Home

ZVL Operating Manual

1. Trace Menu ImportData File name Testhrace s1p a Open Files of type Touchstone files slp s2p sap sdp e Cancel Help a Import Data To Mew Mem The loaded trace data is used to generate a memory trace which is coupled to the active data trace Import Data corresponds to a standard Open File dialog with an additional checkbox e Import Data to New Mem qualities whether the loaded data overwrite the active memory trace box unchecked analogous to Data gt Mem or whether they are used to generate a new memory trace box checked analogous to Data gt New Mem On loading data from a trace file the analyzer displays a list box to select one of the traces stored in the file The example below shows a Touchstone s2p file containing all four 2 port S parameters see Trace File Formats Select Pa x 511 S12 S21 De Trace file import and import conditions Coupling between the imported memory trace and the active data trace implies that the stimulus values of the imported data and of the active trace must be compatible Compatibility means that the Sweep Type of the two traces must match the position and number of the sweep points do not have to be the same The analyzer checks for compatibility before importing data The Select Parameter box remains empty if the selected files contains no compatible data coc O When a sip file is opened the Select Parameter box indicates the 1 port reflec
2. SCPI Command Types Example Confirmed no query MMEM DEL Cc TEME TE TOIT HOCR Remove TEST01 HCP from the current directory MMEMory DELete CORRection lt file_name gt Deletes a system error correction data set stored in the cal pool cal group file lt file_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be deleted Cal group files must have the extension cal The directory path must not be specified the analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Data Device specific no query See MMEMory LOAD CORRection MMEMory LOAD CKIT lt file_name gt Loads cal kit data from a specified NWA cal kit file lt file_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be loaded If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Note The loaded file must be a NWA specific cal kit file with the extension calkit ZVR cal kit files can be imported using the SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT INSTall command Agilent cal kit files can be imported manually and converted into calkit files Device specific no query MMEM LOAD CKIT UGE ROn Se lagjanta a WNC Ger illo techie E ee leese liam cleanin Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit
3. GUI Reference Trace Menu no 4 For an ideal bandpass filter the loss is zero 0 dB for an ideal bandstop filter it is dB Remote CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch BFlLter RESult STATe Bandpass Search Ref to Marker Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates bandfilter Tracking starting at the position of the active marker A bandpass region is the closest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion specified by means of the x dB Bandwidth parameter In contrast to a Bandpass Search Ref to Max the Bandpass Search Ref to Marker does not change the position of the active markers The band filter search results are displayed in the bandfilter info field O To search for a bandstop region in the vicinity of the active marker use Bandfilter Tracking Bandstop Search Ref to Marker Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion BWIDth MODE Barker BSRMarker CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute BFILter Def Peak Define Peak x Marker Marker 4 v t On Peak Type Local Max gt Local Min Local Min or Max It is possible to select the peak type up to ten times for each trace and assign the selection to the markers no 1 to 10 e Marker Selects one of the ten markers that can be assigned to the trace If a selected marker does not exist it is created
4. Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE lt gt Nwa Set1 laf File Trace Channel Display System Window Info Help Tro S dE Mag 10d6 Ref O dB Trace Trace Select ext Trace Select Trace Add Trace Diag Area Delete Assign Diag Area Assign Channel Trace Manager PEt tT ET yy z ERR stop amp sHz WEI LOCAL 1 Programming Examples 2 Create second diagram area and display traces DISPlay WINDow2 STATe ON DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED Admittance_trace DISPlay WINDow1 TRACes3 FEED Y_ trace DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe1 FEED Impedance_trace DISPlay WINDow2 TRACez2 FEED Ratio_trace DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe3 FEED Z_trace Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE mm ch ee ee E R Tre SE op Man 1046 Bett Op Chi Admittance 1 22 Lin Mag mgi Ref50 mS Chi 7 Iracg Y3 Lin Mag S5m 6f Retro ms Chi chi Start 300 KHz Cha Start 300 kHz Pwr 0 d m impedance tr BE Lin mag 250 Ref2500 Ch f Fatio_trace eee dB Mag 10 dB RefOdb Che Z trace ms LinMag 2507 Ref2500 CH Se SSE E a ae 2 2 GE ee GE p O w ae o Chi Start 300 kHz Ch2 Start 300 kHz Ch3 Start 300 kHz 3 Check and modify your configuration Query the traces in channel 1 CALCulate1 PARameter CATalog Basic Tasks L IST 1 Trace Trace Select St
5. OrecaLles active trace active trace active trace Diag Area 2 DISP WIHD1 DISP WIHD Diag Area 1 The active traces are handled as follows After a preset RST the analyzer displays a single diagram area with the default trace no 1 named TRC1 The trace is active in manual and in remote control In manual control a new added trace automatically becomes the active trace To select another trace as the active trace click inside the trace list In remote control a new trace added via CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt trace_name gt lt parameter gt also becomes the active trace To select another trace as the active trace use CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SELect lt trace_name gt The active traces for manual and remote control may be different The following program example illustrates how to create select and reference traces It is instructive to observe the analyzer screen in order to check the effect of each step RST Reset the analyzer creating channel no 1 with the default trace Trct The trace is displayed in diagram area no 1 CALC1 PAR SDEF Tre2 S11 DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED Trc2 Create a new trace named rc2 assigned to channel no 1 the suffix 1 after CALC may be omitted and display the trace The new trace automatically becomes the active trace for manual and for remote control To check this click Trace Marker Marker 1 to create a
6. Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DEFine lt Start gt lt Stop gt lt Points gt lt Power gt lt Point Delay gt lt Unused gt lt Meas Bandwidth gt lt LO gt Re defines a sweep segment with specific channel settings Insert New Segment The segment replaces an existing segment lt Seg gt in the segment list The modified segment must not overlap with any of the existing segments Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory no default values are provided All settings except lt LO gt can be changed for existing segments using other commands of the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt subsystem Note Use SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt Add to create a segment with default channel settings Use SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert no query to insert a new segment into the current segment list lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number Segment numbers must be sequential The specified segment number must be smaller or equal to the number of existing segments plus 1 If segment number lt Seg gt already exists it is replaced by the new segment lt Start gt Start and stop frequency of the segment See lt Stop gt SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STARt and SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STOP Range def A new segment must not overlap with any of the existing segments Besides the uni
7. MMEMory Blo GEET 1 C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA RecallSets Setup_0413 nwa Store the current setup configuration in the file Setup_0413 NWA in the default directory for setup files MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA RecallSets Setup_0413 nwa Load the settings stored in Setup_0413 NWA MMEMory LOAD TRACe lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt lt parameter_name gt Loads trace data from a specified trace file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name Traces are created using the CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine command lt trc_name gt elle name gt lt parameter_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Name of an existing data trace in the active setup string parameter The trace data is loaded into a memory trace associated with the specified data trace If one or more memory traces are already associated with the specified data trace the last generated memory trace is overwritten String parameter to specify the name and directory of the trace file to be loaded Several file formats for trace files are supported If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory gt CDIREctOry The file extensions s lt n gt p csv and dat for Touchstone ASCII and Matlab files are mandatory Optional string parameter for imported Touchstone files for more than one port s2p s3p s4p denotes the imported S parameter S
8. Port Extensions Hesel Extension Cal Manager Electrical Length Recall Last Cal Set Mechanical Length Delay Cal Kits S Auto Length Auto Offset The offset parameters can be defined separately for each port e Reset Extension restores the default values for all length offsets Le it resets all values to zero e Electrical Length defines electrical length offsets and loss parameters at all test ports e Mechanical Length defines mechanical length offsets and loss parameters at all test ports e Delay defines delay times and loss parameters at all test ports e Auto Length determines a length offset for the receiving port of the active measured quantity with the condition that the residual group delay of the active trace is minimized e Auto Offset determines a length offset an loss for the receiving port of the active measured quantity with the condition that the residual group delay of the active trace is minimized and the measured loss is minimized as far as possible across the entire sweep range O The Zero Delay at Marker function overwrites the Offset parameters Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection OFFSet lt port_no gt STATe lt numeric _value gt for Reset Offsets Electrical Length Opens a dialog to define the length offset parameters for the physical test ports as electrical lengths The dialog also contains the DC loss the loss at the reference frequency Losst and the reference frequency
9. Reference impedance no unit To be specified without unit implicit unit is Q Polynomial coefficients Co or Lo for the fringing capacitance or residual To be specified inductance of the standard load parameter without unit implicit unit is fF or pH Polynomial coefficients C or L for the fringing capacitance or residual To be specified inductance of the standard load parameter without unit implicit unit is fF GHz or pH GHz Polynomial coefficients C2 or L for the fringing capacitance or residual To be specified inductance of the standard load parameter without unit implicit unit is fF GHz or pH GHz Command Reference SENSe lt C3 gt lt L3 gt Polynomial coefficients C3 or Ls for the fringing capacitance or residual To be specified inductance of the standard load parameter without unit implicit unit is fF GHz or pH GHz OPEN SHORT Simplified modelling as an open or short or match standard The load Character data MATCh circuit model generally consists of capacitance C which is connected in parallel to an inductance L and a resistance R both connected in series OPEN means that R is infinite so that the standard behaves like a Capacitor no inductance the polynomial coefficients specify C SHORt means that R is zero so that the standard behaves like an inductance no capacitance the polynomial coefficients specify L MATCh means that the standard behaves like
10. Trei Loop over these 2 commands INITIATE IMMEDIATE WA TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trei INITIATE IMMEDIATE WA TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr Trei Continous sweep mode INITIATE CONTINUOUS ON Programming Examples Condensed Programming Examples Retrieving the Results of Previous Sweeps The command CALCulate lt Ch gt DATA NSWeep SDATa lt Trace_Hist_Count gt retrieves the results of any sweep within a previously defined single sweep group This means that in single sweep mode you can first measure a specified number of sweeps SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep COUNt lt sweeps gt and then read any of the data traces acquired This feature has no equivalent in manual control where always the last data trace Is displayed Reset the analyzer RST SYSTEM DISPLAY UPDATE ON Create a second channel with a second trace gt CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SDEFINE Trc2 S11 CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 DISPLAY WINDOW2 STATE ON DISPLAY WINDOW2 TRACE1 FEED Trc2 Select active trace for the created channel 2 Adjust the number of sweep points gt CALCULATE2 PARAMETER SELECT Trc2 SENSE1 SWEEP POINTS 3 SENSE2 SWEEP POINTS 4 Set sweep count for the channels 3 traces per single sweep in channel 1 4 traces in channel 2 SENSE1 SWEEP COUNT 3 SENSE2 SWEEP COUNT A State that INITIATE lt Ch gt IMMEDIATE will start a single sweep for the referenced chan
11. reverse measurement with matched input be ve in the figure above and a 0 to a2 measured at PORT 2 Meaning of squared amplitudes The squared amplitudes of the incident and outgoing waves and of the matrix elements have a simple meaning Jat Available incident power at the input of a two port the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Zo Available incident power at the output bi Reflected power at the input of a two port b2 Reflected power at the output SN Zoo 3 2 2 Impedance Parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current The analyzer provides matched circuit impedances converted from reflection S parameters 3 2 2 1 Converted Impedances The converted matched circuit impedances describe the impedances of a DUT that is terminated at its outputs with the reference impedance Zu i numbers the analyzer DUT port Zoi Z oi Loj I I Reflection Z Transmission Z The analyzer converts the measured S parameters to determine the matched circuit impedances Relation with S parameters It is possible to express the matched circuit impedances Z in terms of the reflection S parameters S and vice versa The reflection parameters are calculated according to 3 2 3 3 2 3 1 System Overview Measured Quantities where i numbers the analyzer DUT port The transmission parameters are calculated according to Zant
12. 1303 6580 32 01 Test and Measurement Division Operating Manual R amp S ZVL Vector Network Analyzer amp ROHDE amp SCHWARZ This Quick Start Guide describes the following R amp S ZVL models R amp S ZVL3 frequency range up to 3 GHz stock no 1303 6509 03 R amp S ZVL6 frequency range up to 6 GHz stock no 1303 6509 06 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG 81671 Munich Germany 2006 Printed in Germany Subject to change R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S ZVL is abbreviated with R amp S ZVL R amp S FSL xxx with R amp S FSL xxx ZVL Documentation Map ZVL Documentation Map Standard documentation The following documentation is supplied with the instrument The help system is embedded in the instrument offering quick context sensitive reference to the information needed for operation and programming The help contains the complete user documentation for the network analyzer You can also transfer the help file RSZVLhelp chm to your PC and use it as a standalone help The quick start guide contains the data sheet Product Brochure and Specifications describes everything that is needed to put the instrument into operation and helps you get familiar with the analyzer The quick start guide gives an int
13. Front Panel Tour 1 Preparing for Use This chapter gives an overview of the front panel controls and connectors of the network analyzer and gives all information that is necessary to put the instrument into operation and connect external devices Notes on reinstallation of the analyzer software appear at the end of the chapter CAUTION General Safety Instuctions A Please make sure to observe the instructions of the following sections so that you cannot endanger people or cause damage to the instrument This is of particular importance when you use the instrument for the first time Also observe the general safety instructions at the beginning of this manual Chapter 2 of this manual provides an introduction to the operation of the analyzer by means of typical configuration and measurement examples for a description of the operating concept and an overview of the instrument s capabilities refer to Chapter 3 For all reference information concerning manual and remote control of the instrument refer to the online help system or its printed printable version A more detailed description of the hardware connectors and interfaces is also part of the help system 1 1 Front Panel Tour The front panel of the network analyzer consists of the VGA display with the softkey area the hardkey areas and the connectors area Brief explanations on the controls and connectors the hardkey area and the rear panel can be found on the next pages
14. Selecting one of the existing area numbers assigns the active trace to the existing diagram area The active trace is removed from the previous area and displayed in the new diagram area Selecting New creates a new diagram area and assigns the active trace to the new area The new area is numbered lt n gt where lt n gt is the largest of all existing area numbers plus one Assign Diag Area is disabled if the current setup contains only one area To create an additional area click Display Area Select New Diag Area oo To go to another diagram area and activate the last active trace in this area simply click a point inside the new area Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Trace Name gt Assign Channel Assigns the active trace to another channel A popup window offers a list of all channels available GUI Reference Trace Menu Channel EN Chi Che Neu e Selecting one of the existing channel names assigns the current trace to the existing channel e Selecting New creates a new channel and assigns the current trace to the new channel The new channel is named Ch lt n gt where lt n gt is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Channel Manager Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace Name gt lt Meas Parameter gt Trace Manager Opens a dialog to perform the actions in the Trace Select menu sys
15. Stops further command processing until all Send WAI directly after the command commands sent before WAI have been which should be terminated before the executed next command is executed Note The GPIB bus handshake is not stopped Stops command processing until 1 is returned Send OPC directly after the Le until the Operation Complete bit has been set command which should be terminated in the ESR This bit indicates that the previous before the next command is executed commands have been completed OPC Sets the operation complete bit in the ESR Set bit 0 in the ESE after all previous commands have been Set bit 5 in the SRE executed Wait for service request SRQ Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the present operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or Ethernet STATus commands Hierarchy of status registers As shown in the graphical overview the status information is of hierarchical structure STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers ESR SCPI registers The STB receives its information fr
16. Y 12 Y S21 Y S22 Stability Factors The Stabilty Factors submenu selects stability factors to be measured and displayed Trace Trace gt F Marker gt Marker d b S11 Format V Szi Scale V 51 Lines De Impedance d Admittance Stability Factors k Src Port 1 k Src Pork 2 Hi Src Port 1 Hi Src Port 2 H2 Src Port 1 H2 Src Pork 2 The three two port stability factors K u or us are available G of stability factors and stability criteria The stability factors K u and us are real functions of the complex S parameters defined as follows GUI Reference Trace Menu 2 2 F PE S29 Lilou amazon oa Zou aal i l n Sa T L Bag ye a S oa ES G A a ou Nag Lou Bag Ou Gau Ou oa where D denotes the complex conjugate of S Stability factors are calculated as functions of the frequency or another stimulus parameter They provide criteria for linear stability of two ports such as amplifiers A linear circuit is said to be unconditionally stable if no Combination of passive source or load can cause the circuit to oscillate The K factor provides a necessary condition for unconditional stability A circuit is unconditionally stable if K gt 1 and an additional condition is met The additional condition can be tested by means of the stability factors u and us The u and us factors both provide a necessary and sufficient condition for unconditional stab
17. aaanaaaeeeeeeeeanee nenene nenene ennenen 272 Parameter selection cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 426 Eege 314 Points Define Segments sssesssesreererrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrern 221 Kli le 225 il 225 Power Define Segments ssssssssrerererrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerene 221 SE 272 Presei eere EN 281 Program example CAMS AOU E 483 Program exvample AANEREN 483 S EE 272 Ee 260 QUES tionable register cccccccceceessseeeeeesessstteeeeeeeeseens 272 Rear DANG lense scare eege 19 PASI 1G e 345 EE VAE eege Ee ege 345 Reference marker cccccseeseeecececeeeseeeeecesenseeeeseaseseeees 314 Reference oscillator ee 427 Reflection measurement EE Ee 40 Remote Control EE eeler EE 265 combine with manual Control 257 DEE 496 Replacing AG Puse Board WE 21 Ge 21 Reset USC ls eegene 197 Reset Values Status Reporting System 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 281 Reset Values acc cc cciccccncvvececicsvensiaacashinede Ee dee saavecdnandeaseens 253 Resolution bandwidth ssssenn000aannnennnnnnnsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 399 Response to queries s sessnnnrnrnrnrnrn rnrn rnrn rn renen en ene 260 e 105 Restrict Port Aesignment AEN 212 PROTA OD ME 16 RPG OOGO sire 499 ROLLUDO EE 501 Ro DLODON E 501 RS DLELID OA EE 501 RSDLLIDrdf seet eer Zegreet eenegen 501 PO ETDS E 501 SIE Be 501 SR Bi ed e E 501 SREL e E to irene T T E in E ar On ee 501 PAS D
18. ams a amp RoHDE amp SCHWARZ 18 1 Mei 2 230200 GHz 5381 dB Ref Position BACK USB lt lt Chi Center 22302GHz Pwr 10 dBm Span 80 MHz Maximize E any LOCAL Z Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour 1 1 1 Display The analyzer is equipped with a color display providing all control elements for the measurements and the diagram areas for the results k Refer to section Navigation Tools of the Screen in Chapter 3 to learn how to use menus keys and softkeys Refer to section Display Elements in Chapter 3 to obtain information about the results in the diagram area K Refer to section Display Menu in the online help system and learn how to customize the screen k Refer to the data sheet for the technical specifications of the display Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system switches off the display if the analyzer receives no command for more than a specified period of time It is switched on again if any front panel key is pressed To change the screen saver properties connect an external keyboard press CTRL ESC to open Windows XP s start menu and click Control Panel Display Screen Saver 1 1 2 Setup Keys The front panel keys to the left of the display provide utility functions assistance and alternative measurement modes Some of the keys are related to the spectrum analyzer mode with option R amp S ZVL K1 irre
19. csv pm see notes below By default cal kit files are stored in the C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Kits directory O To import a ZVL specific or ZVR specific cal kit file ck or calkit you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application The imported cal kit file is automatically set active CC Importing older ZVR cal kit files oO On loading some older ZVR specific ck files e g the ZV Z23 cal kit file the ZVL generates the message File does not comply with instrument calibration kit file format The files must be converted using a ZVR network analyzer equipped with a firmware version V3 52 or higer Proceed as follows 1 On the ZVR press CAL CAL KITS MODIFY KITS GUI Reference Channel Menu INSTALL NEW KIT to import the ck file 2 Press CREATE INST FILE in the same submenu to export the ck file in a ZVL compatible format 3 Import the converted file into the ZVL csv cal kit files VNA Cal Kit Manager 2 1 The VNA Cal Kit Manager is a free Windows based software tool intended to import edit and export csv cal kit files The software is available for download at http www vnahelp com products html The decimal separator used by the VNA Cal kit Manager V2 1 depends on the language version of the Windows operating system Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots the on
20. individual sweep segments The headings of the additional columns read Source Power dBm IF Bandwidth Hz enlF Selectivity en IF Sideband Meas Delay us boSweep Time Auto Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep The minimum number of points is 2 Number of Points d rd Together with the sweep range defined with the Stimulus settings this parameter defines the grid of sweep points The sweep points are equidistantly distributed over the entire sweep range The step width between two consecutive sweep points is constant on a linear scale sweep type Lin Frequency or on a logarithmic scale sweep types Log Frequency and Power In Segmented Frequency sweeps the number of points can be set independently for each segment see Define Segments As an alternative to the Number of Points the Stimulus Step Size can be set O Measurement time and screen resolution A large number of points improves the resolution of the trace but increases the measurement time GUI Reference Channel Menu The overall measurement time is composed of a hardware settling time at the beginning of the sweep plus the sum of the measurement times at each individual sweep point This implies that the measurement time increases roughly linearly with the number of points coc O After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity the analyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep
21. is generated e Aneven number of 2 k values updates or generates k upper limit line segments e Forn gt k the response values of all existing upper limit line segments no 1 3 2 k 1 are updated the existing upper and lower limit line segments no 2 k 1 2 n are deleted The existing lower limit line segments no 2 4 2 k are not affected e Forn lt k the response values of the upper limit line segments no 1 3 to 2 n 1 are updated the upper limit line segments 2 n 1 2 n 3 2 k 1 are generated with default stimulus values see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA In addition the missing lower limit line segments 2 n 2 2 n 4 2 k are generated with default stimulus and response values lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Pair s of response values Range def unit Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition dB RST value The response value of a segment that is created implicitly e g an lower limit line segment is 20 dB SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example CALC LIM UPP 10 0 0 10 Define the following upper and default lower limit line segments Seg Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response 1 300 kHz o GHz 10 dB ER 2 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 70 dB 70 dB 2 Upper 300 kHz O Hz O dE 10 dB 4 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 20 dB 20 dB CALC LIM DISP ON
22. see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example STAT QUES LIM2 NTR 6 Set bits no 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable LIMit2 NTRansition register STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt PTRansition Sets the positive transition filter Setting a bit causes a O to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event register lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST value see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example STAT QUES LIM2 PTR 6 Set bits no 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable LIMit2 PTRansition register STATus QUEue NEXT Queries and at the same time deletes the oldest entry in the error queue Operation is identical to that of SYSTem ERRor NEXT The entry consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard see section Error Messages RST value SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example STAT QUE Query the oldest entry in the error queue 0 No error is returned if the error queue is empty Command Reference SYSTem SYSTem SYSTem This subsystem collects the functions that are not related to instrument performance such as functio
23. 0 To define the stimulus values of several limit line segments with a single command use CALCGlace lt Chn gt EE T sDATAY lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Seg gt Segment number lt numeric_value gt Frequency power or time value to be defined in accordance with the domain setting CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain Range def unit Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition In particular the start value can be larger than the stop value CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt STIMulus STOP Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time sweeps RST value A segment that is created implicitly e g by means of CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA or CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA covers the maximum sweep range of the analyzer SCPI Command Device specific with query Types Example CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment Segment no 1 in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response values of 2 dBm and 3 dBm CALC LIM SEGM STIM STAR GHZ STOP 2 Ghz CALC LIM SEEM TPE LIMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with a stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz CALC LIM DATA Query the type the stimulus and response values of the created segment with a single command The response is 2 1000000 2000000 2 3 CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit
24. Limit lines are available for all Cartesian diagram types Trace Format For polar diagrams the functions of the Lines submenu are grayed The limit lines are hidden and the limit check is disabled when a Cartesian trace format is replaced by a polar diagram Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated to the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the limit line is shown In the diagram upper and lower limit lines can be displayed with different colors Limit line segments with disabled limit check see Define Limit Line can also be colored differently The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog Display Display Config Color Scheme Start 1 GHz Pwr 10 dBm Stop 7 GHz GUI Reference Trace Menu O Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt LlMit DISPlay STATe ON OFF Limit Check On Switches the limit check of the active trace on or off A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the limit check is enabled When the limit check is switched on a PASS or FAIL message is displayed in the center of the diagram If the limit check fails at a measurement point the two trace segments to the left and right of the point can change their color The Limit Fail Trace color is defined in the D
25. SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STARt lt numeric_value gt Defines the Start frequency of sweep segment no lt Seg gt lt Ch gt lt Seg gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Sweep segment number Start frequency of the sweep Depending on the instrument model Hz The increment is 0 1 kHz no sweep segment defined after reset Device specific command or query SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 58 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM FREQ STAR Query the start frequency of the created segment The response is 1 0000000000E 006 Note Ifthe start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency SENSe lt Ch gt JSEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STOP the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the minimum frequency span of 1 Hz SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STOP lt numeric_value gt Defines the Stop frequency of sweep segment no lt Seg gt lt Ch gt lt Seg gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Sweep segment number Stop frequency of the sweep Depending on the instrument model Hz The increment is 0 1 kHz no sweep segment defined after reset Device specific command or query SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 58 0 10KHZ Create a sweep
26. SWR GDELay L C Deletes the existing limit line and re defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain O This command is complemented by CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain COMPlex and CALCulate lt Chn gt LiMit RDOMain SPACing lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Keyword for the physical unit of the response values Range def unit The parameters form four groups e COMPlex REAL IMAGinary and SWR select dimensionless numbers U for the limit line e MAGNitude selects relative units dB e PHASe selects phase units deg e GDELay selects time units s e L selects inductance units H Henry e C selects capacitance units F Farad RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain SPACing LINear LOGarithmic dB SIC Deletes the existing limit line and re defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain O This command is complemented by CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain COMPlex and CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain FORMat lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Keyword for the physical unit of the response values Range def unit The analyzer uses dB units
27. Trace Statistics Smoothing On Smoothing Aperture Import Export Data V Shift Response Value Shift Stimulus value Max Hold Gn Restart Hold e Traces opens a submenu with functions to handle traces and diagram areas and assign traces to channels e Data gt Mem stores the active data trace as a memory trace e Math Data Mem activates the mathematical mode where the data trace is divided by the memory trace e Math Data Mem activates the mathematical mode where the memory trace is subtracted from the data trace e Show Data shows or hides the active data trace e Show Mem shows or hides the active memory trace e Trace Statistics opens a submenu to evaluate statistical and phase information of the trace e Smoothing On activates the smoothing function for the active trace e Smoothing Aperture defines how many measurement points are averaged to smooth the trace e mport Export Data stores the active trace to a file or loads a memory trace from a file e Shift Response Value opens a dialog to define a user correction to the measured values e Shift Stimulus Value shifts a memory trace in horizontal direction GUI Reference Trace Menu e Max Hold On enables or disables the max hold peak hold function for the active trace e Restart Hold restarts the max hold peak hold function for the active trace discarding the old maximum measurement results Many of the functions of the Tr
28. 1 Place the cursor into a numeric data input field in a dialog or in the numeric entry bar 2 Press the data entry keys Use 0 to 9 enter the corresponding numbers be Use and to enter a decimal point or change the sign of the value Use GHz dBm MHz dBm kHz dB or Hz dB to multiply the entered value with factors of 100 100 100 or 1 and or add the appropriate physical unit To enter a character string 1 Place the cursor into a character data input field in a dialog 2 Press the data entry keys as if you were writing a short message on your mobile phone The different characters assigned to each key are displayed in a popup dialog Press 0to 9 once to enter the corresponding numbers al 3 Press the keys repeatedly to select one of the other characters assigned to the key Wait 2 seconds to confirm an entry Getting Started k ESC Basic Tasks Use or to enter a dot or a hyphen Use the sign key to change from upper case to lower case and vice versa Use the checkmark key to enter a space Use the BACK key to correct wrong entries deleting the character to the left of the current cursor position Press ENTER to complete an entry Press ESC CANCEL to close the popup dialog discarding the entries made 3 To enter letters you can also use one of the following methods lf the active input field has a symbol then use the analyzer s on sc
29. A pull down list symbol next to a numeric input field opens a list of all current stimulus and response marker values of the active trace Any of the marker values can be selected as a numeric entry If the physical unit of the selected marker value is inconsistent mismatch of stimulus and response values then the numeric value is used without the unit 3 1 6 4 3 1 7 System Overview Basic Concepts 500 000004 MHz id Paste Ref 500 00000 MHz Paste Mkr 1 500 00001 MHz Paste Mkr 2 500 00000 MHz Paste Mkr 3 500 00000 MHz Paste Ref 999 00 dE Paste Mkr 1 399 00 dB Paste Mkr 2 999 00 dB Paste Mkr 3 999 00 dB The response values in the paste marker list are not updated as the analyzer continues measuring so they may differ from the values in the marker info field To open the paste marker list you can also click on the input field and use the space bar of your keyboard or the checkmark key in the navigation area at the front panel of the analyzer Numeric Entry Bar Single numeric values can be entered using the input field of the numeric entry bar The numeric entry bar appears just below the menu bar as soon as a function implying a single numeric entry is activated In contrast to dialogs it does not hide any of the display elements in the diagram area Center Frequency 500 000006 MHz kl The numeric entry bar contains the name of the calling function a numeric input field including the Cursor Up
30. Application The real part of an impedance corresponds to its resistive portion C Alternative Formats It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat REAL GUI Reference Trace Menu Imag Selects a Cartesian diagram to display the imaginary part of a complex measured quantity Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The imaginary part Im C of the complex quantity C Re C j Im C appears on the vertical axis also scaled linearly Application The imaginary part of an impedance corresponds to its reactive portion Positive negative values represent inductive capacitive reactance OC Alternative Formats It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat IMAGinary Inv Smith Selects an inverted Smith chart to display a complex quantity primarily a reflection S parameter Properties The Inverted Smith chart is a circular diagram obtained by mapping the positive complex semi plane
31. Bandstop Search Ref to Marker RST value BPASs SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion CENTer Sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the marker lt Mk gt on trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Command Reference lt Mk gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example CALCulate Marker number in the range 1 to 10 H Device specific no query RST CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC CENT Leave the sweep range unchanged CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DELTa STATe lt Boolean gt Switches the delta mode for marker lt Mk gt on trace no lt Chn gt on or off Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt DELTa STATe lt Chn gt lt Mk gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 ON OFF Enables or disables the delta mode OFF Device specific command or query CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt Assigns a search range no lt numeric_value gt to marker no lt Mk gt and selec
32. CALCulate SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 and assign it to trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC SEXEC MAX RES Move the created marker to the absolute maximum of the trace and query the stimulus and response value of the search result The analyzer provides the following search modes MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range see CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt BFILter Bandfilter search The results are queried using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Returns the result stimulus and response value of a search started by means of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute The search must be executed before the command is enabled lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Response Search result in the format lt Stimulus value gt lt Response_value gt Range def Depending on the measurement parameter unit depending on the sweep type and unit the marker format see CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat RST value SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute Com
33. CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt TYPE Setting CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA does not overwrite the type setting xu d To define additional new limit line segments without overwriting the old segments use CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit DATA lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Pair s of frequency power or time values to be defined in accordance with the domain setting CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain Range def unit Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time sweeps RST value A segment that is created implicitly e g by means of CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA or CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA covers the maximum sweep range of the analyzer SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain FLIN FLOG FSEG FSINgle TLIN TLOG PLIN PLOG PSINgle Deletes the existing limit line and re defines the physical units of the stimulus values of the limit line The units of the response values and the scaling of the y axis are defined via CALCulate lt Chn gt LI
34. CONT OPE Couple the sweep times in all segments and reset the sweep time in segment no 1 to the initial value SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWELI lt numeric_value gt Defines the delay time for each partial measurement in sweep segment no lt Seg gt Meas Delay H coupling of the segments is switched on SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWEL1 CONTrol ON the delay is valid for all sweep segments in the current channel lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt numeric_value gt Meas delay before each partial measurement Range def unit 0 s to 2 5E 008 s s Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep TIME RST value Os SCPI Command Device specific command or query This default value corresponds to Types automatic sweep time setting in manual control Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM SWE DWEL 1 MS Set the meas delay in segment no 1 to 1 ms SEGM DEF Response 300000 8000000000 51 300 0 056559 0 10000 POS NORM Query the channel parameters for sweep segment 1 The response value for the segment sweep time olive implicitly contains the defined meas delay SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWELI CONTrol lt Boolean gt Qualifies whether or not the Meas Delay defined via SENSe lt Ch g
35. Command to obtain a list of all calibration types for channel lt Ch gt Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired one or two port measurement results SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire stores them and applies them to the calibrated channel lt Ch gt To avoid incompatibilities older system error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal pool MMEMory STORe CORRection lt Ch gt lt file_name gt uz O This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected It must be used in combination with the ZVR compatible commands for calibration method and standard selection see example below lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel RST value SCPI Command Confirmed no query Types Example CORR COLL METH REFL1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 as calibration type CORR COLL OPEN Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard CORR COLL SAVE Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault Generates a set of default system error correction data for the selected ports and calibration type The default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not
36. D rev Port 1 Port 2 Extensions to the signal flow The figure above is sufficient for the definition of S parameters but does not necessarily show the complete signal flow In fact if the source and load ports are not ideally matched part of the transmitted waves are reflected off the receiver ports so that an additional a contribution occurs in forward measurements an a contribution occurs in reverse measurements The scattering matrix links the incident waves aj a2 to the outgoing waves b4 b according to the following linear equation Pai S S aa b Sz Soo a The equation shows that the S parameters are expressed as D ap ins Where lt out gt and lt in gt denote the output and input port numbers of the DUT Meaning of 2 port S parameters The four 2 port S parameters can be interpreted as follows S4 isthe input reflection coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b a measured at PORT 1 forward measurement with matched output and as 0 S is the forward transmission coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b a forward measurement with matched output and av 0 Sis the reverse transmission coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities D reverse measurement with matched input bi rev in the figure above System Overview Measured Quantities and a 0 to ao S is the output reflection coefficient defined as the ratio of the wave quantities b
37. DC power supply The power supply SELV that is used must fulfill the requirements for reinforced double insulation for main supply circuits in accordance to DIN EN IEC 61010 UL 61010B 1 CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 or DIN EN IEC 60950 UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No 950 It is recommended to fuse the DC power supply according to the table below Before switching on the instrument check the connection for correct polarity HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors In continuous operation the actual breaking current can differ from the rated breaking current For fuse selection take the characteristics of the fuse into account Input Voltage Max Current or Power 11 V to 12 5 V 125 VA 12 5 V to 18 7 V 10 A 18 7 V to 28 V 200 VA The instrument is switched on or off using the standby key on the front panel see sections Power Supply Options and DC Power Supply and Battery in chapter 1 Battery Pack Option R amp S FSL B31 The battery pack can be used alternatively as power supply If the battery runs low during operation a message is displayed In this case use another power supply or switch off the instrument For an overview on available power supplies refer to section Power Supply Options in chapter 1 The power supply can be changed during operation The instrument is switched on or off using the ON STANDBY function key on the front panel For details refer to section DC Power Supply and Battery in chapter 1 The battery pack
38. DISPlay 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y RLEV 10 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV 10 CH4TR1 Change the reference level to 10 dB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RPOSition lt numeric_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the point on the y axis to be used as the reference position as a percentage of the length of the y axis The reference position is the point on the y axis which should equal the RLEVel lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value lt trace_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used Value of the reference position in percent The top of the y axis is defined to have a reference position of 100 while the bottom of the y axis is defined to have a reference position of 0 0 to 100 PCT 80 PCT Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored Confirmed with query CALC 4 PAR DEP CMA Ee Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRACQ FEED CH4TR1 Display
39. Go to Transition to the Remote state remote control Remote amp GET Group Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect Execute of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external Trigger trigger signal input amp LLO Local Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means Lockout of the front panel keys amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll amp NREN Not Remote Enables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of Enable the front panel keys RSIB Interface Functions This section lists all functions of the DLL RSIB DLL or RSIB32 DLL or librsib so which allow to produce control applications e Variables e Interface Functions Variables beta iberr ibcntl Same as with the National Instruments interface successful execution of a command can be checked by means of the variables ibsta iberr and ibcntl To this end references to the three variables are transferred to all RSIB functions In addition the status word ibsta is returned as a function value by all functions Status word ibsta All functions send back a status word that provides information on the status of the RSIB interface The following bits are defined inane Bt _ Hoxcode Descmmton ERR 15 8000 This bit is set if an error occurs during a function call If this bit is set iberr contains an error code which specifies the error TIMO 14 4000 This bit is set i
40. If bit 10 QUEStionable LIMit1 summary bit is set then 9 Query STAT QUES LIMit1 EVENT query STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 register If bit 1 is set then the first trace failed the limit check O The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Serial Poll In a serial poll the controller queries the STatus Bytes of the devices in the bus system one after another The query is made via interface messages so it is faster than a poll by means of STB Q Serial poll procedure The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard possibility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instruments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The Visual BASIC command for executing a serial poll is IBRSP The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller Parallel Poll In a parallel poll up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines i e to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical 0 or 1 Parallel poll procedure In addition to the SRE register which determ
41. Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n 1 segments The number of points n is set via Channel Sweep Number of Points The n 1 segments are appended to the current segment table for further editing Existing limit line segments are not overwritten d To import a limit line file limit you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application You have to switch on the limit check separately Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values Columns in the segment table The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable columns e Type indicates whether the segment belongs to an Upper or a Lower limit line or if the limit check at the segment is switched Off Switching off the limit check does not delete the segment but changes its screen color e Start Stimulus is the stimulus x axis value of the first point of the segment not necessarily smaller than Stop Stimulus e Stop Stimulus is the stimulus x axis value of the last point of the segment not necessarily larger than Start Stimulus e Start Response is the response y axis value of the first point of the segment GUI Reference Trace Menu e Stoo Response is the response y axis value of the last point of the segment The limit line segment is calculated as a straight line c
42. K With AC power supply press the standby key to save the current setup close the NWA application shut down Windows XP and set the instrument to standby State If desired set the AC power switch to position O Off KR With DC power supply or battery press the standby key to switch the analyzer off NOTE Standby key OCXO Do not press the standby key longer than 3 seconds The AC power switch also interrupts the power supply of the OCXO option OCXO Reference Frequency R amp S FSL B4 When you switch the instrument back on be sure to comply with the extended warm up phase specified in the data sheet ATTENTION Saving instrument settings When using the AC power supply it is strongly recommended to switch the analyzer to standby state before disconnecting the power If you set the power switch to O while the NWA application is still running you will lose the current settings Moreover loss of program data can not be excluded if the application is terminated improperly With DC power supply or battery it is safe to switch off the instrument using the standby key Preparing for Use Connecting External Accessories 1 6 Connecting External Accessories 1 6 1 The equivalent USB ports on the front panel of the analyzer can be used to connect a variety of accessories A mouse simplifies operation of the instrument using the controls and dialogs of the Graphical User Interface GUI Sd A k
43. L C depending on sign X Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mks FUNCtion BWIDth lt x dB Bandwidth gt Defines the bandfilter level i e the minimum excursion for the bandpass and bandstop peaks xi d Use CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth to set the x dB Bandwidth and query the results of a bandfilter search Note the sign convention for input values lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 lt x dB x dB Bandwidth parameter Bandwidth gt Range def unit 0 01 dB to 100 00 dB the increment UP DOWN is 0 3 dB dB RST value 3 dB SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPASs BSTop BPRMarker BSRMarker Selects the bandfilter search mode lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 Parameters Bandfilter search type BPASs Bandpass Search Ref to Max BSTop Bandstop Search Ref to Max BPRMarker Bandpass Search Ref to Marker BSRMarker
44. Mego et et 187 Kette 188 SEO TE 189 Guided Calibration a ee ce 191 Ropet Proy E 196 GUI Reference Control Menus OES COO E 197 Beigl 197 Sege VE ee ME 199 MECHANIC all IEC e EE 200 BS 201 PTO WE e E 201 PUM ORO E 202 SNE et 203 SC RE e 204 Eege 205 RS EE 217 Ween TYPE eege 218 NUIMD GE or PONS sssrinin Eei eE Ea En ESE ieaS EEEN DiS 225 FrEQUENCY lOD SIZE sanai a E e E EAEE eE EE E EOE E ERA 226 ModS DO EE 226 FSAI SE 2217 EIERE 227 Define Heetart uk 227 Average ACI ON ssiranecnsrea seins ne R E a REEN rE aAa T aE Enies 228 ENIE RE 228 Spela Cl CC E 230 NOTEM eea E E A A 231 Eege eebe 231 POG ker Ei E le 232 Add Chan Trace Diag Area 232 Eege 232 channel Ei Ee 233 Nwa Setup Menu E 234 He E E E E E E A 235 porle Dag PC D 236 GUI Reference Control Menus RI UR 236 TE E 236 GG SU eege 237 engl eg E et 238 UT E 240 SOY CONI E 241 e e E E 242 Define User Color Gcheme 242 Selen le 244 AIS E 244 RON ale ME 244 Frequency WMO EE 245 Elaa E tages ete sates cree estos a se te oe sca woes ess nw nee E eee see tne es eee eee on ne siesta eee 245 POOO aiar E ease dere E E AEE eee onto eae sonra Soo E E EEE 245 SO eere E E E E EEE 245 VS IN ON gate E A E E E E E E E E T dae eunnee eose 245 Jas eigene e TE 248 External ele EEN 248 HeD Eu EE 248 PAN TOPO Le 248 PO OU ANY EE 249 GUI Reference Control Menus 5 GUI Reference This chapter explains in detail all functions of the a
45. PROG Any program running under Windows XP or any file that can be opened with an application program available on the analyzer RST value PROG SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example See PROGram SELected EXECute PROGram SELected WAIT Locks command execution and manual control of the analyzer while a program started via PROGram SELected EXECute Is running The analyzer does not execute any further commands or queries until the program is stopped or paused Parameters None RST value SCPI Command Confirmed command or query The query also locks command execution it Types returns 1 when the executed program is stopped or paused Example See PROGram SELected EXECUTE Command Reference SENSe SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt JAVERage SENSe lt Ch gt AVERage This subsystem sets sweep averaging parameters The sweep average is a noise reduction technique which consists of calculating each measurement point as an average of the same measurement point over several consecutive sweeps SENSe lt Ch gt AVERage CLEar Starts a new average cycle clearing all previous results and thus eliminating their effect on the new cycle lt Ch gt Channel number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example AVER COUN 15 AVER ON Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 and enable the sweep average AVER COUN 5 CLE Reduce
46. Returns the sweep settings of the active system error correction for channel lt Ch gt lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel Response Five values corresponding to the start and stop frequency of the calibration sweep the number of points the source power and the sweep type LIN LOG SEGM RST value the command generates an execution error if no system error correction is active SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATE Returns the date and time when the active system error correction data for channel lt Ch gt was acquired lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel RST value the command generates an execution error if no system error correction is active Command Reference SCPI Command Types Example SENSe Device specific query only CORR COLL METH REFL1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 as calibration type CORR COLL OPEN Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard CORR COLL SAVE Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel CORR DATE Query the time when the system error correction became active The analyzer returns the data and time e g 03 20 06 18 30 39 CORR DATA PAR Query the sweep settings for the calibration sweep The analyzer return
47. SCALe AUTO ONCEL lt trace_name gt Displays the entire trace in the diagram area leaving an appropriate display margin The trace can be referenced either by its number lt WndTr gt or by its name lt trace_name gt lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt ONCE lt trace_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used Activate the autoscale function Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored Confirmed no query RST DISP WIND TRAC Y PDIV RLEV Query the value between two grid graticules and the reference value for the default trace The response is 10 0 DISP WIND TRAC Y AUTO ONCE PDIV RLEV or DISP WIND TRAC Y AUTO ONCE Trc1 PDIV RLEV Autoscale the default trace and query the scaling parameters again In general both values have changed DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WhndTr gt Y SCALe BOTTom lt lower_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the lower minimum edge of the diagram area lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe
48. This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved It is visualized by a Preparing Sweep symbol in the status bar Preparing Sweep All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization If necessary the analyzer terminates the current initialization and starts a new preparation period Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep POINts Frequency Step Size Sets the distance between two consecutive frequency sweep points Stimulus Step Size hus rd The step size is an alternative to the Number of Points setting e lf the sweep range is defined by means of the Start and Stop variables both the Stop value and the Number of Points can vary as the Stimulus Step Size is changed The Stop value is changed as little as possible so that the condition Stimulus Step Size Stop Start Number of Points 1 can be fulfilled Changing the Start and Stop values modifies the Stimulus Step Size e lf the sweep range is defined by means of the Center and Span variables both the Span value and the Number of Points can vary as the Stimulus Step Size is changed The Span is reduced as little as possible so that the condition Stimulus Step Size Stop Start Number of Points 1 can be fulfilled Changing the Span modifies the Stimulus Step Size coc O This setting is valid for linear frequency sweeps only It does not apply to logarithmic and segmented sweep
49. To search for a bandpass region in the vicinity of the active marker use Bandpass Search Ref to Marker Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BPASs CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute BFILter Bandstop Search Activates the search for a bandstop region on the active trace and activates bandfilter Tracking A bandstop region is the lowest peak local minimum in the search range with a minimum excursion that is specified by means of the x dB Bandwidth parameter When Bandstop Search is activated the analyzer uses or creates the four markers Mkr 7 to Mkr 4 to locate the bandstop region GUI Reference Trace Menu e Mkr 7 indicates the minimum of the peak e Mkr 2 indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the minimum plus x dB Bandwidth e Mkr 3 indicates the point on the right edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the minimum plus x dB Bandwidth e Mkr 4 indicates the center of the peak calculated as the arithmetic mean value of the LBE and UBE positions For a symmetric peak the positions of Max and Center coincide The band filter search results are displayed in the bandfilter info field Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion BWIDth MODE BSTOP CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute BFILter Bandfilter Tracking Causes the bandfilter search to be repeated after each
50. Types Example SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 5S 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM2 ADD Create a second sweep segment The frequency range of the second segment will be between 1 5 MHz and the maximum frequency of the analyzer SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution lt numeric_value gt Defines the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer Meas Bandwidth in sweep segment no lt Seg gt At the same time the command activates separate bandwidth setting in all sweep segments SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution CONTrol ON lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt numeric_value gt Internal source power Range def unit 1 0E 6 Hz to 5 MHz Hz UP and DOWN increment decrement the bandwidth in 1 2 5 steps for each decade The analyzer rounds up any entered value between these steps and rounds down values exceeding the maximum bandwidth RST value 10 kHz SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 dBm internal source power SEGM BWID 1 MHZ Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution CONTrol lt Boolean gt Qualifies whether or not the Meas Bandwidth can be set independently for each sweep segment lt Ch gt Channel number C
51. When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 1 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be overwritten and read at will Reading the PTRansition register is nondestructive EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System s ENABIe The ENABle part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit cf below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol _ENAB bit 0 The associated EVENT bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENAB bit 1 If the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be overwritten and read by the user at will Its contents are not affected by reading As shown in the graphical overview the status information is of hierarchical structure STB SRE The register STatus Byte STB defined in IEEE 488 2 and its a
52. Zo j fi S J The two sets of reflection S parameters and input output impedances provide equivalent descriptions of the reflection in a linear n port network Another set of equivalent parameters is given by the matched circuit admittances defined as the inverse of the impedances Example Zu is the input impedance of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Zp matched circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement You can also read the converted impedances in a reflection coefficient measurement from the Smith chart Admittance Parameters An admittance is the complex ratio between a current and a voltage The analyzer provides matched circuit admittances converted from S parameters Converted Admittances The converted matched circuit admittances describe the admittances of a DUT that is terminated at its outputs with the reference impedance values Zoi i numbers the analyzer DUT port The analyzer converts the measured S parameters to determine the matched circuit admittances The converted admittances are the inverse of the converted impedances The reflection parameters are calculated according to where i numbers the analyzer DUT port The transmission parameters are calculated according to 5 LS i 1 Z i j i j l 99 2 Zoi Zo n Zoi Zo System Overview Measured Quantities Example Y11 is the input admittance of a 2 port DUT
53. and hide the frequency stimulus values DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt MARKer STATe lt Boolean gt Displays all markers with the same color or display each marker with the color of the associated trace The colors of all display elements are defined via DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt Element gt Numeric suffix not used in this command Implemented for compatibility with DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt Boolean gt ON All markers have the same color to be defined via DISPlay CMAP6 RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt The marker color is independent of the trace colors OFF Each marker has the color of the associated trace RST value RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt Defines the color of all display elements based on the Red Green Blue color model lt Element gt Number of the display element The display elements corresponding to the numbers 1 to 28 are listed below Command Reference lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Range def unit lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt Range def unit RST values SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay Red green and
54. char far Wrt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibwrt short ud char Wrt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle Wrt String sent to the device Example RSDLLibwrt ud SENS FREQ STAR ibsta iberr ibcntl This function allows to send setting and query commands to the measuring instruments Whether the data is interpreted as a complete command can be set using the function RSDLLibeot RSDLLilwrt This function sends Cnt bytes to a device with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLilwrt ByVal ud ByVal WrtS ByVal Cnt amp ibsta iberr s ibcntl amp As Integer HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors C format short WINAPI RSDLLilwrt Short ud char far WEC unsigned long Cnt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far i bene 1 C format Unix short RSDLLilwrt short ud char Wrt unsigned long Cnt short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl1 Parameter ud Device handle Wrt String sent to the GPIB parser Cnt Number of bytes sent to the device Example RSDELIilwrt ud geb ea t LOO Absta sberr ibontilj Like RSDLLibwrt this function sends data to a device The only difference is that binary data can be sent as well The length of the data is not determined by a zero terminated string but by the indication of Cnt bytes If the data is to be terminated with EOS OAh the EOS byte m
55. def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch TRACking lt Boolean gt Enables or disables the marker tracking mode for marker no lt Mk gt Tracking mode causes the active minimum maximum or target search of the active marker to be repeated after each sweep A marker must be created and a search mode must be active CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute to use this command O If the current search mode is a bandfilter search this command enables or disables bandfilter tracking lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 For a bandfilter search BF ILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 lt Boolean gt ON OFF Enables or disables the marker tracking mode RST value OFF SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON FUNC EXEC MAXimum Create marker no 1 and assign them to trace no 1 Activate a maximum search for marker no 1 CAC MARC deol Enable the tracking mode for the created marker CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe lt Boolean gt Creates the marker numbered lt Mk gt and assigns it to trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number use
56. e Minimize reduces the active window to an icon e Maximize enlarges the active window to fill the available space e Close closes the application e Next switches to the next open setup window GUI Reference Control Menus Restore Returns the maximized or minimized active window to its size and position Restore is available after a Maximize or Minimize command only Move Displays a four headed arrow to move the active window with the arrow keys HOT This command is unavailable for maximized windows Size Returns the maximized or minimized active window to its size and position Restore is available after a Maximize or Minimize command only O This command is unavailable for maximized windows Minimize Reduces the active window to an icon Maximize Enlarges the active window to fill the available space Close Closes the active setup window setup control menu or ends the analyzer session application control menu e In a setup window the analyzer suggests to save changes to the setup before closing it If a setup is closed without saving all changes made since the last time it was saved are lost e Inthe application window the analyzer prompts you to save documents with unsaved changes O The Close application command is equivalent to the Exit command in the File menu Moreover Close is the same as double clicking a Control menu icon or clicking the Si icon in the title bar of the active window
57. irrespective of the parameter selected RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt AMPlitude STARt lt numeric_value gt Changes the start response value i e the response value assigned to the start stimulus value of a limit line segment A segment must be created first to enable this command e g CALC LIM DATA Command Reference CALCulate O To define the response values of several limit line segments with a single command use CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA or CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Seg gt Segment number lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Response value Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition dB The default response values of a segment that is created by defining its stimulus values only e g by means of CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA is 20 dB Device specific with query CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment Segment no 1 in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response values of 2 dBm and 3 dBm gt CALC LIM SEGM AMPL STAR 5 STOP 5 CALC LIM SEGM TYPE LMIN Change the segment to a lower limit line segment with a constant response value of 5 dB CALC LIM DA
58. lt x_dB_Bandwidth gt Range def unit RST value Response for query lt Bandwidth gt lt Center_Stimulus gt lt Q gt lt Loss gt lt LBE gt lt UBE gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 x dB Bandwidth parameter The x dB Bandwidth is the difference between the band edges and the center response value of a bandfilter peak it must be negative for a bandpass search and positive for a bandstop search For bandpass 100 00 dB to 0 01 dB the increment UP DOWN is 0 3 dB dB Beggen 0 01 dB to 100 00 dB the increment UP DOWN is 0 3 GB dB 3 dB Search result in the format lt Bandwidth gt lt Center_Stimulus gt lt Q gt lt Loss gt lt LBE gt lt UBE gt where n dB bandwidth of the bandpass bandstop region where n is the selected x dB Bandwidth setting command CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth lt x dB Bandwidth gt Stimulus frequency at the center of the bandpass bandstop region the stimulus value of marker no 4 Quality factor Le the ratio between the center frequency and the 3 dB bandwidth Loss at the center of the bandpass bandstop region the response value of marker no 4 at the time of the bandfilter search
59. performed using the markers Mkr 7 Mkr 4 irrespective of the selected search range e Search Range Selects a search range for the bandfilter search Full Span means that the search range is equal to the sweep range Besides it is possible to store up to 10 customized search ranges e Start defines the beginning of the search range Start must be smaller than the Stop value otherwise the search will not be initiated e Stoo defines the end of the search range Stop must be larger than the Start value otherwise the search will not be initiated e Range Limit Lines On displays two vertical lines indicating the Start and the Stop value of the current bandfilter search range in the diagram area This function is enabled as soon as one of the search ranges 1 to 10 is selected D scare range properties In contrast to the marker properties defined in the Marker and Search menus the ten search ranges are valid for the entire setup This means that once defined each of them can be used for any trace in the setup irrespective of the channel that the trace belongs to The default search range of each new marker is Full Span The analyzer provides greatest flexibility in defining search ranges In particular two search ranges may overlap or even be identical The search is GUI Reference Trace Menu confined to the part of the search range that belongs to the sweep range The following example shows how search ranges c
60. short RSDLLibonl short ud short v short i1bsta short 1oerr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle d Device state 0 local 1 remote Example RSDLLADOnL ud O bsta iberr abdent lL RSDLLTestSRQ This function checks the status of the SRQ bit VB format Function RSDLLTestSrq ByVal ud Result ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLTestSrq short ud short far result short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLTestSrgq short ud short result short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl1 Parameter ud Device handle result Reference to an integer value in which the library returns the status of the SRQ bit 0 no SRQ 1 SRQ active device requests service Example RSDLLTestSrg ud result ibsta iberr ibcntl This function corresponds to the function RSDLLWaitSrq The only difference is that RSDLLTestSRQ immediately returns the current status of the SRQ bit whereas RSDLLWaitSrg waits for an SRQ to occur RSDLLWaitSrq This function waits until the device triggers an SRQ with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLWaitSrq ByVal ud Result ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLWaitSrq short ud short far result short HW Interfaces far ibsta short far iberr nsigned long far Geer A C format Unix short RSDLLWaitSrgq short ud shor
61. ty is a real quantity and is calculated as the negative of the derivative of its phase response A non dispersive DUT shows a linear phase response which produces a constant delay a constant ratio of phase difference to frequency difference D srameraic relations Delay Aperture Electrical Length The group delay is defined as p ome Ze ada SoD AT where radideg Phase response in radians or degrees Frequency angular velocity in radians s f Frequency in Hz GUI Reference Trace Menu In practice the analyzer calculates an approximation to the derivative of the phase response taking a small frequency interval Af and determining the corresponding phase change Ago The delay is thus computed as A Brag Te wes are ee EE 360 A f The aperture Af must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement If the delay is constant over the considered frequency range non dispersive DUT e g a cable then tg and tg meas are identical and e l Je d S60 7 A sog d F g where At is the propagation time of the wave across the DUT which often can be expressed in terms of its mechanical length Lmech the permittivity e and the velocity of light c The product of Lech SO is termed the electrical length of the DUT and is always larger or equal than the mechanical length e gt 1 for all dielectrics and s 1 for the vacuum Application Transmission measurements especially with the purpose of investig
62. 2 port DUT obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflection measurements e Z is the input impedance of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Zo matched circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement e Zoo is the output impedance of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at its input with the reference impedance Zo matched circuit impedance measured in a reverse reflection measurement e Zus and Zo denote the forward and reverse transfer impedances respectively O Use the Smith chart to obtain an alternative graphical representation of the converted impedances in a reflection measurement Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure lt Trace_Name gt Z S11 Z S12 Z S21 Z S22 GUI Reference Trace Menu SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON POWer Z lt 11 12 21 22 gt Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_Names Z S11 Z 12 Z 821 Z S22 More Impedances x Port Configuration Physical Ports J d A Balanced and Measured Ports Admittance The Admittance submenu contains the functions to convert reflection S parameters into matched circuit admittances The matched circuit admittances describe the admittances of a DUT that is terminated at its outputs with the reference impedance Zp Trace Trace gt F Marker gt
63. 207500 GHz 26 142 dB Limits Chi Center 5 25 GHz Pwr 10 dBm Span 500 MHz IT aA g Refer to section Display Elements to obtain information about the results in the diagram area Refer to section Display Menu in the reference chapter and learn how to customize the screen Menu Bar All analyzer functions are arranged in drop down menus The menu bar is located across the top of the diagram area C Nwa File Trace Channel Nwa Setup Help Menus can be controlled in different ways System Overview Basic Concepts With a mouse like the menus in any Windows application A left mouse click expands a menu or submenu If a menu command has no submenu assigned a left mouse click opens a dialog or directly activates the menu command Using the front panel keys With a combination of the previous methods using the hardkey bar front panel key bar activated via Setup Display Config Front Panel Keys The active menu is the menu containing the last executed command When you select a command in a new menu the softkey bar is updated to reflect the new active menu with all commands You can continue operation using the softkeys Overview of menu functions The Control L menus provide standard Windows functions to control windows The File menu provides standard Windows functions to create save
64. 488 2 or the interface message DCL lf the input buffer is full the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed Subsequently the traffic is continued If however the buffer is not yet full when receiving the delimiter the input unit can already receive the next command during command recognition and execution The receipt of a DCL clears the input buffer and immediately initiates a message to the command recognition Command Recognition The command recognition stage analyzes the data received from the input unit It proceeds in the order in which it receives the data Only a DCL is serviced with priority e g a GET Group Execute Trigger is only executed after the commands received before Each recognized command is immediately transferred to the data set but not executed immediately The command recognition detects syntax errors in the commands and transfers them to the status reporting system The rest of a command line after a syntax error is still executed if possible After the syntax check the range of the numerical parameters is checked if required If the command recognition detects a delimiter or a DCL it also requests the data set to perform the necessary instrument hardware settings Subsequently it is immediately prepared to process further Remote Control General Description Command Processing commands This means that new commands can already be serviced while the hardware is
65. AFEA 521 Delay 4ssign Channel S12 De Delete Trace 522 EE Wb w Marker 1 befall Src Port 1 fon 7 pp babi Src Port 1 Ee Data gt Mem deat Ae Real Math DataMem Trace Color Imag w Show Data Trace Style Inv Smith Shaw Men Trace Width Unwrapped Phase Sutoscale Scale f Diw Ref Value Assign Channel Ref Position Trace Manager The settings correspond to the most common commands in the Trace Trace Select Trace Trace Funct Trace Meas Trace Format and Trace Scale menus A red label Cal Off appears behind the trace list if the system error correction no longer applies to one or more traces see Calibration Overview Markers Markers are tools for selecting points on the trace and for numerical readout of measured data The analyzer provides three different basic marker types A normal marker Mkr 1 Mkr 2 determines the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace Up to 10 different normal markers can be assigned to a trace A reference marker Ref defines the reference value for all delta markers A delta marker A indicates the coordinates relative to the reference marker The stimulus value of a discrete marker always coincides with a sweep point so that the marker does not show interpolated measurement values The markers 1 to 4 are also used for bandfilter search mode The examples below show a bandpass search and a bandsitop search respec
66. Before passing on the data to the hardware the settling bit in the STATus OPERation register is set cf section STATus OPERation Register The hardware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has settled This fact can be used to synchronize command servicing Queries induce the data set management to send the desired data to the output unit Status Reporting System The status reporting system collects information on the instrument state and makes it available to the output unit on request The exact structure and function are described in section Status Reporting System Output Unit The output unit collects the information requested by the controller which it receives from the data set management It processes it according to the SCPI rules and makes it available in the output buffer If the information requested is longer it is made available in portions without this being recognized by the controller If the instrument is addressed as a talker without the output buffer containing data or awaiting data from the data set management the output unit sends the error message Query UNTERMINATED to the status reporting system No data is sent on the GPIB bus or via the Ethernet the controller waits until it has reached its time limit This behavior is specified by SCPI Command Sequence and Command Synchronization IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands A sequent
67. CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SELect Is also necessary if the active trace of a channel has been deleted lt Ch gt Channel number lt string gt Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in the Trace Manager description RST value SCPI Command Device specific with query returns the name of the active trace Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 The trace is the active trace in channel 4 CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr2 S22 Create another trace named Ch4Tr2 to measure the output reflection coefficient 22 Again this new trace becomes the active trace in channel 4 CALC4 PAR SEL Ch4Tr1 Select the first trace Ch4Tr1 as the active trace CALC4 FORM MLIN Calculate the magnitude of S11 and display it in a linearly scaled Cartesian diagram CALCulate PHOLd CALCulate lt Chn gt PHOLd This subsystem controls the max hold peak hold function Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt PHOLd MAX OFF Enables disables or restarts the max hold function lt Chn gt Parameters RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace MAX Enable the max hold function OFF Disables the max hold function OFF Device specific command or query RST CALC PHOL MAX Reset the instrument and enable the max hold function CALC PHOL OFF PH
68. COLL CONN4 returns N75FEMALE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection PORTs ALL SINGle Qualifies whether the connector types at the analyzer ports but not their gender are equal or independent O In the present firmware version a calibration must be performed using the same connector type at all ports Use SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection lt port_no gt PORTS SINGIe if you want to perform a measurement with independent port connectors lt Ch gt Parameters lt port_no gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number of the calibrated channel ALL Equal uniform connector types If the connector type at one port is changed the connector type at all other ports is changed accordingly SINGle Independent possibly non uniform connector types at the ports Port numbers of the analyzer This parameter has no effect because the setting affects all ports ALL Device specific command or query CORR COLL CONN PORTS SING Select independent connector types at the ports CORR COLL CONN1 N50MALE CONN4 N75FEMALE CONN2 Select independent connector types at ports 1 and 4 The connector type at port 2 is not changed the query returns NSOFEMALE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect DELete lt cal_name gt Deletes system error correction data generated and stored previously lt Ch gt lt cal_name gt RST value Channel number of the calibrated channel N
69. Confirmed no query Types Example See MMEMory LOAD STATe MMEMory STORe TRACe lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt UNFormatted COMPlex LINPhase LOGPhase Stores the trace data of a specified trace to a trace file Traces are created using the CALCulte lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine command aim i s lt n gt p Touchstone files lt n gt 1 2 3 are intended for a complete set of lt n gt port S parameters Data export fails if the active channel does not contain the full set of lt n gt traces If the necessary trace are available lt trc_name gt can be the name of any of the traces lt trc_name gt Name of an existing data trace in the active setup string parameter Command Reference OUTPut lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created trace file Several file formats for trace files are supported The file extensions s lt n gt p csv and dat for Touchstone ASCII and Matlab files are mandatory To generate a multiport Touchstone file s2p s3p the channel must contain traces for the full set of S parameters the lt trc_name gt is ignored If no path is specified the analyzer uses the C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Traces directory Optional UNFormatted Unformatted data export specified by the second optional parameters parameter COMPlex Complex values real and imaginary part LINPhase Linear magnitude and ph
70. DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Magnitude gt Multiplied magnitude factor Range def unit 300 dB to 300 dB dB RST value 0 dB lt Phase gt Multiplied phase factor optional for setting command but returned by query Range def unit 3 4 10 deg to 3 4 10 deg deg RST value 0 deg lt Real gt Real and imaginary part of added complex constant optional for setting lt Imaginary gt command but returned by query Range def unit 3 4 10 to 3 4 10 RST value 0 SCPI Command Device specific with query Types Example ols DISP g WIND TRAC xX Orr EE GT EE EEN Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz vertically by 10 dB DISP WIND TRAC Y OFFS Query all response offset values The response is 70 0 0 0 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WhndTr gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE lt trace_name gt Displays the entire trace in the diagram area leaving an appropriate display margin The trace can be referenced either by its number lt WndTr gt or by its name lt trace_name gt lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the Command Reference DISPlay o
71. DUT change the connected ports connect external devices etc Start of the Measurement and Command Synchronization Programming task Start a measurement in single sweep mode Wait until all single sweep data has been acquired before you proceed to the next stage of the measurement INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate IS used to start a single sweep or a group of single sweeps This command has been implemented for overlapped execution The advantage of an overlapped command is that they allow the program to do other tasks while being executed In the present example the sweep must be completed before measurement results can be retrieved To prevent wrong results e g a mix up of results from consecutive sweeps the controller must synchronize its operation to the execution of INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate IEEE 488 2 defines three common commands swat OPC OPC for synchronization A 1 Start single sweep use WA WAI is the easiest method of synchronization It has no effect when sent after sequential commands If WAI follows INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate overlapped command the analyzer executes no further commands or queries until the sweep is terminated WAI does prevent the controller from sending other commands to the analyzer or other devices on the GPIB bus INITiate1 SCOPe SINGle Single sweep will be started in the referenced channel only INITiate1 IMMediate WAI Start single sweep in channel no
72. Description Status Reporting System O Related common commands The IST flag is queried using the command IST The PPE can be set using PRE and read using command PRE ESR and ESE The Event Status Register ESR indicates general instrument states It is linked to the Event Status Enable ESE register on a bit by bit basis The ESR corresponds to the CONDition part of an SCPI register indicating the current instrument state The ESE corresponds to the ENABle part of an SCPI register If a bit is set in the ESE and the associated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STatus Byte is set O Related common commands The Event Status Register ESR can be queried using ESR The Event Status Enable ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using ESE The bits in the ESR are defined as follows Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC after all previous commands have been executed STATus OPERation The STATus OPERation register contains conditions which are part of the instrument s normal operation The analyzer does not use the STATus OPERation register STATus QUEStionable The STATus QUEStionable register indicates whether the acquired data is of questionable quality and monitors hardware failures of the analyzer It can be queried using the commands STATUS QUEStionable CONDition Or STATUS QUEStionable EVENTt The bits in the STATus QU
73. Documents and Secrrings New Dimeckory New subduceerory Create an additional subdirectory MMEM CDIR C MDIR New_Rootdirectory Create an additional directory C New Rootdirectory MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt file_destination gt Copies an existing file to a new file lt file_source gt String parameters to specify the name of the file to be copied and the lt file_destination gt name of the new file RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example MMEM COPY C USER DATA SETUP CFG A Copy file Settp cig im directory Cz USER DATA to the external storage medium mapped to drive Ach Command Reference MMEMory MMEMory NAME lt file_name gt Defines a name for a file which can be used to store the printer output The file is created when it is selected as a printer destination HCOPy DESTination MMEM lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the file name The supported file formats are wnf ewmf omp png see command HCOPy DEVice LANGuage The specified directory must exist otherwise no file can be generated If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST value Hardcopy SCPI Device specific with query Command Types Example MMEM NAME C Screenshots PLOT1 BMP Define a printer file name to be stored in the existing directory C Screenshots without creating the
74. Down H buttons for data variation and a Close button Besides it is closed automatically as soon as an active display element in the diagram area is clicked or a new menu command is activated Display Formats and Diagram Types A display format defines how the set of complex measurement points is converted and displayed in a diagram The display formats in the Trace Format menu use the following basic diagram types Cartesian rectangular diagrams are used for all display formats involving a conversion of the measurement data into a real scalar quantity i e for dB Mag Phase Group Delay SWR Lin Mag Real Imag and Unwrapped Phase Polar diagrams are used for the display format Polar and show a complex quantity as a vector in a single trace Smith charts are used for the display format Smith and show vector like polar diagrams but with grid lines of constant real and imaginary part of the impedance Inverted Smith charts are used for the display format Inverted Smith and show vector like polar diagrams but with grid lines of constant real and imaginary part of the admittance System Overview Basic Concepts NOTE Trace formats and measured quantities The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities Trace Meas Nevertheless in order to extract useful information from the data it is important to select a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a pa
75. Examples Calibration The following example shows you how to perform a multiport calibration of the analyzer Reset the analyzer RST Set cal kit as active kit for N50 SENSE CORRECTION CKIT N50 SELECT N 50 Ohm Ideal Kit Select connectors for the ports SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT CONNECTION1 N50MALE SENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT CONNECTION2 N50MALE Don t save the cal standard measurements with apply cal i e with the commands SSENSE1 CORRECTION COLLECT SAVE or SSENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Instead use the global channel independent setting SENSe CORRection COLLect AC Quire RSAVe DEFault OFF Full one port OSM Select cal procedure SENSe1 CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine Test SFK OSM 1 FOPORT 1 Programming Examples Condensed Programming Examples Measure Standards SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 Apply cal SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected 2 port TOSM Select cal procedure SENSe1 CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine Test SFK TOSM 12 TOSM 1 2 Measure Standards SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected THROUGH 1 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SH
76. FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace In the FDATa setting 20 comma separated ASCII values are returned CALC DATA STIM Query the 20 stimulus values of the created trace 20 comma separated ASCII values are returned Command Reference CALCulate The following parameters are related to trace data see also Data Flow diagram FDATa Formatted trace data according to the selected trace format CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat 1 value per trace point for Cartesian diagrams 2 values for polar diagrams SDATa Unformatted trace data Real and imaginary part of each measurement point 2 values per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format The trace mathematics is not taken into account MDATa Unformatted trace data see SDATa after evaluation of the trace mathematics The following parameters denote the error terms generated during a calibration 31 13 Gm Ce S13 ec Jg LUS SCORr21 Transmission tracking 1 S13 3 32 3 832 32 23 Transmission tracking 2 S23 O Use the generalized command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CDATa to read or write error terms for arbitrary analyzer ports CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA NSWeep SDATa lt Trace_Hist_Count gt Reads the response values of a trace acquired in single sweep mode INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous OFF The trace can be any of the traces acquired during the single sweep cycle lt Chn gt Channel number use
77. Kit 1 N500 f DH 500 ZV 221 typical D Import Kit At least one of the used calibration kits contains default or typical data Please load or edit the characteristic data of the kit that you actually use lt Bact Cancel Help 4 Inthe first dialog of the wizard select the calibration kit here ZV Z21 and the test port connector here N 50 Q f corresponding to a male calibration standard and click Next If you have not yet imported the exact cal kit data of your calibration kit you can use the typical data as shown above Typical data provide an approximate description of a Calibration kit mode To import the actual accurate data of your kit press Import Kit and select the appropriate cal kit file Catibration x ext gt i Measured Standards 1 of 1 i Port N 500 f 4 Short m 0 Hz 18 GHz in ZV 221 typ pi M Show Measurement Diagram V Keep Measurement Data for gt Repeat Previous Cal lt lt Back Apply Cancel Help The next dialog of the calibration wizard shows that only a single calibration standard needs to be measured 5 Click the box Short m to initiate the measurement of the connected short standard Apply FORMAT 2 1 4 Getting Started Reflection Measurements The analyzer performs a calibration sweep and displays a message box with a progress bar After completing the sweep the analyzer generates a short sound and a
78. MELIne1 Line1 m m or line1 m f or line f lt Ckit_Name gt lt Loss gt lt Port_1 gt FFLIne1 suffix 1 optional f lt Port_2 gt no load parameters polynomial coefficients no OPEN SHORt MATCh MMLIne2 MELIne2 Line1 m m or line2 m f or line2 f lt Ckit_Name gt lt Loss gt lt Port_1 gt FFLIne2 f lt Port_2 gt no load parameters polynomial coefficients Command Reference SENSe MMATten MFATten Attenuation m m or attenuation m lt Ckit_Name gt lt Max_Freq gt lt Port_1 gt FFATten f or attenuation f f lt Port_2 gt no offset parameters no load parameters polynomial coefficients no OPEN SHORt MATCh MMSNetwork Symmetric network m m or lt Ckit_Name gt OPEN SHORt MATCH MFSNetwork FFSNetwork symmetric network m f or symmetric lt Port_1 gt lt Port_2 gt network f f no loss otherwise complete parameter list SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt SELect lt ckit_name gt Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type lt conn_type gt O For connector types with arbitrary user defined names you can use the command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT SELect lt conn_name gt lt ckit_name gt lt Ch gt Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent lt conn_type gt Connector type one of the following id
79. METHod DEFine on port numbers One port REFL RSHort REFLTRACK Command Reference SENSe normalization reflection using an open ora short standard Full one port FOPort DIRECTIVITY SRCMATCH REFLTRACK Two port FRTRans TRANSTRACK normalization One path two port OPTPort DIRECTIVITY SROMATCH REFLTRACK TRANSTRACK DIRECTIVITY SROMATCH REFLTRACK LOADMATCH TRANSTRACK at present the ISOLATION terms are not included SENSe CORRection CKIT SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT This subsystem controls system error correction and recording of correction data SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt std_type gt lt Conn_Name gt lt Ckit_Name gt lt Std_No gt lt Min_Freq gt lt Max_Freq gt lt El_Length gt lt Loss gt lt Z0 gt lt CO gt lt C1 gt lt C2 gt lt C3 gt lt LO gt lt L1 gt lt L2 gt lt L3 gt OPEN SHORT MATCh lt Resistance gt lt Port_1 gt lt Port_2 gt Defines the parameters of a non ideal 1 port or 2 port calibration standard lt std_type gt A particular physical standard can be selected by specifying the name of the calibration kit and its serial number Depending on the standard type only a subset of the parameters may be used see table below lt Ch gt Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent lt std_type gt Standard type For re
80. Marker S11 Format d Szi Scale V S12 Lines d Dee Impedance d Admittance EA Stability Factors amp m gle Y lt 521 Ve Y lt S11 Y lt S12 Y lt S21 Y lt S22 select the forward or reverse matched circuit admittances of a 2 port DUT Y lt S11 Y lt 12 Y lt S21 Y lt S22 Selects the 2 port converted matched circuit admittance parameters The parameters describe the admittances of a 2 port DUT obtained in forward and reverse transmission and reflection measurements GUI Reference Trace Menu e Vu is the input admittance of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z matched circuit admittance measured in a forward reflection measurement e Y is the output admittance of a 2 port DUT that is terminated at its input with the reference impedance Z matched circuit admittance measured in a reverse reflection measurement e Vis and Yo denote the forward and reverse transfer admittances respectively d Use the Inverted Smith chart to obtain an alternative graphical representation of the converted admittances in a reflection measurement Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure lt Trace_ Names Y S11 Y S12 Y S21 Y S22 SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON POWer Y lt 11 12 21 22 gt Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_Name gt Y S11
81. Matched broadband termination Zo reference one port impedance of the connector type Sliding One port standard consisting of an match air line with a movable low reflection load element sliding load Reflect Unknown mismatched standard oQ E one port Through Through connection with minimum loss two port Line1 Line Line s for TRL calibration with 2 minimum loss two port Attenuation Fully matched standard in both directions two port the reflection factor at both ports is zero Symm Unknown mismatched reflection IR IR network symmetric standard two port Remote For an overview of standard parameters see also control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt Sweep The Sweep submenu defines the scope of measurement in the current channel This includes the sweep type with various parameters the trigger conditions the periodicity of the measurement and the sweep average Sweeps A sweep is a series of consecutive measurements taken over a specified sequence of stimulus values It represents the basic measurement cycle of the analyzer The analyzer can perform sweeps at constant power but variable frequency frequency sweeps see Sweep Type The sweeps are further specified by the number of measurement points the total measurement time and the trigger mode A measurement may consist of a single sweep or a series of sweeps repeated continuously On the other hand d
82. Menu Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine lt cal_ name gt REFLshort FOPort FRIRans OPTPort TOSM lt port_no gt lt port_no gt lt port_no gt lt port_no gt One Port P1 One Port P2 Opens a submenu to select a one port calibration at test ports PORT 1 or PORT 2 The two submenus are identical Channel Center Span Pur Da a Start Cal One Port P1 Normalization Short Sweep V Repeat Prey al One Fort Pz V Full Channel Select Correction OH Two Port P1 Pz Fort Extensions Cal Manager Recall Last Cal Set Cal te The following menu commands calls up the start dialog of the calibration wizard to start a manual calibration e Normalization Short initiates a normalization using a short standard e Fullinitiates a full one port calibration Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AUTO lt port_no gt for matching analyzer and Cal unit ports SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs for arbitrary pairs of ports SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine lt cal_name gt REFLshort FOPort lt port_no gt Two Port P1 P2 Opens a submenu to select a two port calibration at test ports PORT 1 and PORT 2 GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center Span b Dar Dua b Cal E e One Port P1 Sweep V Repeat Prey Gal One Port P2 V Channel Select Correction Oth Tiwo Port P1 PZ Morma
83. NICS e E 259 GPIB Interlace IMCSSACCS eae sesso tecceeee ete tnecetecueucines ET 259 RSIB and VXI 11 Interface Meseages 259 Device Messages Commands and Device Responses sn nnnnn1nnnnosennrnnsernrnnrsnnnnresnrerennnnenee 259 SCPI Command Structure and SYNtAX 0 cceeececccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeseeeeeeeeseseesseeeeeeeeseaaeseeeeeeessaaeaeses 260 COMON COMAN EE 260 Instrument Control Commande 260 Structure of a Command Lime 262 Responses t0 QUGTIOS share ees scratrnic eege 263 SPTP OE S e E E E A 263 Vlflocgte EE 263 Boolean lec pci cee nen ne ee Te ee ee 264 EE eeh 264 Se tcp E E A E E EE E E E EE E E A GE E E E E 264 leie DTR E 264 Overview Of Syntax Elements 265 Basic Remote Control Concepts sssecccccsssnssseeeeccecensnseeeeeeeeeonnnsseeeeeeesooasseeeeeeeneconsssssessees 265 Traces Channels and Diagram Arezae 266 Active Traces in Remote Control 266 Initiating Measurements Speed Considerations cccccccsssssseccceeeecaeeeseeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaseeeeeees 268 Command Processing E 268 T e E E stan ase decane suene acne emeconestere us iceensaeneeecee 269 Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation Command FECOGAINION E 269 Data Base and Instrument Hardware 270 Status Reporting Gvsiem 270 KEE 270 Command Sequence and Command Synchronization cccccceececcceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeees 270 Status Reponing Sy SOI aiaia Ea a A aoea aA aA
84. Next Selects the next diagram area as the active diagram area This command is available in setup control menus only and is disabled if only one setup is defined GUI Reference Nwa File Menu Nwa File Menu The Nwa File menu provides standard Windows functions to create save and recall setups and to shut down the application Setups A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a NWA setup file zvx Each setup is displayed in an independent window FILE Mwa File New Load Simulation Data Close Recall Mwa Save Mwa Save Mwa As Page Setup Recent File Exit The File menu contains the following functions e New creates a new setup and opens a new setup window e Close closes an opened setup window e Page Setup selects a printer and printer connection e Save Nwa saves an opened setup e Save Nwa As saves an opened setup to a specific file e Recall Nwa recalls an existing setup from a file e 1 Set lt n gt nwa etc is a list of the last 4 setups stored in the current or in previous sessions e Exitcloses the application New Creates a new setup and opens a new setup window The new setup is named Setup lt n gt where lt n gt is the current number for all created setups O To open an existing setup select File Recall Nwa To rename a setup use File Save As Remote control MEMory DEFine lt setup_n
85. Options 2 0 ccccccccccccccssseeeeceeeeseeeesseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesseeeaeseceeeeessaeeeeeeess 23 1 3 7 Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply ccccccccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeees 24 L38 WP OWEN OM ANG EE 24 1 3 9 Standby and Ready State with AC Power Supply ccccccccecceccesseeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeees 25 t30 TACOIMCING EE 25 1311 DG Power Supply and Balen EE 26 1 3 12 Charging the Battery 0 0 0 cccccccsccecceseseeeeeseeeeseeeesseesceeesseaeeeeeessaaaeeeesseaeeeesseaegeeeeseaas 26 L4 WNP nl 28 LAI Stonnig and PACKING EE 28 1 5 Starting the Analyzer and Shutting DOWN ccccccceesesssseseeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeenees 29 1 6 Connecting External ACCESSOLICS ccccccssssseeeeeeeeseeeeesnseeeeeceeeesnseeeeeseeeoeenneneeees 30 1 6 1 1 6 2 1 6 3 1 6 4 1 7 1 7 1 Iie 1 8 1 8 1 1 9 Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour COnmMeCtING EWEN 30 CONNECTING A Keyboard ccccccccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseceeeeeseaeeeseceeeeessuaesseeeeeessssaaeeeeeees 30 CONNECTING a Prier 31 Connecting a LAN Cable cccccccccssseeecceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeeceeeessaaeaeeeeeeessssaaeeeeeeees 32 Remote Control in a IN seeseseseeeceesascesencaedecenscencecateasseunsesuvecensctwoenseseeenussededsveuseveccoes 33 Ae Te ele aN IF eet 33 Remote Desktop Connechon 35 WV UQOW SAPP sapne 36 Accessing Windows XP s Start Men 36 FEN AES e E E 37 Preparing for Use
86. Pressing Horizontal Line for a second time hides the horizontal line for the active trace O Use the analyzer s drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line symbol to the desired position Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt DLINe STATe ON OFF CALCulate lt Chn gt DLINe Global Limit Check On Performs a composite limit check on all traces of the current setup The result of the global check appears in a popup box whenever Global Limit Check is pressed WW Global Limit Check Seti Eg WW Global Limit Check Seti Eg e PASS represents pass for all traces for which the limit check is enabled A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the composite limit check e FAIL means that the limit checks for one or more traces failed Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt CLIMits FAIL GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Menu The Channel menu provides all channel settings and the functions to activate modify and store different channels Channels A channel contains hardware related settings to specify how the network analyzer collects data The channel settings can be divided into three main groups e Control of the measurement process Sweep Trigger Average e Description of the test setup internal source power IF filters and step attenuators e Correction data Calibration Offset The channel settings complement the definitions of the Trace menu Each
87. SCPI Confirmed with query Command Types Example RST SWE STEP Query the default step size For a 6 GHz analyzer the response is 29998500 29998500 Hz 6 GHz 300 kHz 200 SWE STEP UP Increase the step size FREQ STOP SWE POIN Query the stop frequency of the sweep and the number of points Increasing the step size has changed both values SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TIME AUTO lt Boolean gt When enabled the minimum sweep duration is calculated internally using the other channel settings and zero delay SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep DWELI lt Ch gt Channel number lt Boolean gt ON OFF Turns the automatic calculation of the sweep time on or off OFF is also set if the sweep duration or delay is set explicitly using SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TIME or SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep DWELI RST value ON SCPI Confirmed command or query Command Types Example SWE TIME 1 Set a total sweep time of 1 s SWE TIME AUTO A query returns the value 1 Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TYPE LiNear LOGarithmic SEGMent Selects the sweep type frequency and the position of the sweep points across the sweep range lt Ch gt LiNear LOGarithmic SEGMent RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Lin frequency sweep at constant source power SOURce lt Ch gt POWer lt Pt gt LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude The stimulus frequency SENSe lt Ch gt FRE
88. SEGMent lt Seg gt STiMulus STOP lt numeric_value gt Changes the stop stimulus value i e the largest or smallest stimulus value of a limit line segment A segment must be created first to enable this command e g CALC LIM DATA Command Reference CALCulate O To define the stimulus values of several limit line segments with a single command use CALCulate lt sChn gt LIMitiCONTroL DATA lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Seg gt Segment number lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Frequency power or time value to be defined in accordance with the domain setting CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition In particular the stop value can be smaller than the start value CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt STIMulus START Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time sweeps A segment that is created implicitly e g by means of CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA or CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA covers the maximum sweep range of the analyzer Device specific with query See CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt STIMulus STARt CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt TYPE LMIN LMAX OFF Selects the limit line type for a limit line segment This can be done before or after defining the
89. SPAN SENSe lt Ch Tr gt FUNCtion SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion This subsystem selects the sweep type and the measurement parameter SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON lt string gt Defines the sweep type and the measurement parameter in a single string Note To select a measurement parameter without changing the sweep type use CAL Culate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure Use the other commands in the CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter Subsystem to create or delete traces and select measurement parameters lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON is not used as a query the number must be 1 lt string gt Single string parameter defining the sweep type and the parameter to be measured lt string gt lt sweep_type gt lt parameter gt Range def unit See list of strings below Command Reference SENSe RST value XFR S21 SCPI Confirmed command or query Command Types Example CAE ERAR DER Cited asi ie Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 The trace automatically becomes the active trace SENS4 FUNC Check query the sweep type and measurement parameter of the active trace The result is XFR POW S11 The following keyword defines the sweep type see SCPI command reference presentation layer Frequency sweep Lin Frequency Log Frequency Segmented Frequency
90. Show the limit line segments in the active diagram CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer FEED Generates an upper limit line using the stimulus values of a data or memory trace and specified offset values lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace This trace provides the stimulus data for the limit line unless another trace lt trace_name gt is specified lt stimulus_offset gt Stimulus offset value used to shift all imported limit line segments in horizontal direction Range def unit 1000 GHz to 1000 GHz Hz RST value 0 Hz Command Reference CALCulate lt response_offset gt Response offset value used to shift all imported limit line segments in vertical direction Range def unit 10 dB to 10 dB dB RST value 0 dB lt trace_name gt Name of the selected trace as used e g in CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine If no trace name is specified the analyzer uses the active trace no lt Chn gt SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example CALC LIM UPP FEED 1 GHZ 10 Use the stimulus values of the active trace shifted by 1 GHz to the right and increased by 10 dB to create an upper limit line CALC LIM UPP SHIF 3 CALC LIM CONT SHIF 1 GHz Shift the limit line by an additional 3 dB in vertical and by 1 GHz in horizontal direction If a lower limit line exists it is also shifted CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer SHIFt lt numeric_value gt Shifts all lower and u
91. Single Sweep or a group of consecutive sweeps e Scopesindicates that the active sweep mode single or continuous and the Number of Sweeps are valid for All Channels in the active setup The number of sweeps in the single sweep sequence is equal to the selected Number of Sweeps times the number of channels The sequence starts with the first sweep in channel no 1 SAUCE et O In remote control it is possible to retrieve the results acquired in any of the sweeps within a single sweep group see Sweep History Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep COUNt GUI Reference Channel Menu Average Factor Opens the numeric entry bar to define the number of consecutive sweeps to be averaged Average Factor Dn rd An average over several sweeps reduces the influence of random effects in the measurement and therefore minimizes the noise level The effect increases with the average factor however obtaining an averaged result requires several Sweeps and therefore increases the measurement time O The average factor is also valid for calibration sweeps The calculation of system correction data is based on the averaged trace O Smoothing is an alternative method of compensating for random effects on the trace by averaging adjacent measurement points Compared to the sweep average smoothing does not significantly increase the measurement time but can eliminate narrow peaks and thus produce misleading results The sweep aver
92. The sweep time increases with the Frequency Step Size Measurement Examples Optimization To find the appropriate noise reduction settings Use the fastest IF filter that will produce acceptable dynamic range 1 Press the PWR BW key or click Channel Pwr Bw to access the corresponding submenu 2 Select the widest bandwidth compatible with your measurement task 3 If possible click Fine Adjust to further increase the bandwidth Avoid selecting High Selectivity unless it is required for your measurement Calibration Calibrating a Measurement Channel Calibration is the process of eliminating systematic reproducible errors from the measurement results system error correction Select and perform a manual calibration In the following example a 2 port TOSM calibration is performed using the Calibration Wizard Other calibrations can be performed in an analogous way 1 Perform all channel settings for your measurement 2 Click Channel Cal Start Cal Two Port P1 P2 TOSM to open the calibration wizard for the desired calibration type 3 In the first dialog of the calibration wizard select the connector type that you use at port 1 and 2 both connector types must be equal and the calibration kit Click Next gt to access the next dialog of the wizard 4 Connect an open standard to port 1 and click the corresponding box in the Measured Standards list to initiate the calibration sweep and
93. Up and Cursor Down keys are used to Scroll up and down in lists e g in pull down lists among menu items in a list of keywords in the Help table of contents or in the Help topic text Increase and decrease numeric input values Cursor Up Down become inactive or switches to the previous next dialog element as soon as the beginning of the list is reached Cursor Up Down is equivalent to a rotation of the rotary knob to the right left The Cursor Left and Cursor Right keys are used to Move the cursor to the left or right within input fields Compress or expand menus or the Help table of contents Access the previous next menu in the menu bar The Checkmark Space key can be used to Insert a space character into character entry fields Switch a checkmark control in a dialog on or off 3 Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour Activate the selected active control element e g a button in a dialog or a link in the Help system Scroll down in Help topic The Next Tab key opens the next tab of a dialog e g in the Help navigation pane or in some of the spectrum analyzer dialogs 1 1 5 Data Entry Keys The data entry keys are used to enter numbers and units ESC ENTER BACK NOTE Key activation The data entry keys are only enabled while the cursor is placed on a data input field in a dialog or in the Help navigation pane The keys 0 to 9 enter the corresponding numbers In
94. a match with the specified lt Resistance gt Optional resistance for the MATCh standard lt Port_1 gt Optional port restriction one port number for one port standards two port Integer value lt Port_2 gt numbers for two port standards The different standard types are defined by the following parameters MOPen FOPen Open m or open f lt Ckit_Name gt D lt C3 gt I lt Port_1 gt complete parameter list with capacitance coefficients no OPEN SHORT MATCh MSHort FSHort Short m or short f lt Ckit_Name gt be lt L3 gt lt Port_1 gt complete parameter list with inductance coefficients no OPEN SHORT MATCh OSHort MOSHort Offset short sexless or offset short m lt Ckit_Name gt D lt L3 gt lt Port_1 gt FOSHort or offset short f complete parameter list with inductance for user defined connector types only coefficients no OPEN SHORT MATCh MMTCh FMTCh Match m or match f lt Ckit_Name gt lt Max_Freq gt lt Port_1 gt no offset parameters no _ polynomial coefficients no OPEN SHORt MATCh MREFlect FREFlect Reflect m or reflect f lt Ckit_Name gt OPEN SHORt lt Port_1 gt no loss otherwise complete parameter list MMTHrough MFTHrough Through m m or through m f or lt Ckit_Name gt lt Loss gt lt Port_1 gt FFTHrough through f f lt Port_2 gt no load parameters polynomial coefficients no OPEN SHORt MATCh MMLIne1
95. a simple mathematical relation between the active trace and the active memory trace to calculate a new mathematical trace and displays the mathematical trace O This command places some restrictions on the mathematical expression and the operands Use CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession SDEFine to define general expressions lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 NORMal Math trace active data trace SUBTract Math trace data memory DiVide Math trace data memory RST value NORMal SCPI Confirmed with query Command Types Example RST CALC MATH MEM Copy the current state of the default trace Trci to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not displayed CALC MATH FUNC DIV Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by the stored memory trace The mathematical trace is displayed instead of the active data trace CALC MATH STAT The response is 1 mathematical mode switched on mathematical trace displayed CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH MEMorize Copies the current state of the active data trace to a memory trace If a mathematical trace is active the data trace associated with the mathematical trace is copied The memory trace is named Mem lt n gt lt Data_Trace gt where lt n gt counts all data and memory traces in the active setup in chronological order and lt Data_Trace gt is the name of the associated copied dat
96. a user defined connector type you can still change its name offset model and reference impedance Switching between sexed and sexless will delete all kits assigned to the connector type Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CONNection SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CONNection DELete Offset Model Dialog Defines the mode of wave propagation in the lines of the standards associated with the connector type This dialog is opened from the Available Connector Types dialog button in the table Offset Model of UserConnt Line Type Parameters TEM e g Coaxial Relative Permittivity er mmm m The Parameters to be selected depend on the Line Type CO Waveguide e If the calibration kit standards contain lines with transverse electric propagation mode TEM then the Relative Permittivity z of the dielectric can be defined The default permittivity is the value for air TEM type lines have not cutoff frequency e If the calibration kit standards contain waveguides then the lowest frequency where a wave propagation is possible Cutoff Frequency f can be defined The default cutoff frequency if 0 Hz propagation at all frequencies No relative permittivity is needed for waveguides O The impedance for waveguides is frequency dependent If a waveguide line type is selected various dialogs e g Add Standard will indicate varies instead of a definite impedance value Impact of offset model parameters Th
97. aa iaaa i a 272 Overview of Status e E 273 Structure of an SCPI Status Heotster 273 US REGIE ee E E eee ee E EE E E E E A eee eee 275 Contents of the StatUS Registers ccccccccccssssseececeeecceeaeeeeeeeeesseeeseseeeeeeesseeeaeeceeeesseaaaseeeeeeeesaeaaas 275 HR e E EE 276 EFEO ne PRE EE 276 SES 2102 92 Eege 277 STATUS OP e 277 STATUS e Tee 277 SCHEUER re E D 278 Application of the Status Reporting Gvsiem 278 Service Heouest ee 279 Sele OM aee e E caesar qncteiaieqastereeawasaseasstento eoassmesek meoasveeascesene seed etecusnaaare 280 Stee RE 280 Query of an Instrument SLALUS sie axtaverieasastavestanssieara canisavavelcuceveusadeecivdsuds cevanianyacwiancevaddausesoveniearaenite 280 Sls 0 0 ae eee ee nn eee ae ie ee en errr 281 Reset Values of the Status Reporting Gvsiem 281 Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation 6 Remote Control General Description This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments and the description of the analyzer s remote control concept For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument complemented by comprehensive program examples refer to the SCPI Reference chapter This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control a general introduction to remote control of programmab
98. abort channel is used for immediate abort of the core channel the interrupt channel transmits spontaneous service requests of the instrument Link setup itself is very complex For more details refer to the VXI 11 specification Core channel program response control messages Abort channel Interrupt channel Service request The number of controllers that can address an instrument is practically unlimited in the network In the instrument the individual controllers are clearly distinguished This distinction continues up to the application level in the controller i e two applications on a computer are identified by the instrument as two different controllers Controller Instrument Controller Controller The controllers can lock and unlock the instrument for exclusive access This regulates access to the instrument of several controllers VXI 11 Interface Messages On the Ethernet link the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the IEC IEEE bus amp ABO Abort Aborts processing of the commands just received amp DCL Device Clear Aborts processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the Local state manual control amp GTR
99. and phase at the marker position Getting Started FORMAT PRINT Mwa File 2 1 5 Reflection Measurements Tre R I Smith Bei i 511 Fate 1 5 207500 GHz 54 701 0 r Eh 2128 Q e ch Ce 14 363 pF Chi Center 5 25 GHz Pwr 10 dBm Span 500 MHz 4 Still in the FORMAT menu select Smith The Smith chart shows lines of constant real and imaginary part of the impedance in the reflection coefficient plane Refer to section Display Formats and Diagram Types in Chapter 3 to learn more about the diagram properties Saving and Printing Data The analyzer provides standard functions for saving measurement settings and for printing the results You can use these functions as if you were working on a standard PC Moreover you can export your trace data to an ASCII file and reuse it in a later session or in an external application Data transfer is made easier if external accessories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN Refer to sections External Accessories and Remote Control in a LAN in Chapter 1 to obtain information about the necessary steps 1 Press TRACE and activate More 1 3 Import Export Data Export Data 2 Inthe Export Complex Data dialog opened select a file location format and name and activate Save The active trace data is written to an ASCII file Refer to section Trace File Formats to learn more about trace files and their use 3 Press the PRINT key t
100. and the reflected wave R on the transmission line connecting the analyzer and the DUT causes an interference pattern with variable envelope voltage The SWR is the ratio of the maximum voltage to the minimum envelope voltage along the line SWR Vmax Vmin Vi Val Vil voll 1 Sil 1 Sil Application Reflection measurements with conversion of the complex S parameter to a real SWR Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat SWR Lin Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis scale to display the magnitude of the measured quantity Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The magnitude of the complex quantity C i e C sqrt Re C Im CF appears on the vertical axis also scaled linearly Application Real measurement data i e the Stability Factors DC Input 1 2 and the PAE are always displayed in a Lin Mag diagram Alternative Formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a logarithmic scale It is possible to view the real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat MLINear Real Selects a Cartesian diagram to display the real part of a complex measured quantity Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The real part Re C of the complex quantity C Re C j Im C appears on the vertical axis also scaled linearly
101. another calibration kit to the new kit e Add Standard selects defines and adds a new standard to the kit A calibration kit may only contain a single standard of each type e View Modify Standard displays or changes the properties of the selected standard e Delete Standard removes the selected standard from the list and from the calibration kit d Use Copy Standards from to avoid the re definition of their properties Standards are copied together with their parameters and their label which you can modify once they belong to the new kit Copy Standards from Copies standards together with their parameters from a calibration kit in use to a new calibration kit This dialog is opened from the View Calibration Kit dialog Copy Standards from button GUI Reference Channel Menu Copy Standards from kik Mame SKI wH Select Standards All Osinde Open Ff OpentFi In the dialog it is possible to select one of the calibration kits in use Kit Name and select either all or a single standard to be copied A calibration kit may only contain a single standard of each type Available Connector Types Displays and modifies the list of available connector types This dialog is opened from the Calibration Kits dialog Avail Conn Types button The list shows the available connector types with their name Conn Type polarity Sexless and reference impedance Ref Imp The O
102. appears before a trace is imported into the Define Limit Line dialog Properties of Imported Segments from Irci Offsets Type Response O dB fe Upper Limit CO Lower Limit Stimulus 0 Hz f O off The dialog assigns common properties to all limit line segments generated by the imported trace e Offsets contains two input fields to define constant offset values for all imported segments The Response offset shifts all segments in vertical direction the Stimulus offset shifts them in horizontal direction The offsets are added to the start and stop GUI Reference Trace Menu values of all segments e Type defines whether the imported segments belong to the Upper or Lower limit line A third option is to import the segments but disable the limit check Off Remote CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer FEED control lt stimulus_offset gt lt response_offset gt lt trace_name gt CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer FEED lt stimulus_offset gt lt response_offset gt lt trace_name gt MMEMory LOAD LIMit File Format for Limit Lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data By default the limit line file has the extension limit and is stored in the directory shown in the Export Limit Line and Import Limit Line dialogs The file starts with a preamble containing the channel and trace name and the header of the segment list The following lines contain the entries of all editable columns of
103. cable delivered with the instrument Since the instrument is assembled in line with the specifications for safety class EN61010 it may only be connected to an outlet that has a ground contact The power consumption of the analyzer depends on the installed options see Specifications 1 3 8 Power on and off The mains connector is located at the bottom left corner of the rear panel k 8 EE ZS s ai gt 8 cas CS K To turn the power on or off press the AC power switch to position On or 0 Off After power on the analyzer is booted and reaches its ready state NOTE The AC power switch can be permanently on Switching off is required only if the instrument must be completely removed from the AC power supply Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation 1 3 9 Standby and Ready State with AC Power Supply The standby toggle switch is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel co Sd In standby state the right amber LED is on The standby power only supplies the power switch circuits the optional oven quartz OCXO 10 MHz reference oscillator option ZVAB B4 order no 1164 1757 02 and the battery option NIMH Battery Pack R amp S FSL B31 and the fan In this state it is safe to switch off the AC power and disconnect the instrument from the power supply K In ready state all modules are power supplied and the left green LED is on After performing its startup proced
104. calkit from Command Reference MMEMory the default cal kit directory MMEM STOR CRIT New kit Ree r Naa a eak Store the data for the user defined cal kit Newkit and overwrite the cal kit file New_kit calkit MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa lt conn_name gt lt ckit_name gt MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MFLine FFLine MMATten MFATten FFATten MMSNetwork MFSNetwork FFSNetwork MOPen FOPen MSHort FSHort MOSHort FOSHort MREFlect FREFlect MMTCh FMTCh MSMatch FSMatch lt stdlabel_ name gt lt file_name gt lt port1_no gt lt port2_no gt Loads cal kit data for a specific connector type cal kit and calibration standard from a specified Touchstone file assigning a label for the cal data A restriction on the port assignment may be defined in addition lt conn_name gt String parameters containing the name of the connector type lt ckit_name gt String parameters containing the name of a calibration kit available on the analyzer Parameters Standard type for a description refer to the table of standard types lt stdlabel_name gt String parameter defining a label for the cal kit data An empty string means that no label is defined lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the Touchstone file to be loaded A sip file must be used for one port standards a s2p file for two port standards If no path is speci
105. can be reloaded via the AC or DC power supply For details on charging refer to section Charging the Battery in chapter 1 fthe battery is not to be used for a longer time it is recommended to remove it and store it separately IEC IEEE Bus Interface The standard instrument is equipped with a GPIB bus IEC IEEE bus connection The two interface connectors labeled EC BUS and IEC SYSTEM BUS are located on the rear panel of the instrument e The EC BUS connector is intended for remote control of the analyzer from a controller e The IEC SYSTEM BUS can be used to control further devices from the analyzer Always use a shielded cable to connect the GPIB bus interfaces Characteristics of the interface e 8 it parallel data transfer e Bidirectional data transfer e Three line handshake e High data transfer rate of max 1 MByte s e Up to 15 devices can be connected e Maximum length of the connecting cables 15 m The length of a single connecting cable should not exceed 2 m if many devices are used it should not exceed 1 m HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors e Wired OR if several instruments are connected in parallel Pin assignment ATM IFC MED EDI D2 DO GND bo MDAC DAY D3 D1 a emer oe T GNO 4 GND 2 GND 20 GNDAS BOF DS GND 23 GND GN Dig REN D D Bus lines 1 Data bus with 8 lines DO to D7The transmission is bit parallel and byte serial in the ASCII ISO code DO is the l
106. can be saved to a file for later reuse GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Define User Color Scheme Element Background Ke Properties or 5 Trace Style Trace Width CO Use same Color for all Markers keep Trace Color over Reassignment of Diagram Area The following control elements change the current color scheme e The screen element to be modified is selected from the Element drop down list The list contains the background and all traces text elements and lines in the diagrams e Color opens a standard color dialog to assign a color to the selected element Use the What s This help button 2 in the dialog to obtain detailed information e Trace Style and Trace Width are enabled if the selected element is a trace e Use same Color for all Markers allows to select a common marker color which is independent of the trace colors To define the common color select the Same Color for all Markers element e Keep Trace Color over Reassignment of Diagram Area controls the color of traces that are assigned to another diagram area or created together with a new diagram areas see background information below Effects of Keep Trace Color The analyzer assigns trace colors according to a predefined scheme starting with the colors that are easiest to distinguish On one hand it is advantageous to use the colors at the beginning of the scheme On the other hand it is often desirable to use different col
107. closing the dialog the menu bar is deactivated and the cursor returns to the diagram softkey area To Make a Selection in a Dialog 1 Press a softkey or a menu item followed by three dots to open a dialog 2 Use the navigation keys and or the rotary knob to access the controls in the dialog Press Left Field or Right Field or the cursor keys to switch between the control elements in a dialog Select Mkr Marker 1 Si Stimulus 3 00015 GHz El Name Mai Formet Deech D Press the cursor keys to switch between several entries in a list of alternative or independent settings Mode Marker On v Fixed Marker Delta Mode Discrete Mode All Mkrs Coupled 28 Getting Started Basic Tasks l 3 Use the data entry keys or the rotary knob to enter numbers Use the on screen ENTER keyboard for character entry For more details refer to Data Entry 4 Press ENTER ESC CANCEL or press the rotary knob to close the active dialog 2 2 2 Data Entry The analyzer provides dialogs with various types of input fields where you can enter numeric values and character data Data entry with a mouse and an external keyboard is a standard procedure known from other Windows applications However there are various alternative ways to enter data Using Front Panel Keys If no mouse and no external keyboard is connected to the analyzer you can use the data entry keys to enter numbers and units To enter a numeric value
108. connection LAN GPIB bus To install new fimware using the SETUP menu 1 Press SETUP gt More gt Firmware Update and open the Firmware Update dialog box 2 Enter the update path of your firmware depending on the installation medium that you use You can also Browse the update path in the dialog 3 Click Execute to start the installation The installation program will guide you through the installation If installation fails use the Instrument_Update_Tool as described below Setup files can be stored and installed again The default drive name of the USB interfaces is C External storage devices are automatically mapped to the next free drive i e D E etc Remote control SYST FIRM UPD D FW_UPDATE To install new fimware using the update tool 1 Close all applications 2 Access Window XP s startup menu as described in section Accessing Windows XP s Start Menu on p 36 3 Select Programs gt Accessories gt Instrument_Update_Tool 4 Inthe dialog box opened select the ZVL package file and click Open 5 Inthe Install Manager dialog box opened click Install 2 1 2 1 1 2Aec 2 1 3 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 Getting Started Reflection Measurements Ee EE L BE 40 Reflection MeaSureme ntts cccccsscccsessceeeeseeeeeenseeseesseeenenseeeeeesseeeeeseeeneeseessoenseesoonsees 40 Instrument Setup for Reflection Measurements nn0nnnenannnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnann
109. created sweep segment SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep POINts lt numeric_value gt Defines the total number of measurement Points in sweep segment no lt Seg gt lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt numeric_value gt Number of points in the segment Range def unit 1 to 2147483647 1 1 is allowed if start and stop frequencies are equal RST value 51 SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 51 sweep points SEGM SWE POIN 401 Command Reference SENSe Increase the number of points to 401 SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep TIME lt numeric_value gt Sets the duration of the sweep in sweep segment no lt Seg gt Segment Sweep Time At the same time the command activates separate sweep time setting in all sweep segments SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep TIME CONTrol ON lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt numeric_value gt Internal source power Range def unit The minimum duration depends on the other channel settings in particular on the number of points SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep POINts the IF bandwidth BWID and the delay for each partial measurement SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWEL1 The maximum is 1000 s s Changing the duration leaves the n
110. diagram type is selected Scale settings that are not compatible with the current display format are disabled grayed Relations between the scaling parameters The scaling parameters Scale Div Ref Value Ref Position Max Min are coupled together in the following manner Max Min Scale Div lt Number of graticule divisions gt GUI Reference Trace Menu Max Ref Value when Ref Position is 10 Min Ref Value when Ref Position is 0 xi O The Marker gt provide a convenient alternative to manual diagram scaling Autoscale Adjusts the Scale Divisions and the Ref Value in order to display the entire active trace in the diagram area leaving an appropriate display margin e In Cartesian diagrams the analyzer re calculates the values of the vertical divisions so that the trace fits onto 80 of the vertical grid The reference value is chosen to center the trace in the diagram e In circular diagrams Polar Smith Inverted Smith the analyzer re calculates the values of the radial divisions so that the diagram is confined to approx 80 of the outer circumference The reference value is set to the value of the outer circumference Autoscale does not affect the stimulus values and the horizontal axis Remote DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE control Scale Div Sets the value of the vertical diagram divisions in Cartesian diagrams Scale Div 10 dB rd Scal
111. double quotes or one of the following reserved names no string variables ZY R V CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA only for the active data trace in channels Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 see list of trace names RST value SCPI Command Confirmed no query Types Example RST SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 CALC MATH SDEF Trei 2 CALC MATH STAT ON Define a mathematical trace dividing the data trace by 2 Activate the mathematical mode and display the mathematical trace instead of the data trace TRAC COPY MATH Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA CALC MATH STAT OFF Copy the current state of the mathematical trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed Switch the display back to the data trace DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace together with the data trace Command Reference TRACe TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA CH1MEM CH2MEM CH3MEM CH4MEM MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATAS MDATA4 MDATAS MDATAG MDATA7 MDATA8 Returns the response values of the active data trace or memory trace see trace names d To read the response values of an arbitrary data or memory trace use CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA To read the response values of a trace acquired in single sweep mode INI Tiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous OFF use CALCula
112. e Paper Size specifies the size of paper that the document is to be printed on e Paper Source specifies the paper source because some printers offer multiple trays for different GUI Reference Nwa File Menu paper sources e The radio buttons in the Print panel specify whether or not different diagram areas are printed on different pages e The radio buttons in the Orientation panel specify whether the pages are printed in Portrait or Landscape format e The Margins panel contains input fields to define a margin on each of the four edges of the pages e The check boxes in the Add panel select additional information to be included in the printed document e Printer opens the Page Setup dialog to select the printer and printer connection The printers can be selected from the Name drop down list Network opens a dialog to configure the printer connections Properties opens a dialog to select the layout and paper format and specify further printer options Pape Setup Printer Heme ASAP MU5092 NW10 MUC RSD DE y Status Ready Type serox DC 24072557265 DocuTech PS Where SASSP MUCSO92 NW 10 MUOUC ASO DE Comment 26 Jl Gei e Preview shows the active setup as it would appear when printed O To select the Print Range and start printing open the Print dialog To install printers and configure ports use the Control Panel Remote control HCOPy DESTination HCOPy DEVice LANGuage HCOPy ITEM
113. file HOP DEST MMEM T HCOPR Select Print to file and create the printer file specified before MMEMory RDIRectory lt directory_name gt Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system lt directory_name gt String parameter to specify the directory RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example MMEM RDIR C Documents and Settings NetworkService Application Data Removes the specified directory MMEMory STORe CKIT lt kit_name gt lt file_name gt Stores the data of a calibration kit to a specified file lt kit_name gt Name of a user defined calibration kit available on the analyzer Itis not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be created The file is a NWA specific cal kit file with the extension calkit If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRGCCOry RST value Command Reference SCPI Command Types Example MMEMory Device specific no query MMEM LOAD Child NCE RoE S a A Ee aea e e a erer a oe Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit calkit from the default cal kit directory MMEM STOR CKI New kii eA Ronde os ear Nee aor aoa Kalki eren a a Store the data for the user defined cal kit Newkit and overwrite the cal kit file
114. for DISPlay Commands RST value Depending on the measured quantity The default reference level for an S parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 10 GB lt trace_name gt Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored RST value SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Trl1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y PDIV 5 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV 5 CH4TR1 Set the value per division to 5 dB Command Reference DISPlay DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt numeric_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the reference level or reference value for a particular displayed trace Setting a new reference level does not affect the value of PDIVision The trace can be referenced either by its number lt WndTr gt or by its name lt trace_name gt lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_na
115. green checkmark appears in the checkbox 6 Click Apply to close the wizard calculate and store the system error correction data and apply them to the current measurement 7 Remove the short standard and connect the DUT again Evaluation of Data The analyzer provides various tools to optimize the display and analyze the measurement data For instance you can use markers determine the maximum of the reflection coefficient and change the display format to obtain information about the phase shift of the reflected wave and the impedance of your DUT 1 Press the MKR function key This places Marker 1 to its default position center of the sweep range A marker symbol triangle appears on the trace The stimulus value frequency and response value magnitude of the reflection coefficient converted to a dB value at the marker position is displayed in the marker info field in the upper right corner of the diagram 2 Press the MKR gt function key open the Marker Search submenu and activate Min Search The marker jumps to the absolute minimum of the curve in the entire sweep range The marker info field shows the coordinates of the new marker position Tre ERR op Mag 506 Ref 15 dB 1 3 Inthe TRACE keypad press FORMAT and select the Phase of the reflection coefficient to be displayed The phase is shown in a Cartesian diagram with a default vertical scale of 225 deg to 225 deg The marker info field shows the frequency
116. gt CORRection CONNection lt conn_name gt TEM WGUide GENDer NGENder lt perm_rel gt lt imped gt Configures the user defined connector types lt Ch gt Channel number lt conn_name gt Name of the user defined connectors string parameter TEM WGUide Transverse electric or waveguide type propagation mode GENDer NGENder Polar connector type m f Sexless connector type lt perm_rel gt Relative permittivity Range def unit 0 0000000001 to 1000 UP DOWN MIN MAX parameters are not available for this command RST value lt imped gt For TEM type connectors reference impedance in Q without unit For WGUide type connectors cutoff frequency in Hz without unit Range def unit Ref impedance 1uQ to 1000 MQ Cutoff frequency 0 Hz to 1000 GHz RST value SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example CORR CONN USERCON TEM GEND 1 00000 50 Define a TEM type connector type names USERCON CORR CONN USERCON Query the properties of the configured connector type CORR CONN DEL USERCON Command Reference SENSe Delete the configured connector type SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CONNection DELete lt conn_name gt Deletes a user defined connector type named lt conn_name gt lt Ch gt lt conn_name gt Channel number Name of the user defined connectors string parameter SCPI Command Types Device specific no query Example Se
117. gt INSert SELec SWTime this parameter is replaced by lt Time gt Os to 2 5E 003 s s AUTO activates automatic sweep time setting in the segment which is equivalent to a meas delay of 0 s Ignored parameter should be set to the default value 0 Resolution bandwidth in the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution 1 0E 6 Hz to 5 MHz Hz Device specific no query SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 58 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz Command Reference SENSe SEGM2 ADD Create a second sweep segment The frequency range of the second segment will be between 1 5 MHz and the maximum frequency of the analyzer SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert SELect SWTime DWELI Defines whether the sweep time of a new segment Le numeric parameter no 5 of the command SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert Is entered as a segment sweep time or as a meas delay lt Ch gt lt Seg gt SWTime DWELI RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Sweep segment number Use segment sweep time Use meas delay SWTime Device specific command or query SEGM TNS SEL DWEL Select the meas delay to determine the sweep time in a new sweep segment EE EE EE Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz and a meas delay of 10 ms SEGM SWE TIME Query the sweep time
118. gt LIMit STATe Switches the limit check including upper and lower limits on or off O Use CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer STATe or CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer STATe to switch on or off the individual limit checks for upper or lower limit lines lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Limit check on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM STAT ON CALC LIM FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt Defines the response y axis values of the upper limit line and or creates new limit line segments coc d The commands CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA and CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA use a fixed numbering scheme for limit line segments Upper limit line segments are assigned odd numbers 1 3 5 lower limit line segments are assigned even numbers 2 4 6 Command Reference CALCulate Rules for creating segments The following rules apply to an active trace with n existing upper and n existing lower limit line segments e Anodd number of values is rejected an error message 109 Missing parameter
119. gt ON Show the bandfilter search results If no bandfilter search has been initiated before CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute BFILter nothing is displayed OFF hide the bandfilter search results RST value OFF SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch MMediate Initiates a search according to the search function selected with CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion SELect The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON Command Reference CALCulate Note Together with CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion SELect this command ts the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 For a bandfilter search BF ILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 Range def unit RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch LEFT Selects a search mode for marker no lt Mk gt and initiates a search for the next valid peak to the left The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer
120. in channel 1 SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt FREQuency lt ref_frequency gt Defines the reference frequency for the frequency dependent part of the offset loss SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt OFFSet lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt ref_frequency gt Reference frequency Range def unit Frequency range of the analyzer model Hz The increment UP DOWN is 1 MHz RST value 1000000000 Hz 1 GHz SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRect ion EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt OFFSet lt ref_loss gt Defines the offset loss at the reference frequency SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt FREQuency lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt ref_loss gt Frequency dependent part of the offset loss Range def unit 200 dB to 200 dB dB The increment UP DOWN is 0 001 dB RST value 0 dB SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection OFFSet lt port_no gt STATe lt Boolean gt Resets the offset parameters for all test ports to zero or queries whether any of the offset parameters are
121. in the new segment SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt OVERIap lt Boolean gt Queries whether the analyzer supports overlapping sweep segments lt Ch gt lt Seg gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Channel number Sweep segment number ON OFF No effect OFF If used as a query the command returns the information that overlapping sweep segments are not supported OFF Device specific command no effect or query Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer LEVel lt numeric_value gt Defines the Power of the internal signal source in sweep segment no lt Seg gt At the same time the command activates separate power control In all sweep segments SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer Level CONTrol ON lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt numeric_value gt Internal source power Range def unit 40 dBm to 10 dBm The exact range depends on the analyzer model refer to the data sheet dBm RST value 10 dBm SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 dBm internal source power SEGM POW 20 Decrease the power to 20 dBm SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer LEVel CONTrol lt Boolean gt Qualifies whether or not the Power of the internal signal source can be set
122. independently for each sweep segment lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt Boolean gt ON The power can be set independently for each sweep segment OFF The power in all sweep segments is equal to the internal source power for unsegmented sweeps set via SOURce lt Ch gt POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude RST value OFF The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a segment level is entered using SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer LEVel SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 dBm internal source power SEGM POW 20 Command Reference SENSe Decrease the power to 20 dBm paGM POW CONT OnE Couple the powers in all segments and reset the power in segment no 1 to the initial value SENSe lt Ch gt JSEGMent lt Seg gt STATe lt Boolean gt Activates or deactivates the sweep segment lt Seg gt Sweep points belonging to inactive segments only are not measured lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt Boolean gt ON OFF Activates or deactivates the measurement in sweep segment lt Seg gt RST value ON SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM OFF Disable the measurement in the
123. indicates a memory trace Right click the section and call the Trace Manager from the context menu to change the trace name Measured quantity indicates the measured quantity e g an S parameter or an impedance The measured quantity of the active trace is also displayed in the diagram area below the trace list Format shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display trace format Scale shows the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions Scale Div and the Reference Value Channel shows the channel that each trace is assigned to The channel section is omitted if the all traces in the diagram area are assigned to the same channel Type shows Invisible if a trace is hidden and Math if the trace is a mathematical trace GAT indicates that a time gate is active for the trace Right click the trace name and click Show Data or Show Mem from the context menu to display and hide data and memory traces Use the Trace Funct ions to define mathematical traces Right click any of the sections in the trace list except Type to open a context menu and access the most common tasks related to the section Context menus of the trace list A right mouse click on the trace name the measured quantity and the format and scale section of the trace list opens the following context menus respectively 3 1 5 5 System Overview Basic Concepts dB Mag Phase Smith Trace Manager us S11 Polar 455i9n Diag
124. into a unit circle If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient S41 S22 etc then the unit Inverted Smith chart represents the normalized admittance In contrast to the polar diagram the scaling of the diagram is not linear Application Reflection measurements see application example um O The axis for the sweep variable is lost in Smith charts but the marker functions easily provide the stimulus value of any measurement point dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be obtained by means of the Marker Format functions Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat ISMith Unwrapped Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with an arbitrarily scaled linear vertical axis to display the phase of the measured quantity Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The phase of the complex quantity C i e C arctan Im C Re C appears on the vertical axis p C is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep reference phase 0 In contrast to the normal Phase format the display range is not limited to values between 180 and 180 This avoids artificial jumps of the trace but can entail a relatively wide phase range if the sweep span is large Application Phase measurements e g phase distortion deviation from linearity O After changing to the Unwrapped Phase format use Trace Scale Autoscale to re scale the vertical axis and
125. introduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire Is taken into account eiis oO The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction which you can replace with your own external correction data You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on an other instrument If you want Command Reference SENSe to use the external correction data on the analyzer simply generate the default data set corresponding to your port configuration and calibration type and overwrite the default data For details refer to the program example below coc O This command must be used in combination with the ZVR compatible commands SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod and SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATa Use SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault if you want to use ZVL specific calibration commands or if you want to calibrate more than 2 ports lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example CORR COLL METH DEEL Select a one port normalization at port 1 with an open standard as calibration type CORR COLL SAVE DEF Calculate a dummy system error correction for the normalization at port 1 The dummy system error correction provides the reflection tracking error term SCORRS C
126. is independent of the trace colors OFF Each marker has the color of the associated trace RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command Device specific command or query See DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt Defines the color of all display elements based on the Red Green Blue color model lt Element gt lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Range def unit lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt Range def unit RST values SCPI Command Types Example Number of the display element The display elements corresponding to the numbers 1 to 28 are listed below Red green and blue content of the defined color O zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity corresponding to 255 in the 24 bit color model Optional trace style only for traces lt Element gt gt 12 One of the string parameters SOLid DASHed DOTTed DDOTted DDDotted Optional trace width only for traces lt Element gt gt 12 1 to 20 RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command Confirmed with device specific numeric suffix and parameters command or query The query returns three values between 0 and one separated by commas corresponding to the red green and blue color c
127. is the reference admittance of the system zero reflection At the left and right intersection points between the horizontal axis and the outer circle the admittance is infinity Short and zero Open The outer circle corresponds to zero conductance purely imaginary admittance System Overview Basic Concepts Points outside the outer circle indicate an active component The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to negative inductive and positive capacitive susceptive components of the admittance respectively Example Reflection coefficients in the inverted Smith chart H the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient T e g S41 S22 then the unit inverted Smith chart can be used to read the normalized admittance of the DUT The coordinates in the normalized admittance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows see also definition of matched circuit converted admittances Y Y 1 T 1 I From this equation it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the complex admittance to the real and imaginary parts of T 1 Re Im r i Re bm 2 Io gt R D Berta A tot G Re Y Y Ref Ima B Im Y Y in order to deduce the following properties of the graphical representation in an inverted Smith chart Real reflection coefficients are mapped to real admittances conductances The center of the T plane T 0
128. lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER STOP lt numeric_value gt Defines the stop value of the search range selected with CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 lt numeric_value gt End of the search range Range def unit Maximum allowed sweep range depending on the instrument model and on the sweep type Hz dBm or s depending on the sweep type RST value 0 Hz SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute MAXimum MINimum RPEak LPEak NPEak TARGet LTARget RTARget BFiLter Selects a search mode for marker no lt Mk gt and initiates the search The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON exception bandfilter search lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 For a bandfilter search BF TLter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 Parameters See list of parameters below RST value Command Reference
129. marker The marker is assigned to rc2 Delete all markers Trace Marker All Markers Off Remote Control General Description Command Processing CALC1 MARK ON To verify that Trc2 is also active for remote control use the channel suffix 1 after CALC may be omitted to reference the active trace in channel 1 and create a marker Mkr 1 The marker is assigned to Trc2 CALC PAR SEL Trei CALC1 MARK ON Select the old default trace Trc1 as the active trace for remote control Create a new marker to verify that Trc1 is now the active trace in channel 1 O In the SCPI command description the numeric suffix lt Ch gt is used for channel settings it denotes the configured channel whereas lt Chn gt is used for trace settings it denotes the active trace in the channel Initiating Measurements Speed Considerations After a reset the network analyzer measures in continuous mode The displayed trace shows the result of the last sweep and is continuously updated This provides a permanent visual control over the measurement and the effect of any analyzer settings In remote control it is advisable to follow a different approach in order use the analyzer s resources to full Capacity and gain measurement speed The following principles can help to optimize a remote control program see also programming example Typical Stages of a Measurement e Switch off the measurement while configuring your instrument e Use a minim
130. navigation in the file system place the cursor on the icons to obtain What s this help e File Name specifies a file name e g a setup file nwa to open The file can be selected by clicking on the directory overview above e Open opens selected file and closes the dialog e Cancel closes the dialog without opening a setup file GUI Reference Nwa File Menu Save Nwa Saves an opened setup to its current name and directory On saving a setup for the first time the analyzer displays the Save As dialog box in order to name the setup file O To change the name and directory of an existing setup before saving it choose the Save As command Save Nwa As Saves and names the active setup The analyzer opens a standard Windows Save As dialog box to select a NWA setup file name nwa and location for the setup file O To save a document with its existing name and directory use the Save command Remote control MMEMory STORe STATe 1 lt file_name gt Save As Dialog Specifies the name and location of a particular file e g a NWA setup file to save Save Ir Mu Documents Mu Recent My eBooks Documents hn Music string LC Sample Pictures EN Sets best 2vx Mu Documents E Mu Computer File name pets zen L Save Save ae type Niwa Setup File D zl Ww Cancel Mu Network Help e File Name specifies a file name to save the current data e g the setup The analyzer adds
131. not displayed CALCulate1 FORMat PHASe the trace is referenced by the channel suffix 1 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED Trc2 display the second trace numbering it the second trace in diagram area no 1 F Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Programming Examples Basic Tasks d Nwa Set Ser Tre SEN cB Mag 10 dB Potto Go to Local Display On Off Tre EEN Phase 45 Bet E 8 J See I CET 8 oa TEE ttt toate FA HE Ae E E EE ee tere tT III Chi Start 300 kHz Pwr O dBm Stop amp Hz Frequency lock Failure For Details press INFO oe REMOTE 2 One channel two traces two diagram areas Create a second diagram area assign Trc2 to the new area and remove it from the first area DISPlay WINDow2 STATe ON DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 FEED Trc2 Trc2 is now displayed in both diagram areas DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 DELete Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Programming Examples Basic Tasks sr Nwa Seti D EST Cipla On Off Tre ER op Mag 10napt Refode Chi Start 300 kHz Tre ERE Phase 45 Ref 0 CAL Start 300 kHz Pwr O dm Stop 8 GHz Frequency lock Failure For Details press INFO oe REMOTE g 3 One channel four traces four diagram areas Reset the instrument add diagram areas no 2
132. number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Resolution bandwidth 10 Hz to 500 kHz UP and DOWN increment decrement the bandwidth in 1 2 5 steps for each decade The analyzer rounds up any entered value between these steps and rounds down values exceeding the maximum bandwidth 10 kHz Confirmed command or query BAND 1 1 Set a resolution bandwidth of approx 1 1 Hz for channel 1 BAND The analyzer returns the rounded bandwidth of 2 Hz Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection This subsystem controls system error correction and recording of correction data SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CDATa DIRECTIVITY SRCMATCH REFLTRACK ISOLATION LOADMATCH TRANSTRACK lt port1_no gt lt port2_no gt Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel lt Ch gt calibration method SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine and port combination Port no lt Port2_no gt The setting command can be used to transfer user defined correction data to the analyzer the query returns the current correction data set ASCII or block data can be transferred depending on the selected data transfer format FORMat DATA O For an overview of calibration methods and error terms refer to section Calibration Types lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Error term
133. of serial poll Serial Poll CHR 25 Disable PPU IBCMD End of the parallel poll state Parallel Poll controller Unconfigure CHR 21 Addressed Commands Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through OF hex They are only effective for instruments addressed as listeners HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors Command QuickBASIC Effect on the instrument command GET IBTRG device Triggers a previously active device function e g a sweep The effect Group of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external Execute trigger signal input Trigger GTL IBLOC device Transition to the Local state manual control Go to Local PPC IBPPC device Configures the instrument for parallel poll Additionally the QuickBASIC Parallel Poll data command executes PPE PPD Configure SDC IBCLR device Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the Selected command processing software to a defined initial state Does not Device Clear change the instrument setting Instrument Messages Instrument messages commands are transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus while the ATN line is not active ASCII code is used Structure and syntax of the instrument messages are described the SCPI Reference chapter The chapter also provides a detailed description of all messages implemented by the analyzers VXI 11 Interface The VXI 11 standard is based on the RPC prot
134. or recall setups and to shut down the application The Trace menu provides all trace settings and the functions to create select modify and store different traces In addition the menu provides the marker search and limit check functions ZS The Channel menu provides all channel settings and the functions to create select modify and store different channels This incudes the functions for calibration The Display menu provides all display settings and the functions to create select modify and arrange different diagram areas The NWA Setup menu provides standard Windows functions to arrange different windows on the screen display options reverse operations return to a defined instrument state and retrieve information on the instrument Besides it provides configurations for the user interface and for remote control operation The Help menu provides assistance with the network analyzer and its operation 3 1 4 2 Menu Structure All menus show an analogous structure System Overview Basic Concepts Trace Trace Marker gt Marker dv Marker 1 Meas V Marker z Format V Marker 3 Scale V Ref Marker Lines V Delta Mode Mkr gt Ref Mkr All Mrs OFF Mkr Format dB Mag More Mkrs V Lin Mag w Coupled Mrs Phase Discrete Mkrs Real Mkr Properties ao Export Mhrs palsy dE Mag and Phase Lin Mag and Phase Real and Imag Default RLE Ser RLC Par A menu command
135. order used above The data is returned as a comma separated list of real numbers The unit is the default unit of the measured parameter see CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine but also depends on the trace format linear or logarithmic scale see CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat If a polar trace format is selected then the statistical parameters are calculated from the linear magnitude of the measurement parameter Device specific query only RST CALC STAT RES MAX Calculate and return the maximum of the default trace showing an S parameter on a dB Mag scale CALC FORM POL STAT RES MAX Display the trace in a polar diagram and re calculate the maximum The result corresponds to the previous result but is converted to a unitless linear value Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics RMS STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the RMS results in the diagram area of trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace ON OFF Statistical info field on or off OFF Device specific command or query See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics STATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides all statistical results in the diagram area of trace no lt Chn gt except the compression point results O You can display or hide the Min Max Peak Peak Mean Std De
136. ower limit line defines the minimum value for the trace points A limit check consists of comparing the measurement results to the limit lines and display a pass fail indication An acoustic warning and a TTL signal at the USER CONTROL port can be generated in addition if a limit is exceeded Upper and lower limit lines are both defined as a combination of segments with a linear dependence between the measured quantity and the sweep variable stimulus variable The limit lines can be stored to a file and recalled Data or memory traces can be used to define the segments of a limit line Moreover it is possible to modify the limit lines globally by adding an offset to the stimulus or response values GUI Reference Trace Menu No direct access via Trace front panel keys H H a Meas Format H Scale Show Limit Line Limit check Cin Fail Beep On Define Lirit Line Horizontal Line Global Limit Check Gn e Show Limit Line displays or hides the limit line associated to the active trace e Limit Check On activates or deactivates the limit check e Fail Beep On activates or deactivates the acoustic signal indicating a limit excess e Define Limit Line opens a dialog to define save or recall limit lines e Horizontal Line displays or hides the horizontal line of the active trace and changes its position e Global Limit Checkk activates a global composite limit check on all traces in the active setup
137. permittivity at port 2 The mechanical length is equal to the electrical length divided by the square root of the permittivity the latter is set to its default value The response is 0 29990704322 1 00062 CORR EDEL2 Query the value of the delay at port 2 The delay is equal to the electrical length divided by the speed of light in the vacuum so the response is 1 0006922856E 009 CORR LOSS2 2 LOSS2 FREQ 1 5 GHz OFFS 3 dB Define the offset loss parameters at port 2 SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt TIME lt delay gt Defines the offset parameter for test port lt port_no gt as a delay time lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt delay gt Delay Range def 3 40282346638529E 038 s to 3 40282346638529E 038 s s In contrast to the unit electrical length SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth the delay time can not be incremented the UP DOWN parameters do not work RST value Os SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection FACTory STATe lt Boolean gt Enables or disables the factory calibration for a particular channel lt Ch gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number of the calibrated channel Enable or disable factory calibration ON Device specific c
138. ro 9 r g nrl i serl A 8 nol used ES 3 Limit race ro 3 6 wotised 4 d pt ger H Luml aA d F amp T mol read CH Let use ae 5 Limh trace ro B E nal sari A 5 nal used A 5 Limtrasro 5 A 5 not used A Ai Geen ES 4 Lmt race ro 4 Be 4 notised KA a Kies E 3 Limit race ro 3 Ka 3 not laad 8 5 lm used 8 F limil race ro 2 B 2 Limit mace ne 16 8 Int Ud 8 1 Lirnil raca ro E l Limi race ne 15 D oli used a 3 Lint surmar AB O notused STATu OP ERation Register STATu QUEStionable STATS QUE Stionable Ki LiMiti Register LIME Register g mol uer Nal usce nal usce nal asee mol useg L Mil summary Nal dee n l usce Hal Aet nal USET nal usec Nal usec Hol see real ieee nal usec Nal usec SRE STH fe ef fe de de Ge fe Be p te fe te fe EB FER ed Cum Ex OCH OD oO PPE Ki STAT QUE Stiorm ble Aeginter IST Jag Ensawer to saalel pelli not used net Used net used neat used net used net Sed net used Ope at o Complete ge be gol ip wee ge EB amp logical AND amp logical OR of all bit Error Queue Outou Buffer ESE ESR Structure of an SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts which each have a width of 16 bits and have different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most s
139. scaling and format settings OO for trace names The analyzer can define mathematical relations between different traces and calculate new mathematical traces User Def Math The trace names are used as operands in the mathematical expressions and must be distinguished from the mathematical operators etc This places some restrictions on the syntax of trace names e The first character of a trace name can be either one of the upper case letters A to Z one of the lower case letters a to z an underscore or a square bracket or e For all other characters of a trace name the numbers 0 to 9 can be used in addition The analyzer does not accept illegal trace names If an illegal name is specified the input field in the Trace Manager turns red Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace Names lt Meas Parameter gt Add Delete Opens a dialog to add a new trace or delete a trace Add Delete Add new Trace Delete Trace Channel Trace Area e Add creates a new trace and adds it to the list in the Trace Manager assigning it to the channel and diagram area selected in the drop down lists It is possible to create a New channel and or diagram area for the new trace e Delete deletes the selected trace removing it from the list in the Trace Manager and from the screen This button is disabled if the setup contains only one trace In manual control each setup must contain at least o
140. separating diagrams with different trace Format and Channel settings e g Cartesian and polar diagrams R amp S ZVL a GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Polar O 2 Uys Ref 1 U al a l Start 300 kHz To vary the size and position of the diagram areas drag and drop the separating frames or use the Split Manager Remote control No command display configuration only Quad Split Splits the active window into four diagram areas and distributes the traces among the four areas separating diagrams with different trace Format and the Channel settings e g Cartesian and polar diagrams Polar 0 2 Us Refi U Kod Vg d U Ea Pa Stn D 2 GHz Operating Manual 1303 6580 32 01 GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu O To vary the size and position of the diagram areas drag and drop the separating frames or use the Split Manager Remote control No command display configuration only Split Manager Opens a dialog to arrange the diagram areas in the active window S z y G Split Mode Tile Horizontally v Rows S Columns e Split Mode provides a drow down list to select alternative display schemes for the diagram areas see examples for split modes below e Number of Diagram Areas indicates the total number of diagram areas Increasing decreasing the number creates new diagram areas or deletes diagram areas Examples for split modes e The following examples were obtained w
141. specified menu command DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute lt menu_key gt can be used in different ways If the menu key causes an event e g selection of the measured quantity S11 S12 etc the function is executed immediately No further action is required the instrument remains in remote control mode lf the menu key requires a numeric entry e g entry of the sweep range Start Stop etc the command opens the numeric entry bar The instrument is switched back to remote control mode as soon as the entry has been made manually lf the menu key requires several entries to be made in a dialog or in a wizard e g the S Param Wizard the command opens this dialog wizard All entries can be made manually The instrument is switched back to remote control mode as soon as the dialog or wizard is closed Remote Control General Description Messages cija O DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute lt menu_key gt works for all menu keys even though the analyzer may not provide an equivalent remote control command Remote control SYSTem USER KEY SYSlem USER KEY FUNCti0n DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute DISPlay MENU KEY SELect Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB VXI 11 interface can be either interface messages or device messages GPIB Interface Messages GPIB interface messages are transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus the ATN control line being active They a
142. standards Standard Gender R Load Electrical Length Offset SE EIERE Shor GUI Reference Channel Menu Offset Short f m 0Q 10 mm Match f m Zo reference impedance of the connector type Sliding Match f m Reflect f m Through ff mm mf The following additional parameters are used e Characteristic impedance Zo reference impedance of the connector type e Loss 0 dB sart GHz 0 GQ s e Al inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero Cal Kit Files Calibration kit files can be used to store the parameters of a particular calibration kit to reuse the data and to exchange calibration kits from one network analyzer to another OO Cal kit file contents Cal kit files are independent of the current setup and contain the following information e Name and label of the calibration kit e Connector type including all connector type parameters name polarity offset model reference impedance e Type gender and label of all standards in the kit together with the circuit model parameters offsets load or S parameter tables snp file that are necessary to determine its magnitude and phase response e To export cal kit data the analyzer uses a specific binary file format calkit e Three different import file formats are supported ZVL specific binary cal kit files calkit ZVR specific binary cal kit files ck cal kit files in Agilent specific ASCII formats
143. still being set overlapping execution Data Base and Instrument Hardware The expression instrument hardware denotes the part of the instrument fulfilling the actual instrument function signal generation measurement etc The controller is not included The data base manages all the parameters and associated settings required for the instrument hardware Setting commands lead to an alteration in the data set The data set management enters the new values e g frequency into the data set however it only passes them on to the hardware when requested by the command recognition This can only occur at the end of a command line therefore the order of the setting commands in the command line is not relevant The commands are only checked for their compatibility among each other and with the instrument hardware immediately before they are transmitted to the instrument hardware If the instrument detects that execution is not possible an execution error is signalled to the status reporting system All alterations of the data set are cancelled the instrument hardware is not reset Due to the delayed checking and hardware setting however impermissible instrument states can be set for a short period of time within one command line without this leading to an error message example simultaneous activation of a frequency and a power sweep At the end of the command line however a permissible instrument state must have been reached again
144. such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish Dialogs with immediate settings provide a Close button but no OK button Example Step Size dialog Dialogs with confirmed settings provide both an OK button and a Cancel button 3 1 6 2 3 1 6 3 System Overview Basic Concepts Example On screen keyboard You can also cancel an immediate setting using Setup Undo On Screen Keyboard A keyboard symbol next to a character input field opens the analyzer s on screen keyboard pasaeran EE IT Shift de BE Cancel The on screen keyboard contains two sets of characters plus the following additional controls Shift changes between the two character sets containing lower case letters numbers and upper case letters special characters respectively lt BS deletes the current string in the alphanumeric input field OK applies the current selection and closes the keyboard The current string is written into the input field of the calling dialog See also mmediate vs Confirmed Settings Cancel discards the current selection and closes the keyboard The input field of the calling dialog is left unchanged The on screen keyboard allows you to enter characters in particular letters without an external keyboard see Data Entry To enter numbers and units you can also use the DATA ENTRY keys on the front panel of the instrument Paste Marker List
145. sweep When tracking mode is active the markers typically change their horizontal and their vertical positions as the measurement goes on Tracking for the different bandfilter search modes is enabled or disabled in a selection box Selecting a search mode for tracking also activates this mode Bandfilter Tracking for Trace Irci EN oppass Ref toa Max Bandstop Ref to Min Bandpass Ref to Marker Bandstop Ref to Marker Tracking is a toggle function Selecting the function repeatedly switches the tracking mode on and off Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute DEI Ier CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch TRACking GUI Reference Trace Menu Level Opens the numeric entry bar for the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks x dB Bandwidth dB od e A bandpass peak must fall off on both sides by the specified x dB Bandwidth to be considered a valid peak e A bandstop peak must increase on both sides by the specified x dB Bandwidth to be considered a valid peak Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth lt Level gt Search Range Opens the Search Range Dialog to confine the bandfilter search to a subrange of the sweep Bandfilter Search Range EN Evaluation Range Range 1 v Start 2GHz Ga Stop 3 GHz aal Range Limit Lines On It is possible to define and store up to ten different search ranges for each trace The bandfilter search is
146. that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Zu matched circuit admittance measured in a forward reflection measurement You can also read the converted admittances in a reflection coefficient measurement from the inverted Smith chart System Overview Calibration Overview 3 3 Calibration Overview Calibration is the process of eliminating systematic reproducible errors from the measurement results system error correction The process involves the following stages 1 A set of calibration standards is selected and measured over the required sweep range For many calibration types the magnitude and phase response of each calibration standard i e its S parameters if no system errors occur must be known within the entire sweep range 2 The analyzer compares the measurement data of the standards with their known ideal response The difference is used to calculate the system errors using a particular error model calibration type and derive a set of system error correction data 3 The system error correction data is used to correct the measurement results of a DUT that is measured instead of the standards Calibration is always channel specific because it depends on the hardware settings in particular on the sweep range The means that a system error correction data set is stored with the calibrated channel The analyzer provides a wide range of sophisticated calibration methods for all types of mea
147. the GUI Reference Nwa File Menu extension e g nwa in the Save As Type box e Save in specifies the drive and directory in which the data is stored The icons to the right of the pull down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system place the cursor on the icons to obtain What s this help e Save saves the data e g the active setup in the selected file and directory and closes the dialog e Cancel closes the dialog without saving the data O The Save As dialog is used to store various data types e g cal kit data limit lines sweep segment lists Depending on its use the dialog is opened with different file locations and data types File locations directories are remembered when the dialog is closed To restore default directories use the System System Configuration Resets dialog Page Setup Selects a printer and a printer connection This command presents a Page Setup dialog box to specify the printer and its connection Page Setup Dialog Provides options to specify how the document should be printed Page Setup is opened by means of the File Page Setup command Page Setup Paper Print Size A All Diagram 4reas on one Page OC One Diagram Srea per Page SOURCE Automatically Select Ke active Area on one Page Orientation Margins millimeters Add Portrait Left 20 Right 7 Logo Landscape Date and Time Top E Eoktom Marker Table
148. the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Example 2 Overlapping command with OPC The analyzer implements INITiate IMMediate as an overlapped command Assuming that INITiate IMMediate takes longer to execute than OPC sending the command sequence INIT OPC results in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR Sending the commands INIT OPC CLS still initiates a sweep Since the operation is still pending when the analyzer executes CLS forcing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS OPC is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not set until the analyzer executes another OPC command O The analyzer provides only one overlapped command INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate What is said below is not relevant for the other sequential SCPI commands Preventing overlapping execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used For a programming example refer to section Command Synchronization in Chapter Programming Examples Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller
149. the active marker on the trace use one of the following methods e Drag and drop the marker symbol to the desired position e Click the Marker lt n gt or Ref Marker softkey to call up the entry bar for the new stimulus value e Right click the diagram area or select Mkr Properties to call up the Marker Properties dialog and select the new stimulus value e Use the Search functions to place the marker to a specific point on the trace lf the marker position is defined explicitly by entering a numeric value the marker position can be outside the sweep range lf it is just varied using the rollkey the mouse or the cursor keys it always remains within the sweep range If the position of a marker outside the sweep range is varied it is automatically moved to the start or stop value of the sweep range whichever is closer Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mks STATe ON CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt Y Ref Marker Creates a reference marker and assigns it to the active trace toggle function Ref Marker opens the numeric entry bar to define the marker position Stim Ref Mkr The default position is the center of the sweep range Stim Ret Mkr On closing the Stimulus Ref Mkr numeric entry bar a marker symbol triangle labeled Ref is positioned on the trace and a line indicating Ref plus the marker coordinates is inserted in the marker info field The reference marker defines the reference value for
150. the first level mnemonic of a command selects a channel as active channel GUI Reference Channel Menu Add Chan Trace Creates a new channel and a new trace which is displayed in the active diagram area The new channel settings including a possible channel calibration are identical to the previous channel settings the trace is created with the trace settings of the former active trace but displayed with another color The former and the new active trace are superimposed but can be easily separated e g by changing the Reference Position The new channel is named Ch lt n gt where lt n gt is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Channel Manager d To create a new trace in the active channel use the Trace Traces Add Trace function To create a new channel and a new trace and display it in a new diagram area use Add Chan Trace Diag Area Remote control CONFigure CHANnel lt Chs STATe ON CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trc_name gt lt Parameter gt DISPlay WINDow lt No gt TRACe FEED lt Trc_name gt Add Chan Trace Diag Area Creates a new channel and a new trace which is displayed in a new diagram area The new channel settings including a possible channel calibration are identical to the previous channel settings the trace is created with the trace settings of the former active trace but displayed with another color The new channel
151. the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y RPOS 50 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y RPOS 50 CH4TR1 Set the reference position to the center of the diagram area DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe TOP upper value l lt trace_name gt Sets the upper maximum edge of the diagram area lt Wnd gt Command Reference DISPlay lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used lt upper_value gt Value and unit for the upper diagram edge Range def unit Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands RST value Depending on the measured quantity The default upper edge for a dB Mag diagram is 20 dB lt trace_name gt Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored RST value SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example See DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe BOTTom Units for DISPlay Commands The DISPlay subsystem contains commands to define particular points in the diagram e g to set the scale or a reference value This require
152. the instrument must be executed The Start menu of the operating system is accessed as described below All necessary settings can be accessed from the Start menu in particular from the Control Panel Accessing Windows XP s Start Menu The Windows XP Start menu provides access to the Windows XP functionality and installed programs From the start menu you can navigate to the submenus by using the mouse or the cursor keys of the keyboard The following operations require an external keyboard To open the Windows XP Start menu E On your keyboard press the Windows key or the CTRL ESC key combination To return to the measurement screen use one of the following methods Press the ALT TAB key combination to switch to the analyzer application In the Windows task bar opened via ALT Tab click the R amp S Analyzer Interface icon Preparing for Use Firmware Update 1 9 Firmware Update Upgrade versions of the analyzer firmware are supplied as setup files msi To perform a firmware update you can either use the softkeys associated with the SETUP front panel key or the Instrument_Update_Tool The latter procedure is recommended if installation via SETUP is not practicable NOTE Setup files To prepare the installation copy the setup file to any storage medium accessible from the analyzer This may be the internal hard disk an external storage medium USB memory stick CD ROM with external drive or a network
153. the list Example of a limit line file The limit line Seg Type T Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response 1 Upper e 1 GHz 3 GHz z dB 2 dB z Lower 3 GHz amp GHz 3 dB d dE 3 Off 300 kHz 1 GHz 1 dB 1 dE is described by the limit line file Version 1 00 channel 2 Trace 2 en Type Start Stimulus MHz Stop stimulus MHz Start Response dB Stop Response dB Upper 1 OOOOOCOOOOOOOOO0E 003 3 000000000000000E 003 2 000000000000000E 000 2 000000000000000E 000 Lower 3 000000000000000E 006 8 O00000000000000E 003 3 000000000000000E 000 4 000000000000000E 000 off 3 QQQAAQAAQAAQQAQE 0OL 1 000000000000000E 003 1 000000000000000E 000 iL QQQCAAQAAAAAAQAQE 000 Remote control MMEMory LOAD LIMit Trc_name file_ name MMEMory STORe LIMit Trc_name file_name Horizontal Line Shows or hides the horizontal line associated to the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the horizontal line is shown The horizontal line or display line is a red line which can be moved to particular trace points in order to retrieve the response values GUI Reference Trace Menu Start 1 GHz Pur 10 dBm Stop 5 GHz e Pressing Horizontal Line for a first time shows the line for the active trace and opens the numeric entry bar to define its position response value The rounded position is displayed near the left edge of the screen e
154. the menus across the top of the main application window 1 1 3 Function Keys The keys in the upper right part of the front panel provide direct access to the most important measurement settings Each key opens a drop down menu softkey menu or activates a menu command softkey of the graphical user interface The softkeys are hidden after a while to make room for the display and the measurement results The links in the short descriptions below will take you to the detailed description for the network analyzer mode If the spectrum analyzer option R amp S ZVL K1 is active the keys have a similar function The network analyzer keys SCALE FORMAT and CAL have no direct equivalent in spectrum analysis they are replaced by the AMPT TRIG and RUN keys respectively SPAN j L SCALE H pwrew f sweer rormart prs CENTER or SPAN define the center frequency and the width of the sweep range SCALE defines how the current trace is presented in the diagram If the spectrum analyzer option R amp S ZVL K1 is active the key provides additional functions affecting the displayed signal amplitude AMPT PWR BW defines the power of the internal signal source sets the step attenuators and the IF bandwidths SWEEP defines the scope of measurement including the sweep type the number of points the measurement delay and the periodicity of the measurement FORMAT defines how the measured data is presented in the graphical displ
155. the negative transition filter Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event register lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST value see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example STAT QUES NTR 1536 Set bits no 9 and 10 of the QUEStionable NT Ransition register STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Sets the positive transition filter Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event register lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST value see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example STAT QUES PTR 1536 Set bits no 9 and 10 of the QUEStionable PTRansition register Command Reference STATus STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt CONDition Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt register Reading the CONDition registers is nondestructive RST value SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example STAT QUES LIMit COND Query the CONDition part of the QUEStionable LIMit1 register to retrieve the current status of the limit check STATus QUEStionable
156. the same for all standards in a kit and therefore annexed to the kit name M 50 Oo Ideal Kit ZL AN SU ce ZM Z21 twpical e Universal parameters no label describe calibration kit models with highly standardized components so that the parameters are valid for all calibration kits of the model e Typical parameters labelled typical approximately describe a calibration kit model To correct for deviations between the standards each kit of the model is individually measured and delivered with an additional kit specific parameter set Therefore each typical parameter set lt kit name gt typical is complemented by an additional parameter set lt kit_name gt containing optimized parameters for an individual kit e Ideal parameters labelled Ideal Kit describe an idealized calibration kit for each connector type see below O Make sure to use universal or individual parameter sets if you need to obtain high precision results The precision of the calibration kit parameters determine the accuracy of the system error correction and of the measurements The calibration wizard displays a warning if you use a typical or ideal parameter set to calibrate a channel Calibration kits can be obtained as network analyzer accessories refer to the data sheet for the relevant ordering information The name of all parameter sets is equal to the name of the corresponding calibration kit model ideal parameters All ideal kits contain the following
157. the stimulus values of the active trace shifted by 1 GHz to the right and decreased by 10 dB to create a lower limit line CALC LIM LOW SHIF 3 CALC LIM CONT SHIF 1 GHz Shift the limit line by an additional 3 dB in vertical and by 1 GHz in horizontal direction If an upper limit line exists it is also shifted CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer SHIFt lt numeric_value gt Shifts all lower and upper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction HOT E OC This command is identical with CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer SHIFt lt Chn gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Response offset value for all limit line segments Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition dB Device specific no query See CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer FEED CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer STATe lt Boolean gt Switches the lower limit check on or off Lower limit line segments are assigned even numbers see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA The command does not affect segments with odd numbers Command Reference CALCulate um O Use CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit STATe to switch on or off the entire limit check including upper and lower limit lines lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Limit check
158. time The oldest trace has the smallest the newest trace has the largest trace number This is equivalent to the order of traces in the response string of the CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter CATalog query The number of traces monitored cannot exceed 16 If a setup contains more traces the newest traces are not monitored Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System information of all devices The following standard methods are used Service request SRQ initiated by the measuring device Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why Parallel poll of all devices Query of a specific instrument status by means of commands Query of the error queue Service Request The measuring device can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request Causes an interrupt to which the control program can react appropriately Initiating an SRQ As shown in the graphical overview an SRQ is initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits summarizes the information of a further register the error
159. to be loaded The default extension manual control for sweep segment files is seglist although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Device specific no query Assume that the current setup contains two channels numbered 1 and 2 respectively and that sweep segments have been defined for channel no 1 MMEM STOR SEGM I C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA SweepSegments Seg_Chl seglist Store the sweep segment definition of channel 1 to a Sweep segment file MMEM LOAD SEGM 2 C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA SweepSegments Seg_Chl seglist Load the previously created sweep segment file and use the Sweep segments for channel 2 MMEMory LOAD STATe lt numeric_value gt lt file_name gt Loads configuration data from a specified setup file and sets the analyzer to the corresponding instrument State lt numeric_value gt elle name gt RST value SCPI Command Types 1 the lt numeric_value gt is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is ignored String parameter to specify the name and directory of the setup file to be loaded The default extension manual control for setup files is nwa although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Confirmed no query Command Reference Example
160. trace is assigned to a channel see Traces Channels and Diagram Areas The channel settings apply to all traces assigned to the channel No direct access via Channel front panel keys Center Span H Pir Du V Cal 7 Se H Channel Select The Channel menu contains the following functions and submenus e Center Span defines the sweep range depending on the sweep type e Pwr Bw defines the power of the internal signal source sets the step attenuators and the IF bandwidths and configures the sweep average e Cal provides all functions that are necessary to perform a system error correction calibration e Sweep defines the scope of measurement including the sweep type the trigger conditions and the periodicity of the measurement Center Span The Center and Span submenus define the frequency sweep range in the current channel e In Cartesian diagrams the sweep range corresponds to the diagram width and defines the scaling of the x axis e In polar diagrams and Smith charts the stimulus axis is lost but the marker functions easily provide the stimulus value of any measurement point GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center Span Span Pwr Du Start Cal d Stop SWEER Channel Select SE e Center opens the input field for the center frequency It corresponds to the center of the Cartesian diagram i e Start Stop 2 e Span opens the input field for the frequenc
161. traces of the active setup are updated by the current measurements Various settings to assign traces to diagram areas are provided in the Trace Trace gt Traces submenu Diagram areas may contain Measurement results in particular the traces and marker values System Overview 3 1 5 1 3 1 5 2 Basic Concepts ZS An indication of the basic channel and trace settings Context menus providing settings related to the current screen The examples in this section have been taken from Cartesian diagrams All other diagram types provide the same display elements S parameter measurement ite wee JE Mag 10 dE RefOdb Mkr2 3 207p1pGbtz e a 086 db Ref 3 000150 GHz 6 144 dE 0 0602 dB Maximize Overlay All Split All Add Trace Add Diag Area Trace Delete Diag 4rea Title Color Scheme a Chl start 300 kHz Pwr 10 dBm Stop 6 GHz Title Across the top of the diagram area an optional title describes the contents of the area Different areas within a setup are distinguished by area numbers in the upper right corner Measurement of 5 Parameters 1 Use the context menu or the functions in the Display menu to display hide or change the title and to add and customize diagram areas Traces A trace is a set of data points displayed together in the diagram area The individual data points are connected so that each trace forms a continuous line 3 1 5 3 System Overvi
162. tracking between port 1 and port 2 SCORR 7 Directivity at port 2 SCORR8 Source match at port 2 SCORR9Y Reflection tracking at port 2 SCORR10 Reverse isolation between port 2 and port 1 SCORR11 Load match at port 1 SCORR12 Reverse transmission tracking between port 2 and port 1 The analyzer provides a default calibration corresponding to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors see Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE DEFault The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms Calibration type Parameter in Available error terms SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod depending on port numbers One port normalization SCORR3 reflection using an open SCORR9Y standard SCORR3 and SCORR9 Full one port FOPort1 SCORR1 to SCORR3 FOPort2 SCORR7 to SCORR9 FOPort12 SCORRT1 to SCORR3 and SCORR7 to SCORR9Q Two port normalization FTRans SCORR6 RTRans SCORR12 FRTRans SCORR6 and SCORR12 One path two port FOPTport SCORR1 to SCORR3 ROPTport SCORR6 SCORR7 to SCORR9Y SCORR12 SCORRI1 to SCORR12 at present the isolation terms SCORR4 and SCORR10 are not included SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATA PARameter
163. used Passive connecting USB cables should not exceed 4 m in length Use the original USB connecting cable or another high quality cable The maximum current per USB port is 500 MA PROBE POWER Connector for supply voltages of 15 V to 12 V and ground for active probes and preamplifiers A maximum current of 140 mA is available This connector is suitable as power supply for high impedance probes from Agilent Rear Panel Connectors LAN 8 pin connector RJ 45 used to connect the analyzer to a Local Area Network LAN see Remote Control in a LAN The pin assignment of the RF 45 connector supports category 5 UTP STP Unshielded Shielded Twisted Pair cables EXT TRIGGER BNC female connector used as an input for external TTL trigger signals Input levels lt 0 7 V are interpreted as logic low input levels gt 1 4 V as logic high The typical input impedance is 10 kQ EXT TRIGGER GATE IN HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors EXT REF BNC female connector used as an input or output for the 10 MHz reference clock signal EXT REF The function of the 10 MHz REF connector depends on the nt Reference or Ext Reference setting in the SETUP menu e If Int Reference is active 10 MHz REF is used as an output connector for the 10 MHz internal reference clock signal of the analyzer This configuration requires the OCXO option R amp S FSL B4 OCXO Reference Frequency e f Ext Reference is active 10 MHz REF
164. view the entire trace GUI Reference Trace Menu Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat UPHase Scale The Scale settings define how the current trace is presented in the diagram selected in the Format submenu Trace Trace gt F Marker gt Marker d Meas Format V Autoscale Lines j i Scale f Diw Ref Value Ref Position Overlay All Split All Maximize e Autoscale adjusts the diagram scale in order to display the entire active trace in the diagram area e Scale Div sets the value of the vertical diagram divisions e Ref Value sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a polar diagram e Ref Position defines the position of the reference line in a Cartesian diagram e Overlay All displays all traces in one diagram area e Split All displays every trace in a separate diagram area e Maximize maximizes the active diagram area The Scale settings are closely related to the settings in the Format submenu and in the Display menu All of them have an influence on the way the analyzer presents data on the screen The Scale settings depend on the diagram type Trace Format because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way e In Cartesian diagrams all scale settings are available e In circular diagrams no Scale Div no Ref Position and no Max and Min values can be defined The default scale is activated automatically when a display format
165. with a right arrow E expands a submenu with further related settings Example Marker expands a submenu to position markers on a trace and configure their properties Z A menu command with three dots appended calls up an input field or a dialog providing several related settings Example Marker 7 opens an input field to enter the frequency of marker 1 A menu command with no arrow or dots directly initiates an action Example Delta Mode converts the active marker to a delta marker A dot preceding the menu command indicates the current selection in a list of alternative settings Example In the figure above the default format is selected as marker format 3 1 4 3 Softkey Bar The softkey bar displays the commands of the active menu so that they can be activated by hitting the associated keys on the front panel It contains two different softkey types System Overview Step Atten bZ Heas n Bandwidth Basic Concepts Function softkeys Up to 7 softkeys each corresponding to a command of the active menu The function of the softkeys and their labels are strictly equivalent to the corresponding menu commands Three dots indicate that the softkey calls up a dialog providing several related settings A down arrow indicates a submenu with further related settings A softkey with no arrow or dots directly initiates an action Navigation softkey optional Softkey no 7 is reserved for navigat
166. 0 log z dB Magnitude of z unconverted z sqrt xX y 2 arctan y SWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio SWR 1 z 1 z Group Delay Group delay neg derivative of the phase response d z do 2r f 3 1 7 3 An extended range of formats and conversion formulas is available for markers To convert any point on a trace create a marker and select the appropriate marker format Marker and trace formats can be selected independently Polar Diagrams Polar diagrams show the measured data response values in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis The grid lines correspond to points of equal magnitude and phase The magnitude of the response values corresponds to their distance from the center Values with the same magnitude are located on circles The phase of the response values is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis Values with the same phase on straight lines originating at the center The following example shows a polar diagram with a marker used to display a pair of stimulus and response values 3 1 7 4 System Overview Basic Concepts H hp Polar O 2 Fef 1 0 alike 1 2 000000 GHz 0 486 U 123 517 Pwr 10 dBm Example Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient S414 S22 etc then the center of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z
167. 0FEMALE N50MALE N75FEMALE N75MALE PC7 PC35FEMALE PC35MALE PC292FEMALE PC292MALE Additional parameters UFEMALE1 UMALE1 UFEMALE2 UMALE2 Selects a connector type at a specified port lt port_no gt and its gender O Use SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SCONnection lt port_no gt to select an arbitrary connector type using a string variable lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel lt port_no gt Port numbers of the analyzer Note If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection lt port_no gt PORTs ALL then a change of a connector type is valid for all ports The gender of the connectors can still be different Parameters Connector type and gender of the connectors omitted for query UFEMALE1 and UMALE1 denote the user defined connector type UserConn1 UFEMALE2 and UMALE2 denote the user defined connector type UserConn2 The user defined connector types must be defined before being addressed by SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection lt port_no gt Command Reference RST value SCPI Command Types Example SENSe N5SOFEMALE for all ports Device specific command or query RST CORR COLL CONN1 N75MALE CONN4 Change the connector type at port 1 from NS5OFEMALE to N75MALE The connector type at the other ports is also changed to N75 however the gender female is maintained CORR
168. 1 wait until the end of the sweep lt Continue program sequence gt Programming Examples Basic Tasks 2 Start single sweep use OPC If OPC follows INI Tiate lt Ch gt IMMediate it places a 1 into the output queue when the sweep is terminated An appropriate condition in the remote control program must cause the controller to wait until OPC returns one The controller is stopped from the moment when the condition is set INITiate1 IMMediate OPC Start single sweep in channel no 1 indicate the end of the sweep by a 1 in the output queue So far the controller may still send messages to other devices on the GPIB bus lt Condition OPC 1 gt Stop the controller until OPC returns one program syntax depends on your programming environment lt Continue program sequence gt A 3 Start single sweep use OPC lf OPC follows INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate it sets the OPC bit in the ESR after the sweep is terminated This event can be polled or used to trigger a service request of the analyzer The advantage of OPC synchronization is that both the controller and the analyzer can continue processing commands while the sweep is in progress SRE 32 Enable a service request for the ESR ESE 1 Set event enable bit for operation complete bit INITiate1 IMMediate OPC Start single sweep in channel no 1 set the OPC bit in the ESR after the sweep is term
169. 1 5 8 3 1 6 3 1 6 1 3 1 6 2 3 1 6 3 3 1 6 4 3 1 7 3 1 7 1 L System Overview Basic Concepts SSES OVC VICW eege 57 Basic Concepts E 57 Global RESONI CO iarr eE 58 UD e ANIE E I EA A O ENEE S E AIE EAE E O EEE A 58 Traces Channels and Diagram Areas 58 TAC SN a CC 59 Channel SENINGS sarisini paea EEE REEE AAEE A o TAREE 60 Pa ale 60 Navigation TOOls Olhe EE 62 ISU IS E 62 WOR en sascsdssnrcscccebiabidssduasasdsanatagsiaaotencibeabadybduasaddenbavaavcibiabidsiduauaddstbasavetuaoteneibias 63 OUI EE 64 Front Panel Key Ball csciiewnsiananesianessaicnsnansusntnidensaenethisdnendasausunaninestaidaunssuertetmantacanasanstnnsentt 65 S B a e E E nates 66 Display Elements in the Diagram Arez 66 L A E N E A E PE E E E RTT 67 IR 67 Pace e 68 Trace List ANd Trace Gettngs 69 WE act es rcs etc tc ce se ci nth do cele tee pide E E seen 70 Wl gl te Te WEE 71 Channel SUNS eege 72 Comtex ICTS eenn E R 73 Reie 74 Immediate vs Confirmed Settings ccccccccccccccccessseeeceeeeeeeaeeseceeeeesseeeeseeeeeeeessaeaaeees 74 On Screen K yboard siseseid eaii a E EE aaaea 75 Paste Marker et 75 Nomen Eny RTE 76 Display Formats and Diagram Types cccccsseeccccssseeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseseeessaeeeessaeeeeesaeees 76 Cate Sia DIAG AIS semirar A A 77 System Overview Basic Concepts 3 1 7 2 Conversion of Complex into Real Quantities eee cccccccceseeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeaeees 78 31 3 a el Ree EE 78 Sd OUND
170. 11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 DELete Release the assignment between trace no 9 and window no 2 The trace can still be referenced with its trace name Ch4Tr7 Command Reference DISPlay DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt trace_name gt Assigns an existing trace CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_Name gt to a diagram area using the lt WndTr gt suffix and displays the trace com O A trace can be assigned to a diagram only once If a attempt is made to assign the same trace a second time e g by typing DISP WIND2 TRAC8 FEED CH4TR1 after executing the program example below an error message 114 Header suffix out of range is generated You can open the trace manager DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute Trace Manager to obtain an overview of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area lt Wnd gt lt trace_name gt String parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example CALCA PAR E Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measur
171. 11 S12 If nothing is specified the first trace in the specified file is imported Confirmed no query Assume that the current setup contains a trace named Irol UMEM OTOR TRACT IR IL vy E Aa o ea a a eA a e a a Store the current trace data of Trol to a trace file UMEM COAD IN IL C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Traces Trcl sip Load the previously created trace file and create a memory trace assigned to Trci CALC PAR DER SGR 1 2 Create four traces to measure the two port S parameters S41 Dun Da Das The traces are not displayed UMEM STOR TRACT IIRC IL WG Eeer Store the four S parameter traces to a two port Command Reference MMEMory Touchstone file UMEM LOAD TRAC eR Ges C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Traces Trecl s2p Load the previously created Touchstone file and overwrite the previously generated memory trace assigned to Irol with the Si trace MMEMory MD Rectory lt directory_name gt Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in an existing directory lt directory_name gt String parameter to specify the new directory Either the full path ora subdirectory for the current directory See MMEMory CDIRectory RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example MMEM MDIR C Documents and Settings New_Directory Create the specified directory The parent directory C Documents and Settings must have been created before MMEM MDTR C
172. 2 FORMat BORDer NORMal GWAboed 372 FORMat DATA ASCii REAL TL Aengib 373 FORMat DEXPort SOURce FDATa SDATa MDATa nninnnnnnnnnnoonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssssnsssnrerrrnnnrnnnna 373 JI 375 UTP E 375 INITiate lt Ch gt CONTINUOUS Boolean nn 375 Tiere ERT SGI ae E 375 JS E 376 IT io ses nsec se rnc ie scsi nse eisai ars see wee ee see ee innit eels tose eee see eee see 376 INPut lt port_no gt ATTenuation mumernc va lue 3 6 BINS UIT E 377 Ja Do E 377 INS Trament GS ECT E E 377 INSTrument PORT COUNG nre ereeeeeeee 377 INSTrument SELect CHANNEL CHANNEL2 CHANNELS CHANNEL4 A 377 OS Ale e 378 MEMO ebe 378 PTE ele GAY TIO e KEE 378 MEMory DEFine lt SeCtUD NAME gt EE 378 MEMory DELete NAME lt file name ccccccsseeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeesaaeeessaeeeessegeesenaags 379 MEMory SELect lt S tup name 379 AMIS d OY ct eee ees ee oe ee eee eee E AE EEE 380 MIME MO oases ts corctee satse uence ene satso su cid omnes E E E E 380 MMEMory AKAL FACTory CONVersion lt direCtOry name 380 MMEMory CATalog lt directory name 380 MMEMory CATalog ALL lt directory name 381 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation MMEMory CDIRectory lt directory name 382 MMEMory COPY lt file_source gt lt file_ GEStINATIOND 0 cee ccc cc eeccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseaeeeesaees 382 MMEMory DATA lt file_ name data 382 MMEMory DELete lt 1 NAMC gt wsiissincnii
173. 3 4 are intended for a complete set of lt n gt port S parameters Data export fails if the active channel does not contain the full set of lt n gt traces Use the ASCII csv format if you want to do one of the following e Import the created file into a soreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel e Export an arbitrary number of traces multiple traces with the same parameter or memory traces e Use export options Use a the Matlab dat format if you want to import and process the trace data in Matlab For more information see Trace File Formats Remote control MMEMory STORe TRACe lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt UNFormatted GUI Reference Trace Menu Export Formatted Data Swen Tes CI OR Pr Name Size Type Ea TEST Complex Ce 14 KB COM File Ea TEST Format CS 15KB CN File File name TEST Tomat cew sE el Sae Save as type ASCII Files csv y Oukput Format Lin Mag Phase w Contents Active Trace 4sk to Overwrite Decimal Separator Point Trace File Formats Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format The analyzer provides two classes of trace files e Touchstone s lt n gt p files e ASCII csv files e Matlab dat files are ASCII files which can be imported and processed in Matlab The trace file formats complement each other see Selecting an appropriate file format Touchstone files All Touchstone files contain a header a comment section and the ac
174. 3 4 RST DISPlay WINDow2 STATe ON DISPlay WINDow3 STATe ON DISPlay WINDow4 STATe ON W Assign the reflection parameter S11 to the default trace CALCulate1 PARameter MEASure Trei S11 Assign the remaining S parameters to new traces Trc2 Trc3 Tr4 select the Smith chart format for the reflection parameters CALCulate1 FORMat SMITh Smith chart for the active trace Trcl CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc2 S21 CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Irch S12 Programming Examples Basic Tasks CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc4 S22 CALCulate1 FORMat SMITh Smith chart for the active trace Trc4 referenced by the channel number Display the new traces in diagram areas no 2 to 4 DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe2 FEED Trc2 DISPlay WINDow3 TRACe3 FEED Trc3 DISPlay WINDow4 TRACe4 FEED Trc4 Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE lt gt Nwa Set1 S EEGEN Display On Off Trei BE Smith Geri LU SE Tre EI op Mag 100B Bernd Go to Local Display On Off T Chi Start 300 kPwr 0 dBm Trea ll dB Mag 1094B6 Ref0 dB Ke stop 8 GHz CAT Start 300 kRPwr 0 dom stop 6 GHz ARa REMOTE 2 1 Ch Start 300 ktPwr 0 dBm Frequency lock Failure For Details press INFO Check the result in the trace manager The trace manager gives an overview of the current channel trace configuration DISPlay MENU K
175. A semicolon is also inserted before the end of each line The stimulus values are arranged in ascending order Shift Response Value Modifies all points of the active trace by means of an added and or a multiplied complex constant The constant complex values are entered in the four input fields of the Shift Response Value dialog shift Response Value x Magnitude oa E Real o S Phase o sd Imag Fal Magnitude dB ee OR Trace 10 20 e 1 amp 0 Real j I The units of the constants are adjusted to the format of the active trace Setting all values to zero Clear All Values restores the original trace n of the constants The trace points are modified according to the formula displayed in the lower part of the dialog Ma Mie M e e eet eel ie lt Feal j lt Imas The formula and the different constants are adjusted to the different display formats of a trace e The Magnitude factor shifts a dB Mag trace in vertical direction leaving the phase of a complex parameter unchanged e The Phase factor rotates a trace that is displayed in a polar diagram around the origin leaving the magnitude unchanged e The Real added constant shifts a real trace in vertical direction leaving the imaginary part unchanged e The Imaginary added constant shifts a imaginary trace in vertical direction leaving the real part unchanged GUI Reference Trace Menu Shifting the trace by means of constant values
176. A comparison of the Smith chart the inverted Smith chart and the polar diagram reveals many similarities between the two representations In fact the shape of a trace does not change at all if the display format is switched from Polar to Smith or Inverted Smith the analyzer simply replaces the underlying grid and the default marker format Smith chart construction In a Smith chart the impedance plane is reshaped so that the area with positive resistance is mapped into a unit circle The basic properties of the Smith chart follow from this construction The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero reactance real impedance The center of the diagram represents Z Z 1 which is the reference impedance of the system zero reflection At the left and right intersection points between the horizontal axis and the outer circle the impedance is zero short and infinity open The outer circle corresponds to zero resistance purely imaginary impedance Points outside the outer circle indicate an active component The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to positive inductive and negative capacitive reactive components of the impedance respectively 3 1 7 5 System Overview Basic Concepts Example Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart H the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient T e g S41 S22 then the unit Smith chart can be used to read the normalized impedance of the D
177. ALL HCOPy ITEM HCOPy PAGE HCOPy ORIlentation HCOPy WINDow HCOPY IMMediate Recent File Is a placeholder which is replaced by a list of the last 4 setups stored in the current or in previous sessions Clicking an item in the list opens the corresponding setup d Use the setup list in the Window menu to switch between different open setups GUI Reference Trace Menu Remote control MEMory CAT returns a list of the loaded files Exit Ends the analyzer session The analyzer prompts you to save documents with unsaved changes This command is equivalent to the Close command on the application Control menu Trace Menu The Trace menu provides all trace settings and the functions to select modify and store different traces In addition the menu provides the marker search and limit check functions Traces A trace is a set of data points that can be displayed together in a diagram area The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used in order to obtain traces from the collected data They can be divided into several main groups e Selection of the measured quantity S parameters wave quantities ratios impedances e Conversion into the appropriate display format and selection of the diagram type e Scaling of the diagram and selection of the traces associated to the same channel e Readout and search of particular values on the trace by means of markers e Limit check The trace settings co
178. B RST value 0 dB SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency This subsystem sets frequency related parameters especially the measurement and display ranges for the different sweep types The frequency ranges for the different instrument models are listed below Start Stop 10 Hz to 3 GHz 10 Hz to 6 GHz Center gt 10 Hz to lt 3 GHz gt 10 Hz to lt 6 GHz Span 10 Hz to 2 99999999 GHz 10 Hz to 5 99999999 GHz Note For a frequency sweep the range can be defined alternatively by a combination of Start Stop frequencies or a Center frequency and Span SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency CENTer lt center_frequency gt Defines the center of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep lt Ch gt Channel number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 lt center_frequency gt Center frequency of the sweep Range def unit Depending on the instrument model Hz The increment parameters UP or DOWN is 0 1 KHz RST value Center of the analyzer s maximum frequency range fun fmax 2 SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example FUNC XFR POW RAT B1 A2 Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1 A2 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 PEO CENTR IOOMNHAZ Set center frequency to 100 MHZ EREDO SPANT 0000 Command Reference SENSe Set frequency span to 50 kHz O The measurement ra
179. CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine uses a complete parameter list with compatible names lt Ch gt Channel number lt Ch gt may be used to reference a previously defined channel If lt Ch gt does not exist it is generated with default channel settings lt String gt Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in the Trace Manager description S11 S12 S21 Measurement parameter S22 RST value SCPI Device specific no query CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter CATalog returns a list Command of all defined traces Types Example CALC4 PAR DEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr7 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND STAT ON Create diagram area no 1 DISP WIND TRAC FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 1 CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DELete lt string gt Deletes a trace with a specified trace name and channel lt Ch gt Channel number Command Reference CALCulate lt string gt Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in the Trace Manager description RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 CALC4 PAR CAT Query the traces assigned to channel A If Ch4Tr7 is the only trace assigned to channel 4 the response is CH41TR1 11 CALC4 PAR DEL CH4
180. CAM GE 79 Slate TAVEMER Smith CHAR cap eesissensconnts rons sdnnieentonpecdaebenoi se AEE naa TRE RARER ERNER KARER EAE REDRA TEDRE 81 3 1 7 6 Measured Quantities and Display Formats cccccccccssssssssessececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeesseseeeeees 84 3 2 Measured Re TT TE 85 32l EE eegene 85 3 2 2 IMpedance Parameters nnnnn01nnneonennnensrnrnrernntrrosrnrrrnrnrrrensrnrrrrnnrrrrsrnnrrensenrrrenenne 86 321 CORVEMEC Blue Elte 86 3 2 3 Admittance ee Et 87 3291 COMME MOG lant ner 87 3 3 Calibration e TEE 89 3 3 1 Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits ccccccccccccccssssssssseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaes 90 3 3 1 1 Calibration Types 0 00 cccccccccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeesseeaeaseeeeeeessseeeaeeseeeeesssaangeses 90 3 1 System Overview Basic Concepts System Overview The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer s capabilities and their use This includes a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize process and display measurement data of the screen contents possible measured quantities and calibration methods For a systematic explanation of all menus functions and parameters and background information refer to the reference description on the graphical user interface GUI Reference in the online help system Basic Concepts The analyzer provides a variety of functions to perform a particular measurement and to customize and op
181. CPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example See SYSTem PRESet SYSTem PRESet USER STATe lt Boolean gt Selects a factory preset or a user defined preset O The user defined preset can be initiated using System Preset manual control or MMEMory LOAD STATe RST and SYSTem PRESet always initiate a factory preset lt Boolean gt OFF User defined preset switched off factory preset is used ON User defined preset switched on RST value RST does not affect the preset state setting SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SYST PRES USER ON Enable a user defined preset SYST PRES USER NAME C Rohde amp Schwarz Nwa RecallSets Setup_2 nwa Select a setup file for the user defined preset Press System Preset manual control or use MMEM LOAD STAT e C Rohde amp Schwarz Nwa RecallSets Setup_2 nwa Carry out the use defined preset SYSTem PRESet USER NAME lt Setup _file gt Specifies the name of a setup file nwa to be used for a user defined preset lt Setup_file gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the setup file to be loaded The default extension manual control for setup files is nwa although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the default directory subdirectory RecallSets RST value RST does not affect the preset settings SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Exampl
182. Culate lt Chn gt MATH STATe ON Math Data Mem Activates the mathematical mode where the last generated memory trace is subtracted from the active data trace The subtraction is calculated on a point to point basis Each measurement point of the memory trace is subtracted from the corresponding measurement point of the active trace The result of the subtraction is a mathematical trace and replaces the active data trace in the diagram area The mathematical trace is updated as the measurement goes on and the analyzer provides new active trace data This function is disabled unless a memory trace is coupled to the active data trace Trace coupling ensures that the two traces have the same number of points and that the mathematical trace Data Mem is well defined Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession SDEFine lt string gt CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH STATe ON Show Data Displays or hides the active data trace in the diagram area If the mathematical option Math Data Mem or Math Data Mem is active then the active mathematical trace is displayed or hidden Remote control No command display configuration only Show Mem Displays or hides the active memory trace in the diagram area or the memory trace associated with the active data trace If no memory trace is associated with the active data trace Show Mem is disabled Remote control No command display configuration only Traces The Traces submenu provides fu
183. Cute MINimum CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Peak Search gt Sets the active marker to the next peak with higher stimulus value If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 1 created to indicate the search result The peak criteria are defined via Define Peak Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute RPEak CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult lt Peak Search Sets the active marker to the next peak with lower stimulus value If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 1 created to indicate the search result The peak criteria are defined via Define Peak Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute LPEak CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Target Opens a submenu to search for a specific value on the trace Trace Trace gt Marker gt Marker Search Max Search Marker V Max Search Min Search Meas Next Peak Peak Search gt Format Rat Peak Search Scale V eeh Target Search Lines d EES Bandfilter d Target Search gt Center Marker l lt Target Search Marker Tracking Ref Value Marker Max Marker Min Marker Def Value Def Peak Search Range Search Range zero Delay at Marker e Target Search activates the search for the target value e Target Search gt activates the search for the target value to the right of the active marker e lt Target Sea
184. D string can be changed or reset by using the SETUP key Show Error Messages activates a information popup box tooltip to be displayed whenever the parser encounters an remote control command error The tooltip appears at the bottom of the remote or manual screen it is not displayed for SCPI errors no 113 Undefined header Remote Error 22 Data out of range sFREQ STAR 1 The tooltip is to provide information that can be useful for program development and optimization it does not necessarily indicate that a remote control script is faulty or non executable Remote SYSTem SOUNd ALARm STATe control SYSTem SOUNd STATus STATe for Messages and Sounds Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AC Quire RSAVe DEFault control for Keep Measurement Data Remote SYSTem PRESet SCOPe SINGle ALL control for preset Remote CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA control OUTPut lt Ch gt UPORi VALue for channel GUI Reference Help Menu bits Remote FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped control SYSTem ERRor DISPlay for GPIB Integrated Window Restores the window to normal size if checked If Integrated Window is unchecked the window is displayed in full screen mode This function is intended for the use with Remote Desktop It is provided in the Network Analyzer mode only Remote control No command display configuration only External Tools Opens a submenu with various demo setups Demo vbs Shows
185. EStionable register are defined as follows Integrity Register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable INTegrity register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 Limit Register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 lt 1 2 gt The STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt registers indicate the result of the limit check They can be queried using the commands STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt CONDition or STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt EVENt STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 is also the summary register of the lower level STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 register The bits in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 register are defined as follows Bit Meaning LIMit2 Register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 Failed Limit Check for Trace no 1 This bit is set if any point on trace no 1 fails the limit check Failed Limit Check for Trace no 14 This bit is set if any point on trace no 14 fails the limit check Numbering of traces The traces numbers 1 to 16 are assigned as follows Traces assigned to channels with smaller channel numbers have smaller trace numbers Within a channel the order of traces reflects their creation
186. EY EXECute Trace Manager Programming Examples Basic Tasks Trace Manager Meas Type Channel Area S11 DAT Chil e S21 DAT chi e e S12 DAT chi De DAAT chi e Add Delete Coupling Sort Table Several Traces with Different Channel Settings Programming task Create three channels with 3 1 and 2 traces respectively and display the traces in two diagram areas CALC1 Tro3 CALC Tred CALC3 Tres CALCS Tre Orcareci OrcaLlc OrcaLecs active trace active trace active trace Diag Area 2 DISP WIHD1 DISP WIHD Diag Area 1 Important remote control features for this program example The following command sequence illustrates the structure of the remote commands discussed in section Basic Remote Control Concepts In particular it shows that Channels are always referenced by a channel suffix Traces are referenced by trace names The active trace of a channel is often referenced by the channel suffix Programming Examples Basic Tasks Diagram areas are referenced by a window suffix lt Wnd gt An additional suffix lt WndTr gt in the DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt commands numbers the different traces in a diagram area The analyzer provides several commands allowing a smooth transition between remote and manual control A 1 Create all channels and traces Reset the instrument creating
187. En KESO EA CNTR TE EE OSEE ENEE 426 IGENGe Ch FUNG non 426 SENSE lt Ch r gt JROSCIAtOr cccceeeeeccceecccceesseececeececcceseeeceesenccesseneeeensseccesseseeeeeceseceseeseeesasaees 427 ISENSS SCS AOS C TEE asernes geeiert geeiert 427 ISENSe lt GCh gt SEGMEN ccccccccceeseeseceeeccccceneeeceescecessseaeeeeececccesseeeeeeecesccseseeeeesescceseeseeeeeseeases 428 IV VENGA E de EE 428 SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution lt numeric_Value gt cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 429 SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution CONTrol lt Booleans ccccseeeeeeeeeee es 429 SENSe lt Ch gt JSEGMent CLE Ab cece ccccccccssseeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeseseeaseeeeeeeeesaasaeeeeeeeeesaaas 430 SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt COUNt AAA 430 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DEFine lt Start gt lt Stop gt lt Points gt lt Power gt lt Point Delay gt lt Unused gt lt Meas Bandwidth Oe 431 DEN es Ge S VV BCD E 441 DEN E O WEG E 441 Ee 446 i EE 446 SOURce lt Ch gt POWer lt Pt gt LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude lt numeric_value gt naaannnnnnnaeennn 446 HENN CC 447 STA KEE 447 SAATUS E 447 STATus QUEStionable CONDItION 0cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesees 447 SAAR e Tee GV CIE 447 STATUS OUE Sion DE EVEN KEE 448 GIATusO
188. Eval Range opens a dialog to define the range for the statistical and phase evaluation and for the compression point measurement e Compression Point starts the x dB compression point evaluation e Define Compression Value sets the compression level x dB Statistical Evaluation The Min Max Pk Pk Mean Std Dev and RMS commands in the Trace Statistics submenu display or hide the maximum Max minimum Min the peak to peak value Pk Pk arithmetic mean value Mean the standard deviation Std Dev and the RMS value of all response values of the trace in the selected evaluation range Eval Range Mim EELER i May 123 3545 Pk FPk 299 0299 Mean O 67665 Ge 25 6680 RMS 16 3608 D petition of statistical quantities The statistical quantities are calculated from all response values in the selected evaluation range Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x and n corresponding response values y measurement points GUI Reference Trace Menu Mean is the arithmetic mean value of all response values 1 H Mean y M e Std Deviation is the standard deviation of all response values e Max and Min are the largest and the smallest of all response values yi e RMS is the root mean square effective value of all response values e P Pis the peak to peak value and is equal to the difference Max Min The definitions given above appl
189. I commands implemented by the analyzer Special Terms and Notation This section explains the meaning of special syntax elements used in the SCPI command reference sections A general description of the SCPI command syntax can be found in section SCPI Command Structure and Syntax in Chapter Remote Control coc Compatibility with ZVR and other instruments The SCPI command set for the R amp S ZVL vector network analyzer has been designed for compatibility with older R amp S network analyzers of the ZVR type A special class of commands marked with the symbol Z2 R has been implemented primarily for compatibility reasons Use these commands if you want to maintain compatibility with ZVR analyzers If you want to make full use of the ZVL features and don t need ZVR compatibility you should use the generalized R amp S ZVL specific commands A link to a generalized command is provided in the description of each ZVA specific command Similar considerations also hold for other commands that have been implemented for compatibility reasons Information in the command tables All commands are described according to the same scheme The following information is provided 1 Complete command syntax and parameter list 2 Description of the command and its relationship with other commands 3 List and description of the parameters with their numerical ranges default values and default units 4 SCPI conformance information supported command
190. IMENSIONES UNIT MUNIT UUNIT NUNIT PUNIT FUNIT FORMat FORMat This subsystem sets a data format for transferring numeric and array information from and to the analyzer FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped Controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped byte order Parameters SWAPped The least significant bit is transferred first little endian NORMal The most significant bit is transferred first big endian RST value SWAPpped if the GPIB Language is set to PNA or HP xxxx then the order is NORMal SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example FORM BORD NORM Change the bit order to normal mode Command Reference FORMat FORMat DATA ASCii REAL lt length gt Selects the format for numeric data transferred to and from the analyzer O The format setting is only valid for commands and queries whose description states that the response is formatted as described by FORMat DATA In particular it affects trace data transferred by means of the commands in the TRACe system ASCII Numeric data is transferred as ASCII bytes The numbers are separated by commas as specified in IEEE 488 2 REAL Data is transferred in a definite length block as IEEE floating point numbers of the specified lt length gt See block data format If binary data is transferred to the analyzer the receive terminator should be set to EOI SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF
191. IRIGO EE 501 RSDLELIITO E 501 RSDLLIIW t cece cecececceceeeeceeeeceeeesesseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeas 501 Pio DLL SWAB eer xoenasassseateieandecensaschseaswsdeunsdeadseuceansaad 501 SR Belo hs 3 Renee eee earner eee nee oe eee ee 501 PRS DLL WAITS 0G EE 501 RSIB GOSS Sic ereeschen 253 RSIB interface TIunchons nne 501 SVS lA ea RE 158 EEN 107 ho Of IER 345 Scaling el Ee en a pcastaciaintcvtuatmidaianrenteinteddimbebimbaiueanentinndne 51 Deel lee edlee 158 SCPI command structure ananaannnnnnnnennenennnnnnnnnnneennneeenn 260 SCGPL COMMANOS anaa 260 SCPI compatibility sarasini aana 253 SCPI Status Register RODS Eeer 272 SCPI Status Register nenenenenenenenn nnana rnrn rnrn nananana nnn 272 SCENO AVET saurana EE E N 12 DO D 137 314 Seach RANGE srera 314 Segmented Freoguency 96 217 221 228 Selectivity Define Segments AAA 221 Service Request Enable snssnnnenennnenenn nnn nn rnnr rnnr 272 SO E r E EA NEEN 37 El aana E 12 POCOO W EE 29 le EE 227 Single Sweep aeacesccvannisedtaevnnmetaeauntinobavencebuteniavertnen 217 228 TE P AEEA E E ETEA 105 SOCKet miertace onran sien iraani nanni 253 EE 441 Source ENEE SE 185 218 le EE 184 423 S parameters alte EE 60 MEANING eebe eege 85 158 PG Din e VE 158 PRPS OU a 158 S Params VOM ee eetegeeggeeEugEegeeg dees eeeEee eegen 212 Ee 2 2 Ba r E E ceded 272 496 SADY et 162 Standby E 16 SE 16 Start Define Segments ssessesesrer
192. KIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa Restrict Port Assignment Opens a dialog to define whether the standard can be connected to any port of the analyzer or to just one port for one port standards or a pair of ports for two port standards Restrict Port Assignment EN Standard can be connected to Port 1 and Pork P GUI Reference Channel Menu The port assignment is displayed in the Add or View Modify Calibration kit dialogs Port assignment and gender The standards are handled differently depending on their port assignment e lf the port assignment is not restricted the gender belongs to the definition of polarized standards When the connector type and calibration kit is selected in the calibration wizard the analyzer checks whether the kit contains the necessary standard types and whether the standards have the right gender e Standards with restricted port assignment are assumed to have the right gender the one required for this port In the View Modify Standard dialog the Gender input field is disabled In the calibration wizard the analyzer checks whether the kit contains the necessary standard types for the required ports Instead of the gender the port assignment is stored in the calibration kit file This approach simplifies the definition of standards and helps to avoid inconsistencies Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt std_type g
193. LIMit lt 1 2 gt ENABle Sets the enable mask which allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit bit 10 of the QUEStionable register for the LIMit1 register bit O of the LIMit1 register for the LIMit2 register lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST value see also Reset Values of the status reporting system SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example STAT QUES LIM2 ENAB 6 Set bits no 1 and 2 of the QUEStionable LIMit2 ENABle register STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt EVENt Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt register Reading an EVENt register clears it RST value SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example STAT QUES LIM1 Query the EVENt part of the QUEStionable LIMit1 register to check whether an event has occurred since the last reading STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt NTRansition Sets the negative transition filter Setting a bit causes a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the Command Reference STATus associated condition register to cause a 1 to be written in the associated bit of the corresponding event register lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST value
194. Lower band edge Upper band edge Depending on the measurement parameter units depending on the sweep type and the marker format see CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat Device specific query only CALC MARK FUNC BWID MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search CALC MARK FUNC EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace Create markers 1 to 4 CALC MARK SEAR BFIL RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area CALC MARK BWID 6 Select a 6 dB bandwidth for the bandstop CALC MARK BWID Query the results of the bandfilter search An error message is generated if Command Reference CALCulate the bandfilter search fails so that no valid results are available CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt COUPled STATe lt Boolean gt Couples the markers of all traces in the active setup to the markers of trace no lt Chn gt provided that they have the same sweep type SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace The effects of marker coupling depend on the active trace number see Coupled Markers in the GUI Reference chapter lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This suffix is ignored because the command affects all markers lt Boolean gt ON OFF Enables or disables marker coupling RST value OFF SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example Suppose that the active setup c
195. MAP Lie name 392 MMEMory STORe CORRection lt Ch gt lt file name 392 MMEMory STORe LIMit lt trc_name gt file name 393 MMEMory STORe MARKer lt file_ name 393 MMEMory STORe SEGMent lt Ch gt lt file name 394 MMEMory STORe STATe lt numeric_value gt lt file name 394 MMEMory STORe TRACe lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt UNFormatted COMPlex LINPhase Reie 394 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation TU E 395 ERR Bc P eee ee ee nee eee 395 OUTPut lt Chn gt DPORt PORT1 PORT2 assnonnnnannnennnenoeennnesoernnneseenrnnssrenrnnnssenrnnsseenrnnsseenrnnesennn 395 PROGAM E 396 Ee 396 PROGram SELected EXECute lt file_ name gt commande 396 PROGram SELected NAME PROG csssesssacgensctyacsiienccedaceetactseuvintddteetasleneetadtnensidecdeeietesteezacuec cee 397 PROGram SELected RE 397 DEN Oa E 398 PENSE Ch AVER G en a E E E E E 398 PENGER VERIGE E 398 SENSe lt Chs gt JBANDwidth E 399 SENSesCh gt BANDWIAU D 399 SENSe lt Ch gt JCORREGCHION ccccccccsseeecceeeeccaeeseeecceeeeseaeeseseeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeessueaaseeeeeeeesseeaaeeeeeeeessaaas 400 PS EIN SE SCS CO RCC ION asa dazsconcvenge cacunsascccesstessaiecasececcasssanacaceuceddneacandtense caduasarataienenanddncansatvesse 400 PENDE GOP en ER EE 401 SENSe JCORRECtion CO et 407 n e ee e 423 EE EEN See eee ee ee ee 423 EE eee eee eee ee ee ee ee eee eee ee 424 PS EIS TSF ING UO ies suise sectexnnceceesasg anaga naa EA
196. MAP TRAC COL OFF DISP WIND2 STAT ON Select independent color schemes for new diagram areas Create a new diagram area no 2 CALC PAR SDEF TRC2 S11 DISP WIND2 TRAC2 FEED TRC2 Create a new trace named 7RC2 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 2 The new trace Is red like the first trace DISP CMAP TRAC COL ON DISP WIND3 STAT ON Continue the same color scheme in new diagram areas Create a new diagram area no 3 CALC PAR SDEF TRC3 S22 DISP WIND3 TRAC3 FEED TRC3 Create a new trace named TRC3 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 3 The new trace is not red DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute lt menu_key gt Executes the function of a key with a specified name and switches to the local screen O You can use this command to execute part of your measurement task manually see Combining Manual and Remote Control Menu keys that initiate events are executed immediately because no additional input is necessary However DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute can be used as well for manual entries in numeric entry bars dialogs or wizards Command Reference lt menu_key gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay Name of the key as shown in the analyzer s softkey bar case sensitive string variable may contain blanks but no dots If the name is not unique the complete menu path can be specified e g Trace Format Phase Menus submenus and menu function must be separa
197. MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATAS MDATAG MDATA7 MDATA8 Deletes one of the memory traces Mem lt n gt Trc lt m gt where n 1 8 Parameters Identifier for the memory trace see list of trace names Range def unit MDATA lt n gt where lt n gt 1 to 8 RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 TRAC COPY Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 TRACe COPY lt memory_trc gt lt data_trc gt Copies a data trace to a memory trace The trace to be copied can be specified by two alternative methods e As the active data trace of channels 1 to 4 CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA Ha Command Reference TRACe mathematical trace is active the associated data trace is copied e Asa trace with a name string variable The created memory trace can be specified as follows e Asthe memory trace named Mem lt n gt Trc lt m gt where n 1 8 and Trc lt m gt is the name of the copied data trace MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATA5 MDATA6 MDATA MDATA8 e Asamemory trace with an arbitrary name string vari
198. MDPHase Defines the output format for the complex value of marker lt Mk gt on trace no lt Chn gt Note The formats of the markers assigned to a trace are independent of each other and of the trace format settings see CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Parameters See list of parameters below RST value DEF This means the format of the trace no lt Chn gt MLOG after RST see CALCulLate lt Chn gt FORMat SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON CALC MARK FORM Create marker 1 assign it to the trace no 1 and query its format The analyzer returns the format of the active trace Assume that the marker result is given by the complex quantity z x jy The meaning of the parameters is as follows MLINear z sqrt x2 y2 MLOGarithmic Z sqrt x2 y2 AIR M upg dB Mag z 20 log z dB PHASe o z arctan Im z Re z POLar x y Real and Imag ZY R MM complex GDELay Group Delay d 6 z dw REAL IMAGinary SWR Standing Wave Ratio SWR 1 z 1 z LINPhase Lin Mag and Phase z arctan Im z Re z ZNR Mut nass LOGPhase dB Mag and Phase 20 log z dB arctan Im z Re z ZNR I wophase IMPedance R X L or C depending on sign X ADMittance G B
199. Mit RDOMain lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Keywords for the units of the stimulus values The selected unit must be compatible with the sweep type SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TYPE otherwise the limit line can not be displayed and no limit check is possible Range def unit The parameters form three groups e FLIN FLOG FSEG and FSINgle select frequency units default Hz for Command Reference CALCulate the limit line e TLIN and TLOG select time units default s e PLIN PLOG and PSINgle select power units default dBm RST value FLIN SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example SWE TYPE POW Select a power sweep CALC LIM CONT DOME LIN Delete all existing limit line segments and select level units for the limit line of the active trace CALC LIM CONT 20 DBM 10 DBM Define a limit line segment in the stimulus range between 20 dBm and 10 dBm CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol SHIFt lt numeric_value gt Shifts the limit line in horizontal direction lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Amount that the limit line is shifted Range def unit Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time Sweeps see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain RST value SCPI Command Device sp
200. Mkr 2 turns green The numeric suffixes lt E ement gt denote the following display elements Command Reference DISPlay Same Color for all Markers Horizontal Line Vertical Range Lines Diagram Title Limit Fail Trace Color O Limit Line Type Off Limit Line Type Upper NO Limit Line Type Lower GN Trace 1 D Trace 2 Trace 3 O Trace 4 Trace 5 CO Trace 6 O Trace 7 NO O Trace 8 NO Trace 9 NO NO Trace 10 AN GN Trace 11 NO N Trace 12 AA O1 Trace 13 NO O Trace 14 NO N Trace 15 K KS KS KS KS Ca KS KS KA N Command Reference DISPlay DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt TRACe COLor STATe lt Boolean gt Defines the trace color schemes in different diagram areas lt Element gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Numeric suffix not used in this command Implemented for compatibility with DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB OFF Independent color scheme in new diagram area Moved traces change their color ON Color scheme in new diagram area continues the previous color scheme Moved traces keep their color RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command Device specific command or query RST DISP CMAP13 RGB 1 0 0 Create diagram area no 1 with default trace showing the S parameter S24 and color the trace red DISP C
201. New_kit calkit MMEMory STORe CMAP lt file_name gt Stores a color scheme to a specified NWA color scheme file elle name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example String parameter to specify the name and directory of the color scheme file to be created If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory The default extension manual control for color scheme files is ColorScheme although other extensions are allowed Device specific no query pee MMEMOry LOAD CMAP MMEMory STORe CORRection lt Ch gt lt file_name gt Copies the correction data of channel lt Ch gt to the cal pool generating a new correction data file cal group The file has the extension calkit and is stored in the C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Data directory lt Ch gt elle name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number String parameter to specify the name of the created cal group file The directory path must not be specified the analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Data Device specific no query See MMEMory LOAD CORRection Command Reference MMEMory MMEMory STORe LIMit lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt Saves the limit lines associated to a specified trace to a limit line file Limit lines are created using the CALCulte lt Chn gt LIMit commands lt trc
202. OL MAX Restart max hold CALCulate SMOothing CALCulate lt Chn gt SMOothing This subsystem provides the settings for trace smoothing CALCulate lt Chn gt SMOothing APERture lt numeric_value gt Defines how many measu lt Chn gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example rement points are averaged to smooth the trace Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Smoothing aperture 0 05 to 100 A smoothing aperture of n means that the smoothing interval for each sweep point i with stimulus value x is equal to Xi span n 200 x span n 200 and that the result of i is replaced by the arithmetic mean value of all measurement points in this interval Device specific command or query RST CALC SMO ON Activate smoothing for the default trace CALC SMO APER 0 5 Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0 5 Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt SMOothing STATe lt Boolean gt Enables or disables smoothing for trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Smoothing on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics SMOothing APERture CALCulate STATistics CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics This subsystem evaluates and
203. ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used Command Reference lt lower_value gt Range def unit RST value lt trace_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay Value and unit for the lower diagram edge Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands Depending on the measured quantity The default lower edge for a dB Mag diagram is 80 dB Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored Confirmed with query CALO PARS ODER 6 EE Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y BOTT 40 TOP 10 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y BOTT 40 CH4TR1 TOP 10 CH4TR1 Scale the diagram between 40 dB and 10 dB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt numeric_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the value between two grid graticules value per division for the diagram area lt Wnd gt When a new PDIVision value is entered the current RLEVel is kept the same whi
204. ON SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example SYST SOUN ALAR OFF STAT OFF Switch alarm and status sounds off SYSTem SOUNd STATus STATe lt Boolean gt Switches status sounds on or off lt Boolean gt OFF Status sounds switched off ON Status sounds switched on RST value ON SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Command Reference SYSTem Example See SYSTem SOUNd ALARm STATe SYSTem USER DISPlay TITLe lt title gt Defines a title for the remote display lt title gt Title string variable RST value RST does not affect the title SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example SYST USER DISP TITL Remorce test running Define a title for the remote display SYSTem USER KEY lt ukey_no gt lt ukey_name gt Labels a user defined key in the remote display In the query form the command returns whether or not a user defined key was used lt ukey_no gt Number of the user key Range def unit 0 Delete all user keys and restore the default keys Go to Local Display Off 1 to 8 user key numbers RST value 0 lt ukey_name gt Label for user key no 1 to 8 string variable RST value empty string SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SVS U ERTE KEE Define a user key no 1 labeled S11 The user key is only labeled no functionality has been assigned yet SY Say SUSE RSE yi UNG
205. ORR DATA SCORR3 Query the dummy system error correction term The response is a 1 written as 1 0 for the real and imaginary part for each sweep point no attenuation and no phase shift between the analyzer and the calibration plane CORR DATA SCORR3 lt ASCII_data gt Replace the dummy system error correction term with your own correction data transferred in ASCII format SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired measurement results SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected stores them and applies them to the calibrated channel lt Ch gt To avoid incompatibilities older system error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal pool MMEMory STORe CORRection lt Ch gt lt file_ name gt lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel RST value SCPI Command Confirmed no query Types Example CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR COLL SEL SHOR 1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement Command Reference SENSe results of this standard CORR COLL SAVE SEL Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault Generates a set of default system error correction data fo
206. ORT 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 1 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected OPEN 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected SHORT 2 SENSe1 CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected MATCH 2 Apply calibration SENSe1 CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected Save load cal files Save calibration in calibration file pool in directory C Rohde amp Schwarz Nwa Calibration Data the file name in the commands must not contain the path MMEMORY STORE CORRection 1 0SM1 TOSM12 cal load cal file from calibration file pool MMEMORY LOAD CORRection 1 OSM1 TOSM12 cal Programming Examples Condensed Programming Examples Modeling a Max Hold Function The following example shows you how to emulate a max hold function Reset the analyzer RST DISPlay WINDow1 TITLe DATA Max Hold Function Emulation Create a trace with the last extremum as memory trace TRACe COPY LastExtr Trei Display this last extremum trace Because it s a memory trace it must be displayed in the same diagram as the mother trace DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED LastExtr gt CALCulate1 MATH SDEFine Max Data Mem CALCulate1 MATH STATe ON Single sweep mode INITIATE CONTINUOUS OFF Do a single sweep and update trace with the current extremum This is the last extremum for the next sweep INITIATE IMMEDIATE WA TRACe COPY MATH LastExtr
207. Ports in Table is active the connector types at all ports but not their gender are always adjusted to the current selection e Ref Imp shows the reference impedance for the selected connector e Calibration Kits provides a drop down list to select a calibration kit The list contains all calibration kits available for the selected connector type The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all GUI Reference Channel Menu physical ports If a calibration kit is changed the analyzer automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type Completness The selected calibration kit must contain all standards needed for the active calibration type If it doesn t the analyzer displays an error message Waveguide cutoff If a user defined waveguide connector is assigned to one of the calibrated ports then the start frequency of the active channel must be above the waveguide cutoff Otherwise the analyzer displays an error message Import Kit opens the Import Calibration Kit dialog to load and if desired activate a cal kit file Next gt opens the second dialog of the wizard to continue the calibration procedure O lf the calibrated channel has already been assigned to a cal group the correction data overwrites the cal group data so the new calibration will affect all channels assigned to the cal group The network analyzer generates a notice message New calibratio
208. Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 _ Position 6 Position 7 The sliding match is a one port standard consisting of an air line with a movable low reflection load element sliding load This standard is used because a no perfect match is available over a wide frequency range However a series of measurements at a given frequency with equal mismatch and varying phase yields reflection factors that are located on a circle in the Smith chart The center of this circle corresponds to perfect match The network analyzer determines and further corrects this match point following l K sa s circle fitting algorithm To obtain the reflection coefficient for a perfectly matched calibration standard the sliding load must be measured at least at 3 positions which should be unequally spaced to avoid overlapping data points Increasing the number of positions to 4 6 can improve the accuracy Moreover it is recommended to use the predefined load positions of the standard The calibration is valid Apply is available if either the match or three positions of the sliding match have been measured However it is often desirable to acquire calibration data from both standards The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner e The match results are used up to the lower edge of the specified frequency range of the sliding match Min Freq e The sliding match results are used for frequencies above the Min Freq In general the slidi
209. Quency IS Swept in equidistant steps over the frequency range In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a linear frequency axis Log frequency sweep The frequency is swept in equidistant steps on a logarithmic scale In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a logarithmic frequency axis Segmented frequency sweep The sweep range is composed of several continuous frequency ranges or single frequency points defined by means of the commands in the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt subsystem LiNear Device specific command or query FUNC XFR POW S12 Activate a frequency sweep and select the S parameter S12 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SWE TYPE LOG Change to sweep type Log Frequency Command Reference SOURce SOURce SOURce lt Ch gt POWer This subsystem controls the power of the internal signal source and provides output port settings Note The SOURce lt Ch gt POWer subsystem comprises port specific and general settings Port specific settings are valid for the port specified by the numeric suffix lt Pt gt POWER lt Pt gt General settings are valid for all test ports of the analyzer the port suffix is ignored Refer to the description of the individual commands for more information SOURce lt Ch gt POWer lt Pt gt LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude lt numeric_value gt Defines the power of the internal signal source channel power The setting is valid for all sweep type
210. R amp S ES B 496 IEC IEEE BUS Te Eege 496 interlace FUNCIONS EE 498 MONE TAC EE 498 Instrument e EE 499 NAT we 499 VXI 11 Interface Messages E 500 RSID MNtenace FUNCIONS cence cts ics arate dna T eE EE cada tute RA AE ETENE 501 Variables ibsta iberr ibentl EEN 501 OP Vi ee ETE orr E E S 502 Count variable e E 502 Overview of Interface Functions gengt Zegegte geesde Zeegengiegeeb deed Sege Ze geggek hee Gegeede Sege depr eege 502 Description of Interface FUNCTIONS cccccccceecccceeeeeseeeceeeeeseeeeecsaeeeseaeeeseaeeeseueeseaeessaeeesseeesaaseeees 503 Ro BI el WEE 503 Seil Bien 503 HW Interfaces Front Panel Connectors weil 503 Fe Wi EE 504 ES DNN oe i E 504 RS BDECEI ege eege 505 EE ee 505 PRS DL IDO ME 505 Sei BIR le 506 Eege 506 DS E 507 Fe lee aer scene ccc etc ess ee ces ete E enti inset east o ieee ce ween deeGeceesteeee 507 pce BIE leet Te 507 Ro DB BB so E 508 FT a EE 508 ROBLE aE EO E 508 RODLELSWaPE VIGS eege 509 HW Interfaces Front Panel Connectors 9 HW Interfaces This chapter provides a detailed description of the hardware interfaces and connectors of the instrument For a graphical overview of the front panel and rear panel connectors and their use refer to chapter Preparing for Use Front Panel Connectors Test Ports N connectors labelled PORT 1 and PORT 2 RF INPUT The test ports serve as outputs for the RF stimulus signal and as inputs for the measur
211. RACking GUI Reference Trace Menu Marker The functions in the Marker menu are used to position markers on a trace configure their properties and select the format of the numerical readout OO Markers are tools for selecting points on the trace and for numerical readout of measured data A marker is displayed with a symbol a triangle a crossbar or a line on the trace which may be a data trace or a memory trace At the same time the coordinates are displayed in a marker info field or in a table Each marker can be defined as a normal marker reference marker delta marker or discrete marker D prance types e A normal marker Mkr 1 Mkr 2 determines the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace Up to 10 different normal markers can be assigned to a trace e A reference marker Ref defines the reference value for all delta markers e A delta marker A indicates the coordinates relative to the reference marker e The stimulus value of a discrete marker always coincides with a sweep point A special set of markers Mk1 to Mkr4 is provided for bandfilter search mode The most common tasks to be performed with markers can be achieved using the Marker menu functions e Determine the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace In polar diagrams where no x axis is displayed markers can be used to retrieve the stimulus value of specific points e Determine the difference between two trace points or the rel
212. RL 345 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe Booleanm 345 DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt MARKer STATe lt Boolean gt cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeseaas 345 DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt 346 DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt TRACe COLor STAT lt Boolean gt cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeens 348 DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute menu key 349 DISPlay MENU KEY SELect L menu key 349 DISPlay WINDow lt Whd gt MAXiMiIZe Doolean 350 DISPlay WINDow lt Whid gt STAT lt BOOl ans ccccccssssccecceeeeeeeeeeeesssseseeesesessaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 350 DISPlay WINDow lt Whd gt TITLe DATA lt StrinQ gt cccccccccccccceceeceeeeeeseseesseeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeses 351 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe STATe lt BOOlean gt ceeeeeeeecee cece eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeees 351 DISPlay WINDow lt Whd gt TRACe lt Wnd Tr gt DELete o oo ccc ccccccccccceeeeeeeesesessneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 351 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt traCe name 352 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt X OFFSet lt numeric_valUe gt sssssssnnneesseennneenns 353 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y OFFSet lt Magnitude gt lt Phase gt lt Real gt LIMAN e E A E E E E E 353 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE lt trace_nam
213. RTERminator EOI to avoid inadvertent interruption of the data transfer lt length gt The optional lt length gt parameter is needed for REAL format only It defines the length of the floating point numbers in bits Valid values are 32 and 64 RST value ASCII The default length of REAL data is 32 bits single precision SCPI Confirmed command or query Command Types Example FORM REAL 32 Select real data format SYST COMM GPIB RTER EO Set the terminator to EOI During a calibration CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 Query a system error correction term The data is transferred in a definite length block which can be written to a file the analyzer displays the message lt no_of_bytes gt bytes binary data received FORMat DEXPort SOURce FDATa SDATa MDATa Defines the format for traces retrieved with the Z VR compatible command TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL O This command is not relevant for results read with the CALCulate DATA commands Parameters See list of parameters below Range def unit Depending on the measured parameter and format The unit is the default unit of the measured parameter see CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine Command Reference FORMat RST value SDATa SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See TRAGe DATA RESPonse ALL The following parameters are related to trace data see also Data Flow diagram FDATa Formatted trace data acco
214. Reporting System The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the analyzer Switching DCL SDC Device RST or Clear SYSTem PRESet Selected Device Clear Power On Status Clear Effect Clear STB ESR Clear SRE ESE Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUESTionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 Fill PTRansition parts yes yes with 1 Clear NTRansition parts es fys PO ves Clear command processing and input buffer 1 Every command being the first in a command line i e immediately following a lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR gt clears the output buffer Command Reference Special Terms and Notation L CONMMIANC ET sesane EAEE EEES 291 Special Terms and Notation ccceeeeeessesseeeeeeeeeceessseeeeeeeeeoeesseeeeeeeeeooeeseeeeeeeeogenssseeeeseseeoaseees 291 COMMON COMMANA S ce tates cise te ce es AEA E aA E A 293 CALC EE 294 O71 G78 2 ie sl EE 294 CALCulate lt Chn gt CLIMIts 0 0 ccccccccecccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeceeeeessseeeseeeeeessaaaaeeseeeeeseaeas 294 PES AL DATA eset snd ent E E uss assess EEE e eA S 295 CALCU IA DATA ee ee ee E ee er ee ere ee ee 295 Ee a DEIN case tense cee pete alae sea once ec sais anata E den soeu csaseenec E 297 CALCulate Chins RL CT 297 CA CGulatetOhMat 298 AEC Mate SC OA Aa s
215. SB port is 500 mA 1 1 10 PROBE POWER Connector for supply voltages of 15 V to 12 V and ground for active probes and preamplifiers A maximum current of 140 mA is available This connector is suitable as power supply for high impedance probes from Agilent Preparing for Use Rear Panel Tour 1 2 Rear Panel Tour This section gives an overview of the rear panel controls and connectors of the network analyzer alt PR ara p 1106 78 DC o e OVERVOLTAGE ON Ce d dot gt UNDERVOLTAGE LAN oi gege EXT REF 100 240 V 50 60 Hz x 100 120 V 50 400 Hz SVA n gt max 160 VA 3 y fi P LA 104198 af ER IEC 127 T3 15H 250V c us OC NO AUTO MDIX ee ess res 0 28 V me Log j sson NOISE SOURCE CON ocxo ti The following rear panel connectors require special attention K The fuse protected mains connector in the lower left corner is used to connect the analyzer to the AC power supply see Power on and oft k The DC power supply connector and the Battery Pack are alternatives for the AC power supply via the mains connector see DC Power Supply and Battery Ki LAN is used to connect the analyzer to a Local Area Network see Remote Operation in a LAN The remaining rear connectors are described in detail in the annex Hardware Interfaces in the online help system ka EXT TRIGGER GATE IN is an input for external TTL trigger signals EXT REF serves as an i
216. SOME E 162 Lear POI essa a 162 LOCAL MAK csa a E S 314 Local Miiran EEA 314 LOG Ge EE 96 441 Bel EE 175 UE Tele Ca 28 Marker ett UG 314 programming examples ssnesneseeeeeeeererr rre reereeee ren 58 egere EE 314 SWIC OM MEN 314 VE 150 Marker FUNG eee eee Ren Peer Ree ee E nite ea een ee 135 Mathematical trace cccccccssssseeeeceseeseseeeeseeneseeeeeeanes 113 Vd FCG EE 212 MIC oea E 314 E oun TE 105 MAXIMUM EE 263 Meds Dol V E 221 MEAS KEV crr ee ce 158 Meas Dancdhwdt 399 M as Delay ciciicicnvscisasetsnuennesaaynarrasedabsieasinveseagrranctsnenenayedenn 441 Measure S parameters cccececccecccecececececececeecececececececeeeeeeeeess 158 VE 158 Measurement Speed CUE ZUG E 97 Measurement Speed cccccccccccececececeeeeeceececeeeceeeeeeeeeeess 97 Memory WAGE enee eeneg Eee E 113 V OG E 212 NIE ege 314 alle 105 VT Von Uu o ERE EE scence OE NERE E EET T secon se 263 Modify Standard ccccccccccccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeentess 212 leie 314 Ve 105 BAKEN Ge 162 FU ee 162 NAN not a number 263 Navigation E 14 Navigation tools ecreen 62 Kl 496 KSE E 107 New Channel 230 Next Channel 230 NINF negative infinity cc cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 263 Kleer 202 Klee CC EE 158 VISITE 496 NT named ee 253 INT PONDS E 253 Kl dE 272 INT ASIN OO DE 272 Number of Ponts 217 225 228 441 NWA Eeler e DE 29 OOS ee 197 OPERattion register
217. SP WIND TRAC2 FEED MEM_PT20 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 TRACe COPY MATH lt memory_trc gt lt data_trc gt Copies a mathematical trace to a memory trace The trace to be copied can be specified by two alternative methods e As the active mathematical trace of channels 1 to 4 CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA Command Reference TRACe CH4DATA e Asa trace with a name string variable The created memory trace can be specified as follows e Asthe memory trace named Mem lt n gt Trc lt m gt where n 1 8 and Trc lt m gt is the name of the copied data trace MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATA5 MDATA6 MDATA MDATA8 e Asamemory trace with an arbitrary name string variable An existing memory trace with the same name is overwritten coc O To copy a data trace which is not modified by any mathematical operations use TRACe COPY lt memory_trc gt Name of the memory trace Range def unit lt memory_trace gt is either a string variable enclosed in single or double quotes or one of the following reserved names no string variables ZYR I MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATAS5 MDATAG MDATA7 MDATA8 only for memory traces Mem lt n gt Trce lt m gt where n 1 8 see list of trace names RST value lt data_trc gt Name of the data trace Range def unit lt data_trace gt is either a string variable enclosed in single or
218. STAT ON CALC LIM FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALCulate MARKer CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt This subsystem controls the marker functions The commands are device specific and beyond what is specified in the SCPI subsystem SOURce MARKer CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt AOFF Removes all markers from all traces of the active setup The removed markers remember their properties stimulus value format delta mode number when they are restored CALC lt Chn gt MARK lt Mk gt ON The marker properties are definitely lost if the associated trace is deleted lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK1 ON MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no 1 CALC MARK AOFF Remove both markers Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth lt x_dB_Bandwidth gt Sets the bandfilter level for a bandfilter search or returns the results The command is only available after a bandfilter search has been executed CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute BFILter see example below lt Chn gt lt Mk gt
219. Sale oul Assign the functionality S11 select S11 as a measured quantity for the active trace to the created user key EE The query returns 0 indicating that no user key has been pressed If you press the user softkey no 1 the response is 7 User S717 CALC PAR MEAS Trc1 The query returns S77 indicating that the measured quantity for trace Trc1 has been changed SIGS ES USI LOG Ne 0 Delete the user key and restore the default keys Command Reference TRACe SYSTem USER KEY FUNCtion lt ukey_no gt lt ukey_name gt Labels the functionality of a function key to a user defined key in the remote display d You can use this command to execute part of your measurement task manually see Combining Manual and Remote Control lt ukey_no gt Number of the user key Range def unit 1 to 8 user key numbers RST value the parameter is also needed in the query form lt ukey_name gt Name of a function key e g S11 Start etc string variable RST value empty string SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See SYST USER KEY SYSTem VERSion Returns the SCPI version number to which the analyzer complies The analyzer complies to the final SCPI version 1999 0 RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed query only Example SYST VERS Query the SCPI version The response is 1999 0 TRACe TRACe This subsystem handles active trace data and trac
220. Scheme although other extensions are allowed RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example MMEM LOAD CMAP C Rondes ele MNA Coloro emesi l est Coloro chene Load the previously created color scheme file Test ColorScheme from the default color scheme directory DISP CMAP13 RGB 1 0 0 DISP CMAP14 RGB 0 1 0 Color the first trace red the second trace green MMEM STOR CMAP EA Rondes Sochar Nie tColeonrschemeas loc Collonmsememea Store the data for the user defined cal kit Newkit and overwrite the cal kit file New_kit calkit MMEMory LOAD CORRection lt Ch gt lt file_name gt Applies a system error correction data set stored in the cal pool cal group file to channel no lt Ch gt lt Ch gt Channel number of an existing channel elle name gt String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be loaded Cal group files must have the extension cal The directory path must not be specified the analyzer always uses the default cal pool directory C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Data RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example MMEM STOR CORR 1 Calgroupl cal Copy the current correction data set of channel 1 to a cal Command Reference MMEMory group File Calgroupl cal CON CHAZ TATON UME OAD ees Apply the stored correction data to channel 2 MMEM IOP NEY CORNISH INS Kee Undo the previous action Resolve the lin
221. Se SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency SPAN lt span gt Defines the width of the measurement and display range for a frequency sweep lt Ch gt lt span gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Frequency span of the sweep Depending on the instrument model Hz The increment parameters UP or DOWN is 0 1 kHz Maximum frequency range of the analyzer fax fmn Confirmed command or query FUNC XFR POW RAT B1 A2 Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1 A2 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 PREO CENTA IOOMHZ Set center frequency to 100 MHZ RIO o PANE OOOO Set frequency span to 50 kHz leaving the center frequency unchanged Note The measurement range defined by means of the span and the current center frequency ISENSe lt Ch gt J FREQuency CENTer must not exceed the allowed frequency range of the analyzer If necessary the center frequency is adjusted to fun Soan 2 or fmx Span e2 SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STARt lt start_frequency gt Defines the start frequency for a frequency sweep which is equal to the left edge of a Cartesian diagram lt Ch gt lt start_frequency gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Start frequency of the sweep Depending on the instrument model Hz The increment parameters UP or DOWN is 0 1 kHz Minimum frequency of the analyzer 300 kHz Confir
222. Seg gt INSert SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep TIME SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWELI Point List Segment Import and Export The buttons on the right side below the table in the Define Segments dialog are used to retrieve the position of the defined sweep points import and export limit line data e Show Point List opens a list of all active sweep points and their channel settings Point List Segment Frequency Power Low Freq 3001 kHz 10 dEm 43 709 ms bes Low Freq 2 79925 MHz 10 dBm SRF 43 709 ms Low Freq 5 2985 MHz 10 dem Norm gt RF 43 709 ms Low Freg 7 79775 MHz 10 dBm RF 43 709 ms Lon Freq 10 297 MHz 10 dem Norm gt RF 43 709 ms Low Freg 12 79625 MHz 10 dBm SRF 43 709 ms Low Freq 15 2955 MHz 10 dBm SRF 43 709 ms Low Freg 17 79475 MHz 10 dBm SRF 43 709 ms Lon Freq 20 294 MHz 10 dem SRF 43 709 ms sm a I mi P dx wo OO Ohh Of oo Pa r J Points in inactive sweep segmenis i e segments that are not switched On in the segment table are not shown The table provides a check of the settings made and can not be edited e Import Segment List calls up an Open File dialog to load a sweep segment list from a sweep segment file Sweep segment files are ASCII files with the default extension seglist and a special file format e Export Segment List calls up a Save As dialog to store the current sweep segments to a sweep s
223. String parameters describing the different error terms depending on the current parameters calibration method see table below Each term contains one complex value real and imaginary part for each sweep point Range def The error terms consist of dimensionless complex numbers The parameters must be unit transferred in full length and have the following meaning DIRECTIVITY Directivity at port lt port1_no gt SRCMATCH Source match at port lt port1_no gt REFLTRACK Reflection tracking at port lt port1_no gt ISOLATION Isolation between port lt port1_no gt and lt port2_no gt LOADMATCH Load match at lt port2_no gt TRANSTRACK Transmission tracking between port lt port1_no gt and lt port2_no gt RST value The analyzer provides a default calibration corresponding to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors see SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault lt port _no gt Source port number lt port2_no gt Load port number If the error term is not related to the load port a dummy number can be used eg CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SELected DEFault The different calibration types of the analyzer provide the following error terms Calibration type Parameters in Available error terms depending SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect
224. T EET 184 programming examples esssssssssnerrrrerrereenerrrrrr renne 469 WEED crire 217 228 Pag EE 58 Channel susiana R TER 184 Ea EIE ENE E AAA EENET 217 RN te E 228 Ohannel Cal sirenerne a a 202 Channel Manager eessen aint 230 GUC MOON gaccc ncn sestccacsecesenacesningadaaetsstemnlasaiccacagee cecal 212 COS EN 105 Command COMMON EE 260 293 MEVICE SOSCING see n 260 stucture and SV MAX E 260 GONDHO asata E S 272 Continuous Gweenp 217 228 a ie fl DUG E 496 Control lines GPIB bus 496 COTE Rn TEE 105 Coupled Markers seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenesnnrsrsenesennnennnenen nee 314 Crosstalk c cccccccecccecececeeeceeeeeeeeeseueeeeaeeeeeeneeeeneeeees 217 228 Data bus GPIB seisonnan ewer fee eee ner eeeeeee 496 Data entry Eege 15 RE d EE 49 Data Flow S parameters eeegeeeetZeggegeda ANEN dEdeECeEEe 60 e TT 60 Bee 60 Data IOC SSS IG sisipan E 60 KR 113 TA Eeer 496 Ri 496 Kg Re 281 DEC OUDE essex sends sense terdaench 230 Seeerei 263 Define Gegments 221 428 Delete Channel 230 Delete Gegment snssssesnsnsreeseererrrrrrrrrererererrrrrrrrrreeees 221 Delta Mode ssiisacivcnssianscccanveesanenovsasrdaxwerneiaaverecanelanouneeacters 314 Diagram area programming examples ssssssssnsneneeeeseesrenrrnrrrreeeee 469 Diagram AN CA casi cdeicenteserepnovescexten eter nateesteansioneeew 58 66 Diagrams CCUG E 51 FANG EE 76 Dialogs general descrtpotion 74 BIEN 314 Ru SOU estates cee
225. TA Query the type the stimulus and response values of the created segment with a single command The response is 2 1000000 2000000 5 5 CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt AMPlitude STOP lt numeric_value gt Changes the stop response value i e the response value assigned to the stop stimulus value of a limit line segment A segment must be created first to enable this command e g CALC LIM DATA um O To define the response values of several limit line segments with a single command use CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA or CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Seg gt Segment number lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value Response value Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition dB The default response values of a segment that is created by defining its stimulus values only e g by means of CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA is 20 dB Command Reference CALCulate SCPI Command Device specific with query Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt AMPlitude STARt CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGMent lt Seg gt STiMulus STARt lt numeric_value gt Changes the start stimulus value i e the largest or smallest stimulus value of a limit line segment A segment must be created first to enable this command e g CALC LIM DATA
226. TATe ON Coupled Mkrs Couples the markers of all traces in the active setup to the markers of the active trace toggle function While marker coupling is active the active trace markers assume the role of master markers the other markers behave as slave markers following any change of position of the master marker Effects of marker coupling The concept of marker coupling means that corresponding markers on different traces i e markers with the same number or reference markers are positioned to the same stimulus values but keep their independent format and type settings When a trace with markers is selected as the active trace and marker coupling is switched on the following happens e The active trace and all associated markers are left unchanged The active trace markers become the master markers of the setup e Markers on the other traces which have no corresponding master marker are removed but GUI Reference Trace Menu remember their properties and can be re activated after the coupling is released e The remaining markers on the other traces become slave markers and are moved to the position of the corresponding master markers Missing slave markers are created so that each trace has the same number of markers placed at the same position e If the position of a master marker is outside the sweep range of the slave trace the slave marker is displayed at the edge of the diagram The marker info field ind
227. TB STatus Byte query reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Status Byte Query query only TRG TRiGger triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG Trigger generates a manual trigger signal Manual Trigger This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem TST self TeST query triggers selftests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form WAI WAIt to continue prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all Wait to continue preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also no query command synchronization and OPC no query Self Test Query query only CALCulate CALCulate CLIMits CALCulate lt Chn gt CLIMits This subsystem controls the composite limit check CALCulate lt Chn gt CLIMits FAIL Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not a composite limit check on several traces has failed lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace This suffix is not relevant because the command provides a summary of all individual limit fails Response O 1 0 represents pass for all individual limit checks also returned if no limit check is active at all 1 means that the limit checks for one or more traces failed RST value 0 SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus ran
228. TR1 Delete the created trace CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure lt string gt S11 Y S11 Z S11 Assigns a measurement parameter to an existing trace Note To create a new trace and at the same time assign the attributes use CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine To display the trace create a window DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON and assign the trace to this window DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe FEED see example below Traces must be selected to become active traces see CALCulate PARameter SELect CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter CATalog returns a list of all defined traces You can open the trace manager DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute Trace Manager to obtain an overview of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed lt Ch gt Channel number of an existing channel containing the referenced trace lt string gt Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in the Trace Manager description CA Measurement parameter string variable see list of in the CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine command description RST value SCPI Device specific with query see S11 parameter description above Command Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S44 CALC4 PAR MEAS Ch4Tr1 S12 Change the measurement parameter of the trace and measure the transmission co
229. The following keywords define the measurement parameter see SCPI command reference function name POWer S lt Ptour gt lt Ptin gt S parameter with output and input port number of the DUT e g S11 S21 POWer KFACtor Stability factor K POWer MUFactor lt 1 2 gt Stability factors u1 or u2 SENSE lt Ch r gt ROSCillator SENSe lt Ch gt ROSCillator This subsystem controls the frequency reference oscillator SENSe lt Ch gt ROSCillator SOURCce INTernal EXTernal Selects the source of the reference oscillator signal lt Ch gt Channel number This suffix is ignored in the ROSCillator subsystem and can be set to any value INTernal Select internal 10 MHz reference oscillator EXTernal Select external reference clock The frequency of the external reference clock is specified via SENSe lt Chn gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency RST value INTernal SCPI Confirmed command or query Command Types Example ROSC EXT Select external reference oscillator Command Reference SENSe ROSC EXT FREQ Query the frequency of the external reference oscillator The response is 10000000 Hz i e the frequency of the external reference oscillator must be 10 MHz SENSe lt Chs gt ROSCillator EXTernal FREQuency lt numeric_value gt Specifies or queries the frequency of the external reference oscillator lt Ch gt Channel number This suffix is ignored in the ROSCillator subsystem and ca
230. The list is complete All standards must be measured to perform the selected calibrations OO Structure of the Measured Standards list The list of measured standards has a tree structure e The first level contains all physical ports where one port reflection measurements are required and all physical port combinations where two port COX transmission measurements must be performed e The second level contains check boxes for the standards to be measured at each port or port combination e For a sliding match a third level contains check boxes for the different positions of the sliding element To expand the list of a physical port symbol click the symbol to collapse the list double click the symbol Calibrations using a match or sliding match If the calibration kit contains a sliding match standard the Sliding Match appears in the Measured Standards list whenever the selected calibration type requires a Match A click on the node expands the check boxes for the different positions of the load GUI Reference Channel Menu element The number of different positions is defined in the User Interface tab of the System Configuration dialog Co Pot 1 N 500 A 1 Open re OHz 1000 GHz in 50 0 Ideal Kit Short rn 0 Hez 1000 GHz in 500 Ideal Kit Match m UH 1000 GHz im N 50 0 Ideal Kit o a Sliding Match mi Hz 1000 GHz im N 50 0 Ideal Kit 1 Position 1 Position 2 _
231. UEGuonablehNT Hanson 448 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition nonnoeenannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 448 STATus QUEStionable LlMit lt 1 2 gt CONDition 0 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeees 449 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt ENABIe cccceeeeccccceeeceeeceeeeeeeeessseeeeeceeeeeeeseeeseaeageeeeeees 449 SANUS QUEStiOnable LIMMIN2 S EV 1 KEE 449 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt NTRansition 0 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 449 STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt PTRAnSItION 0ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 450 EE Il gee ee ee eee eee eee 450 STE RE 451 e RE E 451 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess address mo 451 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator LFEoTEOL 451 SYSTem DATA SIZE ALLJ AUTO E 452 SYSTem DISPlay COLor DBACkground LBACkground BWLStyles DBWGold 452 SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt Boolean gt TONCE 453 no Go El ERRO NEX T KE 453 EA Eug EE ee EE 453 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation SYSTem ERRor DISPlay lt BOOleans gt ccccccccccccssssssssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeesseaaaaasssseeses 454 SYSTem FiRMware UPDate lt file name 454 SYSTeMm KLOCK lt Booleans cccssseeeeeeceeeeeeessessecccessseeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeseccoasseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeesssssssooes 454 SYSTem PASSword CENable lt pass
232. UT The coordinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows see also definition of matched circuit converted impedances Z Zo 1 T 1 T From this equation it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the complex resistance to the real and imaginary parts of T 1 Re T Im r Ref im 2 Im r R Re Z Z eee gellech Set mT X Im Z Z in order to deduce the following properties of the graphical representation in a Smith chart Real reflection coefficients are mapped to real impedances resistances The center of the T plane T 0 is mapped to the reference impedance Zo whereas the circle with 1 is mapped to the imaginary axis of the Z plane The circles for the points of equal resistance are centered on the real axis and intersect at Z infinity The arcs for the points of equal reactance also belong to circles intersecting at Z infinity open circuit point 1 0 centered on a straight vertical line Circles of equal resistance Short circuited load Z 0 Se Open circuited load Z infinity Arcs of equal reactance Matching impedance Z Z Examples for special points in the Smith chart The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Z infinity 0 is one its phase is zero The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Z 0 U 0 is
233. Uire RSAVe Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected THRough OPEN SHORt MATCh NET ATT REFL SLIDE LINE1 LINE2 lt port_no gt lt port_no gt Starts a calibration measurement in order to acquire measurement data for the selected standards The standards are reflection or transmission standards and can be connected to arbitrary analyzer ports lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel THRough Standard types Through Open Short Match Symmetric Network NET LINE2 Attenuation ATT Reflect Sliding Match SLIDe Line1 LINE1 and LINE are synonymous Line2 lt port_no gt Port numbers of the analyzer For a transmission standard through line attenuation symmetric network the input and output port numbers must be specified for reflection standards only one port number is required RST value AUTO Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard lt delay AUTO The analyzer determines the delay time or phase during the calibration phase gt sweep lt delay or phase gt entry of the delay time in ps for non dispersive standards or of the phase at the start frequency of the sweep in deg for dispersive standards RST value AUTO SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt s CORRSCE LON 3 COLLeECe SAVE Skhected SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection lt port_no gt N5
234. Wnd gt TITle DATA lt title gt DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITle STATe lt Boolean gt Display Config The Display Config submenu configures the screen by showing or hiding controls and information elements and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams Mwa Setup Display Display Config Color Scheme Undo w Softkey Labels Reda w Status Bar Front Panel Keys Setup Info w Frequency Info System Config S f w Integrated Window External Tools b The Display Config menu contains the following functions e Color Scheme controls the colors in all diagram areas e Softkey Labels shows or hides the softkey bar at the right edge of the screen e Status Bar shows or hides the status bar across the bottom of the screen e Front Panel Keys shows or hides the hardkey bar at the top of the screen e Frequency Info shows or hides the frequency values in the diagram areas Hiding the controls and information elements leaves more space for the diagram areas All elements may be shown or hidden simultaneously A checkmark next to the menu item indicates that the view element is displayed GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Color Scheme Controls the colors in the diagram areas Color schemes are global settings and apply to all active setups SS Color Scheme Predefined Schemes gt Dark Background Light Background gt Black and White Line Styles Black and White solid Define User Sc
235. _Name gt lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Command Reference DISPlay lt WndTr gt Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area lt Wna gt RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example CATAE PARE ODER EE Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 DELete Release the assignment between trace no 9 and window no 2 The trace can still be referenced with its trace name Ch4Tr1 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt trace_name gt Assigns an existing trace CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_Name gt to a diagram area using the lt WndTr gt suffix and displays the trace O A trace can be assigned to a diagram only once If a attempt is made to assign the same trace a second time e g by typing DISP WIND2 TRAC8 FEED CH4TR1 after executing the program example below an error message 114 Header suffix out of range is generated You can open the trace manager DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute Trace Manager to obtain an overview of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed lt Wnd gt Number of an ex
236. _name gt elle name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Name of an existing trace in the active setup string parameter for which a limit line definition exists String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created limit line file The default extension manual control for limit line files is limit although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Device specific no query See MMEMory LOAD LIMit MMEMory STORe MARKer lt file_name gt Saves the values of all markers to a ASCII file lt file_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created ASCII file The default extension manual control for marker files is txt although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory An example for the file contents is given below Device specific no query TROT Reset the analyzer creating the default trace no 1 in channel no 1 CARO MARK TON MARE TCH Create marker no 1 and place it to 1 GHz CATO MARR TON MARK l GHz Create a second marker and place it to 2 GHz MMEM STOR MARK Marker txt Store the marker values to an ASCII file The file contains both marker values Tec1l 521 Mkr 1 1 000000 GHz 4 900 dB Mkr 2 2 000000 GH
237. a MEM DEL Setup_2 nwa Store the active setup Setup 2 to a file renaming it Setup _2 nwa Close the setup MEMory DEFine lt setup_name gt Creates a new setup lt setup name gt using default settings for the traces channels and diagram areas The created setup becomes the active setup lt setup_ name gt String parameter to specify the name of the created setup Command Reference MEMory RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query Example See MEM CAT MEMory DELete NAME lt file_name gt Closes the specified setup lt setup_name gt String parameter to specify the name of the setup to be closed RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example See MEM CAT MEMory SELect lt setup_name gt Selects a setup as the active setup lt setup_name gt String parameter to specify the setup RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example RST MEM DEF SETUP_2 Create a setup named Setup_2 and make it the active Secup MEM Shit seri Activate the default setup Setl MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA RecallSets Setl nwa MEM DEL Set1 nwa Store the active setup Set1 to a file renaming it Set1 nwa Close the setup Command Reference MMEMory MMEMory MMEMory The MMEMory system provides mass storage capabilities for the analyzer Internal and external mass storage The mass s
238. a dispersive connector type i e a waveguide see Offset Model dialog assigned to the receiving port of the measured quantitiy is taken into account If the active trace shows an S parameter Gu then Auto Length adds a length offset at port i Preconditions for Auto Length effect on measured quantities and exceptions Auto Length is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a function of frequency and if the interpretation of the results is Unambiguous e A frequency sweep must be active e The measured quantity must be an S parameter a converted impedance or a converted admittance The effect of Auto Length on S parameters is to eliminate a linear phase response as described above The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affected Converted admittances or impedances are calculated from the corresponding Auto Length corrected S parameters Stability factors are not derived from a single S parameter therefore Auto Length is disabled GUI Reference Channel Menu O Use Zero Delay at Marker to set the delay at a special trace point to zero Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt AUTO ONCE Auto Offset Determines all offset parameters such that the residual group delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the phase response is minimized and the measured loss is minimized as far as possible across the entire sweep ran
239. a polar diagram to display an S parameter or ratio Group Delay calculates the group delay from an S parameter or ratio and displays it in a Cartesian diagram Aperture sets a delay aperture for the delay calculation SWR calculates the Standing Wave Ratio from the measured reflection S parameters and displays it in a Cartesian diagram Lin Mag selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear scale of the vertical axis to display the magnitude of the measured quantity Real selects a Cartesian diagram to display the real part of a complex measured quantity Imag selects a Cartesian diagram to display the imaginary part of a complex measured quantity Inv Smith selects an inverted Smith diagram to display an S parameter or ratio Unwrapped Phase selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of the measured quantity in an arbitrary phase range The Format settings are closely related to the settings in the Scale submenu and in the Display menu All of them have an influence on the way the analyzer presents data on the screen The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities Trace Measure Nevertheless in order to extract useful information from the data it is important to select a display format which is appropriate to the analysis of a particular measured quantity see Measured Quantities and Display Formats An extended range of formats is available for markers To
240. a trace The exact function of the command depends on the number of memory traces associated to the active Command Reference CALCulate data trace e f no memory trace is associated to the active trace a new memory trace is generated e f several memory traces are associated to the active trace the current measurement data overwrites the last generated or changed memory trace O To copy a trace to the memory without overwriting an existing memory trace or define a memory trace name use TRACe COPY lt memory_trc gt lt data_trc gt To copy an active mathematical trace use TRACe COPY MATH lt memory_trc gt lt data_trc gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example RST CALC MATH MEM Copy the current state of the default trace Trci to a memory trace named Mem2 Trc1 The memory trace is not displayed DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED Mem2 Trc1 Display the created memory trace in the active diagram area diagram area no 1 CALCulate PARameter CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter This subsystem assigns names and measurement parameters to traces The commands are device specific CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter CATalog Returns the trace names and measurement parameters of all traces assigned to a particular channel lt Ch gt Channel number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Response String parameter
241. aS soon as On is checked A created marker is displayed in the center of the search range The radio buttons in the Peak Type panel offer the following alternative peak types e Local Max activates the peak search for local maxima only The response value at a local maximum is larger than the values in the vicinity e Local Min activates the peak search for local minima only The response value at a local minimum is smaller than the values in the vicinity GUI Reference Trace Menu e Local Min or Max activates the peak search for both local maxima and minima Search Range Opens the Search Range Dialog to confine the minimum maximum search to a subrange of the sweep Search Range Dialog Defines search ranges for the maximum minimum or target search SearchRange Marker Marker 1 wc v On Modify Search Range Search Range Range 1 cl stat 1GHe za Stop 2 GHz z EA Range Limit Lines On lt is possible to define up to ten different search ranges for each setup and assign them to the markers no 1 to 10 The input fields in the Search Range dialog are used to select the markers and define the associated search ranges e Marker Selects one of the ten markers that can be assigned to a trace in the current setup If a selected marker does not exist it is created as soon as On is checked A created marker is displayed in the center of the search range e Search Range Selects the search range to be ass
242. able An existing memory trace with the same name is overwritten coc oO The copied trace is the data trace which is not modified by any mathematical operations To copy a mathematical trace to a memory trace Use TRACe COPY MATH To copy the active trace to the memory using an automatic memory trace name use CAL Culate lt Chn gt MATH MEMorize lt memory_trc gt Name of the memory trace Range def unit lt memory_trace gt is either a string variable enclosed in single or double quotes or one of the following reserved names no string variables ZVR I MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATAS5 MDATAG MDATA7 MDATA8 only for memory traces Mem lt n gt Trce lt m gt where n 1 8 see list of trace names RST value lt data_trc gt Name of the data trace Range def unit lt data_trace gt is either a string variable enclosed in single or double quotes or one of the following reserved names no string variables ZR IV CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA only for the active data trace in channels Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 see list of trace names RST value SCPI Command Confirmed no query Types Example RST SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 TRAC COPY Mem_Pt20 CH1DATA Copy the current state of the created trace to a memory trace named Mem_Pt20 The memory trace is not displayed DI
243. ace and diagram area suffixes In remote control one active trace can be selected for each channel see Active Traces in Remote Control This concept simplifies the remote control command syntax because it allows the active trace in a particular channel to be referenced by means of the channel suffix To keep the syntax transparent lt Ch gt is used for channel settings it denotes the configured channel whereas lt Chn gt is used for trace settings it denotes the active trace in the channel Command Reference Common Commands Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These commands have the same effect on different devices The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the status reporting system Command Parameters Short Description CLS CLear Status sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR Clear Status and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero Ki no query command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer ESE Event Status Enable sets the event status enable register to the value 0 255 Event Status indicated The query ESE returns the contents of the event status enable register in decimal form Enable Standard Event Status Query query only ESR Event Status Read returns the con
244. ace Funct menu act on the active trace Data traces and the associated memory traces share many of their properties see coupling of memory traces Data gt Mem Stores the current state of the active trace as a memory trace The memory trace is displayed in the active diagram area with another color and its properties are indicated in the trace list dB Mag 10 dB Bert dB Mom 2 Tre1 dB Mag 10 dB Ref db Memory traces are named Mem lt n gt lt Data_Trace gt where lt n gt counts all data and memory traces in the active setup in chronological order and lt Data_Trace gt is the name of the associated data trace Trace names can be changed in the Trace Manager dialog The exact function of Data gt Mem depends on the number of memory traces associated to the active data trace e f no memory trace is associated with the active trace anew memory trace is generated e If several memory traces are associated with the active trace the current measurement data overwrites the last generated or changed memory trace Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace it is displayed in the same diagram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace The following display settings of a data trace and the associated memory traces are fully coupled Changing a property of one trace affects the properties of all other traces e All settings inthe Trace Format menu e All s
245. ace Trc1 as the active trace of the channel define a reference marker and a delta marker In the marker commands the active trace is referenced by the channel suffix CALCulate1 PARameter SELect Trc1 CALCulate1 MARKer1 STATe ON the marker is set to the center of the sweep range CALCulate1 MARKer1 DELTa STATe ON this command also creates the reference marker CALCulatel MARKerl REFerence X 4 5 GHz set the reference marker to the beginning of the sweep range W Use the delta marker to search for the minimum of the trace and query the result Programming Examples Basic Tasks CALCulate1 MARKer1 FUNCtion EXECute MIN RES the query returns the stimulus and the response value at the marker position Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE gt Nwa Set1 Goto Lacall Display On Off Trot Beal de Mag 3dB Ref 10dB Tre Een Phase 45 Ref ot Ret 4 500000 GHz 5 625 dB AMkr 1 615 00000 MHz 10 125 dB BP Se ec pt TAT ee 0 pt fT pt Tt dd h1 Stat 4 5 GHz Pwr 0 dBm stop 3 5 GHZ REME _ 180 aw O L EZ DESE a KE JI NI LS ee Lei AL Use the CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA commands to retrieve the complete trace see Retrieving Measurement Results W 2 Limit lines and limit check Remove all markers and define a limit line for the active trace CALCulate1 MARKer1 AOFF CALCu
246. ach sweep e Deft Peak defines the criteria for the peak search e Search Range assigns a search range to each marker of the current trace The search functions are available in all Cartesian and polar diagram types see Trace Format In polar diagrams Polar Smith Inverted Smith where complex values are displayed the magnitude of the response values provides the search criterion Max Search Sets the active marker to the absolute maximum in the search range i e to the largest of all response values If a complex trace format e g a polar diagram is active the marker is set to the measurement point with the maximum magnitude By default the search range coincides with the sweep range If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 7 is created to indicate the search result Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute MAXimum CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Min Search Sets the active marker to the absolute minimum in the search range i e to the smallest of all response values If a complex trace format e g a polar diagram is active the marker is set to the measurement point with the minimum magnitude GUI Reference Trace Menu By default the search range coincides with the sweep range If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 7 is created to indicate the search result Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXE
247. acquire the calibration data for this standard 5 Repeat the last step for a short and a match connected to port 1 an open short and match connected to port 2 and for a through between both ports 6 Click Apply to start the calculation of the system error correction data apply them to the current channel and close the calibration wizard 7 Replace the last measured standard with your DUT and perform calibrated measurements without changing the channel settings used for calibration GUI Reference Control Menus GUT ROTOR NC eege 105 Seite ETC 105 FUG SION G ae cease EPE ET E E E EA ETE E ES E E TE E E EA E ET S 106 let 106 EE 106 Ville Wu E 106 EK dun IEN 106 e 106 ING EEN 106 IN e UE E 107 Kiel 107 Eet 108 FG IN E 108 oper RTE e Te EE 108 SH haa ects eaten sete ane tbe ein dence E ase E A agee E E S A 109 SE 109 Save As DINO ME 109 SS e EEN 110 Pade H EE e E 110 CSE NS Saar craton E E E E E NE 111 ee 112 En LTE 112 leie 113 Pa WGI EE 114 EA DVS EE 114 Mani DALA MEM DEE 115 NON DAT EE 115 DON NIE EE 115 eier 115 See e 117 GUI Reference Control Menus Aad TIAGO aeren E E E E 117 Add Trace Diag Area 117 Rachel 118 ASSON DAG ET EE 118 PS SIG UNG Ms asec A E A E A ten asses E A E A E 118 Ree ee E 119 Ree 121 FOUN BE 126 MOO UNG APEU E 126 MOON EPT BCEE 127 10 Seele EEN 133 el gedu UE ET 134 WE dee Ve ON E 134 Kette g elle e DN 134 VE 135 INSU Me EN 135 a ET EE 136 OPS Ma catst
248. addition these keys can be used ii a to insert characters in character input fields see section Data Entry in chapter 2 The function of the and keys depends on the data type of the active input field enS Paes In numeric input fields the keys enter the decimal point and change the sign of the entered numeric value Multiple decimal points are not allowed pressing for a second time cancels the effect of the first entry In character input fields the keys enter a dot and a hyphen respectively Both entries can be repeated as often as desired The function of the four unit keys depends on the data type of the active input field see Data Entry section in Chapter 3 In numeric input fields e g in the numeric entry bar the GHz dBm MHz dBm kHz dB or Hz dB keys multiply the entered value with factors of 100 100 10 D or 1 and add the appropriate physical unit Preparing for Use ESC CANCEL 1 1 6 1 1 7 Front Panel Tour In character input fields the keys are inactive ENTER is used to Activate the selected active control element e g a button in a dialog or a link in the Help Confirm selections and entries made and close dialogs ENTER is equivalent to pressing the rotary knob The ESC CANCEL key is used to Close dialogs without activating the entries made equivalent to the Close button Close the Help BACK deletes the last character befo
249. age is not frequency selective To eliminate a spurious signal in the vicinity of the measurement frequency alternative techniques e g a smaller filter bandwidth must be used Calculation of sweep average The average trace is obtained as follows Let c be the Average Factor and assume that n sweeps have been measured since the start of the average cycle start of the measurement or Restart Average The following two situations are distinguished e n lt c At each sweep point the average trace no n is calculated from the average trace no n 1 and the current trace no n according to the following recurrence n i l Argin l Currin melat H H Avgr The average trace represents the arithmetic mean value over all n sweeps e n gt c At each sweep point the average trace no n is calculated from the average trace no n 1 and the current trace no n according to Ai EMEC MC C C The formulas hold for Average Factor n 1 where the average trace becomes equal to the current trace Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt JAVERage STATe ON OFF SENSe lt Ch gt AVERage COUNt SENSe lt Ch gt JAVERage CLEar Sweep The Sweep submenu defines the scope of measurement in the current channel This includes the sweep type with various parameters the trigger conditions the periodicity of the measurement and the sweep average GUI Reference Channel Menu ON A sweep is a series of consecut
250. age out quick variations of the measured values and thus produce misleading results To avoid errors observe the following recommendations e Start with a small aperture and increase it only as long as you are certain that the trace is still correctly reproduced e As a general rule the smoothing aperture should be small compared to the width of the observed structures e g the resonance peaks of a filter If necessary restrict the sweep range or switch smoothing off to analyze narrow structures Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt SMOothing APERture lt numeric_value gt GUI Reference Trace Menu Import Export Data Stores one or several data or memory traces to a file or loads a memory trace from a file Import or export is selected from a submenu Trace d Traces d Marker gt Data gt Mem Marker b Math BatalMen Meas Math Data Mem Format Scale k oy Show Data Lines Show Mem Trace Statistics Smoothing Op Smoothing Aperture Import Export Data Import Data Export Data Shift Response Value Shift Stimulus Value Max Hold On Restart Hold e Import Data calls up an Open File dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file e Export Data calls up a Save As dialog to store data or memory traces to a trace file Import Data Calls up a dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format GUI Reference
251. al transmitted through the DUT to be reflected off the receive port so that it is not measured there The load match error can be corrected by means of a two port calibration except normalization Marker Tool for selecting points on the trace and for numerical readout of measured data A marker is displayed with a symbol a triangle a crossbar or a line on the trace its coordinates are shown in the marker info field Glossary of Terms Mathematical trace Trace that is calculated according to a mathematical expression e g the one defined in the Define Math dialog The expression is a mathematical relation between constants and the data or memory traces of the active setup Measurement point Result of the measurement at a specified stimulus value frequency power time Measurement result Set of all measurement points acquired in a measurement e g a sweep The measurement result is displayed in a diagram area and forms a trace Memory trace Trace that is associated to a data trace and stored in the memory Data traces and the associated memory traces share the same channel and scale settings Alternatively memory traces can be imported from a file Partial measurement Measurement at a specified stimulus value maintaining definite hardware settings Depending on the measurement type several partial measurements may be needed to obtain a measurement point A full n port S parameter measurement requires n partial measuremen
252. alibration standards i e their S parameters must be known or predictable within a given frequency range The standards are grouped into several types open through match corresponding to the different input quantities for the analyzer s error models The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit As an alternative to using circuit models it is possible to describe the standards by means of S parameter tables stored in a file The analyzer provides a large number of predefined cal kits but can also import cal kit files and create new kits A selection of predefined kits is available for all connector types The parameters of these kits are displayed in the Ada Modify Standards dialog however it is not possible to change or delete the kits Imported and user defined kits can be changed in the Calibration Kits dialog and its various sub dialogs Calibration kits and connector types are global resources the parameters are stored independently and are available irrespective of the current setup 3 3 1 1 Calibration Types The analyzer provides a wide range of calibration types for one two or more ports The calibration types differ in the number and types of standards used the error terms i e the type of systematic errors corrected and the general accu
253. all markers that are in Delta Mode Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence STATe ON CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence Y GUI Reference Trace Menu Delta Mode Converts the active marker to a delta marker so that its values are measured and indicated relative to the reference marker toggle function A A sign placed in front of the marker line indicates that the marker is in Delta Mode The reference marker itself can not be set to delta mode but must be present when another marker is set to delta mode The analyzer takes into account these conditions when Delta Mode is selected e f Delta Mode is selected while the reference marker is active the marker in the info list after the reference marker is activated and set to delta mode If the current trace contains the reference marker only a new Mkr 7 is created and set to delta mode e f Delta Mode is selected for a normal marker while the current trace contains no reference marker a reference marker is created Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt DELTa STATe ON Ref Marker gt Marker Places the reference marker to the position of the active marker AS a consequence the active marker takes the role of a reference marker Ref Marker gt Marker is not active if the active marker is a reference marker Remote control All Mkrs Off Removes all markers from all traces of the active setup The removed ma
254. alues arranged in 1 line e 3 port files s3p e Freq Re S11 Im S11 Re Si2 Im S12 Re S13 Im S13 e Re 21 Im S21 Re S22 Im S22 Re S23 Im S23 e Re S31 Im S31 Re S32 Im S382 Re S33 Im S33 e values arranged in 3 lines e 4 port files s4p e Freq Re S11 Im S11 Re Si2 Im S12 Re S13 Im S13 Re S14 Im S14 e Re 21 Im S21 Re S22 Im S22 Re S23 Im S23 Re S24 Im S24 e Re S31 Im S31 Re S32 Im S32 Re S33 Im S33 Re S34 Im S34 e Re S41 Im S41 Re S42 Im S42 Re S43 Im S43 Re S44 Im S44 e values arranged in 4 lines The stimulus frequencies are arranged in ascending order If a lin Mag Phase MA or dB Mag Phase DB data format is selected the real and imaginary S parameter values Re Sj Im Sj are replaced by lin Mao phase S or dB Mag Sj phase S respectively ASCII csv files An ASCII file contains a header and the actual trace data freq reTrcl_ S21 imTrcl S21 reMem2 Trcl S21 imMem2 Trcl1 _ S21 300000 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 40499497 487437 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 80698994 974874 0 494927 0 065174 0 500833 0 074866 120898492 462312 0 497959 0 111724 0 488029 0 107375 The header consists of the following data elements lt Stimulus gt stimulus variable freq for Frequency sweep power for Power sweep time for Time sweep trigger for CW Mode sweep lt relrace1 gt first response value of first trace re lt Trace Name mag lt Trac
255. ame e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored RST value SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Trl1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 Command Reference DISPlay to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y BOTT 40 TOP 10 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y BOTT 40 CH4TR1 TOP 10 CH4TR1 Scale the diagram between 40 dB and 10 GB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WhndTr gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt numeric_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the value between two grid graticules value per division for the diagram area lt Wnd gt When a new PDIVision value is entered the current RLEVel is kept the same while the top and bottom scaling is adjusted for the new PDIVision value lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used lt numeric_value gt Value and unit for the vertical diagram divisions Range def unit Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units
256. ame gt GUI Reference Nwa File Menu Close Closes an opened setup window The analyzer suggests to save changes to the setup before closing it If a setup is closed without saving all changes made since the last time it was saved are lost Remote control MEMory DELete NAME lt setup_ name gt Recall Nwa Recalls an existing setup from a file The analyzer opens a standard Windows Open dialog box to select the file from all NWA setup files nwa stored on the file system lt is not possible to open the same setup in different windows If an opened setup is changed and an attempt is made to open the same setup again the analyzer displays a warning P Do you want to restore Ci Setupe zyx Yes overwrites the changes in the opened setup No closes the message box leaving the opened setup unchanged um O lt is possible to create and open several setup files with the same contents but different names or locations To open recall a setup file nwa you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application The imported setup becomes the active setup Remote control MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 lt file_name gt Open Dialog Specifies the name and location of a particular file e g a NWA setup file to open e Look in specifies the drive and directory in which the file to open is stored The icons to the right of the pull down list are provided for easy
257. ame of the calibration string parameter defined together with calibration type SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine If nothing is specified the analyzer deletes the last system error correction stored by means of SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE Command Reference SCPI Command Types Example SENSe Device specific no query CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR COLL SEL SHOR 1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard CORR COLL SAVE DEL Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel then delete the data SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod FRTRans TOSM FOPort1 FOPort2 FOPort12 FOPTport ROPTport REFL1 REFL2 REFL12 TPORt Selects a one port or two port calibration type at ports 1 2 d Use the generalized command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine to select the calibration type for arbitrary analyzer ports or a multiport calibration type lt Ch gt Parameters RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number of the calibrated channel Calibration types TOSM Full One Port One Path Two Port Normalization REFL1 REFL2 and REFL12 for one port TPORT for two port T The numbers in the parameters denote the analyzer ports Parameters for two
258. an be used to search a trace for several bandpass regions Range 1 Range 3 P Range 2 a Remote CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER STARt CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER STOP Search Result Off Hides the info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables bandfiter Tracking The info field is displayed again and tracking re enabled when a new bandfilter search is performed Bandfilter parameters The info field contains the following search results e Bandwidth is the n dB bandwidth of the bandpass bandstop region where n is the selected x dB Bandwidth The bandwidth is equal to the difference between the Upper Bandwidth Edge UBE and the Lower Bandwidth Edge LBE e Center is the stimulus frequency where the trace reaches its absolute maximum minimum within the bandpass bandstop region e Lower Band Edge is the closest frequency below the center frequency where the trace is equal to the center value minus n GB e Upper Band Edge is the closest frequency above the center frequency where the trace is equal to the center value minus n dB e The Quality Factor is the ratio between the Center frequency and the 3 dB Bandwidth it does not depend on the selected x dB Bandwidth e Loss is the loss of the filter at its center frequency and is equal to the response value of marker
259. and phase response within a given frequency range Calibration standards are grouped into several types open through match corresponding to the different input quantities for the analyzer s error models Calibration unit Integrated solution for automatic calibration of 1 to 4 ports accessory ZV Z41 The unit contains calibration standards that are electronically switched when a calibration is performed Channel A channel contains hardware related settings to specify how the network analyzer collects data Each channel is stored in an independent data set The channel settings complement the definitions of the Trace menu they apply to all traces assigned to the channel Confirmation dialog box Standard dialog box that pops up to display an error message or a warning The current action can be either continued OK or cancelled Cancel on closing the dialog box Crosstalk The occurrence of a signal at the receive port of the analyzer which did not travel through the test setup and the DUT but leaks through other internal paths Crosstalk causes an isolation error in the measurement which can be corrected by Glossary of Terms means of a calibration Data trace Trace filled with measurement data and updated after each sweep dynamic trace Diagram area Rectangular portion of the screen used to display traces Diagram areas are arranged in windows they are independent of trace and channel settings Directivity erro
260. and write function call Overview of Interface Functions The library functions are adapted to the interface functions of National Instruments for GPIB programming The functions supported by the libraries are listed in the following table Function Description OO HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors RSDLLSwapBytes Swaps the byte sequence for binary numeric display only required for non Intel platforms Description of Interface Functions RSDLLibfind The function provides a handle for access to the device with the name udName VB format Function RSDLLibfind ByVal udName ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibfind char far udName short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibfind char udName short ibsta short iberr unsigned long iabcnt Ll Parameter udName IP address of device Example ud e E ae aere 69 10 3604 07 ibsta iberr i2bencl The function must be called prior to all other functions of the interface As return value the function provides a handle that must be indicated in all functions for access to the device If the device with the name udName is not found the handle has a negative value RSDLLibwrt This function sends data to the device with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLibwrt ByVal ud ByVal Wrt ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibwrt short ud
261. andwidth Fine Adjust Selectivity Bandwidth 10 kHz mi SE ig e The input field shows the last IF filter bandwidth selected The arrow buttons increment and decrement the bandwidth in 1 2 5 steps for each decade Entered values between the steps will be rounded up values exceeding the maximum bandwidth rounded down e Selectivity selects between two types of IF filters Filters with Normal selectivity and short settling time and filters with High selectivity but larger settling time The selected bandwidth and selectivity applies to all filters used in the current channel This makes sense because the measurement speed is limited by the slowest filter in the channel In Segmented Frequency sweeps the bandwidth and selectivity can be set independently for each segment see Define Segments O In general the system error correction is no longer valid after a change of the IF filter bandwidth The message Cal appears in the trace list Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Cal The Cal menu provides all functions that are necessary to perform a system error correction calibration For an introduction to calibration and calibration types refer to section Calibration Overview in the System Overview chapter See also the Data Flow overview in the System Overview chapter GUI Reference Channel Menu Ka Channel Center Span H Pwr Du SCH tart cal Sweep V Repeat Prey Cal Chan
262. arameters are expressed as Sceouts lt ins Where lt out gt and lt in gt denote the output and input port numbers of the DUT A full 2 port S parameter measurement involves 2 stages referred to as partial measurements with GUI Reference Trace Menu interchanged drive and receive ports The analyzer automatically switches the internal power sources and the receivers to obtain the desired S parameters Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure lt Trace_Name gt S11 S1 Di S21 u S22 SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON POWer S lt 11 12 21 22 gt Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_Name gt S11 S12 S21 S22 Impedance The Impedance submenu contains the functions to convert S parameters into matched circuit impedances The matched circuit impedances describe the impedances of a DUT that is terminated at its outputs with the reference impedance Zp Trace Trace F Marker gt Marker b S11 Format V Szi Scale 51 Lines De Impedance Zec Dll Admittance V F 53512 Stability Factors 2 521 nn e Z lt S11 Z lt S12 Z lt S21 Z lt S22 select the forward and reverse matched circuit impedances of a 2 port DUT Z lt S11 Z lt S12 Z lt 21 Z lt S22 Selects the 2 port matched circuit converted impedances The parameters describe the impedances of a
263. arget value GUI Reference Trace Menu Target Value ne oe ei Marker Marker 4 v e On lt is possible to define up to ten different target values for each trace and assign them to the markers no 1 to 10 The input fields in the Target Search dialog are used to select the markers and define the associated search ranges e Marker selects one of the ten markers that can be assigned to the trace If a selected marker does not exist it is created as soon as On Is checked A created marker is displayed in the center of the search range e Value selects the target value to be assigned to the selected marker The target Value is entered with the unit of the active trace Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt TARget Search Range Opens the Search Range Dialog to confine the target search to a subrange of the sweep Bandfilter Opens a submenu to search for trace segments with a bandpass or bandstop shape and determine characteristic filter parameters Bandfilter search and filter parameters Bandpass and bandsitop regions can be described with the same parameter set e A bandpass region contains a local maximum around which the magnitude of the trace falls off by more than a specified x dB Bandwidth e A bandstop region contains a local minimum around which the magnitude of the trace increases by more than a specified x dB Bandwidth The analyzer locates bandpass and bandstop regions an
264. ase LOGPhase dB magnitude and phase If the second optional parameter is omitted the command stores complex data RST value the default export format is UNFormatted SCPI Confirmed no query Command Types Example See MMEMory LOAD TRACe OUTPut OUTPut lt Pt gt This subsystem controls the characteristics of the analyzer s output ports OUTPut lt Chn gt DPORt PORT1 PORT2 Selects a source port for the stimulus signal drive port The setting acts on the active trace The effect of the drive port selection depends on the measurement parameter associated to the active trace e If an S parameter At Is measured the second port number index lt in gt input port of the DUT drive port of the analyzer is set equal to the selected drive port Drive port selection affects the measured quantity e fa wave quantity or a ratio is measured the drive port is independent from the measured quantity Note This command is equivalent to SENSe lt Chn gt SWEep SRCPort lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 PORT1 Test port number of the analyzer 1 to 2 RST value PORT1 SCPI Command Device specific with query Types Command Reference PROGram Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 A1 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity a1 The trace automatically becomes the active trace EE Select drive po
265. ase 45 Ref Che dB Mag 1008 RefUdb Ch Math Merid Trc Gar dB Mag 10 08 Ref 0 dB Che e lf an inactive area is selected as the active area the trace that was active last time when the area was active will again become the active trace It is highlighted in the trace list of the inactive diagram area as shown for Trc6 in the figure below Treg dB Mag 10 dB Refi dB Tre dE Wag 10 dB RefOdb All settings in the Trace menu except the Trace Functions involving a memory trace apply to the active trace in the active diagram area GUI Reference Trace Menu OC In remote control each channel can contain an active trace The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other see Active Traces in Remote Control Select Trace Opens a box to select an arbitrary trace of the active setup as the active trace This function is disabled if only one trace is defined Remote control The numeric suffix lt Ch Tr gt appended to the first level mnemonic of acommand selects a trace as active trace Add Trace Creates a new trace in the current diagram area and assigns it to the current channel The new trace is created with the trace and channel settings of the former active trace but displayed with another color The former and the new active trace are superimposed but can be easily separated e g by changing the Reference Position The new trace is named Trc lt n gt where lt n gt is t
266. ating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions To obtain the delay a frequency sweep must be active um O The cables connecting the analyzer test ports to the DUT introduce an unwanted delay which often can be assumed to be constant Use the Zero Delay at Marker function define a numeric length Offset or use the Auto Length function to mathematically compensate for this effect in the measurement results To compensate for a frequency dependent delay in the test setup a system error correction is required Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat DELay Aperture Sets a sets a delay aperture for the delay calculation The aperture Af is entered as an integer number of Aperture Steps Aperture Steps fi 0 d The analyzer calculates the aperture from the sweep points of the current frequency sweep Properties The delay at each sweep point is computed as A Paer T Dee 360 where the aperture Af is a finite frequency interval around the sweep point f and the analyzer measures the corresponding phase change Ad GUI Reference Trace Menu Aperture 5 steps Calculation of Af and Ao With a given number of aperture steps n the delay at sweep point no m is calculated as follows e f nis even n 2k then Af m f n k f n k and Ad m Ad n k Ad n k e lf nis odd n 2k 1 then Af m f n k f n k 1 and Ad m Ad n k Ad n k 1 lt may be
267. ation data acquired in previous calibrations lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel lt Boolean gt ON OFF Keep measurement data on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example CORR COLL RSAV DEF ON Generally keep the raw measurement data of the standards after the calibration is completed CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR COLL SEL SHOR 1 Measure a short standard connected to port 1 and store the raw measurement results of this standard CORR COLL RSAV OFF To save disk space delete the current raw calibration data after the calibration is completed CORR COLL SAVE SEL Calculate the system error correction data and apply them to the active channel SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire RSAVe DEFault lt Boolean gt Activates or deactivates the calibration mode where the raw measurement data of the standards is stored after the calibration is completed The setting remains valid for all subsequent calibrations until it is changed explicitly A new calibration deletes the calibration data acquired in previous calibrations lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel lt Boolean gt ON OFF Keep measurement data on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AQ
268. ation holes and the rack casing 1 3 5 EMI Protective Measures In order to avoid electromagnetic interference the instrument may only be operated when it is closed and with all shielding covers fitted Only appropriate shielded signal and control cables may be used 1 3 6 Power Supply Options The R amp S ZVL is equipped with an AC power supply connector In order to use the analyzer independently from an AC power supply it can be fitted with a DC power supply connector option DC Power Supply R amp S FSL B30 and or a battery pack option NIMH Battery Pack R amp S FSL B31 Refer toDC Power Supply and Battery for further information From the available power supplies the R amp S ZVL selects the one to use according to the following priority scheme Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation For example if the R amp S ZVL is connected to both an AC and a DC power supply it uses the AC power supply If it is suddenly disconnected from the AC power supply it switches to the DC power supply 1 3 7 Connecting the Instrument to the AC Supply The network analyzer is automatically adapted to the AC supply voltage supplied The supply voltage must be in the range 100 V to 240 V 50 Hz to 60 Hz see also the General Data section in the Specifications The mains connector is located at the bottom left corner of the rear panel Connect the network analyzer to the AC power source using the AC power
269. ative measurement result Delta Mode e Convert a complex measurement result into other formats Markers also play an important role in performing the following advanced tasks e Change the sweep range and the diagram scale Marker Funct e Search for specific points on the trace Search GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace Trace F Marker gt Marker a vw Marker 1 Meas k vw Marker z Format Marker 3 Scale k ow Ref Marker Lines b Delta Mode Mkr gt Ref Mkr All Mkrs OFF Mer Format V More Mer d Coupled Mr Discrete Mkrs Mkr Properties Export Mkrs The Marker menu contains the following functions e Marker 1 2 3 creates the markers numbered 1 2 and 3 e Ref Marker creates the reference marker which is used to measure relative values and distances e Delta Mode activates the display of the active marker values relative to the reference marker e Ref Marker gt Marker places the reference marker to the position of the active marker e All Mkrs Off removes all markers from all traces of the active setup e Mkr Format defines an output format for the complex marker values e More Mkrs opens a submenu to create the markers numbered 4 to 10 e Coupled Mkrs couples the markers on different traces e Discrete Mkrs turns the active marker into a discrete marker and vice versa e Mkr Properties opens a dialog with extended marker settings e Export Mkrs exports the
270. attern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits the SCPI registers 16 bits The contents of a status register is keyed and transferred as a single decimal number To make this possible each bit is assigned a weighted value The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1 Bits Weight Example The decimal value 40 32 8 indicates that bits no 3 and 5 in the status register e g the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte are set Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Error Queue Each error state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem ERRor NEXT Or SYSTem ERRor ALL Each call of SyYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Reset Values of the Status
271. ay If the spectrum analyzer option R amp S ZVL K1 is active the key provides trigger settings TRIG E MKR positions markers on a trace configures their properties and selects the format of the numerical readout k MARKER gt provides marker functions that allow you to search for values on traces define the sweep range scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset Preparing for Use 1 1 4 ag Front Panel Tour CAL provides all functions that are necessary to perform a system error correction calibration If the spectrum analyzer option R amp S ZVL K1 is active the key starts a new measurement RUN MEAS selects the quantity to be measured and displayed LINES defines limits for measured values and activates the limit check TRACE provides functions to handle traces in diagram areas evaluate trace statistics and store trace data Navigation Keys The navigation keys below the rotary knob are used to navigate within the analyzer screen and the Help system to access and control active elements Cafi edad The Left Field Tab or Right Field Shift Tab keys switch between several active elements in dialogs and panes e g in order to access ZS All control elements e g buttons numerical or text input fields radio buttons checkmarks combo boxes etc in a dialog Alllinks in a Help topic not possible with the rotary knob The Cursor
272. be initiated Use CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_ name gt lt Parameter gt to create a new channel and a new trace In remote control it is possible to remove all channels This is in contrast to manual control where at least one channel with one diagram area and one trace must be available lt Ch gt Number of the channel to be created or deleted lt Boolean gt ON Create channel no lt Ch gt If the channel no lt Ch gt exists already it is not modified but selected as the active channel OFF Delete channel no lt Ch gt RST value ON for channel no 1 created on RST OFF for all other channels SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example See CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CATalog DIAGnostic DIAGnostic SERVice This subsystem provides access to service and diagnostic routines used in service maintenance and repair In accordance with the SCPI standard all commands are device specific Command Reference DISPlay Service functions are password protected SYSTem PASSword CENable and should be used by a R amp S service representative only Refer to the service manual for more information DIAGnostic SERVice FUNCtion lt numeric_value gt DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction lt string gt Activates a service function for internal use only DISPlay DISPlay This subsystem controls the selection and presentation of graphical and trace inf
273. blue content of the defined color 0 zero intensity corresponding to a 0 in the 24 bit color model to 1 full intensity corresponding to 255 in the 24 bit color model Optional trace style only for traces lt Element gt gt 12 One of the string parameters SOLid DASHed DOTTed DDOTted DDDotted Optional trace width only for traces lt Element gt gt 12 1 to 20 RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command Confirmed with device specific numeric suffix and parameters command or query The query returns three values between 0 and one separated by commas corresponding to the red green and blue color content RST DISP CMAP MARK ON CALC MARK ON Create diagram area no 1 with default trace showing the S parameter S24 and a marker Mkr 1 CALC PAR SDEF TRC2 S11 DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED TRC2 Create a new trace named TRC2 and display the trace in diagram area no 1 Note that the new trace automatically becomes the active trace CALC MARK2 ON Assign a marker Mkr 2 to the trace Both markers are displayed with the same color DISP CMAP13 RGB 1 0 0 DISP CMAP14 RGB 0 1 0 Color the first trace red the second trace green DISP CMAP6 RGB Query the marker color The marker color depends on the settings made in previous sessions it is not reset A possible response is 0 0 0 for black markers DISP CMAP MARK OFF Change the marker colors Mkr 7 turns red
274. c command or query Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt DISTance lt length gt Defines the offset parameter for test port lt port_no gt as a mechanical length lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt length gt Mechanical length Range def 3 402823466E 038 m to 3 4028234664E 038 m In contrast to the electrical unit length SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth the distance can not be incremented the UP DOWN parameters do not work RST value Om m SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth lt length gt Defines the offset parameter for test port lt port_no gt as an electrical length lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt length gt Electrical length Range def 3 4028234664E 038 m to 3 4028234664E 038 m m The increment UP unit DOWN is 1 cm RST value Om SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example CORR EDEL2 ELEN 0 3 Define an electrical length of 30 cm for channel 1 and port no 2 CORR EDEL2 DIST DIEL Command Reference SENSe Query the values of the mechanical length and the
275. c properties of a selected marker which is switched on in the Mode panel e Select Mkr opens a drop down list to select the Ref Marker or one of the Marker 1 10 that may be associated to the active trace e Name defines a marker name which may exceed the length of the input box and contain letters numbers blanks and special characters e Stimulus defines the stimulus value in Cartesian diagrams the x axis position of the marker e Format defines the output format of the marker value The Mode panel contains check boxes to select properties that are related to the marker positions All properties can be combined e Marker On displays the selected marker in the diagram and in the marker info field or removes it Marker configurations are only available while the marker is switched On A removed marker remembers its properties stimulus value format delta mode number when it is switched on again The marker properties are definitely lost if the associated trace is deleted e Fixed Marker freezes thecurrent response value of the selected marker The marker can still be shifted horizontally but the vertical position remains fixed if the other marker settings are changed Markers must be inside the sweep range and have a valid response value when they are fixed e Delta Mode sets the selected marker to delta mode and displays its values relative to the reference marker e Discrete Mode means that a marker can be set to discret
276. cal direction Depending on the measured quantity dB 0 Limit line type LMAX upper limit line LMIN lower limit line OFF limit line off LMAX if all optional parameters are omitted Device specific no query Assume that the current setup contains two traces named Trel and Trei respectively and that limit lines have been defined for Trcecl MMEM STOR LIM IR I 12 E keng Ee nee INVA Ib MEME eene lire e e aa E Store the limit line definition of Trel to a limit line file MMEM LOAD LIMIR gt ENRON Eee aea a VINE EE EEN Load the previously created limit line file and assign the limit lines to Trc2 Ela C2 Rolidecsichwearz RE Store the current trace data of Trci to a limit line file in Touchstone format MMEM LOAD LIM TRCI OA RON t o C chwar NW EIM Erne eA e Et LMAX Load the previously created Touchstone limit line file and assign the limit lines to Trci applying a response offset of 2 dB EE Command Reference MMEMory Show the limit line in the diagram MMEMory LOAD SEGMent lt Ch gt lt file_name gt Loads a sweep segment definition from a specified file and assigns it to a specified channel Sweep segments are defined using the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt commands lt Ch gt lt file_ name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number String parameter to specify the name and directory of the sweep segment file
277. cation which can be used to access and control the analyzer from a remote computer through a LAN connection While the measurement is running the analyzer screen contents are displayed on the remote computer and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and network resources of the analyzer To set up a Remote Desktop connection 1 Connect the analyzer to a LAN and determine its IP address see Remote Control ina LAN 2 Set up your remote computer integrated in the LAN to use Remote Desktop and create the Remote Desktop connection to the analyzer For detailed information about Remote Desktop and the connection refer to the Windows XP Help Preparing for Use Windows XP 1 8 Windows XP ATTENTION 1 8 1 The analyzer is equipped with a Windows XP operating system which has been configured according to the instrument s features and needs Changes in the system configuration can be necessary in order to Establish a LAN connection amp Customize the properties of the external accessories connected to the analyzer amp Call up additional software tools Operating system settings The operating system is adapted to the network analyzer To avoid impairment of instrument functions only change the settings described in this manual Existing software must be modified only with update software released by Rohde amp Schwarz Likewise only programs authorized by Rohde amp Schwarz for use on
278. ce Menu vacuum If no dispersion occurs the phase delay is equal to the group delay For more information see mathematical relations If a dispersive connector type i e a waveguide see Offset Model dialog is assigned to a test port related to a particular quantity then the dispersion effects of the connector are taken into account for the calculation of the phase delay and the electrical length O To account for the propagation in both directions the delay and the electrical length of a reflection parameter is only half the delay and the electrical length of a transmission parameter The formula for PD above is for transmission parameters See also introduction to section Channel Offset O The phase parameters are available only if the evaluation range contains at least 3 measurement points Q The phase evaluation can cause misleading results if the evaluation range contains a 360 deg phase jump The trace format Unwrapped Phase avoids this behavior Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics STATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics RESult ELENgth PDELay CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics EPDelay STATe Compression Point Displays or hides all results related to the x dB compression point of the trace where x is the selected compression value To obtain a valid compression point results a power Sweep must be active the trace format must be dB Mag and either an S parameter or a ratio must be measured D comoression poi
279. ce is shifted in vertical direction so that the delay at the marker position vanishes The delay represents the propagation time of the wave across the DUT so this operation corresponds to a electrical length compensation i e to a shift of the reference plane by adding to or subtracting from the test port a simulated lossless transmission line of variable length The correction must be carried out on the Delay trace but has an impact on all trace formats A standard application of Zero Delay at Marker is correction of the constant delay caused by the interconnecting cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT line stretch O The Zero Delay at Marker function modifies the Offset parameters and therefore influences the entire channel Marker Search Marker Search The Marker Search menu uses markers to locate specific points on the trace Search functions The search functions are tools for searching measurement data according to specific criteria A search consists of analyzing the measurement points of the current trace or of a user defined subrange termed the Search Range in order to find one of the following e Absolute or relative local maxima and minima minimum maximum search e Trace points with a specific response value target search e Trace segments with a shape that is characteristic for bandpass or bandstop filters bandfilter search When the search is activated the active marker is moved to the n
280. ce manual for more information lt password gt Case sensitive string variable Sending an invalid password generates error 221 settings conflict RST value neither the password nor the protection of service functions is affected by RST SCPI Command Confirmed no query Types Example SYST PASS XXXX Enter password SYSTem PRESet Performs a factory preset of all instrument settings i e all open setups or of the active setup depending on the SYSTem PRESet SCOPe settings The command is equivalent to RST and to the action of the PRESET key on the front panel O If a user defined preset is active SYSTem PRESet USER STATe ON the PRESET key initiates a user defined preset while SYSTem PRESet and RST still activate the factory preset RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example SYST PRES SCOP SING Define the scope of a preset the active setup is reset only SYST PRES Reset the parameters of the current setup SYSTem PRESet SCOPe ALL SINGIe Specifies whether a preset SYSTem PRESet RST affects the active setup only or all open setups ALL All open setups are deleted and the setup Set is created with default trace and channel settings SINGle The settings of the active setup are reset the name of the active setup and the Command Reference SYSTem parameters of all other setups remain unchanged RST value RST does not affect the preset scope setting S
281. command SWEep TIME AUTO ON Query SWEep TIME AUTO returns 1 Text Parameters Text parameters observe the syntax rules for key words i e they can be entered using a short or long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Query TRIGger SOURce returns EXT Strings Strings must always be entered within single or double quotation marks or Example CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 or CONFigure CHANnel NAME Channel 4 Block Data Format Block data is a transmission format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter with definite length has the following structure Remote Control General Description Basic Remote Control Concepts Example HEADer HEADer 45168XXXXXXXX The hash symbol introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all End or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted A 0 combination introduces a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful
282. configuration Use the Page Setup dialog or the Start Control Panel Printers and Faxes menu of Windows XP to configure the printer properties To access Windows XP you need an external keyboard see Accessing Window XP s Start Menu Preparing for Use Connecting External Accessories 1 6 4 Connecting a LAN Cable A LAN cable can be connected to the LAN connector on the rear panel of the analyzer To establish a LAN connection proceed as follows 1 Refer to section Assigning an IP Address and learn how to avoid connection errors 2 Connect an appropriate LAN cable to the LAN port Use a commercial RJ 45 cable to establish a non dedicated network connection or a cross over RJ 45 cable to establish a dedicated connection between the analyzer and a single PC Dedicated vs non dedicated network connections There are two methods to establish a LAN connection of the analyzer A non dedicated network Ethernet connection from the analyzer to an existing network made with an ordinary RJ 45 network cable The analyzer is assigned an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same network E A dedicated network connection between the analyzer and a single computer made with a cross over RJ 45 network cable The computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the analyzer The use of hubs switches or gateways is not needed however data transfer is still made
283. consists of all upper case characters the long form of all upper case plus all lower case characters On the ZVL either the short form or the long form are allowed mixed forms will generally not be recognized The instrument itself does not distinguish upper case and lower case characters Special characters A vertical stroke in the parameter list characterizes alternative parameter settings Only one of the parameters separated by must be selected Example The following command has two alternative settings FORMat DATA ASCii REAL Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the command header see SCPI Command Structure and Syntax The complete command must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Parameters in square brackets are optional as well They may be entered in the command or omitted Braces or curly brackets enclose one or more parameters that may be included zero or more times Numeric suffixes Symbols in angular brackets lt Ch gt lt Chn gt lt Mks denote numeric suffixes Numeric suffixes are replaced by integer numbers to distinguish various items of the same type The analyzer provides numeric suffixes for channels traces ports markers etc If unspecified a numeric suffix is replaced by 1 The marker suffix must be in the range between 1 and 10 the number of ports depends on the analyzer model No restrictions apply to channel tr
284. convert any point on a trace create a marker and select the appropriate marker format Marker and trace formats can be GUI Reference Trace Menu applied independently dB Mag Selects a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale of the vertical axis to display the magnitude of the complex measured quantity Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The magnitude of the complex quantity C i e C sqrt Re C Im C appears on the vertical axis scaled in dB The decibel conversion is calculated according to dB Mag C 20 log C dB Application dB Mag is the default format for the complex dimensionless S parameters The dB scale is the natural scale for measurements related to power ratios insertion loss gain etc OC Alternative Formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale It is possible to view the real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase Both the magnitude and phase are displayed in the polar diagram Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat MLOGarithmic Phase Selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a complex measured quantity in the range between 180 degrees and 180 degrees Properties The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis scaled linearly The phase of the complex quantity C i e C arctan Im C Re C appears on the ver
285. csaeeessaeeeseueeesaueesaueessaseessaeeesanaes 95 DALEN N eege 95 TO COPY NE aCIVE SEUD EE 95 To load a setup stored on an external device cccccccecseeeeceecaeeeeeeeeeaeeeceeeseeaeeeeseesaaeeeeeesegeeeeeeaas 96 SEI 96 TO Set UP a LIN Frequency ween 96 EO S r upa LogFregquenty 5 We EE 96 To Set up a Segmented Frequency ween 97 UAL ON scared ectte eo sess E sce ena E T 97 Optimizing the Measurement Goeed nne 97 To find the best Set Of SWEEP POINTS ccccssesecccccceeseceecceeeseeeccceuseceeccaeaececessaaseeecessagseeessaaseeeeess 97 To find the appropriate NOISE reduction seine 98 CUI WOM EE 98 Calibrating a Measurement Channel 98 Select and perform a Manual calibration ccccccccssssssecceeeeeeeessecceeeeeseaeesseeceeeeeesaeaneceeeeeesaeaasess 98 Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks 4 Measurement Examples This chapter provides examples for typical measurement tasks to be performed on the network analyzer To make yourself familiar with the instrument use the simple measurement examples outlined in the Getting Started chapter For a systematic explanation of all menus functions and parameters and background information refer to the Manual Control reference Simple Measurement Tasks Display Configuration The analyzer provides various tools that you can use to customize the diagram areas and control elements The following examples show how to change the display color
286. d Deleting Segments e Individual Settings e Point List Segment Import and Export OO in the Define Limit Line table The table contains an automatically assigned current number for each segment plus the following editable or non editable columns Z On Start Stop Points 19 999999996 GHz ZU ZU Hz ZU e On provides check boxes to activate or deactivate each individual segment Sweep points belonging to inactive segments only are not measured and not listed in the Point List e Start is the stimulus x axis value of the first point of the segment If the segment contains more than one Point then Start must be smaller than the Stop value If a Start value equal to or larger than the current Stop value is set Stop is adjusted to the new Start value plus 1 Hz e Stop is the stimulus x axis value of the last point of the segment If the segment contains more than one Point then Stop must be larger or equal than the Start value If a Stop value equal to or smaller than the current Start value is set Start is adjusted to the new Stop value minus 1 Hz e Points is the number of sweep points in the segment A single segment can consist of only one point however the entire sweep range must contain at least 2 distinct frequency points If Points is set to 1 then the Stop frequency is set equal to the Start frequency e The remaining columns show the channel settings for each segment They are displayed only if they are selected in t
287. d determines their position Center frequency and shape Bandwidth LBE UBE Quality factor Q see Show Results For a meaningful definition of the x dB Bandwidth criterion the trace format must be dB Mag GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace Trace gt Marker gt Marker Search Max Search Marker V Max Search Min Search Meas Next Peak Peak Search gt Format d lt Peak Search Start Marker Scale Target d Lines V EE Bandfilter Bandpass Search Center Marker Bandstop Search Marker Tracking Ref value Marker Max Marker Min Marker pelea Level SSSR ANOS Search Range zero Delay at Marker Bandfilter Tracking Search Result OFF Bandpass Search Ref to Marker e Bandpass Search activates the search for a bandpass region in the active trace starting at the absolute maximum of the active trace within the search range e Bandstop Search activates the search for a bandstop region in the active trace starting at the absolute minimum of the active trace within the search range e Bandfilter Tracking causes the bandfilter search to be repeated after each sweep e Level sets the level defining the filter bandwidth e Search Range confines the search to a subrange of the sweep e Search Result Off hides the display of the bandfilter parameters in the diagram area e Bandpass Search Ref to Marker activates the search for a bandpass region in the active trace starting at the position of t
288. d gt lt Meas Bandwidth gt Range def unit SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Sweep segment number Segment numbers must be sequential The specified segment number must be smaller or equal to the number of existing segments plus 1 Moreover segment numbers must selected such that the corresponding frequency ranges are in ascending order If one or more sweep segments with segment numbers lt Seg gt or larger exist in the current channel then all these existing segment numbers are incremented by 1 and the new segment is inserted as segment no lt Seg gt Start and stop frequency of the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STARt and SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STOP A new segment must not overlap with any of the existing segments Besides the frequency range depends on the analyzer model Hz Number of sweep points in the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep POINts 1 to 2147483647 1 1 is allowed if start and stop frequencies are equal Internal source power in the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer 40 dBm to 10 dBm The exact range depends on the analyzer model refer to the data sheet dBm UP and DOWN increment decrement the source power in 1 dB steps Delay for each partial measurement in the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWEL1 In the setting SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg
289. d to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 lt Boolean gt ON OFF Creates or removes the marker Command Reference RST value SCPI Command Types Example CALCulate OFF Device specific command or query Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to trace no 1 The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt TARget lt numeric_value gt Defines the target value for the target search of marker no lt Mk gt which can be activated using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUCTion EXECute TARGet lt Chn gt lt Mk gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Target search value of marker no lt Mk gt Depending on the format of the active trace CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat For a dB Mag trace the range is 300 dB to 200 dB the increment UP DOWN is 0 1 dB dB deg etc depending on the trace format Depending on the trace format 0 dB for a dB Mag trace Device specific command or query CALCG MARK TON Create marker no 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range gt CALC MARK TARG 10 FUNC EXEC TARG Defin
290. d to identify the active trace SDATa Read unformatted sweep data fixed parameter Returns the real and imaginary part of each measurement point 2 values per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format lt Trace_Hist_Count gt Number of sweep to be read 1 denotes the last sweep acquired 2 denotes the second last and so forth Range def unit 1 to sweep count defined via SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep COUNt Command Reference CALCulate RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific query only Example see also SWE COUN 10 Sweep History Define the number of sweeps 10 to be measured in single sweep mode EE O ALIN EAE Activate single sweep mode and start a single sweep in channel no 1 CALC DATA NSW SDAT 5 Query the results of the 5 sweep CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA STIMulus Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memory trace lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Range def unit The data is transferred in the data format defined via FORMat DATA The unit is the default unit of the sweep variable Hz or dBm or s RST value SCPI Command Device specific query only Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA CALCulate DLINe CALCulate lt Chn gt DLINe This subsystem controls the horizontal line used to mark and retrieve response values display line CALCulate lt Chn gt DLINe lt numeric_value gt Defines th
291. d use the point as Dec Separator see Trace File Formats e Output Format selects the format for the exported trace data In the Real Ilmag format each complex measurement value is represented by its real and imaginary part It is also possible to store the linear magnitude and phase Lin Mag Phase or dB magnitude and phase dB Mag Phase of each value GUI Reference Trace Menu e Content selects only the Active Trace or All Traces of the Active Channel including all data and memory traces for data export to an ASCII csv file e Dec Separator selects either the Point or the Comma if needed to process the exported data with an external application as a separator for decimal numbers exported to an ASCII csv file e Ask to Overwrite activates a message box to be displayed before an older trace file with the same file name and directory is overwritten Selecting an appropriate file format Use a Touchstone file format to export a fixed number of S parameter data traces to a file that can be evaluated with applications such as Agilent s Microwave Design System MDS and Advanced Design System ADS The data must be acquired in a frequency sweep e sip files are intended for a 1 port S parameter the reflection coefficient S11 but can be used as well to store any single S parameter Note that any S parameter will be labeled S11 in the file and in the Select Parameter box e s lt n gt p files lt n gt 2
292. different from zero lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer This numeric suffix is ignored the command affects the parameters of all ports lt Boolean gt The parameter function depends on whether the command is used as a setting command or as a query For setting command ON no effect OFF resets all length offsets to zero For query 1 at least one length offset is different from zero 0 all length offsets are zero RST value OFF SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example RST CORR OFFS Reset the instrument and query whether the length offset parameters have been reset as well The response is 0 SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection OFFSet lt port_no gt MAGNitude lt ref_loss gt Defines the offset loss at the reference frequency SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt FREQuency Use the SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt commands to define the complete set of loss offset parameters SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection OFFSet lt port_no gt MAGNitude Is equivalent to Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt CORRect ion LOSS lt port_no gt OFFSet lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt ref_loss gt Frequency dependent part of the offset loss Range def unit 200 dB to 200 dB dB The increment UP DOWN is 0 001 d
293. display formats and measured quantities see Trace Format and CALCulate lt Chn gt PARameter commands Nevertheless it is advisable to check which display formats are generally appropriate for an analysis of a particular measured quantity see Measured Quantities and Display Formats lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters See list of parameters below RST value MLOGarithmic SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Command Reference CALCulate Example EE Sie Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 The trace becomes the active trace in channel 4 CALC4 FORM MLIN DISP WIND TRAC FEED CH4TR1 Calculate the magnitude of S11 and display it in a linearly scaled Cartesian diagram Assume that the result at a sweep point is given by the complex quantity z x jy The meaning of the parameters is as follows see also table in CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat description MLINear Calculate the magnitude of z to be displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a linear scale MLOGarithmic Calculate the magnitude of z displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale PHASe Phase of z displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis UPHase Unwrapped phase of z displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis REAL Real part x displayed in a Cartes
294. displays statistical and phase information of the trace CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt Selects one out of 10 evaluation ranges to be configured with the CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER STARt and CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER STOP commands lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 lt numeric_value gt Number of the evaluation range Range def unit 1 to 10 In addition 0 denotes the non configurable Full Span evaluation range RST value 0 SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example RST CALC STAT DOM USER Query the default evaluation range The response is zero i e the evaluation range is equal to the complete sweep range CALC STAT DOM USER 1 CALC STAT DOM USER STARt 1GHZ STOP 2GHZ Select evaluation range no 1 and define the evaluation range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER STARt lt numeric_value gt Defines the start value of the evaluation range selected via CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER Command Reference CALCulate lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Start value of the evaluation range Range def unit 1000 GHz to 999 999999999 GHz Hz RST value Lowest frequency of the analyzer depending on the analyzer model SCPI Command Types Device
295. e CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 lt ASCIl_data gt Replace the dummy system error correction term with your own correction data transferred in ASCII format SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SCONnection lt port_no gt lt conn_name gt MALE FEMale Selects a connector type at a specified port lt port_no gt and its gender In contrast to SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONnection lt port_no gt this command uses a string variable to identify the connector type Command Reference SENSe lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel lt port_no gt Port numbers of the analyzer Note If the analyzer is set to use the same connectors at all ports SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection lt port_no gt PORTs ALL then a change of a connector type is valid for all ports The gender of the connectors can Still be different Parameters Connector type string parameter and gender of the connectors The gender designation MALE FEMale is not necessary and ignored for sexless connector types RST value N 50 Ohm FEM for all ports SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example RST CORR COLL SCON1 N 75 Ohm MALE SCON4 Change the connector type at port 1 from N 50 Ohm FEMto N 75 Ohm MALE The connector type at the other ports is also changed to N 75 Ohm however the gender female is maintained CORR COLL SCON4 returns N 75 Ohm FEM SENSe lt Ch
296. e The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y axis of the diagram e Ref Value Marker sets the reference value equal to the marker value e Max Marker sets the upper edge of the diagram equal to the marker value e Min Marker sets the lower edge of the diagram equal to the marker value e Zero Delay at Marker corrects the measurement result by adding or subtracting a constant group delay Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next maximum or minimum in the search range depending on the current search criterion If a Max Search or a Bandpass Search is active then the marker is set to the next maximum The next GUI Reference Trace Menu maximum is the maximum with the largest response value that is below the current marker response value e fa Min Search or a Bandstop Search is active then the marker is set to the next minimum The next minimum is the minimum with the smallest response value that is above the current marker response value By default the search range coincides with the sweep range If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 7 is created to indicate the search result Next Peak is disabled while a Target Search is active Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute NPEak CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Start Marker Sets the beginning start of the sweep range equal to the stimulus val
297. e Div corresponds to the increment between two consecutive grid lines The unit depends on the display format dB for display format dB Mag degrees for Phase and Unwrapped Phase ns for Delay U units for all other dimensionless formats Scale Div is not available grayed for circular diagrams Polar Smith Inverted Smith Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt Y PDIVision Ref Value Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram Ret Value lo qB rd e In Cartesian diagrams Ref Value defines the value of the reference line indicated by a lt symbol at the right edge of the diagram area The color of the symbol corresponds to the trace color As the Ref Value is varied the position of the reference line Ref Position is left unchanged so that the current trace is shifted in vertical direction The unit of the Ref Value depends on the display format dB for display format dB Mag degrees for Phase and Unwrapped Phase ns for Delay U units for all other dimensionless formats e In circular diagrams Polar Smith Inverted Smith Ref Value defines the value of the outer circumference Changing Ref Value enlarges or scales down the diagram leaving the center GUI Reference Trace Menu unchanged The unit is U units for all circular diagrams TIF Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of the reference value Remote contro
298. e SCPI command description Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 8000000000 for 8 GHz 4 Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example SWEep TIME AUTO Response 1 5 Text character data is returned in short form see also next section Example TRIGger SOURce Response IMM SCPI Parameters Most commands require a parameter to be specified The parameters must be separated from the header by a white space Permissible parameters are numerical values Boolean parameters text character strings and block data The type of parameter required for the respective command and the permissible range of values are specified in the command description Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the values must be in the value range 9 9E37 to 9 9E37 The exponent is introduced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Permissible unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also permissible K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the default unit is used Example SOUR RFG FREQ 1 5GHz is equivalent to SOUR RFG FREQ 1 559 Special numeric values The texts MINimum MAXimum DEFault UP and DOWN are interpreted a
299. e SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CONNection SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATA SCORR1 SCORR12 Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel lt Ch gt and calibration method SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod The analyzer test ports 1 or 2 are implicitly specified with the correction terms The setting command can be used to transfer user defined correction data to the analyzer the query returns the current correction data set ASCII or block data can be transferred depending on the selected data transfer format FORMat DATA d Use the generalized command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CDATa to transfer calibration data for arbitrary analyzer ports lt Ch gt Error term parameters Range def unit RST value Channel number of the calibrated channel If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 String parameters describing the different error terms depending on the current calibration method see table below Each term contains one complex value real and imaginary part for each sweep point The error terms consist of dimensionless complex numbers The parameters must be transferred in full length and have the following meaning SCORR1 Directivity at port 1 SCORR2 Source match at port 1 SCORR3 Reflection tracking at port 1 SCORR4 Forward isolation between port 1 and port 2 SCORRS Load match at port 2 SCORR6 Forward transmission
300. e See SYSTem PRESet USER STATe Command Reference SYSTem SYSTem SETTings UPDate ONCE Initiates an immediate update of the channel or trace settings The command has an effect if the analyzer operates in single sweep mode INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous OFF and if the display update is switched off SySTem DISPlay UPDate OFF In this scenario a change of the channel or trace settings is usually not taken into account immediately The analyzer waits until the end of the current sweep sequence and changes all settings made during the last sweep period when the next single sweep sequence is initiated Several settings can be made en bloc which generally saves time SYSTem SETtings UPDate ONCE causes the analyzer to apply the settings at once without waiting for the end of the current single sweep sequence The command has no effect in continuous sweep mode or if the display update is switched on aim O The settings are also updated when the continuous sweep mode is activated INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous ON ONCE Causes an immediate update of the settings RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example INIT CONT OFF Activate single sweep mode SYST SETT UPD ONCE Update the settings made during the current single sweep period SYSTem SOUNd ALARm STATe lt Boolean gt Switches alarm sounds on or off lt Boolean gt OFF Alarm sounds switched off ON Alarm sounds switched on RST value
301. e def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Sweep segment number Center frequency of the sweep Depending on the instrument model Hz Device specific query only SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 58 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM FREQ CENT Query the center frequency of the created segment The response is 1 2500000000E 006 Note The frequency range of the sweep segment can be changed via SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STARt and SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STOP SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency SPAN lt numeric_value gt Returns the width of the frequency range of sweep segment no lt Seg gt lt Ch gt lt Seg gt Response Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Sweep segment number Frequency span of the sweep Depending on the instrument model Hz Device specific query only SEGM INS 1MHZ 1 5MHZ 111 21DBM 0 58 0 10KHZ Create a sweep segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM FREQ SPAN Query the span of the created segment The response is 5 0000000000E 005 Note The frequency range of the sweep segment can be changed via SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STARt and SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STOP Command Reference SENSe
302. e a target search value of 10 dB and start the target search CALC MARK X Query the stimulus value corresponding to the target search result CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt TYPE NORMal FlXed Sets marker no lt Mk gt to normal or fixed mode The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON lt Chn gt lt Mk gt Parameters RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 NORMal response value changes according to the measurement result FlXed marker keeps its current response value NORMal Device specific command or query CAG Anke Cl SeALG MAR EE E Create marker 1and display it in the center of the sweep range as a fixed Command Reference CALCulate marker CALC MARK X 1GHz Shift the marker horizontally The response value remains fixed CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt X lt numeric_value gt Defines the stimulus in Cartesian diagrams x axis value of the marker no lt Mk gt which can but doesn t have to be created using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 lt numeric_value gt Stimulus value of marker no lt Mk gt Range def unit 9 9E 11 Hz to 9 9E 11 Hz Hz for frequency sweeps RST value 0 Hz SCPI Com
303. e accessible from the menus of the menu bar or from the softkey bar The front panel key bar is hidden by default to gain screen space for the diagram areas Status Bar The status bar Setup Display Config describes the current channel if the setup contains only one channel the progress of the sweep and the control mode of the analyzer LOCAL or REMOTE chi E L cAL During sweep initialization the progress bar for the sweep is replaced by a Preparing Sweep symbol During the first sweep after a change of the channel settings an additional red asterisk symbol appears chi ann You can hide the status bar and gain screen space for the diagram areas Display Elements in the Diagram Area The central part of the screen is occupied by one or several diagram areas Diagram Areas A diagram area is a rectangular portion of the screen used to display traces Diagram areas are arranged in windows they are independent of trace and channel settings A diagram area can contain a practically unlimited number of traces assigned to different channels overlay mode Diagram areas are controlled and configured by means of the functions in the Display menu and the following additional settings The settings in the Nwa Setup Display submenu arrange several windows containing one or more diagram areas within the entire screen Each window corresponds to a setup Only one setup can be active at a time and only the
304. e ats secs cee secon a EEE E EEEE EE EE EEEE E i 136 Center eegene 136 Rory QI EE egener 136 VE E EE 136 Ve BEE 137 Zero RE 137 Marker SS re E 137 Maker o ca EEN 137 WAX SOAU e DE 138 Ville E 138 Pe eC ET 139 amp SANG E 139 GUI Reference Control Menus Sigs ee ee 141 Kae N E E E E E E E E E ee 147 ST den D a A E 148 VW et BEE 149 IFAC lr aers a tecteannty sanawnees a teenecauearatucssdvenecmnaeess aapeatoustectedenimernesaatanatoceatevacp suasemapisu pcataessearatesee 150 PE Wc EE 152 Red 152 RAN 153 Ref Marker IVAN EE 153 AMEG GE 153 lt en NEEN 153 MOG OC 155 ee eh OC 155 Reger hl 156 lg TOD E 156 siele 158 Ee eee re ee E 158 Uy EE 159 HO SONG O eea R eas tusanieeainonsdtaatacaensMiovauiansdeaueenioeaitaadneniaineviaiade 160 enn ele 161 SPO MY ere 162 ES 163 OBINI EE 165 FT sc eebe 165 Tee 165 Bai 166 GG DC ee 166 POSTS eeh 167 AN ee cee re ctsec vate E A E E E 168 GUI Reference Control Menus Fa E 169 NVA e E 170 JE TE Nias E 170 UWS Gin EE 170 EE 171 tere Renee ee ee ee ee 172 EE EE 172 FE VN irate geste cine fee ee afte sce gan ne nce ora A E ef oe cn econ E eu aeiee tee E EE E 172 PRG FOS IO oria a E E E E A E ENE EA 173 RSA EE 173 Eeer 174 EK dn EE 174 Bi 175 OW EAI EEN 176 LNA gaer EE 177 SUE EE 178 BG FI Bisulg lt 178 0 4740 0 CTIE 182 Global Limit Check Om 183 Channel MEU eege 184 Ceno D EE 184 PT E 185 Re 186 Step Aten Dl Eegeregie 187 REO eea E E E E E E E 187
305. e data stored in the analyzer s internal memory Trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data REAL format depending on the FORMat DATA setting If the block data format is used it is recommended to select EO as receive terminator SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator EOT Reserved Trace Names The commands in the TRACe menu use the following ZVR compatible parameters to specify traces Command Reference TRACe CH1DATA CH2DATA Active data trace of channels 1 to 4 CH3DATA CH4DATA TRACe COPY TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession DEFine CH1MEM CH2MEM Active memory trace associated to the CH3MEM CH4MEM active data trace CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA respectively IMPLied Active data trace addressed with CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession DEFine lt Chn gt CHMem Active memory trace assigned to the CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession DEFine IMPlied trace MDATA1 MDATA2 Memory trace named Mem lt n gt Tre lt m gt MDATA3 MDATA4 The trace name is unique because lt n gt TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL TRACe CLEar TRACe COPY MDATA5 MDATA6 counts all data and memory traces in MDATA7 MDATA8 the active setup TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession DEFine TRACe CLEar
306. e gt 354 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe BOTTom lt lower_value gt ANAC MANIC I E A E E E E E 354 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt s TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt numeric_value gt SAG MAIN EE 355 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt numeric_value gt en nn EE 356 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RPOSition lt numeric_value gt SACS nn WE 35 7 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe TOP lt upper_value gt lt trace_name gt 357 Unite for DISPlay eru Tune ects tes he cairo naittncennte eins chatter bonus ch cation iinet alata aa aalan 358 ul lee 358 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe Boolean 359 DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt MARKer STATe lt BOOle ans cccccccccseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeas 359 DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt 359 DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt TRACe COLor STAT lt Boolean gt ccccccceseseeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeans 362 DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute menu key 362 DISPlay MENU KEY SELect menu key 363 DISPlay WINDow lt Whd gt MAXiMiZe lt BOOlGAN gt ccccccccccccccccceeeeeeeseseseeeenaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 363 DISPlay WINDow lt Whids gt STAT lt BOOl ans gt cccccsssscccccceeeeeeee
307. e limit line for the active trace on a segment by segment basis In each segment the limit line is defined as a straight line connecting two points Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to efficiently create and handle limit lines e To define a limit line with only a few segments use Add Segment and edit each segment in the segment table individually e Use the multiselection feature to edit several limit line segments at the same time e Select a data or memory trace as a limit line mport Trace or import a trace stored in a file Import File e Save your limit lines to a file so you can re use or modify them later sessions Save Limit Line Recall Limit Line Define Limit Line for rect Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response A Upper 300 kHz 40 2995 MHz 997 dB 397 dB Upper 40 2995 MHz 00 297 MHz 9397 dB 4 012574 dB Upper 00 297 MHz 120 2955 MHz 4 012574 dB 4 00647 dB Upper 120 2955 MHz 160 294 MHz A 00647 dB A 024794 dE Upper 160 294 MHz 200 2925 MHz 4 024794 dB 3 97636 dB Add Segment Del All Segments The Define Limit Line dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the limit line see below The active trace is indicated in the title bar of the dialog The three buttons below the table extend or shorten the segment list e Add Segment adds a new segment to the list The new segment is a copy of the previously active segment and in
308. e lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect DELete lt cal_name gt Repeat Prev Cal Reopens the Measure Standards dialog of the calibration wizard to repeat and optimize the previous calibration without necessarily repeating the measurement of all standards Repeat Prev Cal is active only if Keep Measurement Data for gt Repeat Cal lt in the Measure Standards dialog was enabled when the last calibration for the active channel was successfully completed Additional conditions for repeating a calibration Changing the channel settings can cause incompatibilities between the current instrument state and the previous calibration In particular the following conditions must be met GUI Reference Channel Menu e The configuration of all ports needed must be correct see Select Connector Physical Port Number e The Sweep Type must be unchanged If incompatible settings occur the analyzer displays an error message and does not repeat the calibration Correction Off Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel Correction Off is active only if a valid system error correction is assigned to the active channel see Cal State in the Calibration Manager A red label Cal Off appears behind the trace list if the system error correction is switched off see also Calibration Overview Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection STATe OBN OFF Port Ext
309. e lt Ch gt CONTinuous OFF lt Ch gt Channel number lt No_of_Sweeps gt Number of consecutive sweeps to be measured Range def unit 1 to 999 RST value 1 SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Command Reference SENSe Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA NSWeep SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep DWELI lt delay gt Defines the Meas Delay time for each partial measurement lt Ch gt Channel number lt delay gt Meas delay before each partial measurement Range def unit 0s to 3 179551E 002 s s Changing the delay leaves the number of points unchanged but has an impact on the duration of the sweep RST value Os SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example FUNC XFR POW S12 Activate a frequency sweep and select the S parameter S12 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SWE TIME Query total sweep time SWE DWEL 1 Set a delay of 1 s for each partial measurement SWE TIME Query total sweep time The time is extended by the delay times the total number of partial measurements per sweep SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep POINts lt no_points gt Defines the total number of measurement points per sweep Number of Points lt Ch gt Channel number 1 lt no_points gt Number of points per sweep Range def unit 2 to 4001 1 RST value 201 SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example FUNC XFR POW S12 Activate a frequency sweep a
310. e offset model parameters are used for the calculation of the S parameters for the calibration standards GUI Reference Channel Menu associated with the connector type provided that they are derived from a circuit model Add Modify Standard dialog e For TEM type lines the relative permittivity is needed for the conversion of and ZVR type Loss in units of dB saqrt GHz into an Agilent type Offset Loss in units of GQ s and vice versa see Offset andLoad parameters The Electrical Length and Delay values in the Modify Offset dialog are directly entered and therefore independent of e For waveguides the low frequency cutoff frequency f is important because no wave propagation is possible at frequencies below f If a standard is measured in order to acquire calibration data the analyzer checks the low frequency cutoff If the start frequency of the sweep range is below fe then the calibration wizard generates and error message The offset model parameters are not used except in the context of calibration The offset parameterdefinitions seeMechanical Length are based on independent values Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CONNection Add or View Modify Standard Defines displays or modifies the properties of the calibration standards in a particular calibration kit This dialog is opened from the Add or View Modify Calibration Kit dialog Add Standard or View Modify Standard buttons Depend
311. e position response value of the horizontal line lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters See list of parameters below Range def The data is transferred in the data format defined via FORMat DATA The unit is unit the default unit of the measured parameter see CALCulLate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine RST value Command Reference CALCulate SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example RST CALC DLIN 10 Define the position of the horizontal line in the default dB Mag diagram at 10 dBm CALC DLIN STAT ON Display the defined horizontal line CALCulate lt Chn gt DLINe STATe lt Boolean gt Switches the horizontal line on or off lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Horizontal line on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CALC DLIN CALCulate FORMat CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat This subsystem determines a post processing of the measured data in order to obtain various display formats CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat MLINear MLOGarithmic PHASe UPHase POLar SMITh ISMith GDELay REAL IMAGinary SWR COMPlex MAGNitude Defines how the measured result at any sweep point is post processed and presented in the graphical display Note The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of
312. e sweep points only If discrete mode is switched off the marker can be positioned on any point of the trace and its response values are obtained by interpolation e All Mkrs Coupled couples the markers of all traces in the active setup to the markers of the active trace see Coupled Markers Style qualifies how the selected marker is displayed on the screen Show Info selects the marker info to be displayed at the Marker Position in the marker info field or in a GUI Reference Trace Menu separate Table below the diagram area The display options may be selected simultaneously or all switched off The table provides more information than the marker info field Marker Trace Stimulus Response Delta Discr Fixed Tracking Search Range CG ref Treci 3 440171000 GHz 6 426 dE P Iw Iw Off Full Range wot Trci 4 000150000 GHz 5 364 dE TT Off Full Range Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mks STATe ON CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt TYPE NORMal FlXed CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt DELTa STATe ON CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MODE CONTinuous DISCrete CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt COUPIled STATe ON Export Mkrs Calls up a Save As dialog to store the current marker values to a marker file The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export marker values By default the marker file extension is txt The file contains all traces in the active setup together with their names and measu
313. e the following lower and default upper limit line segments Deg Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response i 200 kHz 5 GHz 20 dB 20 dB 2 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 10 dB O dE 3 Upper 300 kHz a Hz 20 dB 70 dB d Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 0 dB 10 dB CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segments in the active diagram CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer FEED lt stimulus_offset gt lt response_offset gt lt trace_name gt Generates a lower limit line using the stimulus values of a data or memory trace and specified offset values lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace This trace provides the stimulus data for the limit line unless another trace lt trace_name gt is Command Reference lt stimulus_offset gt Range def unit RST value lt response_offset gt Range def unit RST value lt trace_ name gt SCPI Command Types Example CALCulate specified Stimulus offset value used to shift all imported limit line segments in horizontal direction 1000 GHz to 1000 GHz Hz 0 Hz Response offset value used to shift all imported limit line segments in vertical direction 10 dB to 10 dB dB 0 dB Name of the selected trace as used e g in CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine If no trace name is specified the analyzer uses the active trace no lt Chn gt Device specific no query CALC LIM LOW FEED 1 GHZ 10 Use
314. e the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt X OFFSet lt numeric_value gt Shifts the trace lt WndTr gt in horizontal direction leaving the positions of all markers unchanged lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt numeric_value gt Stimulus offset value Range def unit 1000 GHz to 1000 GHz Hz for frequency sweeps The range and unit depends on the sweep type SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TYPE RST value 0 SCPI Command Device specific with query Types Command Reference DISPlay Example SROI 3sDISP WIND TRACSX OFFS EE WIND EINE NCE Ola ais 10 Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz vertically by 10 dB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y OFFSet lt Magnitude gt lt Phase gt lt Real gt lt Imaginary gt Modifies all points of the trace lt WndTr gt by means of an added and or a multiplied complex constant The response values M of the trace are transformed according to BE ee eee pe Oats OU rate KEE lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of
315. e_Name gt or db lt Trace_ Name gt for output format Real Imag Lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase respectively The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog lt imTrace1 gt Second response value of first trace im lt Trace_Name gt for output format Real Imag ang lt Trace_Name gt for output formats Lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog GUI Reference Trace Menu lt relrace2 gt __ first response value of second trace re lt Trace Name mag lt Trace_Name gt or db lt Trace_ Name for output format Real Ilmag Lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase respectively The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog lt imTrace2 gt second response value of first trace im lt Trace_Name gt for output format Real lmag ang lt Trace Name gt for output formats Lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog first response value of second trace HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ allowed for imported files The analyzer alway uses HZ for exported data second response value of first trace im lt Trace_Name gt for output format Re Im ang lt Trace_Name gt for output formats lin Mag Phase or dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog The trace data is arranged as described in the header Different values are separated by semicolons
316. east significant bit D7 the most significant bit 2 Control bus with five lines IFC Interface Clear active LOW resets the interfaces of the instruments connected to the default setting ATN_ Attention active LOW signals the transmission of interface messages inactive HIGH signals the transmission of device messages SRQ Service Request active LOW enables the connected device to send a service request to the controller REN Remote Enable active LOW permits switchover to remote control EOI End or Identify has two functions in connection with ATN ATN HIGH active LOW marks the end of data transmission ATN LOW active LOW triggers a parallel poll 3 Handshake bus with three lines DAV Data Valid active LOW signals a valid data byte on the data bus NRFD Not Ready For Data active LOW signals that one of the connected devices is not ready for data transfer NDAC Not Data Accepted active LOW signals that the instrument connected is accepting the data on the data bus The analyzer provides the following functions to communicate via GPIB bus e Interface functions e Interface messages HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors e Instrument messages Interface Functions Instruments which can be controlled via GPIB bus can be equipped with different interface functions The interface function for the network analyzer are listed in the following table Control character Interface function SH1 Handsha
317. easurement results are no longer valid Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt PHOLd MAX OFF Restart Hold Restarts the max hold peak hold function for the active trace discarding the old maximum measurement results This softkey has no effect unless Max Hold On is active GUI Reference Trace Menu Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt PHOLd MAX OFF Marker gt The Marker gt uses the active marker to define the sweep range scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset Trace Trace F Marker gt Marker Search V Marker d Max Search Meas Next Peak ee S Start Marker Scale d Ge R Stop Marker Center Marker Det Value Marker Max Marker Min Marker zero Delay at Marker The functions in the upper section provide search functions to locate specific points on the trace e Marker Search opens a submenu with all marker search functions e Max Search sets the active marker to the absolute maximum in the search range e Next Peak sets the active marker to the next maximum or minimum in the search range depending on the current search criterion The following functions use the stimulus value of the active marker to define the sweep range e Start Marker sets the beginning of the sweep range equal to the marker value e Stop Marker sets the end of the sweep range equal to the marker value e Center Marker sets the center of the sweep range equal to the marker valu
318. ecific no query Types Example Rol CALC DIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define a limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC DEM CONT E EE Shift the segment by 1 Hz The modified limit line segment extends from 1000000001 Hz to 2000000001 Hz CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit DATA lt type gt lt start_stim gt lt stop_stim gt lt start_resp gt lt Stop_resp gt lt type gt lt start_stim gt lt stop_stim gt lt start_resp gt lt stop_resp gt Defines the limit line type the stimulus and response values for a limit line with an arbitrary number of limit line segments Command Reference CALCulate CO In contrast to CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA this command does not overwrite existing limit line segments The defined segments are appended to the segment list as new segments lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt type gt Identifier for the type of the limit line segment Range def unit lt start_stim gt lt stop_stim gt lt Start_resp gt lt stop_resp gt Range def unit RST values SCPI Command Types Example 0 Limit line segment off segment defined but no limit check performed 1 Upper limit line segment 2 Lower limit line segment Stimulus and response values of the first and last points of the limit line segment Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules
319. ector cannot be used simultaneously with the AF output connector on the front panel unless it is configured as a video output AUX PORT Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Interfaces 9 pole SUB D male connector provides output signals for controlling external devices The voltage levels are of TTL type max 5 V The pin assignment is shown below Input I or Voltage Range Output O or Bidirectional B SUPPLY 5 V max 250 mA Supply voltage for external circuits Reserved for future use READY FOR Signal indicating that TRIGGER the instrument is ready to receive trigger signal Attention Watch the pin assignment carefully A short circuit may damage the instrument HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors GPIB Interface Option R amp S FSL B10 GPIB interface in compliance with IEEE488 and SCPI A computer for remote control can be connected via this interface To set up the connection a shielded cable is recommended See GPIB Bus Interface above in this chapter bema DC Power Supply Option R amp S FSL B30 A DC power supply can be connected alternatively to the AC power supply see DC Power Supply and Battery in chapter 1 The connector is supplied with the other accessories of the option and is connected according to the following diagram Input I or Voltage Range Output O or Bidirectional B 11 V to 28 V Positive voltage egen Ground nd SS 0 C 2 J C Ee Caution
320. ects teen aa RNE 197 RI 12 DS 345 DOON IN EE 263 SET EE 272 Ee 496 ENEE 272 EE AE EE A E ANIES AEN PE EEE 272 PE E 272 Examples Reflection measurement 40 EE 314 External Accessories wsicarninasixse sie ie nesencnaatslaseissessiaancenateleetedd 30 File MEMU seisen e ED 107 Firmware UDCALS sieno areke aae EEST 37 Fixed WARK GR a geer ergeg nan TE aE EE TRE 314 e ei EEN 163 298 Frequency E E 218 P UO Y E r sania anaseenseaearesias 97 POT PANGI ekes a NE ET 11 Front Panel Keys eelere VE 47 EIS Ee e 253 GPIB bus interface ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaueeeaseeeeeeeess 496 GPIB EX e E 253 Guided calibration ccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaueeseseeeeeeees 191 Handshake CTT 496 Helo me M ee 248 Eegeregie 501 lols E 501 Ier 501 en RL 496 IEC SYSTEM BUS sercar iaeaea 496 IEC IEEE Bus Interface cccccccccceeeeseseseeneeseeeeeeeeeees 496 Jet 253 JEE 272 Jee 496 Ire 86 Ju eet e ein DANA E 127 INE MMI eege ee 263 Instrument Messages AANEREN 496 Instrument Setup E 21 Instrument control commande AAA 260 merac Geal rean een cSicees N NO 496 IP address Eeer 33 OT aeren 272 Keyboard OSC OON eebe 49 Keys SSA e E 15 DEE E E 14 ei EE 16 ORROD aa 16 SEU a E E 12 EE Ee 16 E EE 11 Keyword SCPI commande 260 aG E re e 162 LAN remote Control 33 Limit line programming examples cece eeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 58 te ei lu 175 Bio gl 299 Lin Ge Une sonimni Ear 96 441 Linear 2 port
321. ed RF signals from the DUT response signals e With a single test port it is possible to generate a stimulus signal and measure the response signal in reflection e With 2 test ports it is possible to perform full two port measurements see S Parameters section in Chapter 3 e The two network analyzer ports are equivalent If the Spectrum Analysis option R amp S ZVL K1 is active test port PORT 2 serves as an AC coupled input for the analyzed RF signal PORT 1 is not used POAT 1 MAX 77 gei 30 OC Attention The maximum input levels at all test ports according to the front panel labeling or the data sheet must not be exceeded In addition the maximum input voltages of the other input connectors at the front and rear panel must not be exceeded USB Connectors Two single Universal Serial Bus connectors of type A master USB used to connect a keyboard recommended PSL Z2 order number 1157 6870 03 mouse recommended PSL Z10 order number 1157 7060 03 or other pointing devices a printer or an external storage device USB stick CD ROM drive etc HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors Using an adapter cable R amp S NRP Z4 a power sensor can be connected as an alternative to the power sensor connector on the rear panel that is only available with option Additional Interfaces R amp S FSL B5 coo O For maintaining the EMI conformity of the R amp S ZVL only appropriate USB accessories may be
322. eeeesaaaaeeeesaaaeeeeessaaeeeeseesaeeeeeeeeaas 478 Condensed Programming Eeleren EEN 483 UNO ON EE 483 Modeiag a Max Hold F uncio Nse e 485 Retrieving the Results of Previous weens 486 Programming Examples Basic Tasks 8 Programming Examples This chapter contains detailed program examples The syntax and use of all SCPI commands is described in the SCPI Reference chapter For a general introduction to remote control of the analyzer refer to chapter Remote Contro For an overview of special remote control features of the network analyzers refer to section NWA Remote Control Features in Chapter 5 Basic Tasks Typical Stages of a Remote Control Program A typical remote control program comprises the following stages Very often steps 3 and 4 or steps 2 to 4 must be repeated several times MOTE O All example programs in this section have been developed and tested by means of the GPIB Explorer provided with the network analyzer No extra programming environment is needed Basic Instrument Settings Programming task Adjust the basic network analyzer settings to your measurement tasks optimizing the instrument for fast measurements Considerations for high measurement speed The measurement speed depends on the sweep time but also on an efficient preparation of the instrument and on proper command synchronization The following items should be kept in mind For maximum speed the basic channel settin
323. eeesseesssesseeeesnseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeees 364 DISPlay WINDow lt Whd gt TITLe DATA lt StrinQ gt cccccccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 364 DISPlay WINDow lt Whnd gt TITLe STATe lt BOOlean gt cceeeeeeeeeee cece eee eeeeeeceeeeeeeeeetetecesneeeeees 365 DISPlay WINDow lt Whd gt TRACe lt Wnhd Tr gt DELete o oo ccccccccccceeeeeeeesssesssneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 365 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt trace name 366 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt X OFFSet mnumentc value 366 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y OFFSet lt Magnitude gt lt Phase gt lt Real gt AMAA EE 367 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE lt trace_name gt 367 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe BOTTom lt lower_value gt AC NE EE 368 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe PDIVision lt numeric_value gt Eeler e rn E E 369 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt numeric_value gt PACS UNIS EE 370 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RPOS ition lt numeric_value gt eaa NO h seer ha east cca ecco E 370 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe TOP lt upper_value gt lt trace_name gt 371 Units for DISPlay Commande 372 FRI EE 372 Sei EE 37
324. eerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrrrn 221 E R ne te ee eee 147 184 EC a 423 SAn serans ene anne r re i near eee eee 189 Startup procedure NEEN 29 US B16 orra E 272 Status Registers ccccccccccceccececeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 272 Status reporting system e TE 281 SA e E EE E EE E EE E E E oneness 272 Stimulus Define Segments sssesssseerreesrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrereren 221 ln UU CG 175 184 Stop Define Segments ssssssseererrerrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrn 221 Ee 147 184 Eege EE 423 AUN and eels eae nea teenth E Rane E E A A E AET 263 tele E 486 WEEP EE 217 228 EE 97 441 Sweep FY DS casinanalesivcrcininiasiamcaivenciesenenevectnentan dude 218 426 geet 163 Syntax elements SCPI overnview 263 System Configuration ccccccccccecccccececceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 245 Target Search wescecestsstecsscersesvevsasestsasaserececasaieediaseveseransuess 314 Target NV AMG sssrin 314 TCP IP BG Vel E 499 Text parameter ege rte andexnaieeerenees 263 BR e ele E 314 Trace CM eee ee E O E A TEA 113 Eu 113 PIS IN ONY E tances cacntes wuancoue sides aan weno dase san us enarScatuauecs 113 programming examples cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 469 ee 58 ee ln 113 Trace Ee 121 MACKAN saci iene ene ae 141 314 DODGE WAU EE 175 VXI 11 EUR 499 WINJOWS E 36 PINS EE 87 DOOM cease tia case Sone cae ean A E 171 Z DANAINIGS ear 86 160
325. efer to section Scaling Diagrams to learn more about the different methods and tools for diagram scaling Getting Started 2 1 3 Reflection Measurements Tre ERR op Mag 5096 Ref 15 dB 1 po pot tt Poe S T S S S S y Oad LS e DP Ss me ER Ee AL JETT Lo E Za EE CAT Center 5 25 GHz Pwr 10 dem Span 500 MHz Instrument Calibration The analyzer provides sophisticated calibration methods for all types of measurements Which calibration method is selected depends on the expected system errors the accuracy requirements of the measurement on the test setup and on the types of calibration standards available In the following we assume that the calibration kit ZV Z21 contains an appropriate male short standard with known physical properties With a single short standard it is possible to perform a normalization compensating for a frequency dependent attenuation and phase shift in the signal path Due to the analyzer s calibration wizard calibration is a straightforward menu guided process 1 Unscrew the DUT and connect the male short standard from calibration kit ZV Z21 2 Press the CAL function key to open the calibration menu 3 Activate Start Cal One Port P1 Normalization Short to open the calibration wizard for the selected calibration type Getting Started Reflection Measurements Calibration a E x JE v Same Connector Type at All Ports Connector Ref Imp Calibration
326. eference marker and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK REF X 1GHz Set the reference marker to the beginning of the sweep range Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence Y Returns the response in Cartesian diagrams y axis value of the reference marker The reference marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence STATe ON lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value Response Response value of the reference marker Range def unit Depending on the measured quantity unit depending on the marker format see CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat RST value SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK REF ON Create the reference marker and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK REF Y Query the measurement value at the reference marker position CALCulate lt cChn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch BFILter RESult STATe lt Boolean gt Shows or hides the bandfilter search results in the diagram area lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value lt Boolean
327. efficient S42 CALC4 PAR MEAS Ch4Tr1 Command Reference CALCulate Query the measured quantity The response is S12 CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt string gt S11 Y S11 Z S11 Creates a trace and assigns a channel number a name and a measurement parameter to it The trace becomes the active trace in the channel but is not displayed com O To display the trace defined via CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine create a window DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON and assign the trace to this window DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe FEED see example below CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure changes the measurement parameter of an existing trace To select an existing trace as the active trace use CALCulate PARameter SELect You can open the trace manager DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute Trace Manager to obtain an overview of all channels and traces including the traces that are not displayed coc O In FW versions lt V1 90 traces created with CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine must be selected explicitly CALCulate PARameter SELect in order to become active traces lt Ch gt Channel number lt Ch gt may be used to reference a previously defined channel If lt Ch gt does not exist it is generated with default channel settings lt String gt Trace name e g Trc4 See Rules for trace names in the Trace Manager description S11 Measureme
328. efine User Color Scheme dialog Display Display Config Color Scheme An acoustic signal Fail Beep and a TTL signal indicating pass or fail can be generated in addition Start 1 GHz Pur 10 dBm Stop 7 GHz O Limit check and display of the limit lines are independent of each other With disabled limit check the limit line can still be displayed however no display elements indicating a limit excess will appear Limits are checked at the actual measurement points whereas a limit failure is indicated for the trace segments on both sides of a failed point A small number of points causes wide trace segments so that the out of tolerance regions can appear wider as they are If no limit lines are defined for the active trace the limit check can be switched on but will always PASS the trace Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit STATe ON OFF CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer STATe ON OFF CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer STATe ON OFF GUI Reference Trace Menu CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit FAIL Fail Beep On Activates or deactivates the fail beep The fail beep is a low tone acoustic signal that is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit No fail beep can be generated if the limit check is switched off A checkmark appears next to the menu item when the fail beep is enabled Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SOUNd STATe ON OFF Define Limit Line Opens a dialog to define th
329. efines the target value for the target search of marker no lt Mk gt which can be activated using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUCTion EXECute TARGet Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt TARget lt Chn gt lt Mk gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Target search value of marker no lt Mk gt Depending on the format of the active trace CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat For a dB Mag trace the range is 300 dB to 200 dB the increment UP DOWN is 0 1 dB dB deg etc depending on the trace format Depending on the trace format 0 dB for a dB Mag trace Device specific command or query Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MAXimum Selects a search mode for marker no lt Mk gt and initiates a maximum search The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute MAXimum lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MINimum Selects a search mode
330. efines the trigger source external trigger Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be optionally inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in this manual The full command length must be recognized by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standard Some commands are considerably shortened by omitting optional mnemonics Example TRIGger SEQuence SOURce EXTernal This command defines the trigger source external trigger The following command has the same effect TRIGger SOURce EXTernal An optional mnemonic must not be omitted if its effect is additionally specified by a numeric suffix Long and short form The key words feature a long form and a short form Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example TRIGger SOURce EXTernal TRIG SOUR EXT Remote Control General Description Messages O The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the manual the instrument itself is case insensitive Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to section Parameters Exa
331. egment file Sweep segment files are ASCII files with the default extension seglist and a special file format d To import a segment list file seglist you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application You must enable the segmented sweep separately GUI Reference Channel Menu Remote control MMEMory LOAD SEGMent lt Ch_no gt file_ name MMEMory STORe SEGMent lt Ch_no gt file_ name File Format for Sweep Segments The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export sweep segment data By default the sweep segment file extension is seglist The file starts with two comment lines containing the version and a third line reproducing the header of the segment list The following lines contain the entries of all columns of the segment list including the ndividual Segment Settings that may be actually hidden Example of a sweep segment file The segmented sweep range On Start Stop Points L ne 300 kHz 300 002 kHz 401 z Iw 300 002 kHz 300 004 kHz 401 a W 4 5 GHz GHz 401 is described by the following sweep segment file T version ae strama start Frequency MHz stop SE intNo of Points true Et 0 300000 2000 000000 4 LO 000000 true Et 2000 O0o000n 3000 O0O0000 JoL 10 000000 true Et 4500 000000 3000 000000 401 10 000000 d The sweep segment file actually contains more columns listing all channel settings of the
332. egmented sweep range Remote control SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DELete SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DELete ALL Individual Settings The options in the Individual Settings panel can be used to vary the channel settings of every individual segment in the list Individual settings Name Power l MeasDelay Meas Bandwidth M Selectivity The first sweep segment is created with the channel settings defined for general sweep types When any further sweep segment created it uses the channel settings of the previously active segment Each selected checked option adds a column to the segment list e Name adds a column to assign a name to each segment A segment name is a string GUI Reference Channel Menu that may contain letters numbers and special characters e Power defines the internal source Power for each individual sweep segment e Meas Bandwidth defines the Meas Bandwidth for each individual sweep segment e Selectivity defines the Selectivity of the IF filter used for each sweep segment e MeasDelay sets a delay time allowing the DUT to settle before the hardware settings of the analyzer are changed and a new partial measurement is started Remote control SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer LEVel SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DEFine SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent lt
333. elect wiew Help S alle gll ele CALCulate1 FORMat POLar Rohde schwarz L 6 10000 7 006 0 90 OF K R6 6 9 66 67 68 622 R74 CALC ulate FORMat POLar Command set Parameter oof ABORL fil A4 9 CALCulatel 4 PHASe D BTOoth UPHase DELTamarker1 ACPower i CONTral oi EA ESPectrum ell D No error 1 commands errors 4 Refer to the GPIB explorer s help system for more information Switchover to Remote Control On power up the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be operated via the front panel controls The instrument is switched to remote control as soon as it receives a command from the controller If the instrument is controlled via RSIB or VX 11 protocol the alternative commands REM and LOC can be used to switch from manual to remote control and back While remote control is active operation via the front panel is disabled with the exception of two softkeys The instrument settings are optimized for maximum measurement speed the display is switched off Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation Ea d l Display On OT Remote Control Active Display Off Ss The two softkeys in the remote screen are used to modify or quit the remote state Go to Local switches the instrument to local state Display On Off switches the display on or off CO On Off states Switching on the display means that the analyzer
334. elected the dialog title is View Modity Calibration Kit The functionality of both dialog versions is the same O lf Add Kit is used for a predefined calibration kit the View Modify Standard button can be used to open the View Modify Standard in lt kit_name gt dialog check the standard parameters All other controls are inactive GUI Reference Channel Menu Connector Type MBISE Ei Hekit i Agilen Mode Standard Open EL Through iff Ca a Heo _ In its upper part the Add or View Modify Calibration Kit dialog contains several controls to do the following e Select a predefined or user defined Connector Type e Insert the unique Name of the new kit and assign a Label e Qualify whether or not the Offset and Load parameters for the standards are defined and displayed in Agilent Mode O Assigning a label to user defined calibration kits is optional However the label is displayed in many dialogs and can provide useful information about the kit e g its serial number The table in the center of the dialog lists all standards in the new kit together with either their gender or their port assignment see Restrict Port Assignment and the label if defined Clicking a standard opens the View Modify Standard in lt kit_name gt dialog where it is possible to change the parameters Four buttons can be used to change the entries in the list e Copy Standards from opens a dialog to copy standards from
335. ement IF bandwidth and other measurement settings for each sweep segment 4 Close the Define Segments dialog 5 Click Sweep Type Segmented Frequency lf the active diagram is a Cartesian diagram the x axis is linearly scaled and ranges from the lowest to the highest frequency in all segments Optimization Optimizing the Measurement Speed Minimizing the measurement time per sweep contributes to a high measurement throughput The following parameters have an influence on the sweep time To find the best set of sweep points Limit the measurement to the stimulus range that you need for your device 1 Click Channel Center or Span to access the submenu defining the sweep range 2 To define a sweep range confined by a start and a stop frequency use Start and Stop Alternatively to define a sweep range of definite width around a known center frequency e g an expected peak use Center and Span 3 Alternatively use the marker functions to define the sweep range Use the minimum number of points that will produce an acceptable resolution 1 Click Channel Sweep Number of Points and reduce the number of sweep points Use the segmented sweep to focus on different subranges of the sweep using optimized channel settings for each subrange 1 Setup a segmented frequency sweep as described in Segmented Frequency 2 Optimize the number of points and the noise reduction settings for each individual sweep segment
336. ensate for a possible mismatch in the test setup Each offset parameter is assigned to a particular port The delay parameters affect the phase of all measured quantities related to this port the loss parameters affect their magnitude An offset at port 1 affects the S parameters S411 S214 S412 Some quantities depend on the whole of all S parameters so they are all more or less affected when one S parameter changes due to the addition of an offset length To account for the propagation in both directions the phase shift of a reflection parameter due to a given length offset is twice the phase shift of a transmission parameter If at a frequency of 300 MHz the electrical length is increased by 250 mm A 4 then the phase of Sz increases by 90 deg whereas the phase of S4 increases by 180 deg Equivalent relations hold for the loss If the trace is displayed in Delay format changing the offset parameters simply shifts the whole trace in vertical direction The sign of the phase shift is determined as follows e A positive offset parameter causes a positive phase shift of the measured parameter and therefore reduces the calculated group delay e A negative offset parameter causes a negative phase shift of the measured parameter and therefore increases the calculated group delay GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center Span H Pwr Du SCH tut cal Sweep V Repeat Prey Gal Channel Seleck Correction OP
337. ensions The Port Extensions menu defines a length offset and a loss for the test ports The offset parameters complement the system error correction compensating for the known length and loss of a non dispersive and perfectly matched transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT Length offset parameters Definition LE The Delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the transmission line The Electrical Length is equal to the Delay times the speed of light in the vacuum and is a measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane For a line with permittivity sand mechanical length Lmecn the delay and the electrical length are calculated as follows EE Delay 5T Electrical Length Luar 4E C Electrical Length Mechanical Length or Delay are coupled parameters When one of them is changed the other two follow For a non dispersive DUT the delay defined above is constant over the considered frequency range and equal to the negative derivative of the phase response with respect to the frequency see mathematical relations The length offset parameters compensate for a constant delay which is equivalent to a linear phase response If a dispersive connector type i e a waveguide see Offset Model dialog is assigned to a test port that is related to a particular quantity then the phase of the quantity is calculated taking dispersion effects into acc
338. ent classes of instrument states or errors The following status registers belong to the general model described in IEEE 488 2 The STatus Byte STB gives a rough overview of the instrument status The IST flag combines the entire status information into a single bit that can be queried in a parallel poll The Event Status Register ESR indicates general instrument states The status registers below belong to the device dependent SCPI register model The STATus OPERation register contains conditions which are part of the instrument s normal operation Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System The STATus QUEStionable register indicates whether the data currently being acquired is of questionable quality The STATus QUEStionable LIMit lt 1 2 gt register indicates the result of the limit check STB and SRE The STatus Byte STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers The STB represents the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the summary bit of the remaining bits of the status byte om and Service Request The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register on a bit by bit basis The STB corresponds to the CONDition part of an SCPI register indicating the current instrument state The SRE corresponds to the ENABle part of an SCPI register I
339. entifiers N50 N75 N50 Q or N 75 Q connectors PC7 PC35 PC292 PC 7 PC 3 5 or 2 92 mm connectors USER lt no gt User defined connectors UserConn1 UserConn2 lt ckit_name gt String parameters containing the name of a calibration kit available on the analyzer RST value A RST does not change the assignment between connector types and calibration kits SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example MMEM LOAD CKIT Ree elie Green NINN let e lem Ee ie waren cl He Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit calkit from the default cal kit directory CORR CKIT N50 SEL EH Assign the imported kit to the N 50 connector type assuming that the cal kit name stored in New_kit calkit reads New_kit Cal kit naming conventions Calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters The string contains the cal kit name used in the Calibration Kits dialog a Q in the name must be replaced by Ohm e g e Newkit1 denotes the user defined calibration kit NewKit1 Command Reference SENSe e N 50 Ohm Ideal Kit denotes the N 50 2 Ideal Kit e Z V Z21 typical denotes the cal kit ZV Z21 typical SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT SELect lt conn_name gt lt ckit_name gt Selects the calibration kit to be used for a specified connector type lt conn_type gt O The command is suitable for connector types with arbitrary user defined names For sta
340. enu Use the marker functions The Autoscale function also works for polar diagrams Using Marker Functions Marker functions are a convenient tool for scaling in particular magnifying diagrams without entering explicit numeric values You simply place a marker to a trace point and use the marker values to change the sweep range or move the trace relative to the vertical axis A mouse makes it easier to activate click or move drag and drop markers Getting Started Basic Tasks Trace Trace gt Dee Marker Search i Marker o Max Search Meas t Next Peak emer S Start Marker Scale i ma Stop Marker Center Marker Ref value Marker Max Marker Min Marker ero Delay at Marker To set the sweep range use one of the following methods Define Start and Stop values 1 Create two normal markers e g the markers Mkr 7 and Mkr 2 and place them to the desired start and stop values of the sweep range 2 Activate Mkr 1 and click Trace Marker gt Start Marker 3 Activate Mkr 2 and click Trace Marker gt Stop Marker Use a definite Span 1 Create a marker and set it to delta mode 2 The analyzer automatically creates a reference marker in addition to the delta marker 3 Place the reference marker to the desired start value of the sweep range d Set the value of the delta marker equal to the desired positive or negative span D Activate the delta ma
341. epending on the measurement task and the measured quantity the measurement at each point can consist of several partial measurements with definite hardware settings GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center Span H Pur Du V Ca d Sweep Type V Channel Select Humber of Points Frequency Step Size Meas Delay Restart w Single All Chans Define Restart Average On Average Factor Restart Average The Sweep menu provides the following settings e Sweep Type defines the sweep variable frequency power time and the position of sweep points in the sweep range e Number of Points sets the total number of measurement points over the sweep range e Frequency Step Size sets the distance between two consecutive frequency sweep points e Meas Delay delays the start of each sweep e Restart aborts the current measurement and restarts a new sweep sequence e f Single All Chans is selected the measurement is terminated after a single sweep or a group of single sweeps defined in the Define Restart dialog e Define Restart opens a dialog to specify how many sweeps are repeated e Average On activates or de activates the sweep average With average on the measurement results are averaged over a selected number of consecutive sweeps Average Factor e Average Factor defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be averaged e Restart Average starts a new average cycle clearing all previous results and thu
342. er opens a dialog to perform the previous actions systematically rename channels Active and inactive traces and channels A window can display several diagram areas simultaneously each with a variable number of traces One of these traces is active at each time The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram area Trc 4 in the figure below dB Mag 10 dB Ref dB Phase El Refi Lin Wag 10 dB Ref dm Phase 45 Reto A mouse click onto a trace in the list selects the trace as the active trace Alternatively use the functions of the Trace Traces menu The active channel is the channel belonging to the active trace The channels of all traces in a diagram area are listed at the bottom of the diagram together with the Stimulus values and the display colors of all traces The active channel is highlighted Ch1 in the example below with two associated traces Start 300 kHz Che Start 500 kHz Chi Start 5 MHz A mouse click onto a trace in the trace list selects the channel associated to the trace as the active channel Channels with no traces are not indicated in the diagram areas but can be accessed via the GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Manager You can monitor the channel activity using the OUTPut lt Ch gt UPORt VALue lt numeric_value gt command and the output signals at pins 8 to 11 of the USER CONTROL connector Next Channel Selects the next channel in a
343. erties correspond to the column headers in the Trace Manager e The two radio buttons qualify whether the traces in the table are sorted in ascending or descending order according to the property selected in the pull down list Remote control No command display configuration only Trace Statistics Opens a submenu to evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the entire trace or of a specific evaluation range and calculate the x dB compression point GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace d Traces d Marker Data gt Mem Marker b Math BatalMen wees i Math Data Ea Me Format d SC 2a i Scale k oy Show Data Lines d Show Mem Trace Statistics Mint Max Pk Pk Phase Delay El Length Smoothing On Smoothing Aperture Mean Std Dew Import Export Data V Lie Eval Range Shift Response Value Shift Stimulus value compression Point Define Compression Value Max Hold Gn Restart Hold e Min Max Pk Pk displays or hides the essential statistical parameters of the trace in the selected evaluation range e Phase Delay El Length displays or hides the phase delay and the electrical length of the trace in the selected evaluation range Eval Range e Mean Std Dev displays or hides the arithmetic mean value and the standard deviation of the trace in the selected evaluation range e RMS displays or hides the RMS value of the trace in the selected evaluation range e
344. es generated on a German system contain commas The network analyzer expects the dot as a separator and displays an error message when a csv file with commas is loaded Please install the VNA Cal kit Manager V2 1 on an appropriate e g Englisch Windows version to avoid trouble pm cal kit files PNA Cal Kit Editor The network analyzer can import and process cal kit files created with the PNA Cal Kit Editor The files use the extension prn the data format is identical to the csv format The decimal separator used by the PNA Cal Kit Editor depends on the language version of the Windows operating system Cal kit files generated on an English operating system contain dots the ones generated on a German system contain commas The network analyzer expects the dot as a separator and displays an error message when a prn file with commas is loaded Please install the PNA Cal Kit Editor on an appropriate e g Englisch Windows version to avoid trouble Remote control MMEMory LOAD CKIT file_ name MMEMory STORe CKIT kit_name file_name SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT INSTall lt file_name gt Add or View Modify Calibration Kit Combines different standards to form a new calibration kit assigning a connector type and further attributes name labels This dialog is opened from the Calibration Kits dialog If the Add Kit button is selected the dialog title is Add Calibration Kit if the View Modify Kit button is s
345. essa a a aaa e aE a aa 298 LS EE EE 299 Oy Be Le E E 299 LA MARK Ol nisreen nescence mpeecemadenutncco setae EEEE EA 314 CPC ile El E E cersersce cpr ree a sserss teeta testes sreena Weed wettest ons ace nueshase seed apenteenssossenasee 314 Ee MA le E 331 CAREC lee E E MA RE 331 GALCUlate un EE 332 CA CGulate Ch P Aameter nnne 332 TEEN Ta E 336 CALGulate lt Chin gt PHO DEE 336 7 1B bl ehic me el dl e at eae eee an ethene See tenn eee keen ee eee eee 337 CALCulate lt Chin gt SMOoitning cscccccsceeseeeeeecesssccsseeeeeccesccsseneteceecccccssseneeesessceasseeeeessscaeesses 337 KEE 338 CALCulate lt Chin gt STATIStiCs AA 338 CALCulate IN SMUT E 342 CA CGulate Chp H AhNetiom annen ennan 342 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation G lle UI 343 CGONoure CHANoel Ch 343 CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CAT alo ccccccccccccccessessseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaeaaseeeseees 343 CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME lt Ch_ name 343 CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME ID Lech Names 0 00 eccceceeeeeceeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaanneeeeees 344 CONFigure CHANnel lt Chs gt STATe Boolean 344 GS ii a cts c teen E a ace aaanaaawacacteaeeaacuaacsteasaeeneaseneeens 344 DIA NOSIC e 344 DIAGnostic SERVice FUNCtion mumerc va lugs 345 DIAGnostic SERVICE SFUNCTION lt StriNG gt cccccecccccseeccecesseeeceeeceeceeecesseaeeeesaueeessaeeesseaeeessaaes 345 MII 345
346. essage or a warning alarm sounds or during calibration The settings are also valid if the instrument is remote controlled Dialog Transparency varies the transparency of all dialogs on a scale between 0 and 100 0 transparency means that dialogs completely hide the diagram area in the background With a maximum transparency of 100 the dialogs are still visible but clearly show the underlying traces and display elements Keep Measurement Data for gt Repeat Previous Cal lt causes the raw measurement data of the standards to be stored after the calibration is completed This function is equivalent to the parameter in the Measured Standards dialog of the calibration wizard see detailed description there but applies to all calibrations No of Sliding Match Positions defines the maximum number of different positions to be measured if a sliding match standard sliding load is used for calibration The different positions appear in the Measure Standards dialog of the calibration wizard A sliding match calibration is valid after three calibration sweeps at different match positions however calibration sweeps at additional positions can still improve the accuracy In general 4 to 6 positions are recommended e Presets The tab specifies whether a Preset affects the Active Setup or all open setups nstrument A preset does not change any of the properties listed in the Resets tab of the System Configuration dialog In the Preset Configura
347. et for both the user name and the password To protect the analyzer from unauthorized access it is recommended to change the factory setting 1 7 1 Assigning an IP Address Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the analyzer can be obtained in different ways H the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP all address information can be assigned automatically E H the network does not support DHCP or if the analyzer is set to use alternate TCP IP configuration the addresses must be set manually Preparing for Use Remote Control in a LAN By default the analyzer is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous analyzer configuration ATTENTION Address selection A If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the analyzer to the LAN Contact your network administrator to obtain a valid IP address because connection errors can affect the entire network Manual TCP IP configuration To disable dynamic TCP IP configuration and enter the TCP IP address information manually proceed as follows 1 Obtain the IP address and subnet mask for the analyzer and the IP address fo
348. ettings inthe Trace Scale menu Selection of the measured quantity Trace Meas is possible for the data trace but disabled for the memory traces Channel settings made for a memory trace act on the associated data trace Some of the channel settings for a data trace e g the Stimulus range also affect the display of the memory traces O If the sweep type of a data trace is changed so that the stimulus ranges of the data traces and the memory traces become incompatible all coupled memory traces are removed from the diagram area and deleted Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH MEMorize Math Data Mem Activates the mathematical mode where the active data trace is divided by the last generated memory trace The division is calculated on a point to point basis Each measurement point of the active trace is GUI Reference Trace Menu divided by the corresponding measurement point of the memory trace The result of the division is a mathematical trace and replaces the active data trace in the diagram area The mathematical trace is updated as the measurement goes on and the analyzer provides new active trace data This function is disabled unless a memory trace is coupled to the active data trace Trace coupling ensures that the two traces have the same number of points and that the mathematical trace Data Mem is well defined Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH EXPRession SDEFine lt string gt CAL
349. ew Basic Concepts The trace can be complemented by the following display elements plotted with the same color Reference value for all traces The Reference Value is indicated with a triangle llat the right edge of the diagram and a dashed horizontal line The value and position of the triangle can be changed in order to modify the diagram scale and shift the trace vertically Measured quantity for the active trace The measured quantity is indicated in the left upper corner of the diagram A trace can be either a data trace a memory trace or a mathematical trace see Trace Types below Context menu of the diagram area A right mouse click on any point of the diagram area except the marker info field and the measured quantity info opens a context menu Maximize Overlay All Split All Add Trace Add Diag Area Trace Delete Diag 4rea Title Color Scheme The settings correspond to the most common commands in the Nwa Setup Display and Nwa Setup Display Config menus Trace Types The analyzer uses traces to display the current measurement result in a diagram area but is also capable of storing traces to the memory recalling stored traces and defining mathematical relations between different traces There are three basic trace types Data traces show the current measurement data and are continuously updated as the measurement goes on Data traces are dynamic traces Memory
350. ext point that meets the search criteria If the trace contains no markers a Mkr 7 is created and used for the search The search result is displayed in the marker info field If no search result can be found the marker remains at its original position Some search functions can be activated repeatedly in order to find all possible search results Moreover the analyzer provides a Tracking mode where the search is repeated after each sweep GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace Trace gt F amp F Marker gt Marker Search Max Search Marker b Max Search Min Search Meas Next Peak Peak Search gt Format lt Peak Search Stark Marker Scale d Target d l Stop Marker Lines F Bandfilter b Center Marker Marker Trackin Det Value Marker Max Marker Det Peak Min Marker Ge Search Range zero Delay at Marker e Max Search sets the active marker to the absolute maximum in the search range e Min Search sets the active marker to the absolute minimum in the search range e Peak Search gt sets the active marker to the next peak with higher stimulus value e lt Peak Search sets the active marker to the next peak with lower stimulus value e Target opens a submenu to search for a specific value on the trace e Bandfilter opens a submenu to search for trace segments with characteristic bandfilter shape and calculate the filter parameters e Marker Tracking causes the search to be repeated after e
351. eyboard simplifies the entry of data K A printer generates hard copies of the screen contents In addition the analyzer provides an interface for network integration A LAN connection can be established in order to access the hard disk or control the analyzer from an external PC Connecting a Mouse A USB mouse can be connected to one of the Universal Serial Bus connectors on the front panel The mouse is detected automatically when it is connected It is safe to connect or disconnect the mouse during the measurement Mouse configuration Use the Start Control Panel Mouse menu of Windows XP to configure the mouse properties To access Windows XP you need an external keyboard see Accessing Window XP s Start Menu Operating the analyzer does not require a mouse You can access all essential functions using the keys on the front panel 1 6 2 Connecting a Keyboard A keyboard can be connected to one of the Universal Serial Bus connectors on the front panel The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected The default input language is English US It is safe to connect or disconnect the external keyboard during the measurement Preparing for Use Connecting External Accessories Keyboard configuration Use the Start Control Panel Keyboard or Regional and Language Options menu of Windows XP to configure the keyboard properties To access Windows XP you need an external ke
352. f or Open m standard For transmission standards the first two characters denotes the genders on both ends e g FFTHrough MFTHrough MMTHrough Through ff Through mf or Through mm standard For a complete list of standard types refer to the table of standard types below String parameters to specify the configured standard lt Ckit_Name gt lt Std_No gt and numeric parameters defining its properties See detailed description below Command Reference SENSe SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example CORR CKIT N50 FOPEN ZV Z21 0 1 8E 010 0 0151 0 0 0 22 0 22 0 0022 Define the properties of the open f standard for the N 50 connector type contained in the ZV Z21 calibration kit Assign a valid frequency range of 0 Hz to 18 GHz an electrical length of 15 1 mm O dB loss and define the polynomial coefficients of the fringing capacitance as 0 fF 0 22 fF GHz 0 22 fF GHz 0 0022 fF GHz The parameters in the SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt std_type gt and SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt commands have the following meaning lt Loss gt lt Z0 gt lt C0 gt lt LO gt lt C1 gt lt L1 gt lt C2 gt lt L2 gt lt El_Length gt Electrical length offset parameter of the standard Default unit is m To b Loss offset parameter of the standard e specified without unit implicit unit is dB
353. f a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from O to 1 a Service Request SRQ is generated on the GPIB bus Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored because it corresponds to the summary bit of the STB Related common commands The STB is read out using the command S7B or a serial poll The SRE can be set using command SAE and read using SRE The bits in the STB are defined as follows Fa Meaning 3 QUEStionable status summary bit This bit is set if an EVEN bit is set in the QUEStionable register and the associated ENABIle bit is set to 1 The bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be further pinned down by polling the QUEStionable register 5 ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit implies an error or an event which can be further pinned down by polling the event status register IST Flag and PPE In analogy to the Service Request SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be queried by means of a parallel poll The Parallel Poll Enable PPE register determines which bits of the STB contribute to the IST flag The bits of the STB are ANDed with the corresponding bits of the PPE with bit 6 being used as well in contrast to the SRE The IST flag results from the ORing of all results Remote Control General
354. f a timeout occurs during a function call A timeout may occur in the following situations while waiting for an SRQ with the function RSDLLWaitSrq if no acknowledgment is received for data sent to an instrument with RSDLLibwrt or RSDLLilwrt if no response from server to a data request with function RSDLLibrd Or RSDLLilrd CMPL 0100 This bit is set if the reply of the IEC IEEE bus parser is completely read If a reply of the parser is read with the function RSDLLilrd and the buffer length is not sufficient the bit is cleared HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors Error variable iberr If the ERR bit 8000h is set in the status word iberr contains an error code that specifies the error The RSIB has error codes of its own independent of the National Instrument interface code IBERR_MEM No free memory available IBERR_TIMEOUT Timeout has occurred IBERR_BUSY The RSIB interface is blocked by a function not yet completed Windows is not blocked for example by function RSDLLibrd if data is still to be transmitted in response to this function In this case a new call is possible Further calls are however rejected by RSIB DLL with error code IBERR_BUSY IBERR_FILE Error in reading from or writing to a file IBERR_SEMA Bo Error upon creating or assigning a semaphore only under Unix Count variable ibcntl The variable ibcntl is updated with the number of bytes transmitted on every read
355. f the Marker menu Delta Mode Ref Mkr gt Mkr Mkr Format The active marker is also used for the Marker Functions It appears in the diagram with an enlarged marker symbol and font size and with a dot placed in front of the marker line in the info field Active menu The menu containing the last executed command If the softkey bar is displayed Display Config View Softkey Labels on then the active menu is indicated on top of the softkey bar Active trace manual control Trace that is selected to apply the settings in the Trace menu The active trace is highlighted in the trace list of the active diagram area It can be different from the active trace in remote control Active trace remote control One trace of each channel that has been selected as the active trace CALCulate Ch PARameter SELect lt Trace Name gt Many commands e g TRACE act on the active trace It can be different from the active trace in manual control Cal pool The cal pool is a collection of correction data sets cal groups that the analyzer stores in a common directory Cal groups in the pool can beapplied to different channels and setups Calibration The process of removing systematic errors from the measurement system error correction See also TOSM TOM TRM TRL TNA Calibration kit Set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector family Calibration standard Physical device that has a known or predictable magnitude
356. fe see Loss parameters Definition above GUI Reference Channel Menu Electrical One Way Loss Length nIe at Freg Freq Dn el dl 0 dE S 1 GHz Dn 3 7 0 dE 3 1 GHz Om F S 0 dB S 1 GHz Om 8 S 0 dB F 1 GHz Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt FREQuency SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt OFFSet Mechanical Length Opens a dialog to define length offset parameters for the physical test ports as mechanical lengths and permittivities The dialog also contains the DC loss the loss at the reference frequency Losst and the reference frequency fre see Loss parameters Definition above Mechanical Length a Mechanics Pemitviy eck One Way Loos Length Factor at Freg Omi wo 1 00062 0 99969 e dB Um Ei 1 00062 0 99969 e O dE Om G 1 00062 0 99969 ie dB Om A 1 00062 0 99969 E Uc Same Dielectric at Each Port The Mechanical Length dialog contains the three editable columns Mech Length Permittivity e and Velocity Fact The velocity factor is 1 sqrt e and is a measure for the velocity of light in a dielectric with permittivity s relative to the velocity of light in the vacuum velocity factor lt 1 see Offset parameters Definition above Permittivity and velocity factor are coupled parameters O Click Same Dielectric at Each Por
357. ffset Model describes the mode of wave propagation in the transmission lines of the standards associated with the connector type The buttons below are used to add and delete user defined connector types Deleting a connector type will also delete all calibration or adapter kits assigned to it Impact of reference impedance The reference impedance Ref Imp Zo for the connectors is a critical value that represents an input value for various parameter conversions Zp enters into e The calculation of the S parameters for the calibration standards associated with the connector type provided that they are derived from a circuit model Add Modify Standard dialog e The calculation of impedance and admittance parameters GUI Reference Channel Menu Storing connector type settings Calibration kits and connector types are global resources the parameters are stored independently and available irrespective of the current setup The connector type settings are always stored together with the associated calibration kit parameters It is possible to export and import the connector settings using Export Kit and Import Kit in the Calibration Kits dialog The name polarity and reference impedance of a user defined connector can be changed in the table The button in the Offset Model column opens the Offset Model dialog to define the propagation mode in detail coc O After assigning a calibration or adapter kit to
358. fied the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory lt port1_no gt Port assignment One port number for one port standards two port number for lt port2_no gt two port standards If the port numbers are omitted the cal kit data is valid for all ports RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example MMEM LOAD CKIT SDAT N 50 Ohm Default Kit MOPEN Test SE Ee El E l Load the file Test sip from the current directory in order to define the properties of an Open m standard in the cal kit named Default Kit for the N 50 Q connector type Assign the label Test data and specify that the data Standard data is only valid for port nos 1 Connector and cal kit naming conventions Connector and calibration kit names must be entered as string parameters The strings contain the Command Reference MMEMory connector and cal kit names used in the Calibration Kits dialog a Q in the name must be replaced by Ohm e g e Newkit1 denotes the user defined calibration kit Newkit7 e N50 Ohm ldeal Kit denotes the N 50 2 Dummy Kit e Z V Z21 typical denotes the cal kit ZV Z21 typical MMEMory LOAD CMAP lt file_name gt Loads a color scheme from a specified NWA color scheme file lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be loaded The default extension manual control for color scheme files is Color
359. flection standards the first character denotes the gender e g FOPEN MOPEN Open f or Open m standard The following reflection standards are supported MOPen FOPen MSHort FSHort OSHort MOSHort FOSHort MMTCh FFTCh MREFLect PREF Lect For transmission standards the first two characters denotes the genders on both ends e g FFSNetwork MFSNetwork MMSNetwork Symm network ff symm network mf or symm network mm standard For a complete list of standard types refer to the table of standard types below Parameter String parameters to specify the configured standard list lt Conn_Names gt lt Ckit_Name gt lt Std_No gt and numeric parameters defining its properties See detailed description below The following transmission standards have only 8 parameters until lt Z0 gt Command Reference RST value SCPI Command Types Example SENSe MMTHrough MF THrough FF THrough MMLine MFLine FFLine The following reflection and transmission standards have only 5 parameters until lt Max_Freq gt MSMatch FSMatch MMATten MFATten FFATten Device specific command or query see examples below CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm Test Kit Define the properties of the open f standard for a N 50 Q connector type in cal kit Test Kit See also example for SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm Query the
360. for Limit Line Definition Hz for frequency sweeps dBm for power sweeps s for time sweeps see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain no limit line defined after RST Device specific with query RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 1 5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1 5 GHz using default response values CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response values of 2 dBm and 3 dBm CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit DELete ALL Deletes all limit line segments lt Chn gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Device specific no query RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 1 5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1 5 GHz using default response values CALC LIM DATA 1 1500000000 2000000000 2 3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 5 GHz and 2 GHz assigning response values of 2 dBm and 3 dBm CALC LIM DEL ALL Command Reference CALCulate Delete both created limit line segments CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit DISPlay STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the entire limit line including all segments associated to the active trace lt Chn gt Channel number
361. for marker no lt Mk gt and initiates a minimum search The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute MAXimum lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MODE CONTinuous DISCrete Sets marker no lt Mk gt to continuous or discrete mode The marker doesn t have to be created before CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON the mode can be assigned in advance lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Parameters CONTinuous marker can be positioned on any point of the trace and its response values are obtained by interpolation DISCrete marker can be set to discrete sweep points only RST value CONT SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK MODE DISC MARK2 CONT Create marker 1 in discrete mode and marker 2 in continuous mode CALC MARK ON MARK2 ON Command Reference CALCulate Display the two markers Due to the different modes the horizontal position can be different CALCulate lt C
362. function temporarily switches the device to the LOCAL state VB format Function RSDLLibloc ByVal ud ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibloc short ud short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLIbloe short wd short ibsta short i1berr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle Example RE E eegen ud absta iberr ibe enti After switchover to LOCAL state the instrument can be manually operated via the GUI On the next access to the instrument by means of one of the functions of the library the instrument is switched again to the REMOTE state HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors RSDLLibeot This function enables or disables the END message after write operations VB format Function RSDLLibeot ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibsre short ud short wv short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibsre short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcnt Ll Parameter ud Device handle v 0 no END message 1 send END message Example FODLLibecot ud 1 ibsta ibe err beer If the END message is disabled the data of a command can be sent with several successive calls of write functions The END message must be enabled again before sending the last data block RSDLLibrsp This function
363. ge Auto Offset involves a two step procedure e An Auto Length correction modifies the phase of the measured quantity minimizing the residual group delay The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affected e The auto loss correction modifies the magnitude of the measured quantity leaving the auto length corrected phase unchanged Preconditions for Auto Offset effect on measured quantities and exceptions d Auto Offset is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase information as a function of the frequency and if the interpretation of the results is Unambiguous e A frequency sweep must be active e The measured quantity must be an S parameter a converted impedance or a converted admittance The effect of Auto Offset on S parameters is to eliminate a linear phase response and account for a loss as described above Converted admittances or impedances are calculated from the corresponding Auto Offset corrected S parameters Stability factors are not derived from a single S parameter therefore Auto Offset is disabled Calculation of loss parameters The loss is assumed to be given in terms of the DC loss LosSpc the reference frequency fe and the loss at the reference frequency Loss The formula used in the Auto Loss algorithm is similar to the formula for manual entry of the loss parameters see Loss parameters Definition The result is calculated according to the following rules e The reference frequenc
364. ge between 1 GHz and 2 Command Reference CALCulate GHz using default response values CALC LIM STAT ON FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALC CLIM FAIL Query the result for the composite limit check As only one trace is tested the response should be equal to the previous response CALCulate DATA CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA This subsystem provides access to the results of a measurement The trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data REAL format depending on the FORMat DATA setting If the block data format is used it is recommended to select EOI as receive terminator SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator EOI CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA FDATa SDATa MDATa SCOR 1 SCORr27 Reads the current response values of the active data trace or memory trace and reads or writes error terms lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 Parameters See list of parameters below Range def unit The data format is parameter dependent see below The unit is the default unit of the measured parameter see CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine RST value SCPI Confirmed command for error terms or query Command Types Example RST SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 CALC DATA
365. gn the four 2 port standard S parameters to the traces and display them in up to four diagram areas Diag Area 1 Diag Area 2 Diag Area 3 Diag Area 4 Important remote control features for this program example The following command sequence illustrates the structure of the remote commands discussed in section Basic Remote Control Concepts In particular it shows that A trace can be created and handled without being displayed Traces are referenced by trace names The active trace of a channel is often referenced by the Programming Examples Basic Tasks channel suffix Diagram areas are referenced by a window suffix lt Wnd gt An additional suffix lt WndTr gt in the DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt commands numbers the different traces in a diagram area In remote control it is possible to display the same trace in several diagram areas The analyzer provides several commands allowing a smooth transition between remote and manual control 1 One channel two traces one diagram area Reset the instrument creating the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The default measured quantity is the forward transmission S parameter S21 The default format is dB Mag RST Create a second trace in channel 1 assign the format Phase A and display the new trace in the same diagram area CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc2 S21 the trace becomes the active trace but is
366. gnal levels at the input connectors are all within the specified maxima Signal outputs are correctly connected and not overloaded The instrument is dry and shows no condensation Non observance may cause damage to the instrument K A A 1 3 1 Unpacking the Instrument and Checking the Shipment The instrument is shipped together with its mandatory accessories in a cardboard box In order to unpack its contents proceed as follows 1 Open the cardboard box 2 Remove the accessories packed into the box and take the instrument out of the packaging 3 Check the shipment against the list of accessories to ensure that all items are included 4 Remove the two protective caps from the front and rear and carefully inspect the analyzer to make sure that it was not damaged during shipment lt p gt Should the instrument be damaged immediately notify the forwarder who shipped the instrument to you and keep the container and packing material Equipment returned or sent in for repair must be packed in the original container or packing with electrostatic protection It is recommended to keep at least the two protective caps for front and rear side in order to prevent damage to the controls and connectors Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation 1 3 2 Instrument Setup The network analyzer is designed for use under laboratory conditions either on a bench top or in a rack The general ambient conditi
367. gnized only RST value LFEoi SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example SYST COMM GPIB RTER EOI Set the terminator to EOI Command Reference SYSTem SYSTem DATA SIZE ALL AUTO Defines the block size for the data transfer between the instrument hardware and the software The block size has an impact on the display of traces and on the readout of trace data using the commands of the TRACe Of CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA subsystems ALL AUTO RST value SCPI Command Types Example Data transfer with full buffer size The data for each sweep are transferred together so that each displayed trace contains the data of exactly one sweep The same is true for queried trace data The trace is displayed or updated at once the sweep progress is not visible on the screen To make sure that all queried trace points stem from the same sweep you can also use single sweep mode INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous OFF and the common command OPC Data transfer with an automatically determined block size In general the data blocks comprise only part of a trace therefore the sweep progress is visible on the screen On the other hand the displayed trace can show the results of two consecutive sweeps AUTO Device specific command or query SYST DATA SIZE ALL Select data transfer with full buffer size in order to view the trace data from a single sweep SYSTem DISPlay COLor DBACkground LBACk
368. gram areas and distributes the traces among the three areas e Quad Split splits the active window into four diagram areas and distributes the traces among the four areas e Split Manager opens a dialog to arrange the diagram areas in the active window GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu e Title opens a dialog to define a title and display it in one of the diagram areas Delete Diag Area Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area Delete Diag Area is disabled if the setup contains only one diagram area In manual control each setup must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace O To restore a diagram area that was unintentionally deleted use the Undo function Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe OFF Dual Split Splits the window horizontally into two diagram areas and distributes the traces among the two areas separating diagrams with different trace Format and Channel settings e g Cartesian and polar diagrams ch dB wag 10 dB Ref Odo dB ag 10dB Ref D d Start 3 GHz Start 200 kHz Stop GHz Polar O 2 Us Ref 1 U Chi Start 3 GHz Stop GHz To vary the size and position of the two diagram areas drag and drop the separating frames or use the Split Manager Remote control No command display configuration only Triple Split Splits the active window into three diagram areas and distributes the traces among the three areas
369. ground BWLStyles BWSolid Selects the color scheme for all diagram areas in the active setup DBACkground Dark background LBACkground Light background BWLStyles Black and white line styles BWSolid Black and white solid RST value SCPI Command Types Example RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command Device specific command or query SYST DISP COL LBAC Select a light background e g to generate color hardcopies Command Reference SYSTem SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt Boolean gt ONCE Switches the display on or off while the analyzer is in the remote state The command has no effect while the analyzer is in the Local operating state d Switching off the display speeds up the measurement This command may have an impact on the update of trace and channel settings see SYSTem SETTings UPDate lt Boolean gt ON OFF Switch the display on or off If the display is switched on the analyzer shows the diagrams and traces like in manual control ONCE Switch the display on and show the current trace This parameter can be used for occasional checks of the measurement results or settings The measurement is continued however the measurement results are not updated Compared to the ON setting ONCE does not slow down the measurement speed RST value OFF SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example SYST DISP UPD ON Switch the di
370. gs should be set while the sweep is stopped and with a minimum of sweep points It is advisable to increase the number of points after all instrument settings have been performed and to initiate the sweep after the test setup has been completed Execution of the INITiate IMMediate command is fastest in synchronized mode Insertion of fixed waiting periods into the command sequence is possible but generally less efficient The sweep time depends on several parameters discussed in section Optimizing the Measurement Speed In particular it is recommended to select the best set of sweep points e g using the segmented sweep Reset the instrument switch off the measurement after one sweep reduce the number of sweep points RST INITiate1 CONTinuous OFF SENSe1 SWEep POINts 2 Programming Examples Basic Tasks Avoid a delay time between different partial measurements and before the start of the sweeps is default setting SENSe1 SWEep TIME AUTO ON TRIGger1 SEQuence SOURce IMMediate Select the widest bandwidth compatible with your measurement SENSe1 BANDwidth RESolution 10 A Adjust your sweep points to your measurement task e g using a segmented sweep SENSe1 SEGMernt Adjusting the Test Setup In general the preparatives described above can be used for a series of measurements In between the measurements it is often necessary to change the test setup e g in order to replace the
371. h as solvents thinners acetone etc acids bases or other substances The address of our support center and a list of useful contact addresses can be found on the Contact page Storing and Packing The network analyzer can be stored at the temperature range quoted in the data sheet When it is stored for a longer period of time the instrument should be protected against dust The original packing should be used particularly the protective caps at the front and rear when the instrument is to be transported or dispatched If the original packing is no longer available use a sturdy cardboard box of suitable size and carefully wrap the instrument to protect it against mechanical damage Preparing for Use Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down 1 5 Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down To start the analyzer proceed as follows If you use the AC power supply make sure that the instrument is connected to the mains supply and switch the power switch on the rear panel to position On KE If you use the DC power supply make sure that the instrument is connected and press the standby key on the front panel The analyzer automatically performs a system check boots the Windows XP operating system and then starts the analyzer NWA application If the last analyzer session was terminated regularly the NWA application uses the last setup with all instrument settings To shut down the analyzer proceed as follows
372. he Define Restart dialog e Define Restart opens a dialog to specify how many sweeps are repeated e Average On activates or de activates the sweep average With average on the measurement results are averaged over a selected number of consecutive sweeps Average Factor e Average Factor defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be averaged e Restart Average starts a new average cycle clearing all previous results and thus eliminating their effect on the new cycle The new cycle is started as fast as possible an ongoing sweep is terminated immediately GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Select The Channel Select submenu provides functions to create and delete channels and select a channel as the active channel No direct access via Channel front panel keys Center Span Pur Du Cal SWEED Next Channel Channel Select Select Channel Add Chan Trace Add Chan Trace Diag Area Delete Channel Channel Manager e Next Channel selects the next channel as the active channel disabled if only one channel is defined e Select Channel opens a box to select an arbitrary channel of the active setup as the active channel disabled if only one channel is defined e Add Chan Trace creates a new channel and a new trace in the active diagram area e Add Chan Trace Diag Area creates a new channel and a new trace in a new diagram area e Delete Channel deletes the active channel e Channel Manag
373. he Individual Segment Settings panel GUI Reference Channel Menu O When a new segment is defined or when the stimulus range of a segment is modified the analyzer automatically checks whether it is compatible with the existing segments The Start and Stop values of the existing segments are modified so that there is no overlap between any of the segments If this is not possible e g because of the limited frequency range of the analyzer the entry of the new Start or Stop value is denied d Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values Remote control The commands in the SENSe lt Chn gt SEGMent subsystem define all sweep segment settings Inserting and Deleting Segments Three buttons on the left side below the table in the Define Segments dialog extend or shorten the segment list e Insert New Segment adds a new segment to the list The new segment is inserted after the active segment The segment numbers of all segments after the new segment are adapted To avoid overlapping segments the new segment ranges from the Stop value of the previously active segment to either the Start valueof the next segment or the maximum frequency of the analyzer The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a sweep range e Delete Segment removes the selected segment from the list e Del All Segments clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new s
374. he active marker Bandfilter mode can be selected for a broad range of measured quantities Trace Measure provided that the display format is dB Mag To obtain real filter parameters the measured quantity must be a transmission S parameter and a frequency sweep must be performed For other quantities e g reflection parameters the Bandfilter functions are still useful to analyze general trace properties In some display formats e g Phase the bandfilter search is disabled Bandpass Search Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates bandfilter Tracking A bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion specified by means of the x dB Bandwidth parameter When Bandpass Search is activated the analyzer uses or creates the four markers Mkr 1 to Mkr 4 to locate the bandpass region GUI Reference Trace Menu e Mkr 7 indicates the maximum of the peak e Mkr 2 indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus x dB Bandwidth e Mkr 3 indicates the point on the right edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus x dB Bandwidth e Mkr 4 indicates the center of the peak calculated as the arithmetic mean value of the LBE and UBE positions For a symmetric peak the positions of Max and Center coincide The band filter search results are displayed in the bandfilter info field
375. he impedance for waveguides is frequency dependent If a waveguide line type is selected in the Offset Model dialog the Char Impedance field is disabled and indicates varies instead of a definite impedance value Moreover no Loss or Offset Loss can be set Offset parameters and standard types Offset parameters are used to describe all types of standards except the Sliding Match and the Attenuation e The Sliding Match is a one port standard with variable load parameters sliding load and unspecified length The reference impedance is fixed and equal to the characteristic impedance of the connector type No load and offset parameters need to be set e The Attenuation is a two port standard which is fully matched in both directions the reflection factor at both ports is zero No load and offset parameters need to be set Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt control Modify Load Specifies the load parameters for a particular calibration standard describing its terminal impedance This GUI Reference Channel Menu Modify Load Open P H Gei Open Short Match i OR The circuit model for the load consists of capacitance C which is connected in parallel to an inductance L and a resistance R both connected in series e Ris the constant resistive contribution It is possible to select a special value Open for Q so that the inductance coefficients are irre
376. he largest of all existing trace numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Trace Manager E O To create a new trace in a new channel use Channel Channel Select Add Chan Trace Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace Name gt lt Meas Parameter gt DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED Add Trace Diag Area Creates a new trace in a new diagram area and assigns the trace to the current channel The new trace is created with the trace and channel settings of the former active trace but displayed with another color The new trace is named Trc lt n gt where lt n gt is the largest of all existing trace numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Trace Manager Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace Name gt lt Meas Parameter gt DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON GUI Reference Trace Menu DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED Delete Trace Deletes the current trace and removes it from the diagram area Delete Trace is disabled if the setup contains only one trace In manual control each setup must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace To restore a trace that was unintentionally deleted use Undo Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DELete lt Trace Name gt Assign Diag Area Assigns the active trace to another diagram area A popup window offers a list of all areas available
377. he resolution of the sweep or reduce the sweep time click Channel Sweep Number of Points If the active diagram is a Cartesian diagram the x axis is linearly scaled and labeled with the Start and Stop frequencies To Set up a Log Frequency Sweep oe I Press the Sweep key or click Channel Sweep to access the Sweep submenu Click Sweep Type Log Frequency Click Channel Center or Span to access the submenu defining the sweep range To define a sweep range confined by a start and a stop frequency use Start and Stop Alternatively to define a sweep range of definite width around a known center frequency e g an expected peak use Center and Span To vary the number of measurement points e g to improve the resolution of the sweep or reduce the sweep time click Channel Sweep Number of Points If the active diagram is a Cartesian diagram the x axis is logarithmically scaled and labeled with the Start and Stop frequencies Measurement Examples Optimization To Set up a Segmented Frequency Sweep 1 Press the Sweep key or click Channel Sweep to access the Sweep submenu 2 Click Sweep Type Define Segments to call up the dialog defining the individual sweep segments Proceed as described in Define Segments to customize your sweep range Make sure to define at least 2 distinct sweep frequencies 3 Use the controls in the Individual Settings panel to define the internal generator power measur
378. heme The following Predefined Schemes are optimized for the analyzer screen and for color hardcopies respectively e Dark Background sets a black background color The traces and information elements in the diagram areas are displayed in different colors This setting is usually suitable for observing results on the analyzer screen e Light Background sets a light background color The traces and information elements in the diagram areas are displayed in different colors This setting is suitable for generating color hardcopies of the screen The following Predefined Schemes can be appropriate for generating black and white hardcopies of the screen e Black and White Line Styles sets a white background color All traces and information elements in the diagram areas are black however the traces are drawn in different line styles e Black and White Solid sets a white background color All traces and information elements in the diagram areas are black All traces are drawn with solid lines Define User Scheme opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements d Use Define User Scheme to create save and recall your own color scheme Remote control SYSTem DISPlay COLor Define User Color Scheme The Define User Color Scheme dialog modifies the predefined color schemes changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements User defined color schemes
379. hn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence STATe lt Boolean gt Creates the reference marker and assigns it to trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value lt Boolean gt ON OFF Creates or removes the marker RST value OFF SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MACON CALC MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no 1 The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence X lt numeric_value gt Defines the stimulus in Cartesian diagrams x axis value of the reference marker which can but doesn t have to be displayed using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt REFerence STATe ON lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value lt numeric_value gt Stimulus value of the reference marker Range def unit 9 9EF 11 Hz to 9 9E 11 Hz Hz RST value 0 Hz SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 and that the sweep range for a frequency sweep starts at 1 GHz CALC MARR EE son Create the r
380. how to perform the settings for typical measurement tasks After running a vbs file you can modify the demo setup according to your own needs and store it to a nwa file for later reuse Help Menu The Helo menu provides assistance with the network analyzer and its operation a Help Topics About MiA The Help menu contains the following functions e Help Topics opens this help system e About NWA opens a dialog to retrieve information about the network analyzer and the current firmware version Help Topics Opens this help system The help file is opened with the Welcome topic and remembers its last size position and default navigation tab Contents Index For more information see About this Help GUI Reference Help Menu About NWA Opens a dialog to retrieve information about the network analyzer and the current firmware version OK closes the dialog About VIE l M m A V BE A GE Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation 6 Remote Control General DeSCriptiOn ccccssseesseseeceeseeseeseesenseseenseseenees 253 Remote Control Operation ssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnn mennan nnmnnn nnmnnn nnn 253 Remote Control Tee ele reen NEE 253 Ctl og me een 254 Switchover to Remote Control 255 Setting the Device Address 257 Return to Manual Operaton 257 Combining Manual and Remote Control 257
381. iagram area The assignment between traces channels and diagram areas is defined via numeric suffixes as illustrated in the following example CALC4 PAR SDEH Ch4tril sSii Create channel 4 channel suffix 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr7 to measure the input reflection coefficient S411 The trace is created but not displayed DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 window suffix 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace identified by its name Ch4Tr1 in diagram area no 2 window suffix 2 assigning the trace number 9 trace suffix 9 to it Active Traces in Remote Control In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and Remote Control General Description Basic Remote Control Concepts traces defined The active channel contains the active trace see section Trace Settings in Chapter 3 In remote control each channel contains an active trace unless the channel contains no trace at all so the notion of active channel is meaningless This principle actually simplifies the remote control command syntax because it allows the active trace in a particular channel to be referenced by means of the channel suffix No additional trace identifier is needed there is no need either to distinguish channel and trace settings using mnemonics or suffixes CALC1 Tro3 CALC2 Trcod CALC3 Tro5 CALCS Tre OrcaLrci OrcaLle
382. ial command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands Remote Control General Description Command Processing An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchronization between the controller and the analyzer According to section Data Set and Instrument Hardware setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Examples Example 1 Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable Sending FREQ STAR 1GHZ SPAN 100 FREQ STAR always returns 1000000000 1 GHz When FREQ STAR 1GHz STAR SPAN 1000000 is sent however the result is not specified by SCPI The result could be the value of STARt before
383. ian diagram IMAGinary Imaginary part y displayed in a Cartesian diagram SWR Standing Wave Ratio SWR displayed in a Cartesian diagram Z R IM complex gt Y displayed in a polar diagram ZUR MM macnituae Magnitude sqrt x y displayed in a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale CALCulate LIMit CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit This subsystem defines the limit lines and controls the limit check CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and or creates new limit line segments Dorie for creating segments The following rules apply to an active trace with n existing limit line segments e Anodd number of values is rejected an error message 109 Missing parameter is generated e Aneven number of 2 k values updates or generates k limit line segments Command Reference CALCulate e Forn gt kthe stimulus values of all existing limit line segments no 1 to k are updated the existing limit line segments no k 1 n are deleted e Forn lt kthe stimulus values of the limit line segments no 1 to n are updated the limit line segments n 1 k are generated with default response values see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA The generated segments are upper or lower limit line segments depending on the
384. icates an invalid measurement result Wart 1788901 GHz While marker coupling is active it is possible to e Move a master marker and thus change the position of all corresponding slave markers e Activate another trace in order to make the associated markers the new master markers O Marker coupling makes sense only if the master and the slave traces use the same stimulus variable Channels with a different stimulus variable sweep type are not coupled Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt COUPIled STATe ON Discrete Mkrs Turns the active marker into a discrete marker and vice versa The stimulus value of a discrete marker always coincides with a sweep point Use discrete markers in order to avoid that the marker indicates an interpolated measurement value Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MODE Mkr Properties Opens a dialog to define the properties of all markers of the active trace GUI Reference Trace Menu Marker Properties o x Stimuli 400 000006 MHz Sr Format Default Show Into Select Mikr Marne Mode Iw Marker On Triangle Marker Position Fixed Marker C Vertical Line Je Info Field Delta Mode C Horizontal Line Table Discrete Mode C Crossbar All Into Fields Ott eo Iw Al Mkrs Coupled In the left part the dialog contains four input fields and drop down lists to select a marker and define the basi
385. igned to the selected marker Full Span means that the search range is equal to the sweep range Besides it is possible to store up to 10 customized search ranges e Start defines the beginning of the search range Start must be smaller than the Stop value otherwise the search will not be initiated e Stop defines the end of the search range Stop must be larger than the Start value otherwise the search will not be initiated e Range Limit Lines On displays two vertical lines indicating the Start and the Stop value of the current search range in the diagram area This function is enabled as soon as one of the search ranges 1 to 10 Is selected D scare range properties In contrast to the marker properties defined in the Marker and Search menus the ten search ranges are valid for the entire setup This means that once defined each of them can be assigned to any marker in the setup irrespective of the trace and channel that the marker belongs to The default search range of each new marker is Full Soan The analyzer provides the greatest flexibility in GUI Reference Trace Menu defining search ranges In particular two search ranges may overlap or even be identical The search is confined to the part of the search range that belongs to the sweep range The following example shows how search ranges can be used to search a trace for several local maxima Range 1 Range 3 S Range 2 KN Use the paste marker
386. ignificant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System SU onone HK 8 49940 PrReraiengat_ 9 2 1 0 ajajaja miraron ICH R wh y Eventet EPID to higher order register KS ESA ES SS SS SE SS E SE 2 A Sumbit logica AND hpp maen Jofel mam Description of the five status register parts The five parts of an SCPI register have different properties and function CONDition The CONDition part is permanently overwritten by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents always reflect the current instrument state This register part can only be read but not overwritten or cleared Reading the CONDition register is nondestructive PTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the condition part none O to 1 1 to 0 or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTRbit 1 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This status register part can be overwritten and read at will Reading the PTRansition register is nondestructive NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter
387. ile menu Use the keys in the NAVIGATION keypad or the rotary knob to navigate between and within the menus Use the Cursor Left and Cursor Right keys to change between the different menus in the menu bar When the first option in a pull down menu is a submenu the submenu will be opened first before proceeding to the next option in the menu bar 23988 irc E Nwa File Trace Channel Nwa Setup Help Use the Cursor Up and Cursor Down keys to scroll up and down in a menu Trace gt Fk Marker Marker V Meas Format Scale H Lines ENTER the Cursor Right key or the rotary knob if pressed expand a submenu open a dialog or initiate an action depending on the selected command type ESC CANCEL or the Cursor Left key compress the current submenu and move the cursor one menu level up or close the active dialog depending on the selected softkey type Getting Started Basic Tasks Trace gt Marker gt Marker KE v Marker 1 a Activate Meas Marker 2 Format Marker 3 Scale Ref Marker a Open dialog mi Delta Mode Mkr gt Ref Mkr All Mkrs OFF Mkr Format t lt _ Open submenu More Mr Coupled Mr Discrete Mr Mkr Properties Export Mhrs 3 As soon as you reach the desired menu command which must not be one opening a submenu press ENTER or press the rotary knob to initiate an action or open a dialog After command execution or after
388. ility The conditions uuzl or u gt 1 are both equivalent to unconditional stability This means that u and us provide direct insight into the degree of stability or potential instability of linear circuits References Marion Lee Edwards and Jeffrey H Sinsky A New Criterion for Linear 2 Port Stability Using a Single Geometrically Derived Parameter IEEE Trans MTT vol 40 No 12 pp 2303 2311 Dec 1992 Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure lt Trace_ Names KFAC21 MUF121 MUF221 Sg SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON POWer KFACtor MUFactor1 MUFactor2 Create new trace and select name and measurement parameter CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace_Name gt SY11 SY12 SY21 SY22 Format The Format submenu defines how the measured data is presented in the graphical display GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace gt Ff Marker gt Marker Meas d Mao Scale Phase Lines Smith Polar Group Delay D erfure SV Lin Mag Real Imag Inv Smith Unwrapped Phase dB Mag selects a Cartesian diagram with a logarithmic scale of the vertical axis to display the magnitude of a complex measured quantity Phase selects a Cartesian diagram with a linear vertical axis to display the phase of a complex measured quantity in the range between 180 degrees and 180 degrees Smith selects a Smith diagram to display an S parameter or ratio Polar selects
389. in Linear Grid Receiver Step Attenuator Settings b1 0 dB Refl Norm Short Calibration For Port 1 Power Correction Data Bee bi Recy 300 kHz 8 GHz 201 Points in Linear Grid Recy Step Att O dB 09 M gt The Calibration Manager dialog contains three main panels e Calibration State lists all channels and their current calibration state e Calibration Pool contains a list of all stored correction data sets e Calibration Properties displays the basic channel settings the System Error Correction Data and the Power Correction Data available for the channel selection in the Calibration State panel Calibration states One of the following calibration states is assigned to each of the channels listed in the Cal State table e No Calibration No specific channel correction data is available The factory system error correction is used This is the default situation when a new setup is created Nwa File New e Channel Cal A system error correction and or power correction with channel specific correction data is active A new calibration of the channel affects the channel specific correction data only GUI Reference Channel Menu e Uses lt CalGroup gt A system error correction with one of the correction data sets cal groups stored in the cal pool is active A new calibration of the channel replaces the correction data in the cal pool and may affect several channels see below The channel calibrat
390. inated The controller may still send messages the analyzer continues to parse and execute commands lt Wait for service request gt Controller waits for service request from the analyzer program syntax depends on your programming environment lt Continue program sequence gt Retrieving Measurement Results Programming task Read the results acquired in a single sweep 1 Read single values gt Markers Markers are the most convenient tool for determining and retrieving single values on traces The analyzer provides up to ten markers see Markers and Limit Lines 2 Read complete trace Select a trace format and read formatted trace data CALCulate1 FORMat MLINear Calculate the linear magnitude of z Programming Examples Basic Tasks CALCulate1 DATA FDATa Read the formatted trace data A d Use CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA NSWeep to retrieve a particular trace within a group of sweeps Handling of Channels Traces and Diagram Areas The following examples show you how to perform basic tasks related to channel and trace definition and to the display of traces in diagram areas O All example programs in this section have been developed and tested by means of the GPIB Explorer provided with the network analyzer No extra programming environment is needed Several Traces with Equal Channel Settings Programming task Create up to four different traces with equal channel settings assi
391. individual traces All stages in the diagram are configurable All stages are described in detail in Chapter 4 of the help system GUI Reference System Overview Basic Concepts Channel data flow for all traces of the channel OFFSET S Parameters no conv Z Sij Y sl pn S Parameters Es Data Access Points 1 2 Import Export Data 3 Apply cal pool data copy to cal pool AVERAGE MATH Trace data flow for individual traces TRACE FORMAT SMOO THING System Overview Basic Concepts 3 1 4 Navigation Tools of the Screen 3 1 4 1 This section describes the operating concept of the network analyzer including the alternative navigation tools for mouse and hardkey operation the trace settings markers and diagram areas For a description of the different quantities measured by the analyzer refer to the Measured Quantities section The main window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measurements and contains the diagram areas for the results There are several alternative ways to access an instrument function Using the menus and submenus of the menu bar provides all settings Using the softkeys of the softkey bar alternative to the previous method Using the hardkey bar preselection of the most important menus Haebie Trace Channel Nwe Setup Help crs oer a oe Tre SR dB Meg 54B Ref 15 dE 1 Fontsize Mkr1 5
392. ines the conditions under which an SRQ is generated there is a Parallel Poll Enable register PPE which is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 AND as well This register is ANDed with the STB bit by bit considering bit 6 as well The results are ORed the result is possibly inverted and then sent as a response to the parallel poll of the controller The result can also be queried without parallel poll by means of the command IST The instrument first has to be set for the parallel poll using the Visual BASIC command IBPPC This command allocates a data line to the instrument and determines whether the response is to be inverted The parallel poll itself is executed using IBRPP The parallel poll method is mainly used to find out quickly which one of the instruments connected to the controller has sent a service request To this effect SRE and PPE must be set to the same value Query of an Instrument Status Each part of any status register can be read by means of queries There are two types of commands Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level registers The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable All queries return a decimal number which represents the bit pattern of the status register This number is evaluated by the controller program Decimal representation of a bit p
393. ing on the title some control elements may not be active For an overview of calibration standards and their properties refer to section Calibration standard types below Add Standard to NewkKit N 50 0 5 Parameters From i Circuit Model Label Restrict Port Assignment ship Pile Read Data From File Circuit Model Min Freq Z i Max Freq 1000 GHz Sal GI 0 10E 15 F 0 10E 27 FIHz 0 10E 12 H 0 10E 36 Elie 0 10E 24 Hrtts 0 10E 45 F Hz 0 10E 33 H Hz2 0 10E 42 Hits _ I I II Modify Offset Modify Load In its upper part the Add Standard or View Modify Standard dialog contains several controls to do the following GUI Reference Channel Menu e Select a standard Type and its Gender for polarized not sexless connector types and if the port assignment is not restricted and assign a Label e Restrict Port Assignment e Select S Params From Qualify whether the standard is described by a Circuit Model from which the analyzer can calculate the S parameters or by a table of measured or simulated S parameters stored in a Touchstone file Pressing the Read Data from File button opens a file selection dialog where the appropriate file type s1p for one port standards and s2p for two port standards is automatically selected coc O The Sliding Match and Attenuation are special standard types which must be described by a circuit model The con
394. ion More 1 2 More 2 2 etc toggle between groups of softkeys which belong to the same menu The softkeys are provided whenever the active menu contains more than 6 commands The lowest front panel key to the right of the display activates the higher level menu This works in all menus except the top level one listing the main menus in the menu bar The softkey bar is automatically updated when the active menu is changed Hiding display elements You can hide the softkey bar and gain screen space for the diagram areas if you use a mouse to control the analyzer see Setup Display Config All settings are accessible from the menus listed in the menu bar across the top of the screen Moreover you don t have to display the softkey bar permanently in order to make use of its functionality Hitting any of the keys associated to the softkey bar will make it visible for a period of time sufficient to select the next instrument function 3 1 4 4 Front Panel Key Bar The front panel key bar hardkey bar Setup Display Config displays the most commonly used setup and function keys of the analyzer Clicking a key symbol executes the action of the corresponding key 3 1 4 5 3 1 5 System Overview Basic Concepts The front panel key bar provides access to the basic groups of settings with a single mouse click It is particularly useful if the analyzer is controlled with a mouse or via Remote Desktop Alternatively the settings ar
395. ion of the active channel is also applied to a new channel created via New Add Chan Trace indicates that the system error correction for the channel has been deactivated using Correction Off coc O lf a new calibration is performed for a channel assigned to a cal group marked as Uses lt CalGroup gt the correction data overwrites the cal group data so the new calibration will affect all channels assigned to the cal group The network analyzer generates a notice message New calibration will overwrite cal pool when opening the first dialog of the calibration wizard The buttons in the upper half of the dialog are used to modify the Cal Pool and apply pool data to channels e Copy gt gt copies the correction data Channel Cal of the selected channel to the cal pool generating a new pool member cal group e Apply assigns the selected cal group to the selected channel e Apply All assigns the selected cal group to all channels in the Cal State table e Resolve Pool Link deletes the assignment between the selected channel Ch lt n gt Uses lt CalGroup_name gt and the cal group The correction data from the cal group lt Ca lGroup_name gt is used as a channel calibration for lt Ch1 gt the Calibration State list displays Ch lt n gt Channel Cal e Delete From Pool deletes the selected cal group O You can apply any correction data set cal group from the Cal Pool to several channels which may belong to different setup
396. is a simple case of trace mathematics Use the Define Math dialog to define more complicated mathematical operations Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y OFFset lt Magnitude gt I lt Phase gt lt Real gt lt Imag gt Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH WUNit STATe ON OFF Shift Stimulus Value Shifts the active trace in horizontal direction leaving the positions of all markers unchanged The positive or negative offset value for the stimulus variable is entered into an input field The unit depends on the sweep type Shift Stimulus Value can be used in Cartesian as well as in polar diagrams The visible effect depends on the diagram type e In Cartesian diagrams the trace is shifted relative to the markers and the x axis e In polar diagrams the trace is not affected however markers change their position Use a negative offset value to reset a shifted trace to its original position Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt X OFFset lt numeric_value gt Max Hold On Enables if selected or disables the max hold peak hold function for the active trace With enabled max hold function the displayed trace shows the maximum values that the analyzer acquired since the start of the measurement The max hold process can be restarted any time using Restart Hold It is also restarted automatically when the channel or trace settings are changed so that the previous m
397. is mapped to the reference admittance Yo whereas the circle with T 1 is mapped to the imaginary axis of the Y plane The circles for the points of equal conductance are centered on the real axis and intersect at Y infinity The arcs for the points of equal susceptance also belong to circles intersecting at Y infinity Short circuit point 1 0 centered on a straight vertical line Circles of equal conductance Short circuited load Y infinity Open circuited load Y 0 Arcs of equal susceptance Matching admittance Y Y Examples for special points in the inverted Smith chart The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Y infinity U 0 is one its phase is 180 The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Y 0 0 is one its phase is zero System Overview Basic Concepts 3 1 7 6 Measured Quantities and Display Formats The analyzer allows any combination of a display format and a measured quantity The following rules can help to avoid inappropriate formats and find the format that is ideally suited to the measurement task All formats are suitable for the analysis of reflection coefficients S The formats SWP Smith and Inverted Smith lose their original meaning standing wave ratio normalized impedance or admittance if they are used for transmission S parameters The complex impedances and Admittances are gene
398. is named Ch lt n gt where lt n gt is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one The name can be changed in the Channel Manager O To create a new trace in the active channel use the Trace Traces Add Trace function To create a new channel and a new trace and display it in the active diagram area use Add Chan Trace Remote control CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe ON CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trc_name gt lt Parameter gt DISPlay WINDow lt No gt STATe ON DISPlay WINDow lt No gt TRACe FEED lt Trc_name gt Delete Channel Deletes the current channel including all traces assigned to the channel and removes all display elements related to the channel from the diagram area Delete Channel is disabled if the setup contains only one channel In manual control each setup must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace O To restore a channel that was unintentionally deleted use the Undo function Remote control CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe OFF GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Manager Opens a dialog to perform the actions in the Channel Select menu systematically and rename channels Channel Manager Traces Tre Mone Delete 4dd Channel Delete Channel che yt All existing channels of the current setup are listed in a table see below Below the table the Trace Manager provides the following buttons e Add Channel add
399. is used as an input connector for an external 10 MHz reference clock signal The external reference signal must meet the specifications of the data sheet The internal reference signal is synchronized to the external signal O The AC power switch also interrupts the power supply of the OCXO When you switch the instrument back on be sure to comply with the extended warm up phase specified in the data sheet POWER SENSOR Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Interfaces LEMOSA female connector used for connecting power sensors of the R amp S NRP Zxy family With an adapter cable R amp S NRP Z4 the USB port on the front panel can be used for this purpose POWER B SENSOR NOISE SOURCE CONTROL Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Interfaces BNC female connector provides the supply voltage for an external noise source e g to measure the noise figure and gain of amplifiers and frequency converting DUTs MOISE SOURCE CONTAGL Conventional noise sources require a voltage of 28 V in order to be switched on and O V to be switched off The output supports a maximum load of 100 mA E HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors IF VIDEO OUT Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Interfaces BNC female connector used as an intermediate frequency IF output of approximately 20 MHz or as a video output at the selected video and resolution bandwidth with spectrum analyzer option R amp S ZVL K1 bi wa IF VIDEO OUT This conn
400. isplayed in an independent window The setup file contains the following information General settings related to the setup The trace settings for all traces in the diagram areas The channel settings for all channels associated to the traces The display settings for each diagram area The Nwa File menu is used to organize setups Demo setups In the System External Tools submenu you can find demo setups vbs for various measurement scenarios You can modify the demo setups and store them to a nwa file for later use Moreover the Measurement Wizard provides predefined optimized setup s for many measurements 3 1 2 Traces Channels and Diagram Areas The analyzer arranges displays or stores the measured data in traces which are assigned to channels and displayed in diagram areas To understand the menu structure of the instrument and quickly find the appropriate settings it is important to understand the exact meaning of the three terms A trace is a set of data points that can be displayed together in a diagram area The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used in order to obtain traces from the measured or stored data and to display them A channel contains hardware related settings to specify how the network analyzer System Overview Basic Concepts collects data A diagram area is a rectangular portion of the screen used to display traces Diagram areas belonging to the sa
401. ist Che Math Che Getting Started Basic Tasks Press the SCALE function key on the front panel Right click the scale section in the trace list and select the parameters from the context menu Select the parameters from the Trace Scale menu Use the marker functions MARKER gt function key Autoscale The Autoscale function adjusts the scale divisions and the reference value so that the entire trace fits into the diagram area To access Autoscale use one of the following methods Press the SCALE function key on the front panel Right click the scale section in the trace list and select Autoscale from the context menu Select Autoscale from the Trace Scale menu Circular Diagrams The radial scale of a circular Polar Smith or Inverted Smith diagram can be changed with a single linear parameter the Ref Value The reference value defines the radius of the outer circumference Increasing the Reference Value scales down the polar diagram Decreasing the Reference Value magnifies the polar diagram The Reference Value is indicated in the scale section of the trace list Polar 0 261 Ref 1 3 smith O20 Ref 1U To change the Reference Value use one of the following methods Press the SCALE function key on the front panel Right click the scale section in the trace list and select the parameter from the context menu Select the parameter from the Trace Scale m
402. isting diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area lt Wnd gt lt trace_name gt String parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example CALCA PAR SDEF Chaired uci Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Command Reference DISPlay Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt X OFFSet lt numeric_value gt Shifts the trace lt WndTr gt in horizontal direction leaving the positions of all markers unchanged lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED Stimulus offset value 1000 GHz to 1000 GHz Hz for frequency sweeps The range and unit depends on the sweep type SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TYPE 0 Device specific with query Role DRSOE WiNhs TRAC EE we Dor WIND RAC Ee Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MH
403. ith 3 diagram areas each with 1 trace Polar O 2 Us Ret es dE hag 1006s Re 3 GHzStop amp GHz Ch Stat 300 kFStop amp GHz GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Stack St op amp GHz Chi Bee Cha Start 300 kHz Tile Horizontally Ch2 Start 300 kHz R amp S ZVL GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Tile Vertically dB htag 10dB Ref 0 dE dB btg 10 dB Ref D dB Start 3 E Polar O 2 Us Ref 1 U og IU Ba Ss Ug mo L U Dan d Chi Start 3 6 Rows and Columns 2 1 the 3rd trace Is displayed in overlay mode Chi Start 3 GHz Ch2 Start 300 kHz Stop GD Polar O 2 Us Ret 1 U Remote control No command display configuration only Title Opens a dialog to opens a dialog to define a title and display it in one of the diagram areas Operating Manual 1303 6580 32 01 GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Se eke pet a Title S12 For SAW Filter 03 e Diag Area All Titles GFF e Title provides an input field for the title string The title may comprise a practically unlimited number of characters and is centered in a line below the top of the diagram area e Diagram Area provides a drop down list of all diagram areas of the current setup The title is assigned to the selected area e All Titles Off removes the titles from all diagram areas The titles are hidden but not deleted Unchecking All Titles Off displays the titles again Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt
404. ith the smallest stimulus value The other measurement points with the same target value can be located using Target Search gt repeatedly If the target is not found e g because the active trace doesn t contain the target value then the active marker is not moved away from its original position Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute RTARget CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult lt Target Search Activates the search to the left of the active marker position and sets the active marker to the defined target value The target search range is between the Start of the sweep range and the active marker position If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 7 is created to indicate the search result and the target search range starts at the end Stop of the sweep range If the target value occurs at several stimulus values the marker is placed to the search result with the smallest stimulus value The other measurement points with the same target value can be located using Target Search gt repeatedly If the target is not found e g because the active trace doesn t contain the target value then the active marker is not moved away from its original position Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute LTARget CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Def Value Opens an dialog to select a marker for the target search and define the t
405. ive at each time The area number in the upper right corner of the active area is highlighted At the same time the active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram area Trc 4 in the figure below dB Mag 10 dB Ref dB Phase El Refi Lin Wag 10 dB Ref dm Phase 45 Refi The analyzer provides several tools to activate a diagram area e A left mouse click on a point in the diagram activates the diagram including the last active trace in the diagram e A left mouse click on a trace list activates the trace including the corresponding diagram e Some of the functions of the Trace Traces menu activate a particular trace including the corresponding diagram Auwwa Setup Display Delete Diag Area Display Conti d EE Overlay All Undo Split All Redo a Maximize Setup Info l oo Duel Splt System Config Triple Split w Integrated Window Quad Split External Tools d Split Manager Title e Delete Diag Area deletes the active diagram area e Overlay All places all traces in a single diagram area which occupies the whole window e Split All splits the active window into as many diagram areas as there are traces and assigns a single trace to each area e Maximize maximizes the active diagram area to occupy the whole window e Dual Split splits the active window into two diagram areas and distributes the traces among the two areas e Triple Split splits the active window into three dia
406. ive measurements taken over a specified sequence of stimulus values It represents the basic measurement cycle of the analyzer The analyzer can perform sweeps at constant power but variable frequency frequency sweeps see Sweep Type The sweeps are further specified by the number of measurement points the total measurement time and the trigger mode A measurement may consist of a single sweep or a series of Sweeps repeated continuously On the other hand depending on the measurement task and the measured quantity the measurement at each point can consist of several partial measurements with definite hardware settings SWEEP Channel Center Span H Pur Du V Ca V Sweep Type Channel Select Humber of Points Frequency Step Size Meas Delay Restart w Single All Chans Define Restart Average On Average Factor Restart overage The Sweep menu provides the following settings e Sweep Type defines the sweep variable frequency power time and the position of sweep points in the sweep range e Number of Points sets the total number of measurement points over the sweep range e Frequency Step Size sets the distance between two consecutive frequency sweep points e Meas Delay delays the start of each sweep e Restart aborts the current measurement and restarts a new sweep sequence e H Single All Chans is selected the measurement is terminated after a single sweep or a group of single sweeps defined in t
407. ization of instrument control commands error handling and the status registers The requirements that the SCPI standard places on command syntax error handling and configuration of the status registers are explained in detail in the following sections Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers The tables are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers O Reset values In contrast to instruments with manual control which are designed for maximum possible operating convenience the priority of remote control is the predictability of the device status This means that when incompatible settings are attempted the command is ignored and the device status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted Therefore GPIB bus control programs Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation should always define an initial device status e g with the command RST and then implement the required settings GPIB Explorer The GPIB Explorer is a easy to use program tool that allows you to obtain an overview of all implemented remote control programs test programs compile and run test scripts The program can be opened by starting the executable file iecwin32 exe in the program directory of the network analyzer e g CAR S inser Bin After the GPIB Explorer is started the interface for the connection to the instrument can be selected in a dia
408. k causing channel 2 to use its previous correction data MMEM DET Ee Delete the created cal group file MMEMory LOAD CORRection RESolve lt Chs lt file_name gt Resolves the link between channel lt Ch gt and the correction data set cal group file so that the channel uses its previous correction data lt Ch gt Channel number lt file_name gt Optional string parameter to specify the name of the cal group file Cal group files must have the extension cal The directory path must not be specified If there is no link between lt Ch gt and the specified file the command has no effect If no file is specified the command resolves any link between lt Ch gt and an arbitrary cal group file RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example See MMEMory LOAD CORRection MMEMory LOAD LIMit lt trc_names gt lt file_name gt lt param_name gt lt x_offset gt lt y_ offset gt lt type gt Loads a limit line definition from a specified file and assigns it to a trace with a specified name Limit lines are created using the CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit commands O Limit lines can be loaded from Touchstone files s lt n gt p where lt n gt denotes the number of ports The optional parameters lt param_name gt lt x_offset gt lt y_offset gt lt type gt are only relevant for Touchstone files For limit files no optional parameters can be set lt trc_name gt Name of an e
409. ke source function Source handshake full capability AH Handshake sink function acceptor handshake full capability L4 Listener function full capability de addressed by MTA T6 Talker function full capability ability to respond to serial poll deaddressed by MLA SR1 Service request function Service Request full capability PPI Parallel poll function full capability L1 Remote Local switch over function full capability Reset function Device Clear full capability Trigger function Device Trigger full capability Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line being active LOW They serve to communicate between controller and instrument Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex They are effective for all instruments connected to the bus without pervious addressing Command QuickBASIC Effect on the instrument command DCL IBCMD controller Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the Device Clear CHR 20 command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC IBSIC controller Resets the interfaces to the default setting Interface Clear LLO IBCMD controller The LOC IEC ADDR key is disabled Local Lockout CHR 17 SPE IBCMD controller Ready for serial poll Serial Poll CHR 24 Enable SPD IBCMD controller End
410. ked or off e Meas Bandwidth selects the bandwidth of the IF measurement filter Power Opens the numeric entry bar to set the power of the internal signal source channel power Power lo dm rd The channel power determines the output power at the test ports if a Frequency Sweep or a Time Sweep is active see info below The setting has no effect in Power Sweep mode where the source power is varied over a continuous range O The selected channel power applies to all source ports used in the active channel Output power at the test ports Power sets the output power at the test port that supplies the stimulus for the active channel The channel power can be varied over a wide dynamic range This leaves enough flexibility to include an attenuation or gain in the test setup The channel power can be modified by the following settings e Generator step attenuators decrease the output power by a definite factor astep Astep can be set individually for all test ports but should not change during a sweep To ensure a sufficient dynamic range at the test ports it is recommended to use automatic generator step attenuator setting e The Source section of the Port Configuration dialog provides a port specific constant power offset for arbitrary sweeps and a port and frequency dependent power slope factor for frequency sweeps Remote SOURce lt Ch gt POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPlitude control GUI Reference Chan
411. l DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y RLEVel Ref Position Defines the position of the reference line in a Cartesian diagram Ref Position e eis The reference line is indicated by a lt symbol at the right edge of the diagram area The color of the symbol corresponds to the trace color Ref Position is defined on a linear scale between 0 bottom line of the diagram and 10 top line of the diagram As the Ref Position is varied the value of the reference line Ref Value is left unchanged so the current trace is shifted together with the Ref Position Ref Position is not available grayed for polar diagrams Polar Smith Inverted Smith Use the analyzers drag and drop functionality to move the reference line symbol to the desired position Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TRACe lt WndTr gt Y RPOSition Overlay All Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole window This function is available irrespective of the trace Format and the Channel settings it is even possible to overlay Cartesian and polar diagrams Tre 1 dB hag 10 dB Ref Odo Tres Polar OF Us Refi U dB tag 10dB Ref D dB Chi Start 3 GHz Stop amp G Start 300 kHz Stop amp GHz The active trace and active channel is highlighted The scaling of the axes corresponds to the active trace GUI Reference Trace Menu O To hide all traces except the active one select Spli
412. l in the help system 3 1 2 2 Channel Settings A channel contains hardware related settings to specify how the network analyzer collects data The channel settings can be divided into three main groups Control of the measurement process Sweep Description of the test setup Power of the internal source IF filter Bandwidth and Step Attenuators Port Configuration Correction data Calibration Port Extensions The Channel menu provides all channel settings NOTE Sweep initialization After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity the analyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved It is visualized by a Preparing Sweep symbol in the status bar Preparing Sweep All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization If necessary the analyzer terminates the current initialization and starts a new preparation period During the first sweep after a change of the channel settinas an additional red i e Chi Oe asterisk symbol appears in the status bar 3 1 3 Data Flow The analyzer processes the raw measurement data in a sequence of stages in order to obtain the displayed trace The following diagram gives an overview The diagram consists of an upper and a lower part corresponding to the data processing stages for the entire channel and for the
413. l number lt Ch gt The channel must be created before CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe ON Moreover it is not possible to assign the same name to two different channels CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CATalog returns a list of all defined channels with their names lt Ch gt Number of an existing channel lt Ch_name gt Channel name e g Channel A RST value Ch1 SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CONP Toure GaANme Ee Command Reference DIAGnostic CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME ID Ch name Queries the channel number numeric suffix of a channel with kown channel name A channel name must be assigned before CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME lt Ch_name gt CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CATalog returns a list of all defined channels with their names lt Ch gt Channel number This suffix is not relevant and may be omitted the command returns the right channel number lt Ch_name gt Channel name e g Channel A RST value SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example See CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CATalog CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe lt Boolean gt Creates or deletes channel no lt Ch gt and selects it as the active channel CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME defines the channel name aie O A channel created with CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe ON can be configured but has no trace assigned so that no measurement can
414. late1 LIMit DATA 1 4500000000 5500000000 5 5 define an upper limit line across the Programming Examples Basic Tasks entire sweep range CALCulate1 LIMit DATA 2 4500000000 5000000000 10 15 CALCulate1 LIMit DATA 2 5000000000 5500000000 15 10 define two segments for the lower limit line Display the limit line and perform the limit check CALCulate1 LIMit DISPlay STATe ON CALCulate1 LIMit STATe ON FAIL if the trace is failed the response is 1 Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Gen Sett Go ta Local Display On Off Trci Ee dE Mag 2 dE Ref 10 dB Treo Seta Phase 45 Ref J Se Go to Local Display Bea l 1 If IR A LI D A THY TOA HI JC CET TER TOS LN HCH Ch Start 4 5 GHz Pwr O d m Stop 3 9 GHz Frequency lock Failure For Details press INFO Check the result in the Define Limit Line dialog H The Define Limit Line dialog gives an overview of the limit line segments of the active trace Programming Examples Condensed Programming Examples Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response Recall Limit Line l YW Upper 4 5 GHz 5 5 GHz 5 dB 5 dB a cane repere e GHe 10 dB 15 dp Save Limit Line 3 Lower 3 Hz KN 15 de 10 dB Import Trace Import File Add Segment Delete Segment Del All Segments Condensed Programming
415. lated settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way All softkeys with three dots behind their labeling as in Mkr Properties call up a dialog The dialogs of the analyzer have an analogous structure and a number of common control elements Dialog Transparency The Dialog Transparency function Nwa Setup System Config menu varies the transparency of all dialogs With an appropriate setting you can control the dialogs and at the same time view the underlying traces and display elements We assume that you are familiar with standard Windows dialogs and mouse operation Refer to Using Front Panel Keys to learn how to control dialogs without a mouse and keyboard Marker Properties EES Stimulus 400 000005 MHz Sr Format Default style Select Mkr Mame bikr Mode Showy Info M Marker Cn Triangle Marker Position Fixed Marker C Vertical Line Je Into Field l Delta Mode C Horizontal Line l Table l Discrete Mode Crossbar All Info Fields Ot e MW All Mkrs Coupled Immediate vs Confirmed Settings In some dialogs the settings take effect immediately so that the effect on the measurement is observable while the dialog is still open This is especially convenient when a numeric value is incremented or decremented e g via the rotary knob In most dialogs however it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect The settings in
416. le instruments and the description of the analyzer s remote control concept For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument complemented by comprehensive program examples refer to the SCPI Reference chapter Remote Control Operation Remote Control Introduction The instrument is equipped with different interfaces for remote control A GPIB bus interface according to standard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 The GPIB bus connector for direct connection to a controller is located on the rear panel of the instrument Instruments connected to a Local Area Network can be controlled via the RSIB or VX 11 protocol Two connectors for LAN connection are located on the rear panel O The GPIB Explorer is a easy to use program tool that allows you to obtain an overview of all implemented remote control programs test programs compile and run test scripts This section assumes basic knowledge of GPIB bus programming and operation of the controller A description of the interface commands can be found in the Annexes sections GPIB Bus Interface and RSIB Interface Functions respectively SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999 0 Not all of the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments however their syntax follows SCPI rules The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standard
417. le the top and bottom scaling is adjusted for the new PDIVision value lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value lt trace_name gt RST value SCPI Command Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used Value and unit for the vertical diagram divisions Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands Depending on the measured quantity The default reference level for an S parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 10 dB Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored Confirmed with query Command Reference DISPlay Types Example GNGCA SNe Sige Clad wei Sie Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y PDIV 5 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y PDIV 5 CH4TR1 Set the value per division to 5 dB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt numeric_value gt
418. levant Short for 0 Q Match for the reference impedance of the current connector type or set any resistance R e The fringing capacitance C and the residual inductance L are both assumed to be frequency dependent and approximated by the first four terms of the Taylor series around f 0 Hz Load parameters are used to describe all types of standards except a Through a Sliding Match aLineand an Attenuation Load parameters and standard types e The Through standard is a through connection between two ports with minimum loss which is taken into account by the Offset Parameters e The Sliding Match is a one port standard with variable load parameters sliding load so there is no fixed load model e The Line standard is a line of variable length with minimum loss which is taken into account by the Offset Parameters e The Attenuation is a two port standard which is fully matched in both directions the reflection factor at both ports is zero No load and offset parameters need to be set Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt control Calibration Standard Types The following table gives an overview of the different standards and their offset and load models Standard Characteristics ideal Standard Offset Load Type Model Model GUI Reference Channel Menu Offset short Short circuit with added electrical OO RI E length offset for waveguide calibration one port
419. list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values Remote CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER STARt CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER S TOP Marker Tracking Causes the active minimum maximum or target search of the active marker to be repeated after each sweep When tracking mode is active the marker typically changes its horizontal and its vertical position as the measurement goes on OC mode properties The tracking mode is available for all search modes i e for minimum maximum search target search and bandfilter search The Marker Tracking function in the Search submenu is valid for an active minimum maximum and target search bandfilter tracking can be activated separately Tracking is marker specific but can be switched on for several markers simultaneously Switching between Max Search and Min Search does not affect the tracking mode Tracking is switched off though when one of the following actions is performed e Redefinition of the active marker position by means of the functions in the Marker menu or drag and drop of the active marker symbol e Change of the active marker s search mode e g from a minimum maximum search to a target search Tracking is a toggle function Selecting the function repeatedly switches the tracking mode on and off Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch T
420. list of defined channels as the active channel This function is disabled if the current setup contains only one channel Start 300 kHz Ch Stat 500 kHz Cha Start 5 MHz If one or several traces are assigned to the next channel one of these traces becomes the active trace The order of all channels belonging to a setup is given by the channels creation time By default the channels are named Chi Ch2 so that Ch lt n gt follows Ch lt n 1 gt This order is always maintained even if channels are renamed invisible because no traces are assigned to them or distributed over several diagram areas Remote control The numeric suffix lt Ch gt appended to the first level mnemonic of a command selects a channel as active channel Select Channel e Opens a box to select an arbitrary trace of the active setup as the active trace This function is disabled if the current setup contains only one channel Fees bannel aax If one or several traces are assigned to the selected channel one of these traces becomes the active trace The order of all channels belonging to a setup is given by the channels creation time By default the channels are named Chi Ch2 so that Ch lt n 1 gt precedes Ch lt n gt This order is always maintained even if channels are renamed invisible because no traces are assigned to them or distributed over several diagram areas Remote control The numeric suffix lt Ch gt appended to
421. lization 4 ae eo a One Path Two Dort TOM Cal Manager Recall Last Cal Set Cal te The following menu commands calls up the start dialog of the calibration wizard to start a manual calibration e Normalization initiates a normalization using a through standard e One Path Two Port initiates a full one port calibration e 7TOSM initiates a Through Open Short Match 12 term calibration Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AUTO lt port_no gt for matching analyzer and cal unit ports SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AUTO PORTs for arbitrary pairs of ports SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine lt cal_name gt FRTRans OPTPort TOSM lt port_no gt lt port_no gt Guided Calibration The analyzer provides a calibration wizard for each calibration type The guided calibration consists of the following steps 1 Select Physical Port Connectors and calibration kits at all calibrated ports 2 Measure Standards Acquire measurement data for all standards required for the selected calibration type 3 Calculate the system error correction data error terms from the measurement data of the standards and apply the result to the active channel O A successful calibration will supersede the previous calibration discarding all previous system error correction data To keep older correction data you can transfer them into a Cal Pool using the Calibration Manager The sys
422. log No connection to instrument E x Connect wia Hel C NT named pipe a GPIB address E e ASIB address 127 0 0 1 D wT TANISA TCPIP 127 0 0 1 INSTR NT Pipe 4 COM Parser NT Pipe E COM Parser f EB200 ES 0 11 23 5555 Rohdes chwarz wv Use SAU Connect nov Cancel PRE The following options are provided NT named pipe not supported at present GPIB address for connection to controllers equipped with a National Instrument GPIB interface using the GPIB bus connector RSIB address for LAN connection via RSIB protocol requires an appropriate IP or local host address see LAN Connection sections in Chapter 1 VXI 11 VISA for LAN connections via the VXI 11 protocol requires an installed VISA library NT pipe A B only for local connection on the analyzer recommended for remote test on the instrument EB200 not supported at present O A connection requires the default settings Rohde amp Schwarz for the SCPI command set and Use SRQ On Select Nwa Setup Setup Info to look up the IP address information of your analyzer After the connection is established the GPIB explorer displays a tree view of all commands included in the Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation current firmware version of the network analyzer The programs can be selected for execution by a single mouse click m toteracttwe IECWINS2 File Options S
423. logously the waves a and az are referred to as incident waves D and bs to as outgoing waves The analyzer measures the waves aj bj at its own test ports in order to obtain S parameters ratios and other derived quantities The test ports of the analyzer are numbered so it is convenient to use them as a reference defining port number n of the DUT as the port connected to test port n of the analyzer With this convention the waves a and b have the following meaning e a is the wave transmitted at test port no n of the analyzer stimulus signal and fed to port number n of the DUT incident wave e b is the wave transmitted at port number n of the DUT response signal and received at test port no n of the analyzer received wave O The analyzer offers various diagrams and display formats to visualize the results The analyzer places no restriction on the formats that are available for each measured quantity However to keep the interpretation simple it is recommended to select an appropriate display format see Trace Format S11 12 21 S22 Select one of the four elements of the standard 2 port scattering matrix S parameters emm b 5 Parov Reverse GG measurement p gt d Forward measurement b Port 1 DUT Port 2 The S parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction S p
424. lt Mk gt STATe ON Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute LPEak lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch NEXT Selects a search mode for marker no lt Mk gt and initiates a search for the next highest or lowest value among the valid peaks The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute NPEak lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch RIGHt Selects a search mode for marker no lt Mk gt and initiates a search for the next valid peak to the right The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON Command Reference CALCulate Note This command is the ZVR compatible equivalent of CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute RPEak lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Range
425. lt trace_name gt Sets the reference level or reference value for a particular displayed trace Setting a new reference level does not affect the value of PDIVision The trace can be referenced either by its number lt WndTr gt or by its name lt trace_name gt lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used lt numeric_value gt Value and unit for the reference level or reference value if the trace does not show a level Range def unit Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands RST value Depending on the measured quantity The default reference level for an S parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 0 GB lt trace_name gt Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored RST value SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tri S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number Command Reference
426. lyzer transmits a stimulus signal to the input port of the device under test DUT and measures the reflected wave A number of trace formats allow you to express and display the results depending on what you want to learn from the data Only one analyzer test port is required for reflection measurements In the following example the analyzer is set up for a reflection measurement a frequency sweep range and measurement parameter is selected the instrument is calibrated and the result is evaluated using various formats 2 1 1 Instrument Setup for Reflection Measurements In order to prepare a reflection measurement you have to connect your DUT which is assumed to have a male N 50 Q connector to one of the equivalent analyzer test ports Besides it is recommended to preset the instrument in order to set it to a definite known state Getting Started 2 1 2 CENTER SPAN SCALE DEC Reflection Measurements 1 Proceed as described in section Starting the Analyzer and Shutting Down in Chapter 1 to OME switch on the instrument and start the NWA i Pi application i fet A 2 Connect the input port of your DUT to test port d ef 1 of the network analyzer a 3 Press the PRESET key in the upper left corner of the front panel to perform a factory preset of the analyzer The analyzer is now set to its default state The default measured quantity is the transmission S parameter Gau This quantity is zer
427. m area The analyzer provides several commands allowing a smooth transition between remote and manual control 1 Create one channel two traces one diagram area Reset the instrument creating the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The default measured quantity is the forward transmission S parameter S21 The default format is dB Mag RST Create a second trace in channel P assign the format Phase and display the new trace in the same diagram area CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Trc2 S21 the trace becomes the active trace but is not displayed CALCulate1 FORMat PHASe the trace is referenced by the channel suffix 1 DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe2 FEED Trc2 display the second trace numbering it the second trace in diagram area no 1 F Check the result on the local screen Go to local SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE Programming Examples Basic Tasks lt gt Nwa Set1 zl Ed cots local Tre Saal dE Mag 10dB Ref db Tre Wal Phase 45 ber tt Al rl Chi Stat 300 kHz stop 2 GHz Frequency lock failure For Details press INFO ss REMOTE 2 Marker settings Adjust the sweep range to consider an interesting segment of the trace and re scale the diagram SENSe1 FREQuency STARt 4 5 GHz STOP 5 5 GHz DISPlay WINDow1 TRACe1 Y SCALe AUTO ONCE in the autoscale command the trace is referenced by its number in the diagram Select tr
428. m area are listed in the upper left corner e The channels for all traces are listed in the lower left corner The contents of the diagram areas are explained in section Display Elements Diagram areas are controlled and configured by means of the functions in the Nwa Setup Display submenu No direct access via front Niwa Setup panel keys Display Display Config d Undo Reda Setup Info System Config External Tools b The Nwa Setup menu contains the following functions and submenus e Display provides functions to delete diagram areas arrange traces to diagram areas and arrange the diagram areas in the active window e Display Config configures the entire screen and the individual diagram areas e Undo reverses the previous operation e Redo reverses the action of the Undo command e Setup Info displays information on the active setup and the instrument e System Config opens a dialog to define various system related settings e Integrated Window sets the window to normal size or full screen mode respectively e External Tools opens a submenu with various demo setups and editing tools GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Display The Display submenu provides functions to delete diagram areas and arrange areas in the active window Active and inactive traces and diagram areas The active window can display several diagram areas simultaneously each with a variable number of traces One of these areas and traces is act
429. m areas or restore the previous display configuration OFF Command Reference DISPlay SCPI Device specific command or query returns whether or not the diagrams are Command maximized Types Example RST DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram areas no 1 with default trace and 2 with no trace DISP WIND2 MAXimize ON Maximize the diagram areas placing area no 2 on top DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe lt Boolean gt Creates or deletes a diagram area identified by its area number lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt Number of the diagram area to be created or deleted lt Boolean gt ON OFF Creates or deletes diagram area no lt Wnd gt RST value SCPI Command Device specific command or query returns whether or not a particular Types diagram area exists Example CATO AE Pan EEN Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe DATA lt string gt Defines a title for diagram area lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt Number of the diagram area lt string gt String variable for the title The length of the title is practically unlimited but should be kept short enough to be displayed in the diagrams RST value SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Exam
430. m the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear frequency scale ranging from the lowest to the highest frequency point of all segments The following example shows a Segmented Frequency sweep with 3 segments in the stimulus range between 50 MHz and 6 GHz the forward transmission parameter S12 as measured quantity and a dB Mag scaled y axis In the frequency ranges between the sweep segments the trace is displayed as a straight line ul Start 300 kHz Pwr Seg Stop 4 GHz Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TPYE SEGMent SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON XFRequency Define Segments Opens a dialog to define all channel settings for a Segmented Frequency sweep and to import and export segmented sweep settings GUI Reference Channel Menu Define Segments Paints 1 I 10 Hz 5 999999946 GHZ z0 dt 2 99999946 GHz 5 999999998 GHz z0 3 bh 59999999496 GHZ b GHz z0 Individual Settings IT Name Power M MeasDelay Meas Bandwidth Selectivity show Point List Import Export OK Cancel Help The Define Segments dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the sweep range Sweep segments must not overlap however two adjacent segments can have one common point see Columns in the Define Limit Line table Delete Delete Al Below the table three groups of controls provide additional settings Refer to the following sections below e Inserting an
431. mand Device specific command or query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 and the sweep range for a frequency sweep starts at 1 GHz CALC MARK ON Create marker no 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK X 1GHz Set the marker to the beginning of the sweep range CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt Y Returns the response in Cartesian diagrams y axis value of marker no lt Mk gt The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Response Response value of marker no lt Mk gt Range def unit Depending on the measured quantity unit depending on the marker format see CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat RST value SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK ON Create marker no 1 and display it in the center of the sweep range CALC MARK Y Query the measurement value at the marker position Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate MATH CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH This subsystem permits processing of measured data in numerical expression format The operators are and use of constants and data arrays are permitted CALCulate lt Chn gt MATH FUNCtion NORMal SUBTract DIVide Defines
432. mand Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion SELect MAXimum MINimum RPEak LPEak NPEak TARGet LTARget RTARget BFlLter Selects a search mode for marker no lt Mk gt which can then be initiated using one of the CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARch CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MAXimum or CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MINimum functions The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON Note This command is not needed expect for compatibility with ZVR programs Use CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute to select a search mode and at the same time initiate the search The CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt SEARCch CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MAXimum or CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt MINimum functions also select the search mode lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 For a bandfilter search BF ILter this numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers Mkr1 to Mkr4 Parameters See list of parameters below RST value SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types The analyzer provides the following search modes MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range see CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_val
433. marker values to an ASCII file CO functions in the Markermenu Some of the Marker functions toggle between two alternative states when they are pressed repeatedly e Delta Mode switches the delta mode for the active marker on or off e Coupled Mkrs activates or deactivates marker coupling e Marker 1 Marker 10 and Ref Marker create a marker or remove it from the display A removed marker remembers its properties stimulus value format delta mode number and will be restored with these properties when Marker lt n gt or Ref Marker is selected again The marker properties are definitely lost if the associated trace is deleted Markers are available for all diagram types Trace Format GUI Reference Trace Menu Marker 1 2 3 Creates the markers numbered 1 2 and 3 respectively and assigns them to the active trace toggle function Marker 1 2 3 opens the numeric entry bar to define the marker position Stimulus Mkr 1 2 23 The default position is the center of the sweep range Stimulus Mkr 1 500 000005 MHz EN On closing the Stimulus Mkr 1 2 3 numeric entry bar a marker symbol triangle labeled Mkr lt n gt is positioned on the trace and the marker coordinates are displayed in the nfo Field Activating and moving markers To select one of several markers as an active marker do one of the following e Click the marker symbol e Click the marker line in the marker info field To change the position of
434. mber of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used Value and unit for the upper diagram edge Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands Depending on the measured quantity The default upper edge for a dB Mag diagram is 20 dB Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored Confirmed with query Command Reference FORMat Example See DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe BOTTom Units for DISPlay Commands The DISPlay subsystem contains commands to define particular points in the diagram e g to set the scale or a reference value This requires the entry of a numeric value and a physical unit depending on the parameter type displayed The following table lists the physical units accepted by the analyzer Power DBM DB DBW W MW UW NW PW Voltage V MV UV NV PV DBV DBMV DBUV ES DEG KDEG MDEG UDEG NDEG PDEG Group delay S MS US NS PS Impedance OHM GOHM MOHM KOHM Admittance SIE MSIE USIE NSIE Inductance m MH UH NH PH FH Capacitance F MF UF NF PF FF D
435. me gt Converts the calibration data of the standards in the active calibration unit SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice AKAL ADDRess to Touchstone format and copies it to the specified directory lt directory_name gt String parameter to specify the directory RST value SCPI Command Device specific command or query returns the current directory Types Example MMEM AKAL FACTory CONVersion C AKAL Touchstone Convert and copy the calibration data of the standards to the specified directory MMEMory CATalog lt directory_name gt Returns the contents of the current or of a specified directory Command Reference MMEMory d Use MMEMory CATalog ALL to query the contents of the current directory and all subdirectories lt directory_name gt Response RST value SCPI Command Types Example String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omitted the command queries the contents of the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory Directory information in the following format lt used_size gt lt free_disk_space gt lt file_name gt lt file_size gt The first two numeric parameters denote the total amount of storage currently used in the directory and the total amount of storage available both expressed in bytes All files are returned with their file name and their size in bytes Confirmed query only MME EE Response 2056878 809734144 zvl_quicksta
436. me gt parameter is used lt numeric_value gt Value and unit for the reference level or reference value if the trace does not show a level Range def unit Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands RST value Depending on the measured quantity The default reference level for an S parameter displayed in a dB Mag diagram is 0 dB lt trace_name gt Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored RST value SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Trl1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRACQ FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y RLEV 10 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y RLEV 10 CH4TR1 Change the reference level to 10 dB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe RPOSition lt numeric_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the point on the y axis to be used as the reference position as a percentage of the length of the y axis The reference position is the point on the y axis which should equal the RLEVel lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace
437. me setup are arranged in a common window The settings for diagram areas are described in section Display Elements in this chapter A diagram area can contain a practically unlimited number of traces assigned to different channels Diagram areas and channels are completely independent from each other Diag Area 1 Diag Area 2 3 1 2 1 Trace Settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used in order to obtain traces from the measured or stored data They can be divided into several main groups Selection of the measured quantity S parameters impedances Conversion into the appropriate display format and selection of the diagram type Scaling of the diagram and selection of the traces associated to the same channel Readout and search of particular values on the trace by means of markers ZS Limit check The Trace menu provides all trace settings They complement the definitions of the Channel menu Each trace is assigned to a channel The channel settings apply to all traces assigned to the channel System Overview Basic Concepts Active Traces If a trace is selected in order to apply the trace settings it becomes the active trace In manual control there is always exactly one active trace irrespective of the number of channels and traces defined The active channel contains the active trace In remote control each channel contains an active trace see section Active Traces in Remote Contro
438. med command or query FUNC XFR POW RAT B1 A2 Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1 A2 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 IMHO SILANE ag OECD Set start frequency to 100 kHz FREQ STOP 10MHz Set stop frequency to 10 MHz Note Ifthe start frequency entered is greater than the current stop frequency SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STOP the stop frequency is set to the start frequency plus the Command Reference SENSe minimum frequency span SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency SPAN SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STOP lt stop_frequency gt Defines the stop frequency for a frequency sweep which is equal to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram lt Ch gt Channel number lt stop_frequency gt Stop frequency of the sweep Range def unit Depending on the instrument model Hz The increment parameters UP or DOWN is 0 1 KHz RST value Maximum frequency of the analyzer MAX SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example FUNC XFR POW RAT B1 A2 Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1 A2 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 NOS SIUM IOV Set start frequency to 100 kHz FREQ STOP 10MHz Set stop frequency to 10 MHz Note Ifthe stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STARt the start frequency is set to the stop frequency minus the minimum frequency span SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency
439. ment are given by the start values of the first selected segment and the stop value of the last selected segment The type is taken from the first selected segment The new segment replaces the selected segments Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer GUI Reference Trace Menu Rules for Limit Line Definition The analyzer places very few restrictions on the definition of limit line segments The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility e Segments don t have to be sorted in ascending or descending order e g the Start Stimulus value of segment no n doesn t have to be smaller than the Start Stimulus value of segment no n 1 e Overlapping segments are allowed The limit check in the overlapping area refers to the tighter limit the pass test involves a logical AND operation e Gaps between segments are allowed and equivalent to switching off an intermediate limit line segment e Limit lines can be partially or entirely outside the sweep range however the limits are only checked at the measurement points The following figure shows a limit line consisting of 3 upper and 2 lower limit line segments To pass the limit check the trace must be confined to the shaded area KE ek ge SS As a consequence of the limit line rules the limit check will always pass a DUT if no limit lines are defined File Import Settings The Properties of Imported Segments dialog
440. ment points Sweep point Value of the sweep variable stimulus value frequency power time where a measurement is taken Sweep range Continuous range of the sweep variable frequency power time containing the sweep points where the analyzer takes measurements In a Segmented Frequency sweep the sweep range can be composed of several parameter ranges or single points Glossary of Terms Sweep segment Continuous frequency range or single frequency point where the analyzer measures at specified instrument settings generator power IF bandwidth etc In the Segmented Frequency sweep type the entire sweep range can be composed of several sweep segments TOSM A calibration type using four known standards through open short match also called SOLT or 12 term error correction model TOSM calibration is available for 2 3 and 4 port measurements Trace A trace is a set of data points that can be displayed together on the screen The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the collected data They complement the definitions of the Channel menu Each trace is assigned to a channel The channel settings apply to all traces assigned to the channel Trace point Point on the screen which is an element of the displayed trace The trace points for ratios and wave quantities can be derived from the entire set of measurement points using different detector settings Transmission tracking error Freq
441. ments are easy to find and intuitive to handle and that the effect of each operation is easy to verify on the screen Convenient remote control operation depends on a Remote Control General Description Basic Remote Control Concepts simple and systematic program syntax and on a predictable instrument state the display of results is secondary These differences suggest the peculiarities in the analyzer s remote control concept discussed in the following sections Traces Channels and Diagram Areas Like in manual control traces can be assigned to a channel and displayed in diagram areas see section Traces Channels and Diagram Areas in Chapter 3 There are two main differences between manual and remote control A trace can be created without being displayed on the screen Achannel must not necessarily contain a trace Channel and trace configurations are independent of each other The following frequently used commands create and delete traces channels and diagram areas Create new trace CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace Name gt and new channel lt Meas Parameter gt if channel lt Ch gt does not exist yet Delete trace CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DELete lt Trace Name gt Create or delete CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe ON OFF channel Create or delete DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON OFF diagram area Display trace in DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED d
442. meters section in Chapter 3 The two network analyzer ports are equivalent If the Spectrum Analysis option R amp S ZVL K1 is active test port PORT 2 serves as an AC coupled input for the analyzed RF signal PORT 1 is not used PORT 1 PORT 3 RF INPUT MAX 77 dba 30 V OC MAT A dBm 9 DC ATTENTION Input levels A The maximum input levels at all test ports according to the front panel labeling or the data sheet must not be exceeded In addition the maximum input voltages of the other input connectors at the front and rear panel must not be exceeded 1 1 9 USB Connectors Two single Universal Serial Bus connectors of type A master USB used to connect a keyboard recommended PSL Z2 order number 1157 6870 03 mouse recommended PSL Z10 order number 1157 7060 03 or other pointing devices a printer or an external storage device USB stick CD ROM drive etc Using an adapter cable R amp S NRP Z4 a power sensor can be connected as an alternative to the power sensor connector on the rear panel that is only available with option Additional Interfaces R amp S FSL B5 Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour NOTE EMI conformity cable length For maintaining the EMI conformity of the R amp S ZVL only appropriate USB accessories may be used Passive connecting USB cables should not exceed 4 m in length Use the original USB connecting cable or another high quality cable The maximum current per U
443. micolon must be omitted in this case Example CALL IBWRT device TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG TIM 0 1 This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the TRIGger command system i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below TRIG The colon after the semicolon is omitted The abbreviated form of the command line reads as follows CALL IBWRT device TRIG SOUR EXT TIM 0 1 However a new command line always begins with the complete path Remote Control General Description Messages Example CALL IBWRT device TRIG SOUR EXT CALL IBWRT device TRIG THR LOW Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 1 The requested parameter is transmitted without header Example TRIGger SOURce Response IMM 2 Maximum values minimum values and all further quantities which are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numerical values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 8000000000 3 Numerical values are output without their unit The default unit for each command is reported in th
444. mple SOURce GROup 1 1 This command defines a group of measured ports Numeric suffix If a device features several functions or features of the same kind e g several channels or test ports the desired function can be selected by a suffix added to the command Entries without suffix are interpreted like entries with the suffix 1 Example SOURce GROup2 1 1 This command defines a second group group no 2 of measured ports Structure of a Command Line A command line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by a lt New Line gt a lt New Line gt with EOI or an EOI together with the last data byte Visual BASIC automatically produces an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example CALL IBWRT device TRIGger SOURce EXTernal SENSe FREQuency STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the TRIGger system and defines the trigger source external trigger The second command belongs to the SENSe system and defines the start frequency of the sweep If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the se
445. mplement the definitions of the Channe menu Each trace is assigned to a channel see Traces Channels and Diagram Areas The channel settings apply to all traces assigned to the channel No direct Trace sea ei front Traces p y Marker gt H a Marker V Meas Format d Scale V a Lines The Trace menu contains the following functions and submenus e Trace gt stores traces to the memory and performs mathematical operations on traces e Marker gt defines the sweep range scales the diagram and introduces an electrical length offset using the active marker e Marker positions markers on a trace configures their properties and selects the format of the numerical readout GUI Reference Trace Menu e Meas selects the quantity to be measured and displayed e Format defines how the measured data is presented in the graphical display e Scale defines how the current trace is presented in the diagram selected in the Format submenu e Lines defines limits for measured values and activates the limit check Trace gt The Trace gt submenu stores traces to the memory and performs mathematical operations on traces Refer to section Trace Types in the System Overview chapter to learn more about data traces memory traces and mathematical traces Trace d Traces Marker gt Data gt Mem Marker V Math Dotoalhiem Meas d ae d Math Data Mem Scale Foy Show Data Lines d Show Mem
446. n be set to any value lt numeric_value gt Frequency of the external reference clock signal The frequency must be 10 MHz any other setting is ignored Range def unit 10 MHz Hz RST value 10 MHz SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example See SENSe lt Ch gt ROSCillator SOURce SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt This subsystem defines all channel settings for a Segmented Frequency sweep A segmented sweep is activated via SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TPYE SEGMent The commands in the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt subsystem do not accept the step parameters UP and DOWN Numeric values can be entered directly or using the DEFault MINimum MAXimum parameters SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt ADD Inserts a new sweep segment using default channel settings Insert New Segment The added segment covers the frequency interval between the maximum frequency of the existing sweep segments and the stop frequency of the entire sweep range d Use SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert to create a segment with specific channel settings lt Ch gt Channel number If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 lt Seg gt Sweep segment number Segment numbers must be sequential If n segments Command Reference SENSe already exist the added segment must have the segment number n 1 RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query
447. n for general housekeeping and function related to global configurations SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess lt address_no gt Sets the GPIB address of the analyzer lt address_no gt GPIB address integer number Range def unit 0 to 30 RST value The GPIB address is factory preset RST has no effect on the value SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 10 Set the GPIB address to 10 RST SYST COMM GPIB ADDR After a reset the address is maintained the response is 10 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator LFEoi EOI Sets the receive terminator of the analyzer The receive terminator indicates the end of a command or a data block The receive terminator setting is relevant if block data is transferred to the analyzer FORMat DATA REAL In the default setting LFEOI the analyzer recognizes an LF character sequence with or without the EOI control bus message as a receive terminator An accidental LF in a data block can be recognized as a terminator and cause an interruption of the data transfer The EOI setting is especially important if commands are transferred in block data format because it ensures that the parser for command decoding is activated by the terminator only after the command has been completely transferred Readout of binary data does not require a change of the receive terminator LFEoi LF character sequence with or without EOI recognized EOI EOI reco
448. n gt input port of the DUT drive port of the analyzer is set equal to the selected drive port Drive port selection affects the measured quantity lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 1 Test port number of the analyzer 1 to 2 RST value 1 test port 1 SCPI Command Device specific with query Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 A1 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr7 to measure the wave quantity a1 The trace automatically becomes the active trace SHNS4 SWE 2 SREP 2 Select drive port 2 for the active trace Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep STEP lt step_size gt Sets the distance between two consecutive sweep points HOTE O This setting is valid for sweep types with equidistant sweep points only It does not apply to logarithmic and segmented sweeps lt Ch gt Channel number lt step_size gt Stimulus step size Range def Depending on the other channel settings The minimum step size is equal to the unit sweep span divided by the maximum number of points minus one SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep POINts the maximum step size is equal to the sweep span SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency SPAN See also description of manual control and program example below RST value The default step size is equal to the default sweep span of the analyzer divided by the default number of points minus one
449. n in 5 dB steps The analyzer rounds any entered value below the maximum attenuation to the closest step RST value 0 dB SCPI Command Confirmed no query query can not return channel specific settings would be Types misleading Example INP2 ATT 10 Set the step attenuator for the wave received at port 2 and for all channels to 10 dB The waves at the other test ports are not affected SENS E POW Ait ENEE Query the receiver step attenuator setting at port 2 and for channel no 1 The response is 70 Command Reference INSTrument INSTrument INSTrument This subsystem identifies and selects particular resources SCPI logical instruments of the analyzer INSTrument NSELect lt Ch gt Selects a channel lt Ch gt as the active channel lt Ch gt Number of the channel to be activated The channel must be created before using CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe ON Range def unit 1 2 H RST value 1 SCPI Confirmed command or query If all channels have been deleted Command CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe OFF the query returns 0 Types Example CONF CHAN2 STAT ON INST NSEL Create channel no 2 and select it as the active channel The query returns 2 INSTrument PORT COUNt Returns the number of test ports of the analyzer Response Number of ports integer number Range def unit 2 RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific query only Example INST EO COUN Return the
450. n the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the output level to some value Queries cause data to be provided for output on the GPIB bus e g for identification of the device or polling the active input 2 According to their definition in standard IEEE 488 2 Common commands have a function and syntax that is exactly defined in standard IEEE 488 2 Typical tasks are the management of the standardized status registers reset and selftest Instrument control commands are functions that depend on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings A majority of these commands has also been standardized by the SCPI consortium The device messages have a characteristic structure and syntax In the SCPI reference chapter all commands are listed and explained in detail SCPI Command Structure and Syntax SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more parameters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several key words Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the header Common commands and device specific commands differ in their syntax Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET resets the i
451. n the sweep type RST value SCPI Command Device specific query only Types Example SWE POIN 20 Command Reference TRACe Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 TRAC STIM CH1DATA Query the 20 stimulus values of the created trace In the default format setting the data is returned as a comma separated list of 10 digit ASCII values Programming Examples Basic Tasks 0 PEPOORAIIEIIING TEXAN EE 466 re rca nice cele eee ie icp nes ieee E eaeese tie eee upon EE E uaeaeeseeeneneenees 466 Typical Stages of a Remote Control Program cccccccccceccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeessseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeees 466 Basic Instrument Settings iiiv cess nestecdsuetccwovinemcudswaluas nsiunieccantheosudeewaus vats basudduniecuandanesentymadeusiumeacioniee 466 Adj stng the Test E 467 Start of the Measurement and Command Synchronization ccccccccceseeeeeeceeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeees 467 Retrieving Measurement Results ccccccccccsseeeeceeeeeseeeeeeceeseeessaeeeeeseaeeeeseeseeeseadeeeesageeesageeeenaags 468 Handling of Channels Traces and Diagram Areasg 469 Several Traces with Equal Channel Settings cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaesaeeeeeees 469 Several Traces with Different Channel Gettngs 474 Markers and Limit Lines 0 0 cece cccccceeeeee cence cece eee eeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeaeaae
452. n will overwrite cal pool when opening the calibration wizard Checks on switching to the next dialog When the Next gt buttonis pressed the analyzer checks the calibration kits and the matching of the calibration standards and possibly displays a notice box confirm with OK This happens if one of the calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect CONNection lt port_no gt control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SCONnection lt port_no gt SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt SELect lt Ckit_Name gt Measure Standards The last dialog of the calibration wizard is used to perform the necessary measurements of standards and to calculate the correction data GUI Reference Channel Menu Calibration Measure Standards Measured Standards 2 of d mint Ce Pot 1 N 500 II Open fm OHz 1000 GH 1 Short m UH 1000 GH Match m UH 1000 GH WT Sliding Match m0 Hz 1000 GH Oso Port 2 N 500 pf 1 Open ral UH 1000 GH 1 Short mt UH 1000 GH 1 Match m UH 1000 GH ED Sliding Match m 0 Hz 1000 GH Ome Port 1 N 500 1 Port 2 N50 0 A Through mm OHz 1000 GH ii gt ee Start 300 kHz otop DH GHz Show Measurement Diagram keep Measurement Data for gt Aepeat Previous Cale The dialog displays the list of measured standards compiled in the previous dialog
453. nalyzer and their application It is organized according to the menus softkey groups of the user interface All topics in this chapter can be called up directly using the HELP key in the menus or the Help buttons in the dialogs A link at the end of each function description leads to the corresponding remote control command For a general overview of the analyzer s capabilities and their use refer to the System Overview Control Menus The Control menus provide standard Windows functions to control windows The analyzer provides two types of Contro menus with analogous function e Clicking the icon opens the Control menu for the main application window To access this icon the Title Bar of the main application window must be open e Clicking a L icon opens the Control menu for an individual setup window If a setup window is maximized the icon is placed to the left of the File menu Double clicking a control icon is the same as clicking the icon or the Close menu command No C Nwa File Trace Chanm direct access Restore amp Restore via Move Move front Sjee SI panel Minimize Minimize keys E Maximize E Maximize Close Alt F 4 A Close Ctri F4 Net Ctrl F The Control menu contains the following functions e Restore returns the active window to its size and position e Move displays a cursor symbol to moves the active window within the available space e Size displays a cursor symbol to size the active window
454. nctions to handle traces and diagram areas and assign traces to channels GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace V Select Trace Marker Data gt Mem EE dd Trace Marker V l Hee e Math Detoihiem Add Trace Diag Area Math Data Men Delete Trace Format Scale k vw Show Data Assign Diag Area Lines d Show Men Assign Channel Trace Statistics d Trace Manager Smoothing On Smoothing Aperture Import Export Data V Shift Response Value Shift Stimulus Value Max Hold On Restart Hold e Select Trace opens a box to select an arbitrary trace of the active setup as the active trace disabled if only one trace is defined e Add Trace creates a new trace in the current diagram area e Add Trace Diag Area generates a new trace in a new diagram area e Delete Trace deletes the active trace e Assign Diag Area assigns the active trace to another diagram area e Assign Channel assigns the active trace to another channel e Trace Manager opens a dialog to perform the previous actions systematically for all traces and diagram areas ive and inactive traces The screen can display several diagram areas simultaneously each with a variable number of traces e In an active diagram area one of these traces is the active trace The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the diagram area Trc 3 in the figure below seen dA Mag 40 debs Ref 200d6 Chi Invisible o2igPh
455. nd IMATCH12 are OSHORT2 synonymous Symmetric Network NET Attenuation ATT Reflect Sliding Match SLIDe Line LINE1 and LINE are synonymous Line2 Match Open M102 O1M2 Match Short M1S2 S1M2 Open Short OSHort The numbers in the parameters denote the analyzer ports Two numbers 12 mean that two separate calibrations are performed at ports 1 and 2 RST value ON AUTO Optional entry of delay time or phase for UTHRough standard lt delay AUTO The analyzer determines the delay time or phase during the calibration sweep phase gt lt delay or phase gt entry of the delay time in ps for non dispersive standards or of an estimate of the phase at the start frequency of the sweep in deg for dispersive standards If an estimate of the start phase is entered the analyzer uses the calculated value which is closest to the estimate RST value AUTO SCPI Confirmed with device specific standards no query Command Types Command Reference SENSe Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect SAVE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire RSAVe lt Boolean gt Activates or deactivates the calibration mode where the raw measurement data of the standards is stored after the calibration is completed The setting is valid for the current calibration where it overwrites the global setting SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire RSAVe DEFault A new calibration deletes the calibr
456. nd select the S parameter S12 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SWE TIME Query total sweep time SWE POIN 2010 Multiply the default number of points by 10 SWE TIME Command Reference SENSe Query total sweep time again The analyzer estimates a sweep time that is also multiplied by 10 SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep SPACing LiNear LOGarithmic Defines the frequency vs time characteristics of a frequency sweep Lin Frequency or Log Frequency The command has no effect on segmented frequency sweeps Note Use SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TPYE to select sweep types other than Lin Frequency or Log Frequency lt Ch gt Channel number LiNear The stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the frequency range In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a linear frequency axis LOGarithmic The frequency is swept in equidistant steps on a logarithmic scale Ina Cartesian diagram the x axis is a logarithmic frequency axis RST value LINear SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example FUNC XFR POW S12 Activate a frequency sweep and select the S parameter S12 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SWE SPAC LOG Change to sweep type Log Frequency SENSe lt Chn gt SWEep SRCPort 1 2 Selects a source port for the stimulus signal Drive Port The setting acts on the active trace If an S parameter Scouts cins IS Measured the second port number index lt i
457. ndard connector types you can use the command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt xconn type gt SELect lt Ch gt lt conn_name gt lt cCkit_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent Connector type e g a user defined connector type string variable String parameters containing the name of a calibration kit available on the analyzer A RST does not change the assignment between connector types and calibration kits Device specific command or query the query requires the first string parameter only MMEM LOAD CKIT EFRO e eara A rk ee ene a eak Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit calkit from the default cal kit directory Cone Gk Sr O O NT E Assign the imported kit to the N 50 Q connector type assuming that the cal kit name stored in New_kit calkit reads New_kit SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT INSTall lt file_name gt Loads cal kit data from a specified ZVR cal kit file lt Ch gt lt file_ name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent String parameter to specify the name and directory of the cal kit file to be loaded Note The loaded file must be a ZVR specific cal kit file with the extension ck NWA cal kit files calkit can be imported using the MMEMor
458. ne diagram area with one channel and one trace Remote control CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine lt Trace Names lt Meas Parameter gt DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Trace Name CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DELete lt Trace Name gt Coupling Selects common channel or scale settings for all traces in the Trace Manager dialog GUI Reference Trace Menu Coupling Channel Scale Decouple all Decouple all Couple all to Couple all to The channel and scale coupling is set in two independent panels e Decouple All assigns independent channel or scale settings to all traces in the Trace Manager If the channel and trace names include numbers the trace with the lowest number is assigned to the channel with the lowest number and so forth Measurement or data traces and their associated memory traces are assigned to the same channel e Couple All assigns all traces to the channel or scale settings selected in the corresponding drop down lists All channel or scale settings except the selected ones are lost The analyzer displays a confirmation dialog box before deleting the unused channels Remote control Sort Table Changes the order of the traces table rows in the Trace Manager dialog Sort Table Sort Traces according to Co Ascending Descending e The drop down list contains all trace properties that can provide the sorting criterion The prop
459. nector Click Nwa File Save Nwa As to open the Save As dialog Open the Save in drop down list and select the storage device and a folder Select a File name and click Save to store the data on the storage device and to close the Save As dialog ST E e The default extension for setup files nwa is appended automatically Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks To load a setup stored on an external device ee em Connect the storage device to an USB connector Click Nwa File Recall Nwa to open the Open dialog Open the Look in drop down list and select the storage device In the center of the dialog select the folder containing the setup files Select a file and click Open to load the setup as the active setup Setting up a Sweep Configurations of the different sweep types require different procedures The following examples list the essential settings for various sweep types To Set up a Lin Frequency Sweep SCH E St Press the Sweep key or click Channel Sweep to access the Sweep submenu Click Sweep Type Lin Frequency Click Channel Center or Span to access the submenu defining the sweep range To define a sweep range confined by a start and a stop frequency use Start and Stop Alternatively to define a sweep range of definite width around a known center frequency e g an expected peak use Center and Span To vary the number of measurement points e g to improve t
460. ned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibrd short ud char file short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle ile File into which the read data is written Example RSDLLibrdar id 1e dbesay absta iberr abenel The file name may as well include a drive or path specification RSDLLibtmo This function defines the timeout for a device The default value for the timeout is set to 5 seconds HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors VB format Function RSDLLibtmo ByVal ud ByVal tmo ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibtmo short ud short tmo short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibtmo short ud short tmo short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle tmo Timeout in seconds Example RSDLLibtmo ud 10 absta iberr abentl RSDLLibsre This function sets the device to the LOCAL or REMOTE state VB format Function RSDLLibsre ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberrs ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibsre short ud short v short far ibsta short far aberr unsigned long far ere A C format Unix short RSDLLibsre short ud short v short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle y State of device 0 local 1 remote Example RSDLLIbste ad 0 168ta ab rr Toe RSDLLibloc This
461. nel lt Ch gt only not for all channels INITIATE IMMEDIATE SCOPE SINGLE Select single sweep mode and measure a single sweep group for channels no 1 and 2 INITIATE IMMEDIATE SCOPE SINGLE INITIATE1 IMMEDIATE WA INITIATE2 IMMEDIATE WA Read trace data without history i e the last trace acquired in each channel CALCULATE1 DATA SDATA Programming Examples Condensed Programming Examples gt CALCULATE2 DATA SDATA Read last and previous trace data in channel 1 and 2 CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 1 last trace data gt CALCULATE1 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 3 previous trace data CALCULATE2 DATA NSWEEP SDATA 1 last trace data gt CALCULATE2 DATA NSWEEP SDATA A previous trace data HW Interfaces Front Panel Connectors 9 AW EE 491 FrontPanel eut TC 491 POSERO E 491 RIS ES CNIS OS eebe 491 EE ee 492 DESEN 492 ME 492 EAT EE ege 492 EXT REF eege 493 POWER SENSOR Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Intertacesl ce cccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 493 NOISE SOURCE CONTROL Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Interfaces ce eeeeeeeeeees 493 IF VIDEO OUT Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Intertacesl ccc ccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeas 494 AUX PORT Option R amp S FSL B5 Additional Interfaces 2 0 0 cccceecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeneees 494 GPIB interlace Option R amp S EECHER eege eege eegenen E 495 DC Power Supply Option R amp S FG B A0 495 Battery Pack Option
462. nel Menu Generator Generator step attenuator Couplers Test Port n Step Atten b1 b2 Opens the numeric entry bar to set the attenuation for the received wave b1 or b2 respectively step Attenuator be fo dB eh The attenuation is used to adjust the received signal level at the port to the input level range of the analyzer in order to avoid damage to the instrument e g if the DUT is a power amplifier The range of values depends on the analyzer model Using a single step attenuation b1 or b2 corresponds to a standard test setup with O dB generator attenuation and attenuation of the amplified wave received at test port 1 2 Remote control INPut lt Pt gt AT Tenuation RF Off RF Off switches the internal and external power sources on if checked or off Switching off the RF power helps to prevent overheating of a connected DUT while not measurement results are taken Meas Bandwidth Sets the measurement bandwidth of the IF filter Step Atten b2 opens a submenu and displays a range of softkeys to directly select bandwidths between 10 Hz and 500 kHz GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center Span Pwr Du POWEeF al d Step Athen bi Sweep V Step Athen bz Channel Select RF Ont Meas Bandwidth 10 Hz 12 1 kHz e 10 kHz 100 kHz SO0kHz Fine Adjust Fine Adjust opens a dialog to modify the selected measurement bandwidth and the selectivity of the IF filter B
463. nel Seleck Correction OFF Port Extensions Cal Manager Recall Last Cal Set Cal Kits e Start Cal opens a submenu to select a new calibration and start the calibration wizard e Repeat Prev Cal reopens the wizard to repeat and optimize the previous calibration e Correction Off activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel e Port Extensions provides a selection of length offset parameters to shift the measurement plane e Cal Manager opens a dialog to store system error correction data to a Cal Pool and to assign correction data to channels e Recall Last Cal Set loads and activates the setup for which the last calibration was performed e Cal Kits opens a dialog to manage the calibration kits in use add new kits and import or export kits Start Cal The Start Cal submenu selects the calibrated ports and the calibration type Channel enter Span Dar Du d See Start Cal Cne Port P1 SWEER Repeat Prey Cal One Port Pz d Channel Seleck Gorrection FF Two PorkP1P2 Port Extensions d Cal Manager Recall Last Cal Set Cal kits The calibration types depend on the number of test ports of the analyzer For a four port unit e One Port P1 and One Port P2 open submenus to select a one port calibration at test ports PORT 1 and PORT 2 respectively e Two Port P1 P2 opens a submenu to select a two port calibration at test ports PORT 1 and PORT 2 GUI Reference Channel
464. ng match will provide better results than the match within its specified frequency range Checking one of the boxes in the list causes the analyzer to stop the measurement in all channels except the active one and measure the standard according to the active channel settings The progress of the calibration sweep and the result can be monitored in the diagram In case of an error e g if the measurement result shows that the calibration standard was not connected properly Abort Sweep immediately terminates the sweep After completing the sweep the analyzer generates a short sound and a green checkmark appears in the checkbox Measurements can be repeated as often as desired Newer results overwrite older measurement data O Most channel settings remain valid for calibration sweeps GUI Reference Channel Menu O Checks for the calibration sweep If the sweep range of the active channel exceeds the validity range of the standard model defined by Min Freq and Max Freq in the Add Modity Standard dialog the analyzer displays a notice box confirm with Ok The dialog provides further controls e Show Measurement Diagram displays or hides the diagram to the right of the list of Measured Standards Hiding the diagram leaves more space for displaying the characteristics of the measured standards e Keep Measurement Data for gt Repeat Previous Cal lt causes the raw measurement data of the standards to be stored after the calib
465. nge defined by means of the center frequency and the current span SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency SPAN must not exceed the allowed frequency range of the analyzer If necessary the span is reduced to min Center fun fuax Center SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency This subsystem sets frequency related parameters especially the measurement and display ranges for the different sweep types Note Fora frequency sweep the range can be defined alternatively by a combination of Start Stop frequencies or a Center frequency and Span SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency MODE SWEep SEGMent Selects the sweep type and defines which set of commands controls the stimulus frequency xi O The command SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TYPE provides a complete list of sweep types lt Ch gt Channel number SWEep Linear or logarithmic frequency sweep depending on the selected spacing SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic The frequency range is set via SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STARt etc SEGMent Segmented frequency sweep The sweep range is composed of several continuous frequency ranges or single frequency points defined by means of the commands in the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt subsystem SCPI Confirmed with device specific RST value and parameters command or query Command Types Example FREQ MODE SWE Activate a time sweep OWE DYER OG Set the sweep type Log Frequency Command Reference SEN
466. nnnnnnnnennnene 40 Parameter and Sweep Range Selection cccccccseeeeeccceececeeeeseeceeeesesaeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeaeess 41 Mistrument G el QU ON BEE 42 EV NEEN Leic he EE ME 44 Saving aNd PrimtinG 8 CC 45 BASIC TASKS E 47 Controla FON Pee EE 47 Rude 49 CO NACI AN Sisas seanincostessadetachontiantacpandsanbntcdneadetnaseniatonceanratadbesiolaasshoetiantaapesdssmscsdsaed 51 Getting Started Reflection Measurements 2 Getting Started The following chapter presents a sample session with a R amp S ZVL network analyzer and explains how to solve basic tasks that you will frequently encounter when working with the instrument CAUTION General safety instructions AN Before starting any measurement on your network analyzer please note the instructions given in Chapter Preparing for Use In the System Overview you will find detailed information on customizing the instrument and the display according to your personal preferences For a systematic explanation of all menus functions and parameters and background information refer to the reference chapters in the online help system NOTE Windows operation In the following we assume that you are familiar with standard Windows dialogs and mouse operation Refer to sections Using Front Panel Keys and Data Entry to learn how to access instrument functions and control dialogs without a mouse and keyboard 2 1 Reflection Measurements In a reflection measurement the ana
467. noted that the delay calculation is based on the already measured sweep points and does not slow down the measurement Af is constant over the entire sweep range if the sweep type is a Lin Frequency sweep For Log Frequency and Segmented Frequency sweeps it varies with the sweep point number m Application The aperture must be adjusted to the conditions of the measurement A small aperture increases the noise in the group delay a large aperture tends to minimize the noise effects but at the expense of frequency resolution Phase perturbations which are narrower in frequency than the aperture tend to be smeared over and can not be measured SWR Calculates the Standing Wave Ratio SWR from the measured quantity primarily from a reflection S parameter and displays it in a Cartesian diagram Properties The SWR or Voltage Standing Wave Ratio VSWR is a measure of the power reflected at the input of the DUT It is calculated from the magnitude of the reflection coefficients Gu where i denotes the port number of the DUT according to E d The superposition of the incident and the reflected wave on the transmission line connecting GUI Reference Trace Menu the analyzer and the DUT causes an interference pattern with variable envelope voltage The SWR is the ratio of the maximum voltage to the minimum envelope voltage along the line Interpretation of the SWR The superposition of the incident wave
468. nput for an external 10 MHz reference signal The following connectors require additional hardware options see rear panel labeling K POWER SENSOR is used for connecting power sensors of the R amp S NRP Zxy family Noise Source Control provides the supply voltage for an external noise source IF VIDEO OUT is an output for the IF signal or video signal AUX PORT provides control signals for external devices OCXO provides the internal 10 MHz reference signal which may be used to synchronize external devices The connector can be used as an input for external reference signals too IEC Bus is the GPIB bus connector according to standard IEEE 488 IEC 625 a Preparing for Use Rear Panel Tour ATTENTION Input levels AUX PORT A The maximum input levels and voltages of the input connectors at the front and rear panel must not be exceeded When using the AUX PORT watch the pin assignment carefully A short circuit may damage the instrument Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation 1 3 Putting the Instrument into Operation This section describes the basic steps to be taken when setting up the analyzer for the first time ATTENTION General safety instructions AN Before turning on the instrument please make sure that the following conditions are fulfilled Instrument covers are in place and all fasteners are tightened Fan openings are free from obstructions Si
469. nstrument TESE 253 EVENT STATUS ENABLE sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY queries the contents of the event status register Instrument Control Commands Instrument control commands are based on a hierarchical structure and can be represented in a command tree The command headers are built with one or several mnemonics keywords The first level root level mnemonic identifies a complete command system Example SENSe This mnemonic identifies the command system SENSe For commands of lower levels the complete path has to be specified starting on the left with the highest level the individual key words being separated by a colon Remote Control General Description Messages Example SENSe FREQuency STARt 1GHZ This command is located on the third level of the SENSe system It defines the start frequency of the sweep The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system Their effect depends on the structure of the command i e on the position in the command header they are inserted in Example SOURce FREQuency CW 1LGHZ This command contains the key word SOURce in the first command level It defines the frequency for sweep types operating at fixed frequency TRIGger SOURce EXTernal This command contains the key word SOURce in the second command level It d
470. nt The x dB compression point of an S parameter or ratio is the stimulus signal level where the magnitude of the measured quantity has dropped by x dB compared to its value at small stimulus signal levels small signal value AS an approximation for the small signal value the analyzer uses the value at the start level of the evaluation range Eval Range Cmp in p The compression point is a measure for the upper edge of the linearity range of a DUT It is close to the highest input signal level for which the DUT shows a linear response al gt x a b gt GUI Reference Trace Menu x b so that the magnitude of all S parameters remains constant When Compression Point is activated a marker labeled Cmp is placed to compression point with the smallest stimulus level Moreover the Trace Statistics info field shows the numerical results of the compression point measurement 39 4 dBm 03 4 dem e Cmp Inis the stimulus level at the compression point in units of dBm e Cmp Out is the magnitude of the wave reflected or transmitted by the DUT If an S parameter S is measured then Cmp Out is the magnitude of the wave bj e The ratio Cmp Out Cmp In in the example above 14 dB is equal to the magnitude of the measured S parameter or ratio at the compression point The info field shows invalid results if the wrong sweep type trace format or measured quantity is selected or if the t
471. nt parameter string variable see list of parameters below RST value SCPI Device specific no query CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter MEASure Command lt Trc_name gt queries the measurement parameter of the trace Types CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter CATalog returns a list of all defined traces Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 The measurement parameter is selected by means of the following keywords the selection depends on the number of test ports of the analyzer e g S44 is not available on 2 port analyzers fol her Command Reference CALCulate KFAC21 KFAC12 Stability factor K for unbalanced ports only MUF121 MUF112 Stability factor u for unbalanced ports only MUF221 MUF212 Stability factor u for unbalanced ports only Selecting a parameter Y lt n gt lt m gt or Z lt n gt lt m gt sets the range of port numbers to be considered for the Y and Z parameter measurement to lt n gt lt m gt CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SELect lt string gt Selects an existing trace as the active trace of the channel All trace commands without explicit reference to the trace name act on the active trace eg CALCulate lt Ch gt FORMat
472. ntext menu providing frequently used marker settings 3 1 5 7 System Overview Basic Concepts ZS To change the position of the marker info field select Movable Marker Info from the context menu Drag and drop the info field to any position in the active diagram area To change the format of the active marker select Mkr Format To express the coordinates of the active marker relative to the reference marker activate the Delta Mode For more information Show Info Table In addition to the marker info field the analyzer provides an info table with extended marker information Marker Trace Stimulus Response Delta Discr Fixed Tracking Search Range H Ret Trci 3 3 440171000 GHz 6 426 dE T Iw Iw Off Full Range H Mkr 1 Trci 4 000150000 GHz 5 364 dB M E DW Off Full Range The table is hidden by default To display the table double click the marker info field to open the Marker Properties dialog Context menu of the marker info field A right mouse click on the marker info field opens a context menu Marker Properties w Marker 1 woe Marker 2 Marker 3 All Markers OFF Max Search Min Search Movable Marker Info Movable Marker Info allows the marker info field to be placed to any position in the diagram area The remaining settings correspond to the most common commands in the Trace Marker and Trace Search menus Channel Settings The main properties of all channels assigned to the traces in
473. number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the Command Reference lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value lt trace_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used Value of the reference position in percent The top of the y axis is defined to have a reference position of 100 while the bottom of the y axis is defined to have a reference position of 0 0 to 100 PCT 80 PCT Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored Confirmed with query CUCL PARS ODER YONA EE Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram area no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISP WIND2 TRAC9 Y RPOS 50 or DISP WIND2 TRAC Y RPOS 50 CH4TR1 Set the reference position to the center of the diagram area DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe TOP upper value l lt trace_name gt Sets the upper maximum edge of the diagram area lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt lt upper_value gt Range def unit RST value lt trace_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Nu
474. number of test ports The response is 2 INSTrument SELect CHANNEL1 CHANNEL2 CHANNEL3 CHANNEL4 Selects a channel lt Ch gt as active channel O To select a channel number gt 4 use the generalized command INSTrument NSELect SCN Parameters Number of the channel to be activated The channel must be created before using CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe ON Range def unit CHANNEL1 CHANNEL2 CHANNEL8 CHANNEL4 Command Reference MEMory RST value CHANNEL SCPI Command Confirmed command or query If all channels have been deleted Types CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe OFF the query returns CHANNELO Example CONF CHAN2 STAT ON INST CHANNEL2 Create channel no 2 and select it as the active channel MEMory MEMory The MEMory system controls the loaded setups of the analyzer d The MEMory command don t affect any stored files Use the MEMory commands to store and load data and to manage files stored on a mass storage device MEMory CATalog Returns the names of all loaded setups Response Comma separated list of all setups RST value Gei the default setup is created after each RST SCPI Command Confirmed with device specific response query only Types Example RST MEM DEF SETUP_2 Create a setup named Setup_2 and make it the active Setup MEM CAT Query all setups The response is Setl Setup_2 MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA RecallSets Setup_2 nw
475. o at the input test port of the DUT no reflection matched input whereas the outer circumference Gul 1 represents a totally reflected signal io Circles of equal magnitude Voltage reflection aM Voltage reflection Short circuited Open circuited load Z 0 load Z infinity a 180 00 Radial lines of Matching equal phase angle impedance Z Z 90 Examples for definite magnitudes and phase angles The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of an open circuit Z infinity 0 is one its phase is zero The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit Z 0 U 0 is one its phase is 180 Smith Chart The Smith chart is a circular diagram that maps the complex reflection coefficients Si to normalized impedance values In contrast to the polar diagram the scaling of the diagram is not linear The grid lines correspond to points of constant resistance and reactance Points with the same resistance are located on circles Points with the same reactance produce arcs The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value the complex impedance Z R j X and the equivalent inductance L see marker format description in the help system System Overview Basic Concepts smith O 2 Us Ret 1 U abr 1 2 000000 GHz 16 478 O j 480 0 515 63 pH Meee Stat 40 h i Pwr 10 dBm Polar diagram types
476. o in the current test setup so the trace shows the noise level Parameter and Sweep Range Selection After preset the display shows a diagram with a dB Mag scale The sweep range scale of the horizontal axis is equal to the maximum frequency range of the analyzer and the S parameter S42 is selected as a measurement parameter To obtain information about the reflection characteristics of your DUT you have to select an appropriate measurement parameter and specify the sweep range 1 Press the CENTER function key to the right of the display to open the associated numeric entry bar Center Frequency Enter the center of your desired frequency range in e g 5 25 GHz If you use the data keys at the front panel for data entry simply type 5 25 and terminate the entry with the G n key Refer to section Data Entry to learn more about entering numeric values and characters 2 Press SPAN and enter the width of the frequency range you want to measure e g 0 5 GHz In addition to the linear frequency sweep considered in this example the analyzer provides frequency sweeps with a logarithmic or segmented frequency axis Refer to Setting up a Sweep for more application examples 3 Press MEAS and select the forward reflection coefficient Gu as a measurement parameter 4 Press SCALE and activate the Autoscale function The analyzer adjusts the scale of the diagram to fit in the entire S4 trace leaving an appropriate display margin R
477. o the left of the display then press Device Setup 4 Inthe Hardcopy Setup dialog opened select Printer 5 Close the dialog and press Print Screen to create a hardcopy of your diagram 6 Press Device Setup again and select a file format or Clipboard 7 Close the dialog and press Print Screen again to copy the diagram to a file or an external application 8 Open the Nwa File menu and select Save NWA As 9 Inthe Save As dialog opened select a file location format and name and activate Save Getting Started Reflection Measurements The active setup is stored to a file and can be reused in a later session Proceed as described in section Starting the Analyzer Shutdown to shut down your analyzer 28 Getting Started Basic Tasks 2 2 Basic Tasks 2 2 1 WEN U The following sections describe how to solve basic tasks that you will frequently encounter when working with the instrument In particular you can learn how to access instrument functions and control dialogs without a mouse and keyboard Control via Front Panel Keys Although a mouse and external keyboard simplify the operation of the instrument you can access all essential functions using the keys on the front panel The following examples are intended to make you familiar with front panel key operation To Access a Particular Menu Command 1 Press the MENU key to the left of the display to access the menu bar and open the Nwa F
478. ocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are pre configured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the exchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost Remote control of an instrument via a network is based on standardized protocols which follow the OSI reference model see Fig below Application SCPT Presentation XDE WH 115 CSS On GON C RP Transport TEDE Data Link Ethemet sU s Based on TCP UDP messages between the controller and the instrument are exchanged via open network computing ONC remote procedure calls RPC With XDR VXI 11 legal RPC messages are known as VXI 11 standard Based on this standard messages are exchanged between the controller and the instrument The messages are identical with SCPI commands They can be organized in four groups HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors e Program messages control command to the instrument e Response messages values returned by the instrument e Service request spontaneous queries of the instrument e Low level control messages interface messages A VXI 11 link between a controller and an instrument uses three channels core abort and interrupt channel Instrument control is mainly performed on the core channel program response and low level control messages The
479. of the GPIB bus Combining Manual and Remote Control Using a remote control script is the quickest and easiest way of performing complicated tasks which need to be repeated many times On the other hand it is often preferable to control a previously configured measurement manually in order to observe the result on the screen Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation The analyzer provides a number of tools for combining manual and remote control User Keys The remote control commands SYSTem USER KEY place up to 8 softkeys with arbitrary functionality on the remote screen The softkeys replace the default softkeys Go to Local and Display On Off User S11 Remote Control Active Display Off sc Pressing a user softkey or clicking the corresponding command across the top of the remote screen executes the assigned functionality O If you want to use more than 8 user keys you can easily introduce additional levels Simply reserve one key for re defining the entire user key bar If you press or click the key your remote script should re assign the labels and functions of the existing keys If you use this procedure repeatedly you can emulate an arbitrary number of manual control features on your remote screen Menu key commands The commands in the DISPlay MENU KEY subsystem open the manual control screen activate menus or submenus for manual control or execute a
480. ol REM sYSTem DISPlay UPDate SYSTem USER DISPlay TITLe define a title for the remote display SYSTem ERRor DISPlay switch tooltip on or off Setting the Device Address The GPIB address primary address of the instrument is factory set to 20 It can be changed manually in the System menu or via GPIB bus For remote control addresses 0 through 30 are permissible The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings Remote control SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess Return to Manual Operation Return to manual operation can be initiated via the front panel or via remote control Manually Click the Local softkey in the remote screen Via GPIB bus CALL IBLOC device Via RSIB or VX 11 protocol LOC and REM can be used to switch from remote to manual control and back OC Local lockout Before returning to manual control command processing must be completed If this is not the case the analyzer switches back to remote control immediately Returning to manual control by pressing the Local softkey can be disabled by the GPIB Local Lockout Message LLO see GPIB Bus Interface Universal Commands which is also included in the NI commands SetRWLS Set Remote With Lockout State or SendLLO This prevents unintentional switch over Le return to manual control is possible via the GPIB bus only Returning to manual control via the front panel keys can be enabled again by deactivating the REN control line
481. oller address to which GPIB bus control is returned after termination of the triggered action PRE Parallel poll Register Enable sets parallel poll enable register to the value 0 255 Parallel Poll indicated The query PRE returns the contents of the parallel poll enable register in decimal form Register Enable 0 Power On Status registers is maintained or reset when the analyzer is switched on Clear PSC 0 causes the contents of the status registers to be maintained Thus a service request can be triggered on switching on in the case of a corresponding configuration of status registers ESE and SRE PSC 0 resets the registers O PSC Power on Status Clear determines whether the contents of the ENABIe Command Reference CALCulate RST ReSeT sets the instrument to a defined default status The command resets all Reset setups restoring the factory default values defined for remote control operation In no query contrast the command SYSTem PRESet resets the active setup only The default settings are indicated in the description of commands SRE Service Request Enable sets the service request enable register to the value 0 255 Service Request indicated Bit 6 MSS mask bit remains 0 This command determines under which Enable conditions a service request is triggered The query SRE returns the contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 is always 0 S
482. om the following registers The Event Status Register ESR with the associated mask register standard event status enable ESE The STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument IST PPE The IST flag Individual STatus like the SRQ combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE is associated to the IST flag It fulfills an analogous function for the IST flag as the SRE does for the service request Output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview All status registers have the same internal structure O The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENABIe part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System Overview of Status Registers The status registers of the network analyzer are implemented as shown below 4 hat Used A ngt usad 15 IA Leet 4 nt used BH Lin rare ra 14 A 14 not Laad D nat used P lihat racer 14 13 not Leed i net user aie Lt raca ro 12 amp 12 ngt sad 5 nat uscd A Limit race ro 11 11 not Leed A vu ser 4 Limit race ro 12 a du ngt Sed 3 not used J imit race
483. ommand Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics MSTDev STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the Mean Sid Dev results in the diagram area of trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Statistical info field on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics STATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics RESult MEAN STDDev MAX MIN RMS PTPeak ELENgth PDELay ALL Returns a single statistical parameters of the trace no lt Chn gt or all parameters It is not necessary to display the info field CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics S TATe ON before using this command lt Chn gt Parameters Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace MEAN Return arithmetic mean value of all response values of the trace in the entire sweep range or in the evaluation range defined in manual control STDDev Return standard deviation of all response values MAX Return the maximum of all response values MIN Return the minimum of all response values RMS Return the root mean square of all response values PTPeak Return the peak to peak value MAX MIN ELENgth Return the electrical length PDELay Return the phase delay ALL Return all statistical values observing the
484. ommand Reference SENSe lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt Boolean gt ON The bandwidth can be set independently for each sweep segment OFF The bandwidth in all sweep segments is equal to the bandwidth for unsegmented sweeps set via SENSe lt Ch gt BWIDth RESolution RST value OFF The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a bandwidth is entered using SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 kHz measurement bandwidth SEGM BWID 1 MHZ Increase the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz GER BWIDSCONT Ore Couple the bandwidths in all segments and reset the bandwidth in segment no 1 to the initial value SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent CLEar Deletes all sweep segments in the channel The command is equivalent to SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent DELet ALL SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt COUNt Returns the number of sweep segments in the channel including all segments that are switched off SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt STATe OFF lt Ch gt Channel number RST value SCPI Command Device specific query only Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM OFF Disable the measurement in the created sweep segment SEGM COUN Query the number of segments
485. ommand or query hod COnR 2 AGI 2 Reset the instrument and query whether the factory calibration for channel 1 is enabled The response is 7 SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt lt DC_loss gt Defines the frequency independent part DC value of the offset loss Command Reference SENSe lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt DC loss gt Frequency independent part of the offset loss Range def unit 200 dB to 200 dB dB The increment UP DOWN is 0 001 dB RST value 0 dB SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example See SENSe lt Ch gt CORRect ion EDELay lt port_no gt ELENgth SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt AUTO ONCE Defines the offset parameters for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the phase response is minimized and the measured loss is reproduced as far as possible across the entire sweep range lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer This numeric suffix is ignored the active port is determined by the active trace ONCE Applies the Auto Length and Loss function RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example RST CORR LOSS AUTO ONCE Reset the instrument and apply the Auto Length and Loss function to the default trace Trc7
486. on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example CALC LIM LOW 10 0 0 10 Define the following lower and default upper limit line segments 5eg Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response 1 300 kHz o GHz 20 dB 20 dB 2 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 10 dB 0 dE 3 Upper 300 kHz a Hz 720 dB 70 dB 4 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 0 dB 10 dB CALC LIM LOW STAT ON CALC LIM FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain COMPlex S SINV Y Z YREL ZREL Deletes the existing limit line and re defines the physical units of the response values of the limit line The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DOMain O This command is complemented by CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain FORMat and CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain SPACing lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters Keyword for the physical unit of the response values Range def unit The parameters form four groups e Sand SINV select relative units dB for the limit line e Y selects admittance units S Siemens e Z selects impedance units Q e YREL and ZREL select dimensionless numbers U kel RST value SCPI Command Types Device specific no query CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit RDOMain FORMat COMPIex MAGNitude PHASe REAL Command Reference CALCulate IMAGinary
487. one its phase is 180 Inverted Smith Chart The inverted Smith chart is a circular diagram that maps the complex reflection coefficients S to normalized admittance values In contrast to the polar diagram the scaling of the diagram is not linear The grid lines correspond to points of constant conductance and susceptance System Overview Basic Concepts Points with the same conductance are located on circles Points with the same susceptance produce arcs The following example shows an inverted Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value the complex admittance Y G j B and the equivalent inductance L see marker format description in the help system shkr 1 2 000000 GHz 2 212 m 18 885 mt Bur 10 dm Polar diagram types A comparison of the Smith chart the inverted Smith chart and the polar diagram reveals many similarities between the two representations In fact the shape of a trace does not change at all if the display format is switched from Polar to Smith or Inverted Smith the analyzer simply replaces the underlying grid and the default marker format Inverted Smith chart construction The inverted Smith chart is point symmetric to the Smith chart The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction ZS The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance real admittance The center of the diagram represents Y Y 1 where Y
488. onnecting the two points lt Start Stimulus gt lt Start Response gt and lt Stop Stimulus gt lt Stop Response gt see Rules for Limit Line Definition Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA CALCulate lt Chns gt LIMit DATA CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SEGment lt Seg gt CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit DELete ALL MMEMory STORe LIMit MMEMory LOAD LIMit Multi Selection of Limit Line Segments In the Define Limit Line dialog it is possible to edit several limit line segments at the same time Selection of two or more segments use the left mouse key and the Shift key of an external keyboard and a right click on the dark grey Seg area opens a context menu Deg Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus 1 Upper 300 kHz D GHz Upper DES Lower elete Segments 4 OFF 5 Add Response Offset 040148 GHz Add Stimulus Offset Adi ent De Start Response Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Merge Segments The context menu provides the following functions e Modification of all entries in the segment table Type start and stop values for the stimulus and response variable e Definition of an offset for response and stimulus values in analogy to the Properties of Imported Segments dialog e Delete the selected segments e Merge the selected segments to a single new segment The start and stop values of the new seg
489. ons required at the operating site are as follows K The ambient temperature must be in the ranges specified for operation and for compliance with specifications see data sheet Kg All fan openings including the rear panel perforations must be unobstructed The distance to the wall should be at least 10 cm ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge A To avoid damage of electronic components of the DUT and the analyzer the operating site must be protected against electrostatic discharge ESD ESD is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT or test fixture to the analyzer s test ports To prevent ESD damage use a wrist strap and grounding cord and connect yourself to ground 1 3 3 Bench Top Operation lf the analyzer is operated on a bench top the surface should be flat In order to move the handle into the desired position pull at both side knobs and turn the handle Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation WARNING Danger of injury A To avoid injuries place the instrument on a stable surface and do not stack other instruments or material on top of it 1 3 4 Mounting in a 19 Rack Using the adapter R amp S ZZA S334 order no 1109 4487 00 the instrument can be mounted in 19 racks according to the mounting instructions supplied with the rack adapter ATTENTION Allow for sufficient air supply in the rack A Make sure that there is sufficient space between the ventil
490. ontains two traces Trci and Trc2 assigned to channels no 1 and 2 respectively CALC1 PAR SEL TRC1 CALC1 MARK1 ON MARKZ ON Select Trci as the active trace and create the two markers no 1 and 2 The default position for both markers is the center of the sweep range CALC1 MARK COUP ON Create two markers no 1 and 2 on Trc 2 and couple them to the markers of Trc 1 CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt DELTa STATe lt Boolean gt Switches the delta mode for marker lt Mk gt on trace no lt Chn gt on or off The marker must be created before using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt STATe ON If the active trace contains no reference marker the command also creates a reference marker lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 lt Boolean gt ON OFF Enables or disables the delta mode RST value OFF SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example Suppose that the active setup contains an active trace no 1 CALC MARK Oh Create marker no 1 and set it to the center of the sweep range CALC MARK DELT ON Command Reference CALCulate Create a reference marker at the center of the sweep range and set marker 1 to delta mode CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat MLINear MLOGarithmic PHASe POLar COMPlex GDELay REAL IMAGinary SWR LINPhase LOGPhase IMPedance ADMittance MDB MLPHase
491. ontent RST DISP CMAP MARK ON CALC MARK ON Create diagram area no 1 with default trace showing the S parameter S and a marker Mkr 1 CALC PAR SDEF TRC2 S11 DISP WIND TRAC2 FEED TRC2 Create a new trace named TRC2 and display the trace in diagram area no 1 Note that the new trace automatically becomes the active trace CALC MARK2 ON Assign a marker Mkr 2 to the trace Both markers are displayed with the same color DISP CMAP13 RGB 1 0 0 DISP CMAP14 RGB 0 1 0 Color the first trace red the second trace green DISP CMAP6 RGB Command Reference DISPlay Query the marker color The marker color depends on the settings made in previous sessions it is not reset A possible response is 0 0 0 for black markers DISP CMAP MARK OFF Change the marker colors Mkr 1 turns red Mkr 2 turns green The numeric suffixes lt Element gt denote the following display elements 6 Same Color for all Markers 9 Limit Fail Trace Color Command Reference DISPlay DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt TRACe COLor STATe lt Boolean gt Defines the trace color schemes in different diagram areas lt Element gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Numeric suffix not used in this command Implemented for compatibility with DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB OFF Independent color scheme in new diagram area Moved traces change their color ON Col
492. oolean gt Maximizes all diagram areas in the active setup or restores the previous display configuration lt Wnd gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Number of the diagram area to become the active diagram area DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt MAXimize acts on all diagrams of the current setup however the diagram no lt Wnd gt is displayed on top of the others ON OFF Maximize all diagram areas or restore the previous display configuration OFF Device specific command or query returns whether or not the diagrams are maximized RST DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram areas no 1 with default trace and 2 with no trace DISP WIND2 MAXimize ON Maximize the diagram areas placing area no 2 on top DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe lt Boolean gt Creates or deletes a diagram area identified by its area number lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt lt Boolean gt Number of the diagram area to be created or deleted ON OFF Creates or deletes diagram area no lt Wnd gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Device specific command or query returns whether or not a particular diagram area exists EE EE Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 DISP WIND2 STAT ON Create diagram area no 2 Command Reference DISPlay DISP WIND2 TRAC9 FEED CH4TR1 Display the generated trace in diagram a
493. op 8 GHz Stop 8 GHz Add Trace Diag Area 2 Delete Trace Assign Diag Area Assign Channel Stop 8 GHz Trace Stop 8 GHz Manager Stop 8 GHz Programming Examples Basic Tasks The response is Trc1 521 lmpedance_trace Z S21 Admittance_trace Y S21 Query the reference level for the Z_trace The trace is referenced by its number in diagram area no 2 DISPlay WINDow2 TRACe3 Y RLEVel A Change the display format for the Z trace The trace is the active trace in channel 3 so it is referenced by the channel suffix 3 CALCulate3 FORMat PHASe Markers and Limit Lines Programming task Display two traces in a single diagram ares use markers to read results and perform a limit check Diag Area 1 Important remote control features for this program example The following command sequence illustrates the structure of the remote commands discussed in section Basic Remote Control Concepts In particular it shows that Traces are referenced by trace names The active trace of a channel is often referenced by the channel suffix This simplifies the program syntax e g in the commands for marker settings and for the limit check Programming Examples Basic Tasks Diagram areas are referenced by a window suffix lt Wnd gt An additional suffix lt WndTr gt in the DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt commands numbers the different traces in a diagra
494. or a particular Command Reference SENSe Command sweep segment Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings SEGM DEF Query the channel settings for the new segment SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DELete Deletes the specified single sweep segment Del Selected Segment SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DELete ALL deletes all segments in the channel lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number If unspecified the value is set to 1 RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus NORMal selectivity SEGM DEL Delete the created segment SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent DELete ALL Deletes all sweep segments in the channel Del All Segments SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DELete deletes a single segment lt Ch gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Device specific no query SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus NORMal selectivity SEGM ALL Delete the created segment and all segments in the channel created before Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency CENTer Returns the center frequency of sweep segment no lt Seg gt lt Ch gt lt Seg gt Response Rang
495. or scheme in new diagram area continues the previous color scheme Moved traces keep their color RST does not affect the color settings see also description of the Preset command Device specific command or query RST DISP CMAP13 RGB 1 0 0 Create diagram area no 1 with default trace showing the S parameter S21 and color the trace red DISP CMAP TRAC COL OFF DISP WIND2 STAT ON Select independent color schemes for new diagram areas Create a new diagram area no 2 CALC PAR SDEF TRC2 S11 DISP WIND2 TRAC2 FEED TRC2 Command Reference DISPlay Create a new trace named TRC2 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 2 The new trace is red like the first trace DISP CMAP TRAC COL ON DISP WIND3 STAT ON Continue the same color scheme in new diagram areas Create a new diagram area no 3 CALC PAR SDEF TRC3 S22 DISP WIND3 TRAC3 FEED TRC3 Create a new trace named TRC3 and display the trace in a new diagram area no 3 The new trace is not red DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute lt menu_key gt Executes the function of a key with a specified name and switches to the local screen O You can use this command to execute part of your measurement task manually see Combining Manual and Remote Control Menu keys that initiate events are executed immediately because no additional input is necessary However DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute can be used as well for manual entries in numeric entry ba
496. or the DC power supply without being removed Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation K To charge the battery using the AC power supply connect the instrument to the mains supply and switch on the AC power on the rear panel The standby key on the front panel can be set either way k To charge the battery using the DC power supply connect the instrument to the DC power supply If you have more than one battery packs in use you can also charge them outside the instrument using the power supply unit of option R amp S FSL Z4 DC Supply for FSL B31 stock no 4052 3041 00 An LED with the inscription Charge is switched on during charging Charging conditions Approximate duration AC power supply standby mode AC power supply instrument is switched on DC power supply instrument is switched off DC power supply instrument is switched on External charging battery removed Preparing for Use Maintenance 1 4 Maintenance ATTENTION 1 4 1 The network analyzer does not require any special maintenance Make sure that the air vents are not obstructed The outside of the instrument is suitably cleaned using a soft line free dust cloth Cleaning agents Instrument damage caused by cleaning agentsCleaning agents contain substances that may damage the instrument e g solvent containing cleaning agents may damage the front panel labeling or plastic parts Never use cleaning agents suc
497. ormation on the screen Note Traces are generally identified by a string parameter defining the trace name e g CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SELect lt Trace_Name gt In the DISPlay subsystem traces are assigned to diagram areas DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Trace_Name gt While this assignment is valid the trace is identified by the numeric suffix lt wndTr gt and the trace name is not needed DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe lt Boolean gt Shows or hides all frequency stimulus values in the diagrams lt Boolean gt ON OFF Show or hide stimulus values RST value ON SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example RST DISP ANN FREQ OFF Create diagram area no 1 with default trace and hide the frequency stimulus values DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt MARKer STATe lt Boolean gt Displays all markers with the same color or display each marker with the color of the associated trace The colors of all display elements are defined via DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt Element gt Numeric suffix not used in this command Implemented for compatibility with DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt RGB Command Reference lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay ON All markers have the same color to be defined via DISP lay CMAP 6 RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt The marker color
498. ors in different diagram areas so that any trace that is moved from one diagram area to another can keep its color Keep Trace Color changed between these two alternative color modes as shown below Move trace to another Add Trace Diag Area Trace Trace Select diagram area Trace Manager Trace color changed Color scheme of the new diagram area is independent according to the new restarts with the first colors Consequently the new trace is diagram area s color displayed with a color that has been already used scheme Trace keeps its color Color scheme of the new diagram area continues color scheme of the previously active area The new trace is displayed with a new color See also program example for DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt TRACe COLor STATe Two buttons at the bottom of the dialog are used to save or recall user defined color schemes GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu e Save opens a Save As dialog to select a color scheme file and save the current settings Color scheme files are non editable files with the extension ColorScheme the default directory is C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA ColorSchemes e Recall opens an Open File dialog to load and apply a color scheme saved before O To recall a color scheme file ColorScheme you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application Remote control DISPlay CMAP lt Elemen
499. ost common tasks related to the section Context menus of the channel list A right mouse click on the channel name the sweep range and the additional parameter section of the channel list opens the following context menus respectively enter Power Span Channel Manager akart Meas Bandwidth Mew Channel Stop average Delete Channel Humber of Points Average Factor The settings correspond to the most common commands in the Channel Channel Select Channel Center Span and Channel Pwr Bw menus Context Menus To provide access to the most common tasks and speed up the operation the analyzer offers context menus right click menus for the following display elements Diagram area Marker info field Trace list Separate context menus for trace name section measured quantity section format section scale section and channel section Channel list separate context menus for channel name section sweep range section additional parameter section Working with context menus requires a mouse Click inside the display element that you want to work with using the right mouse button Except from some particular screen configurations anything you can do from a context menu you can also do from the menu bar using front panel keys and softkeys Use whatever method is most convenient for you 3 1 6 3 1 6 1 System Overview Basic Concepts Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of re
500. ount Loss parameters Definition The loss L is the attenuation of a wave traveling through the offset transmission line In logarithmic representation the loss can be modeled as the sum of a constant and a frequency dependent part The frequency dependence is essentially due to the skin effect the total loss can be approximated by an expression of the following form GUI Reference Channel Menu Losst 7 Losst f g L088 pa Es FESS ei r i The DC loss LosSpc the reference frequency Ier and the loss at the reference frequency Loss are empirical parameters for the transmission lines connected to each port which can be entered into any of the dialogs in the Offset menu For a lossless transmission line both Losspc and Losse are zero In practice Loss f et often represents the dominant contribution so that LosSpc can be set to zero Offset parameters Application and effect Offset parameters can be particularly useful if the reference plane of the calibration cannot be placed directly at the DUT ports e g because the DUT has non coaxial ports and can only be measured in a test fixture Offset parameters can also help to avoid a new complete system error correction if a cable with known properties has to be included in the test setup A positive length offset moves the reference plane of the port towards the DUT a negative offset moves the reference plane away from the DUT The offset parameters cannot comp
501. performs a serial poll and provides the status byte of the device VB format Function RSDLLibrsp ByVal ud spr ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format Short WINAPL RSDLLibrso short ad char Tar spr Shore far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibrsp short ud char spr short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle spr Pointer to status byte Example RSDLLibrsp ud spr ibsta iberr ibcntl RSDLLibclir sends the command SDC Device Clear to the instrument VB format Function RSDLLibclr ByVal ud spr ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Ineeger C format short WINAPI RSDLLibclr short ud short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLIib lr sh rt ud Short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter Eke Device handle Example RSDilibelr tid absta iberr abencl HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors RSDLLibonl This function switches the device to onlme or offline mode When it is switched to offline mode the interface is released and the device handle becomes invalid By calling RSDLLibfind again the communication is set up again VB format Function RSDLLibonl ByVal ud ByVal v ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPL RSDLIiibonl short ud short v short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format
502. ple SRST sDISP WIND TITL DATA S21 Test Diagram Define a title for the default diagram area The title is displayed below the top of the diagram area DISP WIND TITL OFF TITL DATA Command Reference DISPlay Hide the title The title is no longer displayed but still defined so it can be displayed again DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the title for area number lt Wnd gt defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe DATA lt Wnd gt Number of the diagram area lt Boolean gt ON OFF Displays or hides the title RST value ON SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe DATA DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt DELete Releases the assignment between a trace and a diagram area as defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Trace_Name gt and expressed by the lt WndTr gt suffix The trace itself is not deleted this must be done via CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DELete lt Trace_Name gt lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Trace number used to distinguish the traces of the same diagram area lt Wnd gt RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example CALCA PAR ODER E EES Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S
503. port calibration types contain no numbers because the command is only valid for ports 1 and 2 Confirmed with device specific calibration types command or query If several calibration types are assigned to channel lt Ch gt the query returns a list of all calibration types See SENSe lt Ch gt cORRection COLLect SAVE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod DEFine lt cal_name gt REFL RSHort FOPort FRTRans OPTPort TOSM lt port_no gt lt port_no gt Selects a one port or two port calibration type at arbitrary analyzer ports lt Ch gt lt cal_name gt Parameters lt port_no gt Channel number of the calibrated channel Name of the calibration string parameter The name serves as a reference to delete a particular set of system correction data SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect DELete Calibration types One port Normalization reflection using an open REFL or a short RSHort standard Full One Port Two port Normalization transmission FRTRans One Path Two Port TOSM Port numbers of the analyzer For an n port calibration type n 1 to 2 n port Command Reference SENSe numbers must be specified If more than n numbers are defined the spare numbers the last ones in the list are ignored Entering less than n numbers Causes an error message RST value SCPI Device specific no query Use SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect METHod
504. pper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction MOTE O This command is identical with CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer SHIFt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Response offset value for all limit line segments Range def unit Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition dB RST value SCPI Command Device specific no query Types Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer FEED CALCulate lt Chns LIMit UPPer STATe lt Boolean gt Switches the upper limit check on or off Upper limit line segments are assigned odd numbers see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA The command does not affect segments with even numbers um O Use CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit STATe to switch on or off the entire limit check including upper and lower limit lines lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Limit check on or off RST value OFF Command Reference CALCulate SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example CALC LIM UPP 10 0 0 10 Define the following upper and default lower limit line segments Seg Type Start Stimulus Stop Stimulus Start Response Stop Response i 200 kHz o GHz 10 dB 0 dB 2 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 70 dB 70 dB 2 Upper 300 kHz O Hz 0 dE 10 dB 4 Lower 300 kHz amp GHz 20 dB 20 dB CALC LIM UPP
505. properties of the open f standard for a N 50 Q connector type in the active cal kit CORR CKIT FOP N 50 Ohm Test Kit Query the properties of the open f standard for a N 50 Q connector type in cal kit Test Kit SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt lt Ckit_Name gt lt Std_No gt lt Min_Freq gt lt Max_Freq gt lt El_Length gt lt Loss gt lt C0Os lt LO gt lt C1 gt lt L1 gt lt C2 gt lt L2 gt lt C3 gt lt L3 gt OPEN SHORt Defines the parameters of a calibration standard lt std_type gt for a specified connector type lt conn_type gt A particular physical standard can be selected by specifying the name of the calibration kit and its serial number Depending on the standard type only a subset of the parameters may be used see table below lt Ch gt lt conn_type gt lt std_type gt Parameter list RST value Channel number This suffix is ignored because calibration kits are channel independent Connector type one of the following identifiers N50 N75 N 50 Q or N 75 Q connectors PC7 PC35 PC292 PC 7 PC 3 5 or 2 92 mm connectors USER lt no gt User defined connectors UserConn1 UserConn2 This command only supports ZVR compatible connector types For general definitions use SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt std_type gt Standard type For reflection standards the first character denotes the gender e g FOPEN MOPEN Open
506. ptional lt trace_name gt parameter is used ONCE Activate the autoscale function lt trace_name gt Optional string parameter for the trace name e g Trc4 If this optional parameter is present the trace number lt WndTr gt is ignored RST value SCPI Command Confirmed no query Types Example RST DISP WIND TRAC Y PDIV RLEV Query the value between two grid graticules and the reference value for the default trace The response is 10 0 DISP WIND TRAC Y AUTO ONCE PDIV RLEV or DISP WIND TRAC Y AUTO ONCE Trei PDIV RLEV Autoscale the default trace and query the scaling parameters again In general both values have changed DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y SCALe BOTTom lt lower_value gt lt trace_name gt Sets the lower minimum edge of the diagram area lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON lt WndTr gt Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED This suffix is ignored if the optional lt trace_name gt parameter is used lt lower_value gt Value and unit for the lower diagram edge Range def unit Range and unit depend on the measured quantity see Units for DISPlay Commands RST value Depending on the measured quantity The default lower edge for a dB Mag diagram is 80 dB lt trace_name gt Optional string parameter for the trace n
507. queue or the output buffer The ENABle parts of the status registers can be set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ To use the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits in the enable registers SRE and ESE should be set to 1 Examples Use oPc to generate an SRQ 1 Set bit 0 in the ESE Operation Complete 2 Set bit 5 in the SRE ESB 3 Insert OPC in the command sequence e g at the end of a sweep As soon as all commands preceding oPc have been completed the instrument generates an SRQ Generate an SRQ when a limit is exceeded 4 Set bit 3 in the SRE summary bit of the STATus QUEStionable register set after STATus PRESet 5 Set bit 10 in the STATus QUEStionable ENABle register Summary bit of the STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 register 6 Set bit 1 in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 ENABle register The analyzer generates a SRQ when the event associated with bit 1 of the STATus QUEStionable LIMit1 ENABle register occurs i e when any point on the first trace fails the limit check Find out which event caused an SRQ The procedure to find out which event caused an SRQ is analogous to the procedure to generate an SRQ 7 STB query the contents of the status byte in decimal form If bit 3 QUEStionable summary bit is set then Remote Control General Description Status Reporting System 8 STAT QUES EVENT query STATus QUEStionable register
508. r Measurement error caused by a coupler or bridge in the analyzer s source port causing part of the generated signal to leak through the forward path into the receive path instead of being transmitted towards the DUT The directivity error can be corrected by means of a full one port calibration or one of the two port calibration methods except normalization Discrete marker The stimulus value of a discrete marker always coincides with a sweep point so that the marker does not show interpolated measurement values Excursion Difference between the response values at a local maximum minimum of the trace and at the two closest local minima maxima to the left and to the right Forward A measurement on a two port DUT is said to be in forward direction if the source signal stimulus is applied to port 1 of the DUT Isolation error Measurement error caused by a crosstalk between the source and receive port of the analyzer Limit check Comparison of the measurement results with the limit lines and display of a pass fail indication An acoustic warning can be generated in addition if a limit is exceeded Limit line A limit line is a set of data to specify the allowed range for some or all points of a trace Typically limit lines are used to check whether a DUT conforms to the rated specifications conformance testing Load match error Measurement error caused by a mismatch of the analyzer s receive load port causing part of the sign
509. r predictable within a given frequency range The standards are grouped into several types open through match corresponding to the different input quantities for the analyzer s error models The standard type also determines the equivalent circuit model used to describe its properties The circuit model depends on several parameters that are stored in the cal kit file associated with the calibration kit As an alternative to using circuit models it is possible to describe the standards by means of S parameter tables stored in a file The analyzer provides a large number of predefined cal kits but can also import cal kit files and create new kits e A selection of predefined kits with different types of parameters is available for all connector types The parameters of these kits are displayed in the Add Modify Standards dialog however it is not possible to change or delete the kits e Imported and user defined kits can be changed in the Calibration Kits dialog and its various sub dialogs Calibration kits and connector types are global resources the parameters are stored independently and available irrespective of the current setup Calibration Kits Calibration Kits in Use Import Kit Conn Type kit Name NSDQ N 50 amp Dummy Kit adaki ZE N75 amp Dummy Kit View i Modify Kit DC 3 5 PC 3 5 Dummy Kit PEF PE Dummy Kik Delete Kit 292 mm 2 92 mm Dummy Kit 2 4 mm 24mm Dummy Kit Export Ki
510. r the local default gateway from your network administrator If needed also obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS and WINS servers on your network 2 Press the SETUP front panel key to the left of the analyzer s display 3 Inthe softkey menu opened press General Setup Network Address DHCP Off d Enter your IP Address and Subnet Mask To enter additional IP address information you have to access the operating system of the R amp S ZVL Access Windows XP using an external keyboard see Accessing Window XP s Start Menu ND Open the Control Panel Network Connections Local Area Connection Status Local Area Connection Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog and enter the complete address information e g Preparing for Use 1 7 2 Remote Control ina LAN Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IF settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Othenvise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IF address automatically Use the following IF address IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Obtain ONS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses Prefered ONS server 152 168 133 4 Alternate DNS server For more information refer to the Windows XP Help Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop is a Windows appli
511. r the selected ports and calibration type The default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not introduce any systematic errors none of the measurement results acquired previously SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected Is taken into account aim O The main purpose of the default correction data set is to provide a dummy system error correction which you can replace with your own external correction data You may have acquired the external data in a previous session or even on an other instrument If you want to use the external correction data on the analyzer simply generate the default data set corresponding to your port configuration and calibration type and overwrite the default data For details refer to the program example below lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example CORR COLL METH DEF Test RSHort 1 Select a one port normalization at port 1 with a short standard as calibration type CORR COLL SAVE SEL DEF Calculate a dummy system error correction for the normalization at port 1 The dummy system error correction provides the reflection tracking error term REFLTRACK CORR CDAT REFLTRACK 1 0 Query the dummy system error correction term The response is a 1 written as 1 0 for the real and imaginary part for each sweep point no attenuation and no phase shift between the analyzer and the calibration plan
512. race contains no x dB compression points in the selected evaluation range Remote control CALCulate STA Tistics NLINear COMP RESult Define Compression Value Opens the numeric entry bar to define the compression value x in dB for the compression point measurement Remote control CALCulate STATistics NLINear COMP LEVel Eval Range Opens a dialog to define the range for the statistical and phase evaluation and for the x dB compression point measurement The evaluation range is a continuous interval of the sweep variable Evaluation Range Evaluation Range Range 1 v Start 2GHe Stop 3 GHz Bel Range Limit Lines On It is possible to select define and display up to ten different evaluation ranges for each setup Full Span means that the search range is equal to the sweep range The statistical and phase evaluation and the compression point measurement take into account all measurement points with stimulus values x between the Start and Stop value of the evaluation range Start x Stop GUI Reference Trace Menu O The evaluation ranges are identical to the marker search ranges For more information see Search Range Dialog Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER STARt lt numeric_value gt CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER STOP lt numeric_value gt Smoothing On Activates the smoothing func
513. racy The following table gives an overview Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Application Accuracy Reflection Open or Short Si Reflection Low to Reflection measurements on Normalization Or S22 tracking medium any port Transmission Through Si2 Sa Transmission Medium Transmission measurements in Normalization tracking any direction and between any combination of ports Full One Port Open Short S41 Reflection High Reflection measurements on Match or S2 tracking any port Source match Directivity One Path Two Port Open Short Reflection Medium to Unidirectional transmission Match at tracking high measurements in any direction source port Source match and between any combination Through Directivity of ports Transmission tracking System Overview Calibration Overview Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Application Accuracy TOSM Open Short Reflection High Reflection and transmission Match at tracking measurements on DUTs with 2 each port Source match ports Through Directivity between the 2 Load match ports Transmission tracking 1 Or any other 3 known one port standards To be used in a guided calibration the known standards must be declared to be open short and match irrespective of their properties 2 Or any other known two port standard See remark above The calibration type must be selected in accordance with
514. rally displayed in one of the Cartesian diagrams with linear vertical axis scale or in a polar diagram The real Stability Factors are generally displayed in a linear Cartesian diagram Lin Mag or Real In complex formats real numbers represent complex numbers with zero imaginary part The following table gives an overview of recommended display formats Complex dimensionless quantities Complex quantities with Real quantities S parameters dimensions Stability Factors impedances admittances Lin Mag m M default for impedances M default admittances Unwrapped Phase reflection coefficients Si Inverted Smith ia reflection coefficients Si IM reflection coefficients S Group Delay m transmission coefficients Gu The default formats are activated automatically when the measured quantity is changed x l l System Overview Measured Quantities 3 2 Measured Quantities 3 2 1 This section gives an overview of the measurement results of the network analyzer and the meaning of the different measured quantities All quantities can be selected in the Trace Meas submenu S Parameters S parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction For a 2 port measurement the signal flow is as follows a ees b Forward gt S D rev Reverse measurement b 22 measurement geen ara
515. ration is completed This enables the Repeat Prev Cal command which can be used to optimize a previous calibration without repeating the measurement of all standards If Keep Measurement Data is not active then the raw measurement data of the standards is deleted and the analyzer only stores the system error correction data Deleting the raw data saves disk space e Apply is enabled as soon as data has been acquired for all standards The button Starts the calculation of the system error correction data and closes the calibration wizard The current instrument settings are stored with the correction data To avoid incompatibilities older system error correction data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a Cal Pool using the Calibration Manager O The Keep Measurement Data for gt Repeat Previous Cal lt setting is valid for the current calibration only To activate this function in general use the parameter in the User Interface tab of the Sytem Configuration dialog menu Nwa Setup System Config d Checks during the calculation of correction data Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type the standards and the channel settings may cause the calibration to be inaccurate The analyzer auto detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate self explanatory notice boxes Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect AC Quire RSAVe control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQUire SELected SENS
516. rch activates the search for the target value to the left of the active marker e Def Value specifies the target value e Search Range confines the search to a subrange of the sweep GUI Reference Trace Menu Target Search Activates the search and sets the active marker to the defined target value If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 7 is created to indicate the search result If the target value occurs at several stimulus values the marker is placed to the search result with the smallest stimulus value The other measurement points with the same target value can be located using the Target Search gt function If the target is not found e g because the active trace doesn t contain the target value then the active marker is not moved away from its original position Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion EXECute TARGet CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion RESult Target Search gt Activates the search to the right of the active marker position and sets the active marker to the defined target value The target search range is between the active marker position and the end Stop of the sweep range If the active trace contains no markers a marker Mkr 7 is created to indicate the search result and the target search range starts at the beginning Start of the sweep range If the target value occurs at several stimulus values the marker is placed to the search result w
517. rding to the selected trace format CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat 1 value per trace point for Cartesian diagrams 2 values for polar diagrams SDATa Unformatted trace data Real and imaginary part of each measurement point 2 values per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format The trace mathematics is not taken into account MDATa Unformatted trace data see SDATa after evaluation of the trace mathematics Command Reference INI Tiate INITiate INITiate lt Ch gt This subsystem control the initiation of the trigger system and defines the scope of the triggered measurement INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous lt Boolean gt Qualifies whether the analyzer measures in single sweep or in continuous sweep mode lt Ch gt Channel number The channel is ignored because the command affects all channels lt Boolean gt ON The analyzer measures continuously repeating the current sweep OFF The measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep COUNt INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate initiates a new measurement cycle RST value ON SCPI Confirmed command or query Command Types Example RST INIT CONT OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels including channel no 2 created later INIT SCOP SING State that a single sweep will be performed in the active channel only CALC2 PAR SDEF TRC2 S11 INIT2 Create channel no 2 with a new trace and start a
518. re displayed with the same color irrespective of the trace colors Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks Screen Control Control of the analyzer s display elements is based on the standard Windows functionality The following examples show you how to make efficient use of the functions To move an active setup window within the available space 1 Make sure that the window is not maximized 2 Click the L icon in the title bar to open the setup control menu 3 Click Move After the pointer changes to the four headed arrow 4 Press one of the direction keys left right up or down arrow key to move the entire window without changing its size 5 Press ENTER or left click the window when it is at the position you want To size the active setup window 1 Make sure that the window is not maximized 2 Click the L icon in the title bar to open the setup control menu 3 Click Size After the pointer changes to the four headed arrow 4 Press one of the direction keys left right up or down arrow key to move the pointer to the border you want to move 5 Press a direction key to move the border Press ENTER or lett click the window when it is the size you want Data Transfer The following examples show you how to perform basic tasks related to data transfer from and to the analyzer To copy the active setup Connect a storage device like an USB stick or a CD ROM drive to an USB con
519. re the cursor position or the selected character sequence If an entire numeric value is selected BACK deletes the whole entry Rotary Knob The rotary knob can be turned in both directions or pressed Turning the rotary knob is equivalent to the action of the cursor up and down keys Turn the knob in order to Increase or decrease numerical values Scroll within lists Switch to the previous or next dialog element Pressing the rotary knob is equivalent to the action of the ENTER key Press the knob in order to Activate the selected active control element e g a button in a dialog or a link in the Help Confirm selections and entries made and close dialogs Standby Key The standby toggle switch is located in the bottom left corner of the front panel co The key serves two main purposes 2 Toggle between standby and ready state if the instrument is AC supplied k Save settings shut down and switch off if the instrument is DC or battery supplied Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour 1 1 8 Test Ports N connectors labelled PORT 1 and PORT 2 RF INPUT The test ports serve as outputs for the RF stimulus signal and as inputs for the measured RF signals from the DUT response signals With a single test port it is possible to generate a stimulus signal and measure the response signal in reflection K With 2 test ports it is possible to perform full two port measurements see S Para
520. re used for communication between controller and instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of an GPIB bus controller GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into Universal commands act on all devices connected to the GPIB bus without previous addressing Addressed commands only act on devices previously addressed as listeners The interface messages relevant to the instrument are listed in the GPIB bus section RSIB and VXI 11 Interface Messages The RSIB and VXI 11 interfaces allow the instrument to be controlled in a Local Area Network For a short introduction and a list of interface functions refer to the following sections RSIB Interface VXI 11 Interface Device Messages Commands and Device Responses Device messages are transferred via the data lines of the GPIB bus the ATN control line not being active The ASCII character set is used A distinction is made according to the direction in which device messages are transferred Commands are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the device functions and request information Device responses are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status Commands are subdivided according to two criteria Remote Control General Description Messages 1 According to the effect they have o
521. rea no 2 assigning the trace number 9 to it DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe DATA lt string gt Defines a title for diagram area lt Wnd gt lt Wnd gt Number of the diagram area lt string gt String variable for the title The length of the title is practically unlimited but should be kept short enough to be displayed in the diagrams RST value E SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example Roly DISP Wie Tithe DATA S521 Test Diagram Define a title for the default diagram area The title is displayed below the top of the diagram area DISP WIND TITL OFF TITL DATA Hide the title The title is no longer displayed but still defined so it can be displayed again DISPlay WINDow lt Wnds TITLe STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the title for area number lt Wnd gt defined by means _ of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe DATA lt Wnd gt Number of the diagram area lt Boolean gt ON OFF Displays or hides the title RST value ON SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TITLe DATA DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt DELete Releases the assignment between a trace and a diagram area as defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Trace_Name gt and expressed by the lt WndTr gt suffix The trace itself is not deleted this must be done via CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DELete lt Trace
522. red quantities Below each trace the file shows a list of all markers with their names stimulus and response values The following example of a marker file describes a setup with two traces Trc7 and its memory trace Trc1 has no markers assigned the memory trace has four markers named Mkr 7 Mkr 4 Trel 21 Ho Markers Meme TrelL 521 mkr 1 G69 60000 MHz 4 896 Op Mkr A 129 72115 MHz 7 896 Op Mkr 3 4 793734 GHZ 7 896 dB Mke 4 2 461727 GHZ 5 192 dB Remote control MMEMory STORe MARKer file_ name Meas The Measure submenu selects the quantity to be measured and displayed Trace Trace F Marker gt Marker V b S11 Format d Szi Scale 51 Lines V De Impedance d Admittance V Stability Factors GUI Reference Trace Menu e S11 S12 S21 S22 select the four elements of the standard 2 port scattering matrix S parameters e mpedance opens a submenu to convert reflection S parameters into matched circuit impedances converted Z parameters e Admittance opens a submenu to convert reflection S parameters into matched circuit admittances converted Y parameters e Stability Factor selects one of the three factors K u or us to assess the stability of linear circuits e g amplifiers ON assignments of the DUT and the analyzer S parameters Sout ins Characterize the Device Under Test so the indices lt out gt and lt in gt denote the output and input ports of the DUT Ana
523. reen keyboard Otherwise use an external keyboard or a mouse and Windows XP s on screen keyboard Using the Analyzer s On Screen Keyboard The on screen keyboard allows you to enter characters in particular letters without an external keyboard It is available for all character input fields which have a l symbol Operation with front panel keys 1 Place the cursor into a character data input field in a dialog or in the numeric entry bar Press ENTER or the Checkmark key to open the on screen keyboard Use the cursor keys or turn the rotary knob to move the cursor to a character Press ENTER or the rotary knob to select the character for the input string After completing the input string use the Right Field key to move to the OK button Press ENTER or the rotary knob to apply your selection and close the keyboard o mr oh Operation with a mouse 1 Click the keyboard symbol to open the on screen keyboard 2 Click a sequence of characters and OK to apply your selection and close the keyboard You can also access Windows XP s on screen keyboard from the start menu Connect an external keyboard press CTRL ESC to open the start menu and click Programs Accessories Accessibility On Screen Keyboard From the start menu you can also access other useful software accessories 3 Getting Started Basic Tasks On Screen Keyboard File Keyboard Settings Help cee Ft ll el F5 Fo elef velo d der ad lztat
524. rker and click Trace Marker gt Span Marker To move the trace relative to the vertical axis proceed as follows 1 Create a normal marker e g the marker Mkr 7 and place it to a particular trace point E g you can use the marker Search functions to locate a maximum or minimum on the trace 2 Click Trace Marker gt Max Marker to move the trace towards the upper diagram edge leaving the values of the vertical divisions Scale Div and the overall vertical scale unchanged Analogously click Min Marker to move the trace towards the lower diagram edge or click Ref Value Marker to move the trace towards the Reference Value Enlarging the Diagram Area The analyzer provides different tools for customizing the contents and size of the diagram areas Maximize allows you to enlarge the active diagram area to occupy the whole window A double click on any point in the diagram area is equivalent to the Maximize function The Title the Softkey Labels the Status Bar and the Front Panel Keys are optional Getting Started Basic Tasks display elements which you can hide in order to gain space for the diagram Use the context menu of the diagram area or the Nwa Setup Display menu to access the scaling functions above 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 2 3 1 4 3 3 1 4 4 3 1 4 5 3 1 5 3 1 5 1 3 1 5 2 3 1 5 3 3 1 5 4 3 1 5 5 3 1 5 6 3 1 5 7 3
525. rkers remember their properties stimulus value format delta mode number when they are restored The marker properties are definitely lost if the associated trace is deleted Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt AOFF Mkr Format Opens a submenu to select an output format for the complex active marker value in the marker info field The default marker format is the format of the associated trace The current format is indicated with a GUI Reference Trace Menu Trace Trace gt F amp F Marker gt Marker b Marker 1 Meas k ow Marker z Format b Marker 3 Scale k yw e Ref Marker Lines d Delta Mode Mkr gt Det Mkr All Mkrs OFF Mkr Format dB Mag More Mer d Lin Mag Coupled Mr Phase Discrete Mkrs Feal rina Mkr Properties SE Export Mier S Delay dE Mag and Phase Lin Mag and Phase Real and Imag Default RLE Ser RLE Par All marker formats are available irrespective of the measured quantity The output values are calculated by a simple conversion of a complex measurement result where the marker format defines the conversion rules This flexibility in the calculation must be kept in mind when interpreting the results and physical units displayed see also Measured Quantities and Display Formats Short description of marker formats The formats of the markers assigned to a trace are independent of each other and of the trace format settings The following
526. rmalization but is only applicable for reflection measurements One Path Two Port Calibration A one path two port calibration combines a full one port calibration with a transmission normalization so it requires a short an open and a match standard to be connected to a single test port plus a through standard between this calibrated source port and a second load port The four standard measurements are used to derive the following error terms System Overview Calibration Overview ZS The short and open standards are used to derive the source match and the reflection tracking error terms at the source port ZS The match standard is used to derive the directivity error at the source port The through standard provides the transmission tracking error term A one path two port calibration requires only four standards to be connected instead of 7 for a full two port TOSM calibration and is suitable when only the forward e g S44 and Gaul or reverse S parameters e g Gas and S42 are to be measured and the DUT is well matched especially at the load port TOSM Calibration A TOSM Through Open Short Match calibration requires the same standards as the one path two port calibration however all measurements are performed in the forward and reverse direction TOSM is also referred to as SOLT Short Open Load Match Through calibration The four standards are used to derive 6 error terms for each
527. roduction to the instrument s functionality and provides procedures for typical measurement tasks The CD ROM provides the complete user documentation for the network analyzer The online help system in two different HTML based formats chm for transfer to the hard disk and WebHelp for viewing from the CD A printable pdf version of the online help The quick start manual in printable form The service manual in printable form Links to different useful sites in the R amp S internet K A AA Optional documentation The following documentation may be ordered in addition to the standard documentation please refer to the ordering information in the Product Brochure The printed version of the online help provides the contents of the quick start manual plus the complete reference information for operation and programming contained in the online help The service manual describes the performance test of the analyzer and gives hints for troubleshooting and repair The manual explains the instrument down to module level and provides the information needed for module installation and exchange Glossary of Terms Glossary of Terms Active channel Channel belonging to the active trace The active channel is highlighted in the channel list below the diagram The active channel is not relevant in remote control where each channel can contain an active trace Active marker Marker that can be changed using the settings o
528. rs 1 3 5 lower limit line segments are assigned even numbers 2 4 6 Rules for creating segments The following rules apply to an active trace with n existing upper and n existing lower limit line segments e Anodd number of values is rejected an error message 109 Missing parameter is generated e Aneven number of 2 k values updates or generates k lower limit line segments e Forn gt k the response values of all existing lower limit line segments no 2 4 2 k are updated the existing upper and lower limit line segments no 2 k 1 2 n are deleted The existing upper limit line segments no 1 3 2 k 1 are not affected e Forn lt k the response values of the lower limit line segments no 2 4 to 2 n are updated the lower limit line segments 2 n 2 2 n 4 2 k are generated with default stimulus values see CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit CONTrol DATA In addition the missing upper limit line segments 2 n 1 2 n 3 2 k 1 are generated with default stimulus and response values lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Pair s of response values Range def unit Almost no restriction for limit segments see Rules for Limit Line Definition dB RST value The response value of a segment that is created implicitly e g an upper limit line segment is 20 dB SCPI Command Confirmed with query Types Example CALC LIM LOW 10 0 0 10 Defin
529. rs dialogs or wizards lt menu_key gt Name of the key as shown in the analyzer s softkey bar case sensitive string variable may contain blanks but no dots If the name is not unique the complete menu path can be specified e g Trace Format Phase Menus submenus and menu function must be separated by colons RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example RST DISP MENU KEY EXEC S11 EXEC Trace Format Phase Assign the S parameter S4 to the default trace open the local analyzer screen then display the phase of the measured quantity The commands are executed immediately without any manual entry DISP MENU KEY EXEC Start Open the numeric input bar for the start frequency of the sweep The frequency can be entered manually DISP MENU KEY EXEC About Nwa Display information about your network analyzer and the firmware version The info box is closed when you click the analyzer screen or if you send another command DISPlay MENU KEY SELect lt menu_key gt Activates the menu or submenu of the specified key Command Reference lt menu_key gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay Name of the key as shown in the analyzer s softkey bar case sensitive string variable Device specific no query RST DISP MENU KEY SEL S11 Open the Trace Meas menu in order to select a measured quantity DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt MAXimize lt B
530. rt 2 for the active trace PROGram PROGram This subsystem controls external application programs that can be run on the analyzer PROGram SELected EXECute lt file_ name gt lt commands gt Starts an application program or open a file using an application available on the analyzer elle name gt Name and path of an application program to be executed or of a file to be opened The path can be defined as an absolute path e g c or relative to the current directory MMEMory CDIRectory Blanks in the file name are not allowed because everything after a blank is interpreted as a lt command gt lt command gt Command name in the selected application lt file_ name gt optional RST value SCPI Confirmed no query Command Types Example PROG SEL NAME PROG Selects general program execution on the analyzer MMEM CDIR C Program Files Rohde amp Schwarz Network Analyzer Bin Go to the program directory PROG EXEC iecwin32 exe Start the application iecwin32 PROG EXEC WAIT Lock command execution and manual control of the analyzer until iecwin32 is paused or stopped Command Reference PROGram PROGram SELected NAME PROG Selects the application to be run on the analyzer At present only the general parameter PROG is available PROGram SELected EXECute can start any program O Use this command in order to avoid problems should the default value change in future firmware versions
531. rt pdf 2056878 MMEMory CATalog ALL lt directory_name gt Returns the contents of the current or of a specified directory and all subdirectories d Use MMEMory CATalog to query the contents of the current directory lt directory_name gt Response RST value SCPI Command Types Example String parameter to specify the directory If the directory is omitted the command queries the contents of the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRGCTOLy Directory information in the following format Directory of lt Dir_name gt lt used_size gt lt free_disk_space gt lt Subdir gt lt DIR gt lt file_name gt lt file_size gt Directory of lt Subdir_name_1 gt lt used_size gt lt free_disk_space gt lt Subdir gt K lt DiR gt y kb erie name gt lt file_ Esch Directory of lt Subdir_name_2 gt lt used_size gt lt free_disk_space gt The first line is omitted if the current directory contains no subdirectories The following lines are analogous to the output of MMEMory CATalog Confirmed query only MMEM CAT ALL Response Directory of C Rohde amp Schwarz Nwa DOC 2056878 809734144 zvl_quickstart pdf 2056878 Command Reference MME Mon MMEMory CDIRectory lt directory_name gt Changes the default directory for mass memory storage lt directory_name gt String parameter to specify the directory RST value A RST does not change the c
532. rticular measured quantity see Measured Quantities and Display Formats 3 1 7 1 Cartesian Diagrams Cartesian diagrams are rectangular diagrams used to display a scalar quantity as a function of the stimulus variable frequency The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis x axis scaled linearly sweep type Lin Frequency or logarithmically sweep type Log Frequency The measured data response values appears on the vertical axis y axis The scale of the y axis is linear with equidistant grid lines although the y axis values may be obtained from the measured data by non linear conversions The following examples show the same trace in Cartesian diagrams with linear and logarithmic x axis scaling Start 40 MHz Pwr 10 dBm Stop D GHz System Overview 3 1 7 2 Basic Concepts Conversion of Complex into Real Quantities The results to be selected in the Trace Meas menu can be divided into two groups S Parameters Impedances and Admittances are complex Stability Factors are real The following table shows how the response values in the different Cartesian diagrams are calculated from the complex measurement values z x jy where x y Z are functions of the sweep variable The formulas also hold for real results which are treated as complex values with zero imaginary part y 0 TraceFormet Description Form dB Mag Magnitude of z in dB z sqrt xX y dB Mag z 2
533. s lt Ch gt lt Pt gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number Test port number of the analyzer This suffix is ignored because the selected channel power applies to all source ports used in the active channel Internal source power 50 dBm to 0 dBm The exact range for all analyzer models is quoted in the data sheet dBm UP and DOWN increment decrement the source power in 0 1 dB steps 0 dBm Confirmed command or query HUNCH KERE POW RAT Bile Activate a frequency sweep and select the ratio B1 A2 as measured parameter for channel and trace no 1 SOUR POW 6 Set the internal source power for channel 1 to 6 dBm Command Reference STATus STATus STATus This subsystem controls the Status Reporting System Note that RST does not influence the status registers STATus PRESet Configures the status reporting system such that device dependent events are reported at a higher level The command affects only the transition filter registers the ENABle registers and queue enabling e The ENABle parts of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to all T s e The PTRansition parts are set all 1 s the NIT Ransition parts are set to all O s so that only positive transitions in the CONDition part are recognized The status reporting system is also affected by other commands see Reset Values of the Status Repor
534. s To select or define a color scheme for the diagrams and their display elements Click Nwa Setup Display Config Color Scheme to open the Color Scheme dialog Select the Predefined Scheme that is most appropriate for your needs Click Define User Scheme to open the Define User Color Scheme dialog Select a display element from the Element drop down list Click the Color field to open a standard Color dialog and assign the color GAUK ee p You can repeat the last 2 steps for as many elements as you like For traces you can also select a Trace Style and Trace Width Your settings apply to all setups they are permanent even after you close the network analyzer application 6 If you wish to use several color schemes in parallel click Save to save your current color scheme to a file 7 If you wish to restore the original Predefined Scheme click Setup System Config Resets Reset Colors To change the marker colors When you create markers their color is the same as the color of the associated trace You can change the marker colors using the Color Scheme dialog Click Nwa Setup Display Config Color Scheme Click Define User Scheme to open the Define User Color Scheme dialog Select Same Color for all Markers from the Element drop down list Click the Color field to open a standard Color dialog and assign the color Click Use same Color for all Markers a PS dt Je All markers a
535. s Increasing the Frequency Step Size generally increases the measurement time Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep STEP Meas Delay Sets the delay time before the start of each partial measurement Meas Delay los eh A measurement delay time increases the accuracy in particular in measurements on DUTs with long settling times e g quartzes SAW filters Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep DWELI GUI Reference Channel Menu Restart Stops the current measurement and restarts a measurement sequence In Single sweep mode a new single sweep sequence is started Remote control INI Tiate lt Ch gt IMMediate Single All Chans Toggles between single sweep and continuous sweep mode e In continuous mode Single All Chans not selected the analyzer measures continuously repeating the current sweep e In single sweep mode the measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps selected in the Define Restart dialog O Press Single to activate the single sweep mode and start a single sweep sequence To start further sweep sequences press Restart Remote control INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous ON OFF Define Restart Opens a dialog to configure the Single sweep mode Define Restart E S x Number of sweeps for All Channels AGEE e Single Sweep C Single Group of i Hu Cancel Help e Number of Sweeps selects the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode either one
536. s The step width between two consecutive sweep points is constant and given by lt Span gt n 1 where n is the specified Number of Points n gt 1 The internal generator power can be set if so desired in the Power Bandwidth Average submenu A Lin Frequency sweep corresponds to the analysis of a signal over the frequency as obtained e g by means of a spectrum analyzer This is the default sweep type In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a linear frequency scale spectral representation The following example shows a Lin Frequency sweep with a stimulus range between 4 5 GHz and 6 GHz the forward transmission parameter S12 as measured quantity and a dB Mag scaled y axis GUI Reference Channel Menu Trez 621 dB Mag 10 0B Kefi dB ul Start 300 kH Pwr 10 dBm Stop 4 GHZ Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TPYE LiINear SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON XFRequency Log Frequency In a Log Frequency sweep the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range The frequency range sweep range is defined with the Stimulus settings The sweep points are calculated from the Span and the specified Number of Points n gt 1 with the condition that the step width is constant on the logarithmic scale The internal generator power can be set if so desired in the Power Bandwidth Average submenu Log Frequency sweeps are suitable for the anal
537. s When doing make sure that the port configuration of the channels connectors state and the cal group are compatible You can also use a cal group stored in the Cal Pool to define a channel specific calibration Apply the cal group to the channel and click Resolve Pool Link Remote MMEMory STORe CORRection lt Ch gt lt file_name gt control MMEMory LOAD CORRection lt Ch gt lt file_name gt MMEMory LOAD CORRection RESolve lt Ch gt lt file_ name gt MMEMory DELete C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Data lt file_ name gt MMEMory DELete CORRection lt file_name gt SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATE SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection DATA PARameter SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection SS Tate Recall Last Cal Set e Loads and activates the setup for which the last calibration was performed If the last calibrated setup is already active nothing is changed e The calibrated setups are automatically stored in the C Rohde amp Schwarz Nwa Calibration RecallSets directory A message box pops up if the directory is empty e g because no calibration was performed yet GUI Reference Channel Menu Cal Kits e Opens a dialog to manage the calibration kits in use add new kits and import or export kits Calibration kits A calibration kit is a set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector type The magnitude and phase response of the calibration standards i e their S parameters must be known o
538. s a new channel to the list The new channel is named Ch lt n gt where lt n gt is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one e Delete Channel deletes the channel selected in the drop down menu This button is disabled if the setup contains only one channel In manual control each setup must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace Columns in the Channel Manager table The channel table contains several editable white or non editable gray columns Name Traces Che Tre4 Ch Mone e Channel indicates the current channel name The default names for new channels are Ch lt n gt where lt n gt is a current number e Traces indicates the names of all traces assigned to the channel Remote control CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CATalog CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME ID CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt STATe GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu Nwa Setup Menu The Nwa Setup menu provides all display settings and the functions to activate modify and arrange different diagram areas OO Areas A diagram area Is a rectangular portion of the screen used to display traces Diagram areas are arranged in windows they are independent of trace and channel settings e A diagram area can contain a practically unlimited number of traces assigned to different channels overlay mode see Traces Channels and Diagram Areas e The traces displayed in the diagra
539. s eliminating their effect on the new cycle The new cycle is started as fast as possible an ongoing sweep is terminated immediately Sweep Type The Sweep Type submenu defines the frequency sweep type and the position of the sweep points across the sweep range GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center d Span H Pur Du V Ca V Sweep Type Lin Frequency Channel Select Number of Points Log Frequency Freguency Step Size Segmented Frequency Meas Delay Define Segments Restart Single All Chans Define Restart Average On Average Factor Restart Average e Lin Frequency is the default sweep type The stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a linear frequency axis e Log Frequency is analogous to Lin Frequency however the frequency is swept in equidistant steps on a logarithmic scale In a Cartesian diagram the x axis is a logarithmic frequency axis e Segmented Frequency is analogous to Lin Frequency but uses a sweep range that can be composed of several continuous frequency ranges or single frequency points defined via Define Segments A valid segment list must be defined before activating Segment Frequency Lin Frequency In a Lin Frequency sweep the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range The frequency range sweep range is defined with the Stimulus setting
540. s special numeric values A query returns the associated numerical value Example Setting command SENSe FREQuency STARt MINimum Remote Control General Description Messages The query SENSe FREQuency STARt returns 300000 the exact value depends on the analyzer model The following special values can be used s MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value of a range of numeric values DEF DEFault denotes the preset value This value is set by the RST command UP DOWN UP DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step The step width is reported in the detailed command description INF NINF Negative INFinity NINF represent the numerical values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 respectively INF and NINF are only sent as device responses NAN Not a Number NAN represents the value 9 91E37 NAN is only sent as device response This value is not defined Possible causes are division by zero subtraction or addition of infinite and the representation of missing values Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0 The OFF state logically false is represented by OFF or the numerical value 0 A query responds with 0 or 1 Example Setting
541. s the entry of a numeric value and a physical unit depending on the parameter type displayed The following table lists the physical units accepted by the analyzer Power DBM DB DBW W MW UW NW PW Voltage Vv MV UV NV PV DBV DBMV DBUV ES DEG KDEG MDEG UDEG NDEG PDEG Group delay S MS US NS PS Impedance OHM GOHM MOHM KOHM Admittance SIE MSIE USIE NSIE Inductance H MH UH NH PH FH Capacitance F MF UF NF PF FF BIERGER UNIT MUNIT UUNIT NUNIT PUNIT FUNIT WINDow This subsystem controls the selection and presentation of graphical and trace information on the screen Command Reference DISPlay Note Traces are generally identified by a string parameter defining the trace name e g CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SELect lt Trace_Name gt In the DISPlay subsystem traces are assigned to diagram areas DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED lt Trace_Name gt While this assignment is valid the trace is identified by the numeric suffix lt wndTr gt and the trace name is not needed DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe lt Boolean gt Shows or hides all frequency stimulus values in the diagrams lt Boolean gt ON OFF Show or hide stimulus values RST value ON SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Types Example RST DISP ANN FREQ OFF Create diagram area no 1 with default trace
542. s the start and stop frequency the number of points source power and the sweep type e g 300000 8000000000 201 0 LIN CORR SST Query the calibration status The analyzer returns CAL OFF because the performed one port calibration is not sufficient for the measured transmission S paramter S34 SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt AUTO ONCE Defines the offset parameter for the active test port such that the residual delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the phase response is minimized across the entire sweep range lt Ch gt lt port_no gt ONCE RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number of the offset corrected channel Port number of the analyzer This numeric suffix is ignored the active port is determined by the active trace Applies the Auto Length function Device specific no query nol CORR EDEN AUNOR ONCE Reset the instrument and apply the auto length function to the default trace Trc7 in channel 1 Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt DIELectric lt permittivity gt Defines the permittivity for the offset correction at test port lt port_no gt lt Ch gt Channel number of the offset corrected channel lt port_no gt Port number of the analyzer lt permittivity gt Permittivity Range def unit 1 to 3 4028234664E 038 m RST value 1 00062 SCPI Command Types Device specifi
543. se order of Motorola processors Comparison of byte sequences Big Endian Motorola processors Most significant byte at The most significant byte is at the left network standard least significant address end of the word Little Endian Intel processors Least significant byte at The most significant byte is at the right least significant address end of the word EE 37 i E E E A A N EE AE 281 SENSe lt Ch gt ee 398 EECHER 423 SWEep a E 441 e e In Oren eee ere E re eer ee ene eer eee ee 158 2 port S parameters ENNEN 158 Steeg 158 E 158 Ae 21 Add Chann l E 230 Add DIAG AGa aaa N 230 Add Diag Area Trace 230 Add Standard ssrt 212 CH E 496 HEED sederii E E A 496 Average FACIO EE 398 Average ON sussana 217 228 398 BE eege 158 Bee 158 Bandfilter Se AUC p OEE EA E E E E E E E 141 CTO E 141 Bandpass Search Ref to Marker n 141 Bandpass Search Ref to MaX 141 Bandstop Search Ref to Marker ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 Bandstop Search Ref to Mm 141 BAC WIG s esr e EE rA aE 185 Basic Concepts tegen ees 57 Block data Torma E 263 Boolean parameter cccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 263 Buffered Gweenp 486 Eeer 202 Calibration OL EE 191 Measurement examples EEN 98 program example issn cicctuctenacesinarneradaudeccauesie teaancuegedaxs 483 EE 191 ANI WOM E 483 Calibration Manager 202 ue En EE 163 CSU AE E E A E 184 423 Channel dala e E 60 AALE Uo careers
544. segment with a sweep range between 1 0 MHz and 1 5 MHz SEGM FREQ STOP Query the stop frequency of the created segment The response is 1 5000000000E 006 Note Ifthe stop frequency entered is smaller than the current start frequency SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency STARt the start frequency is set to the stop frequency minus the minimum frequency span SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt FREQuency SPAN Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert lt Start gt lt Stop gt lt Points gt lt Power gt lt Point Delay gt lt Unused gt lt Meas Bandwidth gt Inserts a new sweep segment with specific channel settings Define Segments Add The new segment must not overlap with any of the existing segments Entry of the first seven numeric parameters is mandatory no default values are provided All settings except lt LO gt can be changed for existing segments using other commands of the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt subsystem Note Use SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt Add to create a segment with default channel settings Use SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt DEFine to change or query all settings of an existing segment lt Ch gt lt Seg gt lt Start gt lt Stop gt Range def unit lt Points gt Range def unit lt Power gt Range def unit lt Point Delay gt Range def unit ZVR lt Unuse
545. serted after that segment The current segment numbers are adapted The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments GUI Reference Trace Menu in a limit line e Delete Segment removes the selected segment from the list e Del All Segments clears the entire segment list so it is possible to define or load a new limit line The buttons to the right of the table are used to import and export limit line data e Recall Limit Line calls up an Open File dialog to load a limit line from a limit line file Limit line files are ASCII files with the default extension limit and a special file format e Save Limit Line calls up a Save As dialog to store the current limit line configuration to a limit line file Limit line files are ASCII files with the default extension limit and a special file format e mport Trace opens a box to select a trace that can be used to define a limit line Genk CAA The box contains all data or memory traces of the active channel As soon as a trace is selected the Properties of Imported Segments dialogwith further global import options is opened e mport File Calls up a standard mport File dialog to load a limit line from a trace file The limit line import is analogous to the import of traces Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format After the trace file is selected the Properties of Imported Segments dialogwith further global import options is opened
546. shows the measurement screen with the current setups diagram areas and traces without leaving the remote state In this operating mode it is possible to observe the screen while a remote control script is executed and the control elements on the front panel are still disabled e A Display Ou OPT o X Tra E Polar O2 Uy Refi U a pee Go to fo Local i f as i fi Display Da D On Off Chi Start 300 KHz Pwr 10 dBm Stop amp GHz Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement Therefore it is recommended to switch off the display in real measurement applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when this is triggered by a remote control command see SYSTem DISPlay UPDate ONCE The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the GUI or via GPIB bus see section Return to Manual Operation Remote Control General Description Remote Control Operation O You can create you own keys to replace the two default softkeys Go to Local and Display On Off See Combining Manual and Remote Control A tooltip across the bottom of the remote screen indicates a remote command error e g Remote Error 222 Data out of range FREQ STAR 1 You can switch off this tooltip using SYSTem ERRor DiIsPlay OFF Remote contr
547. signal direction In addition to the source match and reflection tracking error terms provided by the one path two port calibration TOSM also provides the load match The directivity error is determined at both source ports The transmission tracking is determined for each direction The number of required standard measurements and of error terms for 2 port measurements is shown in the following table Number of ports Number of standards to be Number of standard Number of error terms connected measurements 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 1 7 2 1 8 2 2 10 An open through and match measurement is required at each port in addition a through must be measured between the two ports and in both directions The analyzer automatically performs each through measurement in both directions so the number of connected standards is smaller than the number of measurements Measurement Examples Simple Measurement Tasks 4 MEASUPCMICNE EE ee 94 Simple Measurement Tasks sscseeeeeessccsessneeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeoessseeeeeeeeeoonsssseeeeeseceassseeesesseooaoenens 94 Display SO MMU ANON EE 94 To select or define a color scheme for the diagrams and their display elements 000008 94 TO Change the Marker colore 94 SC CONIO EE 95 To move an active setup window within the available space 0 ecccseeecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeneaes 95 TO size the active setup WINKOW cccceecccsseccceeeeeceeeecececaucecsuce
548. single sweep in channel no 2 INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate Starts a new single sweep sequence This command is available in single sweep mode only INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous OFF The data of the last sweep or previous sweeps see Sweep History can be read using CALCulate lt Ch gt DATA NSWeep SDATa lt history_count gt O In contrast to all other commands of the analyzer INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate has been implemented for overlapped execution see Command Synchronization lt Ch gt Channel number If the channel number does not exist the analyzer returns an error message If INITiate lt Ch gt IMMediate SCOPe ALL is active this suffix is ignored RST value SCPI Confirmed no query Command Reference INPut Command Types Example See INITiate lt Ch gt CONTinuous INPut INPut This subsystem controls the characteristics of the analyzer s input ports INPut lt port_no gt ATTenuation lt numeric_value gt Sets the attenuation for the received waves Note INPut lt port_no gt ATTenuation Is not channel specitic the value is valid for all channels Use SENSe lt Ch gt POWer ATTenuation to set or query a channel specitic attenuation value lt port_no gt Test port number of the analyzer 1 or 2 If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 lt numeric_value gt Attenuation factor for the received wave Range def unit 0 dB to 30 dB UP and DOWN increment decrement the attenuatio
549. specific command or query Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER STOP lt numeric_value gt Defines the stop value of the evaluation range selected via CALCuLate lt Chn gt STATist1 cs sDOMain USER lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt numeric_value gt Stop value of the evaluation range Range def unit 999 999999999 GHz to 1000 GHz Hz RST value Highest frequency of the analyzer depending on the analyzer model SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics DOMain USER CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics EPDelay STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the Phase Delay E Length results in the diagram area of trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Statistical info field on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics STATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics MMPTpeak STATe lt Boolean gt Displays or hides the Min Max Peak Peak results in the diagram area of trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Statistical info field on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Device specific command or query Example See CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics STATe C
550. spective of the active mode PRESET performs a general factory preset or user preset depending on the Preset Scope selected in the System Configuration menu ZS FILE provides standard Windows functions to create save and recall spectrum analyzer settings and results For detailed information refer to the spectrum analyzer help system HELP Alternatively use the functions in the Nwa File menu of the network analyzer mode SETUP provides basic instrument configurations For detailed information refer to the spectrum analyzer help system HELP Alternatively use the functions in the Nwa Setup menu of the network analyzer mode in particular the System Config settings PRINT customizes the printout selects and configures the printer For detailed information refer to the spectrum analyzer help system HELP Alternatively use the functions in the Nwa File menu of the network analyzer mode ZS HELP calls the help system depending on the active context The network analyzer and spectrum analyzer modes are described in two separate help MENU systems MODE opens a dialog to switch between the network analyzer and spectrum analyzer modes SETUP Dr Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour MENU activates the highest softkey menu level of the current spectrum analyzer context For detailed information refer to the spectrum analyzer help system HELP In network analyzer mode use the Function Keys or
551. splay on to view the traces and diagrams SYSTem ERRor NEXT Queries and at the same time deletes the oldest entry in the error queue Operation is identical to that of STATus QUEue NEXT The entry consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard see section Error Messages RST value SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example SYST ERR Query the oldest entry in the error queue 0 No error is returned if the error queue is empty SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries and at the same time deletes all entries in the error queue The entries consist of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard see section Error Messages RST value SCPI Command Confirmed command or query Command Reference Types Example SYSTem SYST ERR ALL Query all entries in the error queue 0 No error is returned if the error queue is empty SYSTem ERRor DISPlay lt Boolean gt Switches the display of a tooltip for remote command errors on or off The tooltip appears at the bottom of the remote screen and of the manual screen it is not displayed for SCPI errors no 113 Undefined header lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example ON OFF Swi
552. ssociated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers ESR SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers The standard IEEE 488 2 Event Status Register ESR with the associated mask register standard event status enable ESE The STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument IST PPE The IST flag Individual STatus like the SRQ combines the entire instrument status in a single bit The PPE is associated to the IST flag It fulfills an analogous function for the IST flag as the SRE does for the service request Output buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Status Registers Contents of the Status Registers The individual status registers are used to report differ
553. stimulus and response values of the segment however a segment must be created first to enable this command e g CALC LIM DATA O The type command overwrites the CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit DATA settings and is overwritten by them It is not affected by the other commands in the LIMit subsystem defining stimulus and response values of limit lines lt Chn gt lt Seg gt Parameters Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Segment number Limit line type LMAX upper limit line segment LMIN lower limit line segment OFF limit check switched off limit line segment not deleted LMAX Device specific with query RST CALC LIM UPP 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM SEG TYPE LMIN Turn the defined limit line segment into a lower limit line segment Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit SOUNd STATe Switches the acoustic signal fail beep on or off The fail beep is generated each time the analyzer detects an exceeded limit lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Fail beep on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example CALC LIM STAT ON SOUN ON Switch the limit check on and activate the fail beep CALCulate lt Chn
554. surements Which calibration method is selected depends on the expected system errors the accuracy requirements of the measurement on the test setup and on the types of calibration standards available Due to the analyzer s calibration wizard calibration is a straightforward menu guided process TIP Storing system error correction data The system error correction data determined in a calibration procedure is stored on the analyzer You can read this correction data using the remote control command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CDATa You can also replace the correction data of the analyzer by your own correction data sets A label Cal Off appears behind the trace list if the system error correction no longer applies to one or more traces Tre dE Maq 10 dE Ret0 dE Call Tre EN dE Mag 10 dE Ref dE talot This may happen for the one of the following reasons The sweep range is outside the calibrated frequency range The channel calibration is not sufficient for the measured quantity e g a one port calibration has been performed but the measured quantity is a transmission parameter The system error correction has been switched off deliberately Correction Off System Overview Calibration Overview 3 3 1 Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits A calibration kit is a set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector type The magnitude and phase response of the c
555. t Modify Offset Specifies the offset parameters for the transmission lines of a particular calibration standard This dialog is opened from the Add or View Modify Standard dialog Modify Offset button Modify Offset Modify Offset Open P den oe Open E Loss aer Le z o Ga The offset parameters depend on whether or not the circuit model is defined in Agilent Mode see Add Modify Calibration Kit dialog e f Agilent Mode is active then the standard is characterized by its Delay in s its characteristic impedance Zo in Q and its Offset Loss in GQ s e f Agilent Mode is switched off then the standard is characterized by the ZVR compatible parameters Electrical Length in m its Char Impedance in Q and its Loss in dB sart GHz The loss is zero and not editable as long as the electrical length is zero Both parameter sets are closely related The Electrical Length is proportional to the Delay Z corresponds to the Char Impedance Moreover the analyzer converts an Agilent type Offset Loss into a ZVR type Loss and vice versa using the Relative Permittivity for the connector type defined in the Offset Model dialog Offset parameters GUI Reference Channel Menu The offset parameters have the following physical meaning e The Delay is the propagation time of a wave traveling through the standard The Electrical Length is equal to the Delay times the speed of light in the
556. t SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWEL1 can be set independently for each sweep segment Command Reference SENSe lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt Boolean gt ON The meas delay can be set independently for each sweep segment OFF The meas delay in all sweep segments is equal to the Meas Delay measurements for unsegmented sweeps set via SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep DWELI1 RST value OFF The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a meas delay time is entered using SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWELI SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example SEGM ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 0 s meas delay SEGM SWE DWELI 0 1 Increase the meas delay to 0 1 s SECM SWE DWE CONT Orr Couple the meas delay in all segments and reset the delay in segment no 1 to the initial value of O s SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep This subsystem provides general settings to control the sweep Most of the settings are related to the sweep time O The SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep settings apply to non segmented sweep types Segmented Sweeps are selected via SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TPYE SEGMent and configured in the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt subsystem SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep COUNt lt No_of_Sweeps gt Defines the number of sweeps to be measured in single sweep mode INITiat
557. t geri 1 85 mm 1 85 mm Dummy Kit Avail Conn Types 7 16 7 16 Dummy Kit E The Calibration Kits dialog contains a series of buttons each of them opening a dialog e Import Kit imports a cal kit file containing the parameters for a new calibration kit It is possible to load several kits so the analyzer asks whether to set the imported calibration kit active e Add kit combines different standards to form a new calibration kit e View Modify kit adds or deletes standards in an imported or user defined calibration kit and or changes their parameters e Copy kit to creates a copy of the selected calibration kit The cal kit data is stored in the internal GUI Reference Channel Menu memory and can be exported to a cal kit file using Export Kit e Delete Kit removes an imported or user defined kit from the list of Calibration Kits in Use e Export Kit exports calibration kit data to a cal kit file e Avail Conn Types adds or deletes connector types The Calibration Kits in Use table is used to select a calibration kit for each connector type The pull down lists contain all kits for the individual connector types Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt conn_type gt SELect lt ckit_name gt SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT SELect lt conn_type gt lt ckit_name gt Cal Kit Parameter Types The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards The parameter type is
558. t frequency range depends on the analyzer model Hz lt Points gt Number of sweep points in the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep POINts Range def 1 to 2147483647 1 1 is allowed if start and stop frequencies are equal unit lt Power gt Internal source power in the segment See SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt POWer Range def 40 dBm to 10 dBm The exact range depends on the analyzer model refer to the unit data sheet dBm UP and DOWN increment decrement the source power in 1 dB steps lt Point Delay for each partial measurement in the segment See Delay gt SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep DWEL1 In the setting SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt INSert SELect SWTime this parameter is replaced by lt Time gt Range def 0 s to 2 5E 003 s s AUTO activates automatic sweep time setting in the segment unit which is equivalent to a meas delay of 0 s 7 VR Iv Ignored parameter should be set to the default value 0 lt Unused gt lt Meas Resolution bandwidth in the segment See Bandwidth gt SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt BWIDth RESolution Range def 1 0E 6 Hz to 5 MHz Hz unit lt LO gt Position of the local oscillator frequency LO relative to the RF frequency Spur Avoid In remote control this parameter must be set when a sweep segment is created Range def POSitive LO gt RF unit SCPI Device specific with query used to retrieve the channel settings f
559. t result short ibsta Short iberr unsigned long ibcntLl Parameter ud Device handle result Reference to an integer value in which the library returns the status of the SRQ bit 0 No SRQ has occurred during the timeout 1 SRQ has occurred during the timeout Beispiel RSDLLWaitSrq ud result ibsta iberr ibcntl The function waits until one of the following two events occurs The measuring instrument triggers an SRQ No SRQ occurs during the timeout defined with RSDLLibtmo RSDLLSwapBytes This function changes the display of binary numbers on non Intel platforms VB format Not provided at present since it is required only on non Intel platforms C format void WINAPI RSDLLSwapBytes void far pArray const long size const long count C format Unix void RSDLLSwapBytes void pArray const long size const long count Parameter pArray Array in which modifications are made size Size of a single element in pArray count Number of elements in pArray Example RSDLLSwapBytes Buffer sizeof float ibcntl sizeof float This function swaps the display of various elements from Big Endian to Little Endian and vice versa It is expected that a coherent storage area of elements of the same file type size byte is transferred to pArray This function has no effect on Intel platforms Different types of processor architecture store data in different byte sequences For example Intel processors store data in the rever
560. t All and Maximize Remote control No command display configuration only Split All Splits the active window into as many diagram areas as there are traces and assigns a single trace to each area Polar 0 2 Us Ref 1 U KoA UBS Ly D Start 300 kHz Stop GHz Remote control No command display configuration only Maximize Maximizes all diagram areas of the active setup to occupy the whole window placing the active diagram area on top Clicking Maximize again restores the previous display configuration GUI Reference Trace Menu dE hag dbs Ref Ode Tre ot D ZU Refi U 10 0 0 0 10 0 20 0 30 0 gellt 50 0 60 0 CU D Chi Start 3 GHz Stop 8 G Start 300 kHz Stop A double click into any point in the diagram area is equivalent to the Maximize function To view all traces in a common maximized diagram area select Overlay all Remote control DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt MAXimize ON OFF Lines The commands in the Lines define limits for the measurement results visualize them in the diagrams and activate deactivate the limit check Besides the menu provides a horizontal line for each trace OO Limit Lines A limit line is a set of data to specify the allowed range for some or all points of a trace Typically limit lines are used to check whether a DUT conforms to the rated specifications conformance testing e The upper limit line defines the maximum value for the trace points e The
561. t gt RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt lt trace_style gt lt trace_width gt DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt MARKer STATe ON OFF DISPlay CMAP lt Element gt TRACe COLor STATe ON OFF MMEMory LOAD CMAP MMEMory STORe CMAP Softkey Labels Shows or hides the softkey bar at the right edge of the screen Step Atten b2 Meas n Bandwidth The softkey bar shows up to 7 commands of the active menu indicated above softkey no 1 The figure above shows the upper part of the softkey bar corresponding to the Trace Meas submenu Pressing the key to the right of a softkey directly activates a submenu calls up the numeric entry bar or a dialog or initiates an action See Softkey Bar in the introductory chapter for more information Status Bar Shows or hides the status bar across the bottom of the screen chi Je Loca The status bar describes the current channel if the setup contains only one channel the progress of the sweep and the control mode of the analyzer LOCAL or REMOTE Front Panel Keys Shows or hides the hardkey bar front panel key bar at the top of the screen to the left of the softkey bar GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu The hardkey bar represents the most commonly used front panel keys of the analyzer Clicking a key symbol executes the action of the corresponding key See Hardkey Bar in the introductory chapter for more information Frequency Info Shows or hides all frequenc
562. t to change the permittivity or velocity factor for all ports by entering a single value Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt DISTance control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt DIELectric SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt FREQuency SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt OFFSet GUI Reference Channel Menu Delay Opens a dialog to define the length offset parameters for the physical test ports as delays The dialog also contains the DC loss the loss at the reference frequency Loss frer and the reference frequency Ier see Loss parameters Definition above Delay One Way Loss at Freq Os e E 0 d Os Si a 0 dB Os e A 0 dB Os a Si U d Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection EDELay lt port_no gt TIME SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt FREQuency SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection LOSS lt port_no gt OFFSet Auto Length Adds an electrical length offset to the active test port with the condition that the residual delay of the active trace defined as the negative derivative of the phase response is minimized across the entire sweep range If Delay is the selected trace format the entire trace is shifted in vertical direction and centered around zero In phase format the Auto Length corrected trace shows the deviation from linear phase The effect of
563. table gives an overview on how a complex marker value z x jy is converted dB Mag Magnitude of z in dB z sqrt xX y dB Mag z 20 log z dB Lin Mag Magnitude of z unconverted z sqrt x y Phase Phase of z Zz arctan y x Real part of z Re z x Imag Imaginary part of z Im z y SWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio SWR 1 z 1 le Delay Group delay neg derivative of the d9 z do phase response dB Mag and Phase Magnitude of z in dB and phase in two 20 log z dB GUI Reference Trace Menu lines arctan Im z Re z Lin Mag and Phase Magnitude of z unconverted and izi phase in two lines arctan Im z Re z Real and Imag Real and imaginary part of z in two X lines y Default Trace Marker format identical with trace format Unnormalized resistance and reactance L or C in three lines Smith diagram fi Unnormalized conductance and susceptance L or C in three lines Inverted Smith diagram The delay aperture is defined in the Trace Format menu The equivalent inductances or capacitancesL or C are calculated from the imaginary part of the impedance according to eee rt eS 0 a 1 ZZ cl OH A Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FORMat More Mkrs Opens a submenu to create the markers numbered 4 to 10 The markers are analogous to marker no 1 to 3 Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mks S
564. tch the tooltip on or off OFF Device specific command or query SYST ERR DISP ON Switch the display of the tooltip for remote command errors on FREQ STAR 1 Remote Error 222 Dakba out of range FREQ 5TAR 1 SYSTem FiRMware UPDate lt file_name gt Installs a firmware version stored in a NWA setup file msi on the analyzer The installation is automatic and does not require any further action to be taken lt file_name gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example String variable for the name and directory of a NWA setup file msi Device specific no query SYST FIRM UPD C Setup ZVAB_01 10 msi Install the firmware version 01 10 from the setup file stored in the Setup directoy of the analyzer s internal hard disk SYSTem KLOCk lt Boolean gt Locks or unlocks the local controls of the analyzer This includes the front panel keys the keyboard or other local interfaces lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example ON OFF Lock or unlock the local keys OFF Confirmed command or query SYST KLOCk ON Command Reference SYSTem Lock the local keys SYSTem PASSword CENable lt password gt Sends a password to the analyzer enabling a class of service functions to function Command ENable Service functions are activated with the commands of the DIAGnostic system and should be used by a R amp S service representative only Refer to the servi
565. te lt Chn gt DATA NSWeep lt Response gt Response data of the selected trace see list of trace names Range def The data is transferred in the data format defined via FORMat DATA and unit FORMat DEXPort SOURce The unit is the default unit of the measured parameter see CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine RST value SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example SWE POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1 CALC FORM MLIN FORM ASCII FORM DEXP SOUR FDAT Select the trace data format linear magnitude values ASCII format and formatted trace data 1 value per sweep point TRAC CH1IDATA Query the 20 response values of the created trace according to the previous format settings TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA CH1MEM CH2MEM CH3MEM CH4MEM MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATAS MDATA4 MDATAS MDATAG MDATA7 MDATA8 Returns the stimulus values of the active data trace or memory trace see trace names O To read the stimulus values of an arbitrary data or memory trace use CALCulate lt Chn gt DATA STIMulus lt Response gt Response data of the selected trace see list of trace names Range def unit The data is transferred in the data format defined via FORMat DATA The numeric values are expressed in the default unit of the stimulus variable Hz dBm or s depending o
566. ted by colons Device specific no query RST DISP MENU KEY EXEC S11 EXEC Trace Format Phase Assign the S parameter Gu to the default trace open the local analyzer screen then display the phase of the measured quantity The commands are executed immediately without any manual entry DISP MENU KEY EXEC Start Open the numeric input bar for the start frequency of the sweep The frequency can be entered manually DISP MENU KEY EXEC About Nwa Display information about your network analyzer and the firmware version The info box is closed when you click the analyzer screen or if you send another command DISPlay MENU KEY SELect lt menu_key gt Activates the menu or submenu of the specified key lt menu_key gt Name of the key as shown in the analyzer s softkey bar case sensitive string variable RST value SCPI Command Types Example Device specific no query RST DISP MENU KEY SEL S11 Open the Trace Meas menu in order to select a measured quantity DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt MAXimize lt Boolean gt Maximizes all diagram areas in the active setup or restores the previous display configuration lt Wnd gt lt Boolean gt RST value Number of the diagram area to become the active diagram area DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt MAXimize acts on all diagrams of the current setup however the diagram no lt Wnd gt is displayed on top of the others ON OFF Maximize all diagra
567. tem error correction data determined in a calibration procedure are stored on the analyzer You can read these correction data using the remote control command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CDATa You can also replace the correction data of the analyzer by your own correction data sets GUI Reference Channel Menu Select Connectors The first dialog of the calibration wizard displays a table to select the connectors and calibration kits for all calibrated physical ports Calibration Select Physical Port Connector s Same Connector Type at All Ports H Connector Ref Imp Calibration Kit T NS00 SOQ NS50QDummy kit 2NSOO NEO D Dummy Kit 3 N500 500 N 500 Dummy Ei k I mMm M AS rer Import Kit The table contains the following rows e Physical Port Number The ports and therefore the number of table rows are determined by the active calibration type selected in the Start Cal submenu e Connector provides a drop down list to select the connector type An f behind the connector type denotes female connectors an m denotes male connectors Symmetric sexless connectors e g PC7 are not labeled User defined connectors can be added or removed in the Available Connector Types dialog which is opened from the Channel Cal Cal Kits dialog at the port and its gender If Same Connector at All
568. tematically for all traces and diagram areas Trace Manager Hame On Meas Type Channel Area Scale Trez 3 sep par Ch 2 el Tre J IW h Tre3 4 sai DAT che 2 mo Add Delete Coupling Sort Table All existing traces of the current setup are listed in a table with several editable white or non editable gray columns Below the table the Trace Manager provides the following buttons e Add Delete opens a dialog to add a new trace or delete a trace e Coupling opens a dialog to define coupling criteria channel scale for all traces in the table e Sort Table opens a dialog to change the order of the traces rows in the table Columns in the 7race Manager table e Name indicates the current trace name The default names for new traces are Trc lt n gt where lt n gt is a current number Current numbers in the trace names are necessary to make automatic assignments e g decouple the channel settings in the Coupling dialog e Onindicates whether the trace is displayed on the screen On or invisible e Meas indicates the measured parameter e Type indicates whether the trace is a data trace DAT displaying the current measurement data ora memory trace MEM e Channel indicates the channel of each trace GUI Reference Trace Menu e Area indicates the diagram area of each trace e Scale shows which traces use common
569. tents of the event status register in decimal form 0 to 255 and subsequently sets the register to zero IDN IDeNtification query returns the instrument identification The response is of Identification the form Rohde amp Schwarz ZVA8 4Port 12345 0 10 1 23 where Query ZV xx nPort is the analyzer type query only 12345 is the serial number of the analyzer 0 10 1 23 is the firmware version number The ID string can be changed in the System Config dialog Individual Status Query query only IST Individual STatus query returns the contents of the IST flag in decimal form 0 1 The IST flag is the status bit which is sent during a parallel poll Operation Complete OPC OPeration Complete sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT OPTion identification query queries the options included in the instrument Option and returns a list of the options installed The response consists of arbitrary ASCII Identification response data according to IEEE 488 2 The options are returned at fixed positions in Query a comma separated string A zero is returned for options that are not installed query only Pass Control Back no query PCB Pass Control Back indicates the contr
570. the average factor and restart the average SENSe lt Ch gt AVERage COUNt lt numeric_value gt Defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be combined for the sweep average Average Factor lt Ch gt Channel number lt numeric_value gt Average factor Range def unit 1 to 1000 1 RST value 10 SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example AVER COUN 15 Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 AVER ON Enable the sweep average Command Reference SENSe SENSe lt Ch gt JAVERage STATe lt Boolean gt Enable or disable the sweep average lt Ch gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number ON OFF Enables or disables the automatic calculation of the sweep average over the specified number of sweeps SENSe lt Ch gt JAVERage COUN ON Confirmed command or query AVER COUN 15 Set the average factor for channel 1 to 15 AVER ON Enable the sweep average over the defined number of sweeps SENSe lt Ch gt BANDwidth SENSe lt Ch gt BANDwidth This subsystem sets the bandwidth of the IF measurement filter resolution bandwidth The forms BANDwidth and BWIDth are equivalent SENSe lt Ch gt BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution lt bandwidth gt Defines the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer Meas Bandwidth lt Ch gt lt bandwidth gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel
571. the case of Visual Basic programming a string of sufficient length must be generated before This can be done during the definition of the string or using the command Space Generation of a string of the length 100 Dim Rd as String 100 Dim Rd as String Rd Space 100 RSDLLuiIrd This function reads Cnt bytes from the device with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLilrd ByVal ud ByVal Rd ByVal Cnt amp ibsta3 iberr s ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLilrd short ud char far Rd unsigned Long Cnt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLilrd short ud char Rd unsigned long Cnt short ibsta short 1berr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle ent Maximum number of bytes copied from the DLL into the target string Rd Example RSDLLilrd ud RD 100 ibsta iberr ibcntl Like the function RSDLLibrd this function reads data from a device The only difference is that in this case the maximum number of bytes to be copied into the target string Rd can be indicated by means of Cnt This function prevents writing beyond the end of the string RSDLLibrdf Reads data from the device with the handle ud into the file file VB format Function RSDLLibrdf ByVal ud ByVal fileS ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibrd short ud char far tile short far ibsta short far iberr unsig
572. the default trace Trc1 in channel 1 The default measured quantity is the forward transmission S parameter S21 The default format is dB Mag RST Create two more traces in channel 1 assigning a trace name and a measured quantity to each of them Choose descriptive trace names instead of the short default names used above CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Impedance_trace Z S21 the trace becomes the active trace for channel 1 but is not displayed CALCulate1 PARameter SDEFine Admittance trace Y S21 the trace becomes the active trace for channel 1 Create channel 2 with one new trace channel 3 with two new traces CALCulate2 PARameter SDEFine Ratio_ trace B1 B2 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Z_ trace Z21 CALCulate3 PARameter SDEFine Y_ trace Y21 CALCulate3 PARameter SELect Z trace the trace created previously becomes the active trace for channel 3 So far only the default trace is displayed Check the result in the trace manager The trace manager gives an overview of the current channel trace configuration DISPlay MENU KEY EXECute Trace Manager Programming Examples Basic Tasks Trace Manager Name On Channel Area Trci S21 DAT Chil e Impedance trace Fe 571 DAT Chl Admittance trace Ye 521 DAT Chl Ratio_trace bifbz DAT Che Z trace z321 DAT Chas V rare die MAT Ch Se S D i Odd Delete Coupling Sort Table
573. the diagram area are displayed in the channel list below the diagram Chl Center 3 1 GHz Pwr 10 dam Span DUU MHz Che stat 16Hz Pwr 10 dBm stop 2 5 GHZ Each line in the channel list describes a single channel The channel of the active trace is highlighted The lines are divided into several sections with the following contents from left to right Channel name indicates the current channel name The default names for new 3 1 5 8 System Overview Basic Concepts channels are Ch lt n gt where lt n gt is a current number Right click the section and call the Channel Manager from the context menu to change the channel name Start value of the sweep indicates the lowest value of the sweep variable e g the lowest frequency measured corresponding to the left edge of the Cartesian diagram Color legend shows the display color of all traces assigned to the channel The colors are different so the number of colors is equal to the numbers of traces assigned to the channel Additional stimulus parameter shows either the power of the internal signal source for frequency sweeps and time sweeps or the CW frequency for power sweeps Stop value of the sweep indicates the highest value of the sweep variable e g the highest frequency measured corresponding to the right edge of the Cartesian diagram Right click any of the sections in the trace list except Color legend to open a context menu and access the m
574. the test setup Select the calibration type for which you can obtain or design the most accurate standards and for which you can measure the required parameters with best accuracy Normalization A normalization is the simplest calibration type since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each calibrated S parameter One port reflection S parameters S41 S22 are calibrated with an open or a short standard providing the reflection tracking error term Two port transmission S parameters S12 S24 are calibrated with a through standard providing the transmission tracking error term Normalization means that the measured S parameter at each sweep point is divided by the corresponding S parameter of the standard A normalization eliminates the frequency dependent attenuation and phase shift in the measurement path reflection or transmission tracking error It does not compensate for directivity or mismatch errors This limits the accuracy of a normalization Full One Port Calibration A full one port calibration requires a short an open and a match standard to be connected to a single test port The three standard measurements are used to derive all three reflection error terms ZS The short and open standards are used to derive the source match and the reflection tracking error terms ZS The match standard is used to derive the directivity error A full one port calibration is more accurate than a no
575. tical axis dh C is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep reference phase 0 If p C exceeds 180 the curve jumps by 360 if it falls below 180 the trace jumps by 360 The result is a trace with a typical sawtooth shape The alternative Phase Unwrapped format avoids this behavior Application Phase measurements e g phase distortion deviation from linearity OC Alternative Formats The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale It is possible to view the real and imaginary parts instead of the magnitude and phase Both the magnitude and phase are displayed in the polar diagram As an alternative to direct phase measurements the analyzer provides the derivative of the phase response for a frequency sweep Delay Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat PHASe Smith Selects a Smith chart to display a complex quantity primarily a reflection S parameter Properties The Smith chart is a circular diagram obtained by mapping the positive complex semi plane into a unit circle Points with the same resistance are located on circles points with the same reactance produce arcs If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient S41 S22 etc then the unit GUI Reference Trace Menu Smith chart represents the normalized impedance In contrast to the polar diagram the scaling of the diagram is not linear Applica
576. timize the evaluation of results To ensure that the instrument resources are easily accessible and that user defined configurations can be conveniently implemented stored and reused the instrument uses a hierarchy of structures Global resources can be used for all measurements irrespective of the current measurement session or setup A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a setup file The diagram areas show traces which are assigned to channels See section Traces Channels and Diagram Areas Setup2 2vx 3 1 1 3 1 1 1 System Overview Basic Concepts Global Resources The analyzer provides global settings that are mostly hardware related and can be used for all measurements irrespective of the current measurement session or setup The settings are stored in independent files and do not enter into any of the setup files The following settings correspond to global resources Calibration kits Connector types Cal pool data including system error correction and power correction data Color schemes The data related to global resources are not affected by a Preset of the analyzer However it is possible to delete or reset global resource data using the Resets tab in the System Config dialog Setups A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a NWA setup file nwa and reused Each setup is d
577. ting System RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example STAT PRES Preset the status registers STATus QUEStionable CONDition Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the QUEStionable register Reading the CONDition registers is nondestructive RST value SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example STAT QUES COND Query the CONDition part of the QUEStionable register to check for questionable instrument states STATus QUEStionable ENABle Sets the enable mask which allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the QUEStionable register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit bit 3 of the STatus Byte Command Reference STATus lt NRf gt 0 to 65535 decimal representation RST value see also Reset Values of the Status Reporting System SCPI Command Types Confirmed command or query Example STAT QUES ENABle 1536 Set bits no 9 and 10 of the QUEStionable ENABle register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the QUEStionable register Reading an EVENt register clears it RST value SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example STAT OPER Query the EVENt part of the OPERation register to check whether an event has occurred since the last reading STATus QUEStionable NTRansition Sets
578. tion GUI Reference Trace Menu parameter S11 irrespective of the actual S parameter stored in the file um d To import a trace file snp or csv you can also use the Windows Explorer and simply double click the file or drag and drop the file into the NWA application The imported data generates a memory trace which is coupled to the active data trace Remote control MMEMory LOAD TRACe lt trc_name gt lt file_ name gt Export Data Calls up a dialog to store data or memory traces to a trace file Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format Data export can serve many purposes e g e To process and evaluate measurement data in an external application e To store measurement data and re import it in a future measurement session Export Complex Data Savein Gp Tes IO eh Name Size Type Ea TEST Complex csy 14 KB SY File EN TEST Format CS 15KB CSV File File name TEST _ complex cey w ei Sae Save as type ASCII Files csv wl Output Format Contents Ask bo Overwrite Decimal Separator Point w Export Complex Data corresponds to a standard Save As dialog with an additional panel to specify the export options The export options are remembered when the dialog is closed The Dec Separator export option is not available for Matlab dat file export Touchstone files s lt n gt p contain either a single trace s1p or the complete set of S parameters of an n port an
579. tion Reflection measurements see application example am O The axis for the sweep variable is lost in Smith charts but the marker functions easily provide the stimulus value of any measurement point dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be obtained by means of the Marker Format functions Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat SMITh Polar Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity primarily an S parameter or ratio Properties The polar diagram shows the measured data response values in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis In contrast to the Smith chart the scaling of the axes is linear Application Reflection or transmission measurements see application example cija O The axis for the sweep variable is lost in polar diagrams but the marker functions easily provide the stimulus value of any measurement point dB values for the magnitude and other conversions can be obtained by means of the Marker Format functions Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt FORMat POLar Group Delay Calculates the group delay from the measured quantity primarily from a transmission S parameter and displays it in a Cartesian diagram Properties The group delay ty represents the propagation time of wave through a device
580. tion for the active trace which may be a data or a memory trace With active smoothing function each measurement point is replaced by the arithmetic mean value of all measurement points located in a symmetric interval centered on the stimulus value The width of the smoothing interval is referred to as the Smoothing Aperture and can be adjusted according to the properties of the trace cija O The sweep average is an alternative method of compensating for random effects on the trace by averaging consecutive traces Compared to smoothing the sweep average requires a longer measurement time but does not have the drawback of averaging out quick variations of the measured values Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt SMOothing STATe lt Boolean gt Smoothing Aperture Defines how many measurement points are averaged to smooth the trace if smoothing is switched on The Smoothing Aperture is entered as a percentage of the total sweep span Smoothing apere 14 eiis An aperture of n means that the smoothing interval for each sweep point i with stimulus value x is equal to x span n 200 x span n 200 and that the result of i is replaced by the arithmetic mean value of all measurement points in this interval The average is calculated for every measurement point Smoothing does not significantly increase the measurement time O Finding the appropriate aperture A large smoothing aperture enhances the smoothing effect but may also aver
581. tion panel it is possible to specify whether the Preset command will perform a factory preset or restore the settings stored to a user preset file A user preset file is an arbitrary setup zvx file to be stored using the Nwa File Save Network Analysis command If the current user preset GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu file is not found e g because it was deleted or moved the analyzer performs a factory preset O In remote control a user defined preset must be initiated using the commands in the SYSTem PRESet USER subsystem RST and SYSTem PRESet always restore the factory preset settings e Channel Bits e Resets Provides several buttons to reset global instrument settings and properties Global settings e g the data related to global resources are not affected by an instrument Preset coc O The Use Default Directories button is inactive in the current firmware version e Remote Settings Specifies the Remote Language and an D String for the analyzer to be queried via IDN e lf the DEFAULT language is activated the factory ID string Rohde amp Schwarz ZVL lt Max Freg Ports gt Port lt Serial_no gt lt FW_Version gt e g Rohde amp Schwarz ZVL6 2Port 1145101010100001 1 70 5 is set The bit order for transferred binary data is swapped FORMat BORDer SWAPped e Ifthe PNA is activated an Agilent compatible ID string is set The bit order for transferred binary data is normal The I
582. tively 3 1 5 6 System Overview Basic Concepts Mkr 7 indicates the maximum minimum of the peak Mkr2and Mkr 3 indicate the lower and upper band edge where the trace value has decreased increased by a definite Level value Mkr 4 indicates the center of the peak calculated as the arithmetic mean value of the LBE and UBE positions Marker Info Field The coordinates of all markers defined in a diagram area are displayed in the info field which by default is located in the upper right corner Ret AS35279 GHz 1 954 dB Whe B 0OSS307 GHz 0 160 dB uhh 2 779 20254 MHz 0521 dE The list contains the following information Mkr 1 Mkr2 denote the marker numbers Markers are displayed with the same color as the associated trace The marker coordinates are expressed in one of the marker formats selected via Marker Format The formats of the markers assigned to a trace are independent of each other and of the trace format settings The active marker has a dot placed in front of the marker line A Assign placed in front of the marker line indicates that the marker is in Delta Mode Customizing the marker info field To change the position appearance or contents of the marker info field use one of the following methods Double click the info field to open the Marker Properties dialog with extended settings for all markers of the active trace Right click the info field to open a co
583. torage of the analyzer may be internal or external The internal mass storage device can be any section of the internal hard disk mapped to drive C The external mass storage device can be a floppy disk inserted into the drive at the front panel of the instrument which is mapped to drive a see MMEMory MSIS a USB memory stick connected to one of the USB ports mapped to any free drive letter or a network connection File and directory names The lt file_name gt and lt directory_ name gt parameters are strings Some commands use a fixed directory for others the mie name gt can contain the complete path including the drive name and all subdirectories e g C TEMP TRASH test txt for the file named test txt in the TEMP TRASH subdirectory of the internal hard disk drive C If no complete path is specified the file location is relative to the current directory queried with MMEMory CDIRectory The file name itself may contain the period as a separator for extensions File and directory names can be chosen according to Windows conventions the restrictions placed on file names known from DOS systems do not apply All letters and numbers are allowed as well as the special characters UU Se AU D I UU n AN KA J UU SA We UU T me L NN and Wn Reserved file names are CON AUX COM1 COM4 LPT _ LPT3 NUL and PRN The use of wildcards and is not allowed MMEMory AKAL FACTory CONVersion lt directory_na
584. traces are generated by storing the data trace to the memory It represents the state of the data trace at the moment when it was stored Memory traces are static traces which can be stored to a file and recalled 3 1 5 4 System Overview Basic Concepts Mathematical traces are calculated according to a mathematical relation between constants and the data or memory traces of the active setup A mathematical trace that is based on the active data trace is dynamic It is possible to generate an unlimited number of memory traces from a data trace and display them together see Data gt Mem Markers and marker functions are available for all trace types The trace type of each trace in a diagram area is indicated in the trace list You can also make each trace Invisible without deleting it Trace List and Trace Settings The main properties of all traces assigned to the diagram area are displayed in the trace list in the upper left corner SEA OH Mag AU dB Ret 20008 Ch Invisible o2igPhase 45 Ret Chi dB Mag 10 dB Ret de Che Math Mermo Trc Ea dB Mag 10 dB Refi de Che Each line in the trace list describes a single trace The active trace is highlighted The lines are divided into several sections with the following contents from left to right Trace name indicates the current trace name The default names for new traces are Trc lt n gt where lt n gt is a current number A Mem preceding the trace name
585. trols in the S Params From panel are disabled For two port standards described by a s2p file the implicit ports 1 and 2 given by the order of S parameters Re S11 Im S11 Re S21 Im S21 Re S12 Im S12 Re S22 Im S22 in the file are assigned to the test ports that the analyzer actually calibrates as follows Port 1 is always assigned to the lower numbered calibrated test port port 2 to the other higher numbered calibrated test port Assigning a label to standards is optional However the label is displayed in many dialogs and can provide useful information about the standard e g its serial number If Circuit Modelis selected in the S params From panel then the controls in the central panel of the dialog are enabled The circuit diagram is adjusted to the selected standard type The following parameters can be set e Frequency range Min Freq to Max Freq for which the circuit model is valid During calibration the analyzer checks whether the sweep range is contained in the validity range of all measured standards and possibly generates a warning see Measure Standards dialog e Offset and Load parameters of the circuit model coc O The impedance for waveguides is frequency dependent If a waveguide line type is selected in the Offset Model dialog the circuit model indicates varies instead of a definite impedance value Remote SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection CKIT lt std_type gt control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection C
586. ts the search range e g in order to define the start and stop values lt Chn gt lt Mk gt lt numeric_value gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Number of the search range 0 fixed full span search range equal to the sweep range 1 to 10 user definable search ranges see example O reserved for full soan search range Device specific command or query CALC1 MARK1 FUNC DOM USER 2 Select the search range no 2 assigned to marker no 1 and trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC DOM USER STARt 1GHz Set the start frequency of the search range to 1 GHz CALC MARK FUNC DOM USER STOP 1 2GHz Set the stop frequency of the search range to 1 2 GHz Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER STARt lt numeric_value gt Defines the start value of the search range selected with CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion DOMain USER lt numeric_value gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 lt numeric_value gt Beginning of the search range Range def unit Maximum allowed sweep range depending on the instrument model and on the sweep type Hz dBm or s depending on the sweep type RST value 0 Hz SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example See CALCulate
587. ts with n different drive ports Peak Local maximum or local minimum dip on the trace In the Trace Search menu it is possible to define a minimum excursion that both types of peaks must have to be considered valid Reflection tracking error Frequency dependent variation of the ratio of the reflected wave to the reference wave at a test port when an ideal reflection coefficient 1 is measured The reflection tracking error can be corrected by means of a reflection normalization or one of the more sophisticated calibration methods Reverse A measurement on a two port DUT is said to be in reverse direction if the source signal stimulus is applied to port 2 of the DUT Setup A setup comprises a set of diagram areas with all displayed information that can be stored to a NWA setup file zvx Each setup is displayed in an independent window Source match error Measurement error caused by a mismatch of the analyzer s source port causing part of the signal reflected off the DUT to be reflected again off the source port so that it is not measured there The source match error can be corrected by means of a full one port calibration or a two port calibration except normalization Stimulus value Value of the sweep variable frequency power time point number where a measurement is taken Also termed sweep point Sweep Series of consecutive measurements taken at a specified sequence of stimulus values series of consecutive measure
588. tsltelztetatalsvb tab Lelslet UrtielrRelelel 1n cl sl oho It lIetsl et n DS DDDOR AE cti at ER 2 2 3 Scaling Diagrams The analyzer provides several alternative tools for setting the sweep range and customizing the diagrams Pick the method that is most convenient for you Setting the Sweep Range The sweep range for all channels is displayed in the channel list across the bottom of the diagram area CAT Stat 300 kHz Pwr 10 dam stop 6 GHz Ch Start 300 kHz Pwr 10 dam stop 2 GHz CAs Stat 300 kHz Pwr 5 dBm Stop 6 GHz To change the sweep range use one of the following methods Press the CENTER or SPAN function keys on the front panel Right click the start or stop value in the channel list and select Start Stop Center Span from the context menu Select Start Stop Center Span from the Channel Center or Channel Span menus Use the marker functions MARKER gt function key Reference Value and Position The analyzer provides three parameters for changing the scale of the vertical response axis Changing the Ref Value or Ref Position shifts the trace in vertical direction and adjusts the labels of the vertical axis Ref Value also works for radial diagrams Changing the Scale Div modifies the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions and thus the entire range of response values displayed The Scale Div and the Ref Value is indicated in the scale section of the trace l
589. tual trace data HZ S RI R 50 0000 I Rohde amp Schwarz ZVL I Measurement S11 2003 07 07 60297750 000000 0 498113 0 054290 80297000 000000 0 504888 0 081229 The header consists of the following data elements specifies beginning of header line required at top of file lt Frequency unit gt HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ allowed for imported files The analyzer always uses HZ for exported data lt Data file tyoe gt at present S for S parameter files lt Data format gt RI for Re Im MA for lin Mag Phase DB for dB Mag Phase The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog GUI Reference Trace Menu lt Normalizing impedance gt Impedance system in which the data was defined The analyzer uses 50 0000 Q Comment lines start with the exclamation mark and may contain any text used for documentation of the trace data file Any number of comment lines may be inserted before or after the header line The trace data depend on the number of ports lt n gt and the data format For real and imaginary values data format RI the trace data for each stimulus frequency are arranged as follows e 1 port files s1p e Freq Re S11 Im S11 e 11 can be replaced by an any S parameter so the sip format is suitable for exporting an arbitrary data trace representing an S parameter e 2 port files s2p e Freq Re S11 Im S11 Re S21 Im S21 Re S12 Im S12 Re S22 Im S22 e all v
590. types setting command query 5 Program example Order of commands The commands are arranged in alphabetical order SCPI systems or subsystems are arranged in one topic Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters Parameters either provide alternative options setting a or setting b or setting c see special character or they form a list separated by commas setting x y lt Par_Name gt In the command tables and lists parameters are generally described by a name literal written in angle brackets lt gt This literal merely serves as a parameters description in an application program it must be replaced by one of the possible settings reported in the detailed parameter description Example CONTrol AUXiliary C DATA lt numeric_value gt with lt numeric_value gt 0 to 15 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation possible command syntax CONT AUX C 1 NAN Not A Number is generally used to represent missing data e g if a portion of a trace has not been acquired yet It is also returned after invalid mathematical operations such as division by zero As defined in the SCPI standard NAN is represented as 9 91 E 37 INV invalid is returned e g if a limit check is performed without defining the appropriate tolerance values Upper lower case Upper lower case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command The short form
591. ue gt BFILter Bandfilter search Bandfilter search The results are queried using CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt BWIDth CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion STARt Sets the beginning start of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the marker lt Mk gt on trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace lt Mk gt Marker number in the range 1 to 10 Range def unit RST value Command Reference SCPI Command Types Example CALCulate Device specific no query RST CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC STAR Divide the sweep range in half starting at the current marker position CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion STOP Sets the end stop of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the marker lt Mk gt on trace no lt Chn gt lt Chn gt lt Mk gt Range def unit RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace Marker number in the range 1 to 10 ge Device specific no query RST CALC MARK ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and assign it to trace no 1 CALC MARK FUNC STOP Divide the sweep range in half ending at the current marker position CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion TARget lt numeric_value gt D
592. ue of the active marker leaving the end stop value unchanged The active marker appears at the left edge of the diagram Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion S TARt Stop Marker Sets the end stop of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker leaving the beginning start unchanged The active marker appears at the right edge of the diagram Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion STOP Center Marker Sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker leaving the span unchanged The active marker appears in the center of the diagram Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt MARKer lt Mk gt FUNCtion CENTer Ref Value Marker Sets the reference value equal to the response value of the active marker leaving the values of the vertical divisions Scale Div unchanged Max Marker Sets the upper edge of the diagram equal to the response value of the active marker leaving the values of the vertical divisions Scale Div unchanged GUI Reference Trace Menu Min Marker Sets the lower edge of the diagram equal to the response value of the active marker leaving the values of the vertical divisions Scale Div unchanged Zero Delay at Marker Corrects the measurement result by adding or subtracting a constant group delay This function must be applied to a trace which is displayed in group delay format The tra
593. uency dependent variation of the ratio of the transmitted wave to the reference wave at a test port when an ideal transmission coefficient 1 is measured The transmission tracking error can be corrected by means of a transmission normalization or one of the more sophisticated calibration methods Window Rectangular portion of the screen showing all diagram areas of a particular setup Windows are limited by a blue frame with several icons The analyzer uses standard windows provided by the operating system Preparing for Use Front Panel Tour 1 Prepaing Tor USO acccecesecepecevecesccesesenssawecspecssecesesesegseecanecsaceeseceussswecaus 11 TI FON PNE RL TT 11 Tee D EE 12 eee UPR EVS oa Ghadadnucs eu eciencsoseussanceceuehndateacdavecnwasodicmucen ecssae 12 to FUNCION E 13 114 Navigation E 14 LLS Pala e TE 15 SE ROY e E EEE 16 US Ee UA A EE 16 REG Kn 17 11 9 USB COMMECIONS 3 sais sarssancsniabidecsrasesdsiiaintssuantavectiabideeneasaddsaasandinabidacitacesdsbiasetesantandataad 17 t PROBE POWER siete saree nates neaetiesece shen E gd oe seinb E E 18 MZ Beat MG tee 19 1 3 Putting the Instrument into Operation ccccceesecssessseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 21 1 3 1 Unpacking the Instrument and Checking the Shipment snnannnnnnnannnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnenenne 21 132 e Ge tu E 22 1 3 3 Bench Top Operation 22 1 3 4 Mounting in a 19 TRACK EE 23 1 3 5 EMI Protective Measures AER 23 1 36 Power Supply
594. um number of suitably positioned sweep points e Start a single sweep observing proper command synchronization and retrieve your results The following command sequence performs a single sweep in a single channel RST INITiate CONTinous OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels including the channels created later INITiate SCOPe SING State that a single sweep will be performed in the active channel only INI Tiate IMMediate WA Start a single sweep in channel no 2 wait until the sweep is terminated before proceeding to the next command see Command Synchronization Command Processing The block diagram below shows how GPIB bus commands are serviced in the instrument The individual components work independently and simultaneously They communicate with each other by means of so called messages Remote Control General Description Command Processing Input unit with IECNEEE bus eut buffer Ethernet Command recognition Instrument settings data base status reporting Bh system Instrument hardware lIEC IEEE bus Output unit with Ethernet output butter Input Unit The input unit receives commands character by character from the controller and collects them in the input buffer The input unit sends a message to the command recognition as soon as the input buffer is full or as soon as it receives a delimiter lt PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATORs as defined in IEEE
595. umber of points unchanged but directly affects the delay RST value MIN depending on the channel settings This default value corresponds to automatic sweep time setting in manual control SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example SECH ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 dBm internal source power SEGM SWE TIME 0 1 Increase the segment sweep time to 0 1 s SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep TIME CONTrol lt Boolean gt Qualifies whether or not the Segment Sweep Time can be set independently for each sweep segment lt Ch gt Channel number lt Seg gt Sweep segment number lt Boolean gt ON The time can be set independently for each sweep segment OFF The time in all sweep segments is equal to the sweep time for unsegmented sweeps set via SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TIME RST value OFF The parameter is automatically switched to ON when a segment sweep time is entered using SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt SWEep TIME or if the channel settings in a sweep segment require a sweep time larger than the unsegmented Command Reference SENSe sweep time SCPI Device specific command or query Command Types Example SECH ADD Create a new sweep segment no 1 in channel no 1 using default settings and thus 10 dBm internal source power SEGM SWE TIME 0 1 Increase the segment sweep time to 0 1 s SpHGM SWEh LIME
596. ure the analyzer is ready for operation ZS After using the instrument in its ready state press the standby key to save the current settings and reduce the power consumption Press the standby key again to resume your measurements quickly avoiding the complete startup procedure The standby key shows a different behavior if the R amp S ZVL does not use the AC power supply seeDC Power Supply and Battery CAUTION Power supply in standby mode A The instrument is still power supplied while it is in standby mode 1 3 10 Replacing Fuses The instrument is protected by two fuses IEC 127 T 3 15 H 250 V located on the rear panel at the right side of the AC power switch DANGER Shock hazard A For fuse replacement ensure that the instrument is switched off and disconnected from the power supply by removing the plug from the AC and DC power connector To replace the fuses 1 Open the lid of the AC power connector 2 Lift the fuse holder out of its slot Preparing for Use Putting the Instrument into Operation 3 Exchange the two fuses 4 Put the fuse holder back in its slot and close the lid 1 3 11 DC Power Supply and Battery While the R amp S ZVL is disconnected from the AC power supply it can be supplied either by a DC power option DC Power Supply R amp S FSL B30 or a battery option NIMH Battery Pack R amp S FSL B31 seePower Supply Options With DC power or battery supply the AC power s
597. urrent directory SCPI Command Confirmed command or query returns the current directory Types Example MMEM CDIR C Documents and Settings NetworkService Application Data Change to the specified directory MMEMory COPY lt file_source gt lt file_destination gt Copies an existing file to a new file lt file_source gt String parameters to specify the name of the file to be copied and the lt file_destination gt name of the new file RST value SCPI Command Types Confirmed no query Example MMEM COPY C USER DATA SETUP CFG A Copy file Setup cfg in directory C USER DATA to the external storage medium mapped to drive Ach MMEMory DATA lt file_name gt lt data gt Loads lt data gt into the file Je name gt lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name of the file Data in 488 2 block data format The delimiter EOI must be selected to achieve lt data gt correct data transfer RST value SCPI Command Confirmed with query The query form is MMEMory DATA lt file_name gt with Types the response being the associated lt data gt in block format Example MMEM DATA C TEMP TEST01 HCP Query the block data contained in file TESTO1 HCP Command Reference MMEMory MMEMory DELete lt file_name gt Removes a file from the specified directory lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the file to be removed RST value
598. used to identify the active trace lt Boolean gt ON OFF Limit line on or off RST value OFF SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit FAIL Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the limit check has failed d Use CALCulate lt Chn gt CLIMits FAIL to perform a composite global limit check lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace Response O 1 0 represents pass 1 represents fail RST value 0 SCPI Command Confirmed query only Types Example RST CALC LIM CONT 1 GHZ 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz using default response values CALC LIM STAT ON FAIL Switch the limit check on and query the result CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt Defines the response y axis values of the lower limit line and or creates new limit line segments Command Reference CALCulate The commands CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit LOWer DATA and CALCulate lt Chn gt LIMit UPPer DATA use a fixed numbering scheme for limit line segments Upper limit line segments are assigned odd numbe
599. using the TCP IP protocol The IP address information is displayed in the nfo Setup Info dialog Preparing for Use Remote Control in a LAN 1 7 Remote Control in a LAN A LAN connection is used to integrate the analyzer into a home company network This offers several applications k Transfer data between a controller and the analyzer e g in order run a remote control program ee Control the measurement from a remote computer using the Remote Desktop application Use external network devices e g printers ATTENTION Virus protection A An efficient virus protection is a prerequisite for secure operation in the network Never connect your analyzer to an unprotected network because this may cause damage to the instrument software To establish the connection proceed as follows 1 Access Windows XP using an external keyboard see Accessing Window XP s Start Menu 2 Open Windows XP s control panel 3 Select System and open the Remote tab in the System Properties dialog Enable Allow users to connect remotely to this computer 4 Assign an IP address to the analyzer following the directions below and connect the analyzer to the network as described in Connecting a LAN Cable 5 Create a Remote Desktop Connection using the analyzer s IP address NOTE Password protection The analyzer uses a user name and password as credentials for remote access In the factory configuration instrument is pres
600. ust be appended to the string RSDLLibwrtf This function sends the contents of a file files to the device with the handle ud VB format Function RSDLLibwrtf ByVal ud ByVal fileS ibsta iberr ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPL RSDLLibwrt short wud char far Wrt short far ibsta short far iberr unsigned long far ibcntl C format Unix short RSDLLibwrt short ud char Wrt short ibsta short 1berr unsigned long ibcnel Parameter ud Device handle file File the contents of which are sent to the device Example RSDLLibwrti ud Ci cbasav ibsta twoerr abencl This function allows to send setting and query commands to the measuring instruments Whether the data is interpreted as complete command can be set using the function RSDLLibeot RSDLLibrd The function reads data from the device with the handle ud into the string Rd VB format Function RSDLLibrd ByVal ud ByVal RdS ibsta iberrs ibcntl amp As Integer C format short WINAPI RSDLLibrat short ud char far Rd short far xibsta Short far iberr unsigned long far aibentl C format Unix short RSDLLibrd short ud char Rd short ibsta short iberr unsigned long ibcntl Parameter ud Device handle Rd String into which the read data is copied Example RSDLLLbrd ud Rd absta ib rr iabentl This function fetches the responses of the GPIB parser to a query HW Interfaces Rear Panel Connectors In
601. v RMS and the Phase Delay EI Length results separately see example below lt Chn gt lt Boolean gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example Channel number used to identify the active trace ON OFF Statistical info field on or off OFF Device specific command or query RST CALC STAT MMPT ON Reset the instrument hiding all statistical results Display the Min Max Peak Peak results CALC STAT MSTD ON Display the Mean Std Dev results in addition CALC STAT RMS ON Display the RMS results in addition CALC STAT EPD ON Display the Phase Delay El Length results in addition CALC STAT OFF Hide all results Command Reference CALCulate CALCulate TRANsform CALCulate lt Chn gt TRANsform This subsystem converts measured data from one representation to another CALCulate lt Chn gt TRANsform COMPlex S Y Z Converts S parameters into matched circuit converted Y parameters or Z parameters and vice versa assuming that port no is terminated with Zu so that the three parameter sets are equivalent and the following formulas apply IS date ayy jj cout cinri Sar TOLED I gt Out CIN ji pi l Lg J Zaang d R Z eh Pes soufr Ine ii 1 1 5 Ces e li fy zm lt on SC Ke dd E ann Renee i lt Chn gt Channel number used to identify the active trace If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 S Y P S parameters Y parameters Z parameters RST
602. vacuum and is a measure for the length of transmission line between the standard and the actual calibration plane For a waveguide with permittivity sand mechanical length Lech the following relations hold Lee fs Delay Zen AS Electrical Length Lyan yE 2 The default delay is 0 s the default step width is 1 ns corresponding to a step width of 299 792 mm for the electrical length The relations hold for one port and 2 port standards e Zis the Characteristic Impedance of thestandard If the standard is terminated with Zo then its input impedance is also equal to Zo Zois not necessarily equal to the reference impedance of the system depending on the Connector Type or the terminal impedance of the standard The characteristic impedance of the standard is only used in the context of calibration The default characteristic impedance is equal to the reference impedance of the system e The Loss is the energy loss along the transmission line due to the skin effect For resistive lines and at RF frequencies the loss is approximately proportional to the square root of the frequency In Agilent mode the Offset Loss is expressed in units of Q s at a frequency of 1 GHz The following formula holds Loss ilas Z dc Offset Lossi O s 4 34297 d5 delay ils To determine an offset loss value experimentally measure the delay in seconds and the loss in dB at 1 GHz and use the formula above The default Loss or Offset Loss is zero O T
603. value The initial representation of the trace is determined by means of CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine SCPI Command Device specific command or query Types Example RSE ATC EPAR Ee Re Select the converted admittance Y lt S22 as measurement parameter of the default trace CALC TRAN COMP S Convert the converted Y parameter into an S parameter Command Reference CONFigure CONFigure CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt This subsystem creates and deletes channels and assigns names to channels The commands are device specific CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt CATalog Returns the numbers and names of all channels in the current setup lt Ch gt Channel number This parameter is ignored because the command returns all channels Response String with comma separated list of channel numbers and names see example below If all channels have been deleted the response is an empty string RST value SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example SRSTI CONF CHANZ SITAT ON NAME New Channel Create channel 2 and assign the channel name New Channel CONF CHAN CAT Query all channels and their names As a default channel no 1 is created on RST the response is 1 Ch1 2 New_Channel CONF CHAN NAME ID New Channel Query the channel number for the channel named New Channel The response is 2 CONFigure CHANnel lt Ch gt NAME lt Ch_name gt Assigns a name to channe
604. wencassiereavacianasscddbasniencdveneanadsannesciidsendadipeareausverlouanstesahanannans 383 MMEMory DELete CORRe ction lt file name 383 MMEMory LOAD CKIT Lie name 383 MMEMory LOAD CKIT SDATa lt conn_name gt lt ckit_name gt MMTHrough MFTHrough FFTHrough MMLine MFLine FFLine MMATten MFATten FFATten MMSNetwork MFSNetwork FFSNetwork MOPen FOPen MSHort FSHort MOSHort FOSHort MREFlect FREFlect MMTCh FMTCh MSMatch FSMatch lt stdlabel_ name gt lt file_name gt kepon MOS A ele ien KEE 384 MMEMory LOAD CMAP mie name 385 MMEMory LOAD CORRection lt Ch gt lt file name 385 MMEMory LOAD CORRection RESolve lt Chs lt file_ name 386 MMEMory LOAD LIMit lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt lt param_name gt lt x_offset gt lt y_offset gt lt type gt 386 MMEMory LOAD SEGMent lt Ch gt lt file_ name 388 MMEMory LOAD STATe lt numeric_value gt lt file name 388 MMEMory LOAD TRACe lt trc_name gt lt file_name gt lt parameter_NAME gt cseeeeeeeeeeeeees 389 MMEMory MDIRectory lt directOry Damme 390 MMEMory MOVE lt file_source gt lt file_ GEStINATIOND cc ceeccccceeeceeceeeceeceeeeeceeeceeceeeeeesseeeeeeeaees 390 MMEMory NAME lt file name 391 MMEMory RDIRectory lt directory name ccccccccecseseeeceseesseeeesseaseeeeessaaeeeeensaaeeeesseaeeneesseases 391 MMEMory STORe CKIT ckt name Lie name 391 MMEMory STORe C
605. when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Overview of Syntax Elements The colon separates the key words of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command i Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it The hash sign introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data Binary B10110 Octal 07612 Hexadecimal HF3A7 Block 21312 A white space ASCIl Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates header and parameter Basic Remote Control Concepts The functionality of the network analyzer s remote control commands has been defined in close analogy to the menu commands and control elements of the graphical user interface GUI The basic concepts of setups traces channels and diagram areas remain valid in remote control Moreover all commands follow SCPI syntax rules and SCPI confirmed commands have been used whenever possible These principles largely simplify the development of remote control scripts The GUI and the remote control command set both aim at maximum operating convenience In manual control this generally means that the control ele
606. witch on the rear panel is disabled The standby toggle switch on the front panel is used to switch the analyzer on or off co E While the R amp S ZVL is switched off press the standby key to initiate the startup procedure until the R amp S ZVL enters its ready state The left green LED is on K While the R amp S ZVL is switched on ready press the standby key to switch the analyzer off Both LEDs are off When using the DC power supply or battery note the safety instructions below Please also refer to the detailed information about DC Power Supply and the Battery Pack CAUTION DC power supply The power supply SELV that is used must fulfill the requirements for reinforced double insulation for main supply circuits in accordance to DIN EN IEC 61010 UL 61010B 1 CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 or DIN EN IEC 60950 UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No 950 It is recommended to fuse the DC power supply appropriately Before switching on the instrument check the connection for correct polarity CAUTION Battery pack The power supply that is used must fulfill the requirements for reinforced double insulation for main supply circuits in accordance to DIN EN IEC 61010 UL 61010B 1 CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 or DIN EN IEC 60950 UL 1950 CSA C22 2 No 950 Note If the battery is not to be used for a longer time it is recommended to remove it and store it separately 1 3 12 Charging the Battery The battery can be charged via the AC
607. with comma separated list of trace names and measurement parameters e g CH4TR1 S11 CH4TR2 S12 The measurement parameters are returned according to the naming convention of CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter SDEFine The order of traces in the list reflects their creation time The oldest trace is the first the newest trace is the last trace in the list RST value SCPI Device specific query only Command Types Example CALC4 PAR SDEF Ch4Tr1 S11 Command Reference CALCulate Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S11 CALC4 PAR CAT Query the traces assigned to channel 4 If Ch4Tr1 is the only trace assigned to channel 4 the response is CH4TR1 S11 CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DEFine lt string gt S11 S12 S21 S22 Creates a trace and assigns a channel number a name and a measurement parameter to it The trace is not displayed To display a trace defined via CALCulate lt Ch gt PARameter DEFine a window must be created DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON and the trace must be assigned to this window DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe FEED see example below Traces must be selected to become active traces see CALCulate PARameter SELect cc O This command has been implemented for compatibility reasons The parameter names in this command differ from ZVL conventions moreover the parameter list is not complete The alternative command
608. word gt scccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeesessaaaaaasssseeeess 455 Sro TON PRE CU ee cercsctipe coe sc des cane E E E E E E 455 SYSTem PRESet SCOPe ALL TGlNGole cccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeessseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaasssseeeees 455 SYSTem PRESet USER STATe Boolean AAA 456 SYSTem PRESet USER NAME lt Setup Tel 456 SY Orem oe MNOS UPDate ONCE sareni a EEEE 457 E un Re 459 TRAC cease reece dare spam E esas cpedeeueteence encusetiesuuies 459 Se 459 Reserved Tracehames EE 459 TRACe CLEar MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATA3 MDATA4 MDATAS MDATAG MDATA7 MDATA8 460 TRAGE COPY lt memory 11CS lt Cala UC Siinccivessaricundsiouivadgasntunagandedundsteoedwadaesinpudiswanmuacenesaduadanandians 460 TRACe COPY MATH lt memory_tre gt lt data Ir 461 TRACe DATA RESPonse ALL CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA CH1MEM CH2MEM CH3MEM CH4MEM MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATAS MDATA4 MDATAS MDATAG MDATAT MDATAS s sessesssesseseeseecsessesscssessececsecsscssessessessessussesseseesecsetseesseesesses 463 TRACe DATA STIMulus ALL CH1DATA CH2DATA CH3DATA CH4DATA CH1MEM CH2MEM CH3MEM CH4MEM MDATA1 MDATA2 MDATAS MDATA4 MDATAS MDATAG MDATAT MDATAS c sessesssesseseeseecsessessucssesseseesecssessessessessessssteseseesecssessessessessee 463 Command Reference Special Terms and Notation 7 Command Reference This chapter lists all common commands and SCP
609. xisting trace in the active setup string parameter The imported limit line is assigned to this trace irrespective of the trace information in the limit line file RST value lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the limit line file to be loaded The default extension manual control for limit line files is limit although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory See Command Reference RST value lt param_name gt RST value lt x_offset gt Range def unit RST value lt y_Offset gt Range def unit RST value lt type gt RST value SCPI Command Types Example MMEMory also note on Touchstone files above String parameter selects an S parameter from a Touchstone file The parameter must be compatible with the file type e g for one port Touchstone files s1p only the parameter name S11 is allowed S11 if all optional parameters are omitted Stimulus offset for limit lines loaded from a Touchstone file A 1 GHz offset shifts the limit line by 1 GHz in positive horizontal direction Depending on the sweep range of the analyzer The default units for frequency power and time sweeps are Hz dB and s respectively 0 Response offset for limit lines loaded from a Touchstone file A 1 dB offset shifts the limit line by 1 dB in positive verti
610. y LOAD CKIT command Agilent cal kit files can be imported manually and converted into calkit files Device specific no query COPR CT Te EE EN Command Reference SENSe Load the previously created ZVR cal kit file ZCAN ck from the default cal kit directory MMEM STOR CRIT 2CAN Ce VRolacde amp S Glaweie7d INIA Ce ILalloi eue 6m Kae S SCAN Ce llkkane Store the imported cal kit data to a NWA cal kit file ZCAN calkit assuming that the cal kit name stored in ZCAN ck reads ZCAN SENSe CORRection COLLect SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect This subsystem controls the system error correction and manages calibration kits SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire THRough OPEN1 OPEN2 OPEN12 SHORT1 SHORT2 SHORT12 MATCH1 MATCH2 MATCH12 NET ATT IMATCH12 REFL1 REFL2 SLIDe1 SLIDE2 SLIDE12 LINE1 LINE2 M102 O1M2 M1S2 S1M2 OSHORT1 OSHORT2 Starts a calibration measurement in order to acquire measurement data for the selected standards The standards are reflection or transmission standards and must be connected to port 1 or 2 of the analyzer d Use the generalized command SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection COLLect ACQuire SELected to obtain measurement data at arbitrary analyzer ports lt Ch gt Channel number of the calibrated channel If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1 THRough Standard types Through Open Short Match MATCH12 a
611. y Le is kept at its previously defined value default 1 GHz e The DC loss c is zero except for S parameters with maximum dB magnitude larger than 0 01 dB e Auto Offset for S parameters centers the corrected dB magnitude as close as possible around 0 dB The resulting offset parameters are displayed in the Electrical Length Mechanical Length and Delay dialogs Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt CORRection _LOSS lt port_no gt AUTO ONCE GUI Reference Channel Menu Cal Manager Opens a dialog to store system error correction and power correction data to the cal pool and to assign stored correction data to channels Cal pool The cal pool is a collection of correction data sets cal groups that the analyzer stores in a common directory C Rohde amp Schwarz NWA Calibration Data Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and setups Each cal group is stored in a separate file named lt CalGroup_name gt cal The cal group name can be changed in the Calibration Manager dialog e m en EE Calibration Manager Calibration State Calibration Pool Chi Uses Calsroup2 cal Copy gt gt gt CalGroup1 calkest Che No Calibration lt lt Apply lt lt Apply to Al Resolve Pool Link Delete From Fool Calibration Properties CalGroup2 cal User Correction Data CalGroup2 cal From Calibration Pool System Error Correction Data 04 16 04 12 43 05 300 kHz 20 GHz 201 Points
612. y span It corresponds to the diagram width i e Stop Start e Start opens the input field for the the lowest frequency to be measured It corresponds to the left edge of the Cartesian diagram e Stop opens the input field for the highest frequency to be measured It corresponds to the right edge of the Cartesian diagram e Power defines the power of the internal signal source The Marker Functions provide a convenient alternative to the manual entry of the sweep range parameters Use the paste marker list for convenient entry of Start and Stop values Equivalence For a frequency sweep the Start and Stop frequencies or the Center of settings frequency and Span are alternative settings Center WV A lt lt _ jj Span Start Stop Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STARt SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency STOP SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency CENTer SENSe lt Ch gt FREQuency SPAN Pwr Bw The Pwr Bw menu defines the power of the internal signal source and sets the step attenuators and the IF bandwidths GUI Reference Channel Menu Channel Center Span H Pwr Dua Power Cal d Step tten bl Sweep V Step Athen bz Channel Select RF Orr Meas Bandwidth e Power defines the power of the internal signal source e Step Atten b1 b2 sets the attenuation for the received wave b1 or b2 respectively e RF Off switches the internal and external power sources on if chec
613. y stimulus values in the diagrams This comprises e The frequency stimulus ranges below the diagram area e The frequency stimulus values in the marker info field at the marker position and in the marker table The Frequency Info setting is valid for frequency and segmented frequency sweeps only Remote control DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency STATe ON OFF Undo Reverses the last action if possible Otherwise Undo is disabled grayed You can use Undo even after a Preset in order to restore your own instrument settings Redo Reverses the action of the Undo command If Undo was not used before Redo is disabled grayed Setup Info Displays the channel and trace settings of the active setup and the main characteristics of the instrument including its IP address System Config Opens a dialog to define various system related settings GUI Reference Nwa Setup Menu System Configuration i E x User Interface Presets Channel Bits Resets Remote Settings Messages and sounds wv instrument Messaqes Selz Dialog Transparency O Calibration kW keep Measurment Data for gt Repeat Previous Cals cna Side E H The System Configuration dialog is divided into the following tabs e User Interface The two check boxes in the Messages and Sounds panel switch the instrument messages or acoustic messages on or off Sounds are generated when the analyzer generates a notice status m
614. y to all linear scalar trace formats For a dB Mag trace the Mean Std Dev and RMS are calculated before logarithmation Remote control CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics S TATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics RESult MIN MAX PEAK2P MEAN STDDev RMS CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics MMP Tpeak STATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics MSTDev STATe CALCulate lt Chn gt STATistics RMS STATe Phase Delay El Length Displays or hides the phase delay Phs Diy and the electrical length El Len of the trace in the selected evaluation range Eval Range The parameters are only available for trace formats that contain phase information i e for the formats Phase Unwrapped Phase and the polar diagram formats Polar Smith Inverted Smith Moreover the sweep type must be a frequency sweep ee eee mm pm pm mm ms Delay 39 2764 ps EL 11 7748 mm G of phase parameters The phase parameters are obtained from an approximation to the derivative of the phase with respect to frequency in the selected evaluation range e Delay is the phase delay which is an approximation to the group delay and calculated as follows A Prog 360 Af where Af is the width of the evaluation range and Ad is the corresponding phase change See also note on transmission and reflection parameters below e EL is the electrical length which is product of the phase delay times the speed of light in the GUI Reference Tra
615. yboard see Accessing Window XP s Start Menu Operating the analyzer does not require a keyboard You can access all essential functions using the keys on the front panel In combination with a mouse the front panel keys provide access to all instrument functions 1 6 3 Connecting a Printer A printer can be connected to one of the Universal Serial Bus connectors on the front panel It is safe to connect or disconnect the printer during the measurement When printing a copy PRINT the analyzer checks whether a printer is connected and turned on and whether the appropriate printer driver is installed If required printer driver installation is initiated using Windows XP s Add Printer Wizard The wizard is self explanatory A printer driver needs to be installed only once even though the printer may be temporarily removed from the analyzer Printer driver installation A great variety of printer drivers is available on the analyzer To obtain the complete list access Windows XP press the Windows key and open the Add Printer Wizard in the Start Control Panel Printer and Faxes menu You can load updated and improved driver versions or new drivers from an installation disk USB memory stick or another external storage medium Alternatively if the analyzer is integrated in a network you can install driver data stored in a network directory In either case use the Add Printer Wizard to complete the installation Printer
616. ysis of a DUT over a large frequency range e g over several octaves In a Cartesian diagram the measurement result is displayed as a trace over a logarithmic frequency scale The following example shows a Log Frequency sweep with a stimulus range between 50 MHz and 6 GHz the forward transmission parameter S12 as measured quantity and a dB Mag scaled y axis Tre28521 dB Mag 10 dB Ref0 dB BI A UI TO Hitt CITT IE er T ae lt a WR ep RES S T T ul Start 300 kHz Pwr 10 dBm Stop 4 GHz Remote control SENSe lt Ch gt SWEep TPYE LOGarithmic SENSe lt Chn gt FUNCtion ON XFRequency Segmented Frequency In a Segmented Frequency sweep the sweep range can be composed of several continuous non GUI Reference Channel Menu overlapping frequency sub ranges or single frequency points The sub ranges are termed sweep segments and defined in the Define Segments dialog The segment list must contain at least 2 distinct frequency points before a Segmented Frequency sweep can be started Instrument settings such as the internal generator power the measurement IF bandwidth the selectivity of the measurement filter the frequency band of the local oscillator and the measurement time can be set independently for the individual segments Due to this flexibility Segmented Frequency sweeps are suitable for any detailed analysis of a DUT at specified frequencies In a Cartesian diagra
617. z 6 087 dB Command Reference MMEMory MMEMory STORe SEGMent lt Chs gt lt file_name gt Saves the sweep segment definition of a specified channel to a sweep segment file Sweep segments are defined using the SENSe lt Ch gt SEGMent lt Seg gt commands lt Ch gt Channel number lt file_name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created sweep segment file The default extension manual control for sweep segment files is seglist although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST value SCPI Device specific no query Command Types Example See MMEMory LOAD SEGMent MMEMory STORe STATe lt numeric_value gt lt file_name gt Stores the configuration data of the current setup to a specified setup file coc MMEMory STORe STATe renames the current setup appending a nwa extension See example for MME Mory LOAD STATe lt numeric_value gt 1 the lt numeric_value gt is used for compatibility with the SCPI standard but is ignored lt file_ name gt String parameter to specify the name and directory of the created setup file The default extension manual control for setup files is nwa although other extensions are allowed If no path is specified the analyzer uses the current directory to be queried with MMEMory CDIRectory RST value SCPI Command
618. z vertically by 10 dB DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y OFFSet lt Magnitude gt lt Phase gt lt Real gt lt Imaginary gt Modifies all points of the trace lt WndTr gt by means of an added and or a multiplied complex constant The response values M of the trace are transformed according to Mey EE 4 lt Deal gt lt Imag s lt Wnd gt lt WndTr gt lt Magnitude gt Range def unit RST value lt Phase gt Range def unit RST value lt Real gt lt Imaginary gt Range def unit RST value Number of an existing diagram area defined by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt STATe ON Existing trace number assigned by means of DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt FEED Multiplied magnitude factor 300 dB to 300 dB dB 0 dB Multiplied phase factor optional for setting command but returned by query 3 4 10 deg to 3 4 10 deg deg 0 deg Real and imaginary part of added complex constant optional for setting command but returned by query 3 4 10 to 3 4 10 0 Command Reference SCPI Command Types Example DISPlay Device specific with query SRST 3DISP WIND TRACX 0FPS LMZ 3DISP WIND TRAC Y s OFFS 10 Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz vertically by 10 dB DISP WIND TRACG Y OFFS Query all response offset values The response is 70 0 0 0 DISPlay WINDow lt Wnd gt TRACe lt WndTr gt Y

ZVL Operating Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents